- Manuals
- Brands
- Mitsubishi
- Software
- GT SoftGOT1000
- Operating Manual
Mitsubishi GT SoftGOT1000 Software Operating Manual PDF
Summary of Content for Mitsubishi GT SoftGOT1000 Software Operating Manual PDF
GT SoftGOT1000 Version3
Operating Manual for GT Works3
GOT1000 COMPATIBLE HMI SOFTWARE
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS (Always read these precautions before using this equipment.)
Before using this product, please read this manual and the relevant manuals introduced in this manual
carefully and pay full attention to safety to handle the product correctly.
The precautions given in this manual are concerned with this product.
In this manual, the safety precautions are ranked as "WARNING" and "CAUTION".
Note that the caution level may lead to a serious accident according to the circumstances.
Always follow the instructions of both levels because they are important to personal safety.
Please save this manual to make it accessible when required and always forward it to the end user.
[DESIGN PRECAUTIONS]
WARNING Depending on some failures of the personal computer, interface board, or cable, GT SoftGOT1000
may keep the outputs on or off.
An external monitoring circuit should be provided to check for output signals which may lead to a
serious accident.
Not doing so can cause an accident due to false output or malfunction.
Do not use GT SoftGOT1000 as the warning device that may cause a serious accident.
An independent and redundant hardware or mechanical interlock is required to configure the device
that displays and outputs serious warning.
Failure to observe this instruction may result in an accident due to incorrect output or malfunction.
When programs or parameters of the controller (such as a PLC) that is monitored by GT
SoftGOT1000 are changed, be sure to restart GT SoftGOT1000 at the same time.
Not doing so can cause an accident due to false output or malfunction.
Configure safety circuits external to the PLC to ensure that the entire system operates safely even
when a fault occurs in a personal computer.
Failure to do so may result in an accident due to an incorrect output or malfunction.
(1)Emergency stop circuits, protection circuits, and protective interlock circuits for conflicting
operations (such as forward/reverse rotations or upper/lower limit positioning) must be
configured external to the PLC.
(2)The station to which the board is installed may be disconnected from the data link due to a data
link error. If this occurs, the data output from the station and written to other stations before the
error will be held until the station is reconnected to the network (until its data link is restarted).
Provide a mechanism for data link status monitoring and error handling for each station that is
connected to the data link system.
WARNING Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions, resulting in death or severe injury.
CAUTION Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions, resulting in medium or slight personal injury or physical damage.
A - 1
[DESIGN PRECAUTIONS]
[WIRING PRECAUTIONS]
WARNING For the operating status of each station after a communication failure, refer to the manual of the
interface board.
Incorrect output or malfunction due to a communication failure may result in an accident.
When changing data during operation, configure an interlock circuit in the program to ensure that the
entire system will always operate safely.
Configure an interlock circuit in the program, and determine corrective actions to be taken between
the personal computer and CPU module in case of a communication failure.
To maintain the security (confidentiality, integrity, and availability) of the GOT and the system against
unauthorized access, DoS*1 attacks, computer viruses, and other cyberattacks from unreliable
networks and devices via network, take appropriate measures such as firewalls, virtual private
networks (VPNs), and antivirus solutions.
Mitsubishi Electric shall have no responsibility or liability for any problems involving GOT trouble and
system trouble by unauthorized access, DoS attacks, computer viruses, and other cyberattacks.
*1 DoS: A denial-of-service (DoS) attack disrupts services by overloading systems or exploiting
vulnerabilities, resulting in a denial-of-service (DoS) state.
CAUTION Do not bundle the control and communication cables with main-circuit, power or other wiring.
Run the above cables separately from such wiring and keep them a minimum of 100mm (3.94 in.)
apart. Failure to do so can cause a malfunction due to noise.
When the GOT is connected to the Ethernet network, the available IP address is restricted according
to the system configuration.
When multiple GOTs are connected to the Ethernet network:
Do not set the IP address (192.168.0.18) for the GOTs and the controllers in the network.
When a single GOT is connected to the Ethernet network:
Do not set the IP address (192.168.0.18) for the controllers except the GOT in the network.
Doing so can cause the IP address duplication. The duplication can negatively affect the
communication of the device with the IP address (192.168.0.18).
The operation at the IP address duplication depends on the devices and the system.
Turn on the controllers and the network devices to be ready for communication before they
communicate with GT SoftGOT1000.
Failure to do so can cause a communication error on GT SoftGOT1000.
WARNING
Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before wiring.
Failure to do so may result in an electric shock, product damage or malfunctions.
A - 2
[WIRING PRECAUTIONS]
[TEST OPERATION PRECAUTIONS]
[STARTUP/MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS]
[PRECAUTIONS FOR REMOTE CONTROL]
CAUTION
Plug the communication cable into the connector of the connected unit and tighten the mounting and
terminal screws in the specified torque range.
Undertightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction.
Overtightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or unit.
WARNING
Before testing the operation of a user-created screen (such as turning on or off a bit device,
changing the current value of a word device, changing the set value or current value of a timer or
counter, and changing the current value of a buffer memory), thoroughly read the manual to fully
understand the operating procedure.
When testing, never change the data of the devices that control the operation essential for the
system.
Faulty output and malfunction may result in an accident.
WARNING
When power is on, do not touch the terminals.
Doing so can cause an electric shock or malfunction.
Before starting cleaning or terminal screw retightening, always switch off the power externally in all
phases.
Not switching the power off in all phases can cause a unit failure or malfunction.
Undertightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction.
Overtightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or unit.
WARNING
Remote control is available through a network by using GOT functions, including the SoftGOT-GOT
link function, the remote personal computer operation function, and the VNC server function.
If these functions are used to perform remote control of control equipment, the field operator may not
notice the remote control, possibly leading to an accident.
In addition, a communication delay or interruption may occur depending on the network
environment, and remote control of control equipment cannot be performed normally in some cases.
Before using the above functions to perform remote control, fully grasp the circumstances of the field
site and ensure safety.
A - 3
CAUTIONS FOR USING THIS SOFTWARE
1. Required PC memory
The processing may be terminated by Microsoft Windows on a personal computer of which main memory capacity is less than 128M bytes. Make sure to secure the capacity of 128M bytes or more.
2. Free capacity of hard disk At least 100M bytes of free capacity of virtual memory should be secured within hard disk to run this software.
The processing may be terminated by Windows, if free space of 100M bytes or more cannot be secured within hard disk while running GTSoftGOT1000. Secure enough free capacity of virtual memory within hard disk space in order to run the software.
3. Display of GT SoftGOT1000 and GOT Display of GT SoftGOT1000 may be different from display of GOT. Confirm for actual display of GOT on the GOT.
A - 4
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS.........................................................................................................................A - 1
CAUTIONS FOR USING THIS SOFTWARE............................................................................................A - 4
INTRODUCTION ......................................................................................................................................A - 5
CONTENTS ..............................................................................................................................................A - 5
MANUALS...............................................................................................................................................A - 10
QUICK REFERENCE .............................................................................................................................A - 12
ABBREVIATIONS AND GENERIC TERMS ...........................................................................................A - 14
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL................................................................................................................A - 19
GT SoftGOT1000
1. OVERVIEW
1.1 Features........................................................................................................................................... 1 - 2
SPECIFICATIONS AND OPERATION OF GT SoftGOT1000
2. SPECIFICATIONS OF GT SoftGOT1000
2.1 Operating Environment.................................................................................................................... 2 - 1
2.2 Specifications................................................................................................................................... 2 - 3
2.2.1 Specifications of the GT SoftGOT1000 ................................................................................ 2 - 3
2.2.2 License key specifications .................................................................................................... 2 - 5
2.3 Functions that Cannot Be Used....................................................................................................... 2 - 6
2.4 Precautions...................................................................................................................................... 2 - 8
2.4.1 Precautions for using the GT Soft GOT1000........................................................................ 2 - 8
2.4.2 Precautions on license key................................................................................................. 2 - 10
3. OPERATION OF GT SoftGOT1000
3.1 Start GT SoftGOT1000 .................................................................................................................... 3 - 1
3.2 Screen Configuration of GT SoftGOT1000...................................................................................... 3 - 4
3.3 Menu Bar ......................................................................................................................................... 3 - 5
3.4 Tool Bar ........................................................................................................................................... 3 - 7
3.5 Environment Setup .......................................................................................................................... 3 - 8
3.5.1 Environment setup dialog box .............................................................................................. 3 - 8
3.6 Communication Setup ................................................................................................................... 3 - 14
3.6.1 Communication setup dialog box ....................................................................................... 3 - 15
3.7 Opening the Project ....................................................................................................................... 3 - 21
3.7.1 Open the GT Designer3 Project ......................................................................................... 3 - 21
3.7.2 Open a single file format project of GT Designer3/GT Designer2 file ................................ 3 - 23
INTRODUCTION
Thank you for choosing Mitsubishi Electric Graphic Operation Terminal (Mitsubishi Electric GOT).
Read this manual and make sure you understand the functions and performance of the GOT thoroughly in
advance to ensure correct use.
CONTENTS
A - 5
3.8 Starting Monitoring......................................................................................................................... 3 - 25
3.9 Monitoring Operation ..................................................................................................................... 3 - 26
3.10 Monitor Stop .................................................................................................................................. 3 - 26
3.11 Exiting from GT SoftGOT1000....................................................................................................... 3 - 27
3.12 Automatic Startup .......................................................................................................................... 3 - 28
3.12.1 Automatic startup settings on Windows(R) 7, Windows(R) 8, Windows(R) 8.1,
Windows(R) 10, or Windows(R) 11 .................................................................................... 3 - 28
3.13 Help ............................................................................................................................................... 3 - 30
CONNECTION BETWEEN GT SoftGOT1000 AND DEVICES
4. CONNECTION
4.1 Controller that can be Monitored and the Accessible Range........................................................... 4 - 1
4.1.1 Controller that allows monitoring .......................................................................................... 4 - 1
4.1.2 Monitorable controllers ......................................................................................................... 4 - 3
4.1.3 Access range ........................................................................................................................ 4 - 6
4.1.4 System setting examples.................................................................................................... 4 - 30
4.1.5 How to monitor redundant system...................................................................................... 4 - 35
4.1.6 Access range of the data link system (MELSECNET/B, (II)) .............................................. 4 - 61
4.2 Type of PC to Be Used .................................................................................................................. 4 - 63
4.3 Connectable Devices..................................................................................................................... 4 - 63
4.4 Converter/Cable to Be Used.......................................................................................................... 4 - 63
4.5 Bus Connection ............................................................................................................................. 4 - 64
4.5.1 System configurations and connection conditions.............................................................. 4 - 64
4.5.2 GT SoftGOT1000 setting .................................................................................................... 4 - 64
4.6 Direct CPU Connection.................................................................................................................. 4 - 65
4.6.1 System configurations and connection conditions.............................................................. 4 - 65
4.6.2 Connection cable ................................................................................................................ 4 - 66
4.6.3 GT SoftGOT1000 setting .................................................................................................... 4 - 71
4.6.4 Precautions......................................................................................................................... 4 - 72
4.7 Computer Link Connection ............................................................................................................ 4 - 73
4.7.1 System configurations and connection conditions.............................................................. 4 - 73
4.7.2 Serial communication module, computer link module ........................................................ 4 - 74
4.7.3 Connection cable ................................................................................................................ 4 - 75
4.7.4 GT SoftGOT1000 side ........................................................................................................ 4 - 79
4.7.5 Controller setting................................................................................................................. 4 - 79
4.8 Ethernet Connection ...................................................................................................................... 4 - 82
4.8.1 System configurations and connection conditions.............................................................. 4 - 82
4.8.2 Built-in Ethernet port CPU, Ethernet module, Ethernet board/card .................................... 4 - 85
4.8.3 Connection cable ................................................................................................................ 4 - 86
4.8.4 Controller setting................................................................................................................. 4 - 86
4.9 MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10 Connection ........................................................................... 4 - 140
4.9.1 System configurations and connection conditions............................................................ 4 - 140
4.9.2 Network module, interface board...................................................................................... 4 - 141
4.9.3 Connection cable .............................................................................................................. 4 - 142
4.9.4 GT SoftGOT1000 setting .................................................................................................. 4 - 142
4.9.5 Controller setting............................................................................................................... 4 - 142
4.10 CC-Link IE Controller Network Connection ................................................................................. 4 - 143
A - 6
4.10.1 System configurations and connection conditions............................................................ 4 - 143
4.10.2 Network module, interface board...................................................................................... 4 - 143
4.10.3 Connection cable.............................................................................................................. 4 - 144
4.10.4 GT SoftGOT1000 setting.................................................................................................. 4 - 144
4.10.5 Controller setting .............................................................................................................. 4 - 144
4.11 CC-Link IE Field Network Connection ......................................................................................... 4 - 145
4.11.1 System configurations and connection conditions............................................................ 4 - 145
4.11.2 Network module, interface board...................................................................................... 4 - 146
4.11.3 GT SoftGOT1000 setting.................................................................................................. 4 - 146
4.11.4 Controller setting .............................................................................................................. 4 - 146
4.12 CNC Connection.......................................................................................................................... 4 - 147
4.12.1 Direct CPU connection ..................................................................................................... 4 - 147
4.12.2 Ethernet connection.......................................................................................................... 4 - 148
4.13 Robot Controller Connection ....................................................................................................... 4 - 153
4.13.1 System configurations and connection conditions............................................................ 4 - 153
4.13.2 Connection cable.............................................................................................................. 4 - 153
4.13.3 Controller setting .............................................................................................................. 4 - 153
4.14 Third Party PLC Connections ...................................................................................................... 4 - 157
4.14.1 OMRON PLC.................................................................................................................... 4 - 157
4.14.2 KEYENCE PLC ................................................................................................................ 4 - 162
4.14.3 TOSHIBA PLC.................................................................................................................. 4 - 165
4.14.4 YASKAWA PLC................................................................................................................ 4 - 168
4.14.5 YOKOGAWA PLC ............................................................................................................ 4 - 175
4.14.6 SIEMENS PLC ................................................................................................................. 4 - 178
4.15 MODBUS(R)/TCP Connection..................................................................................................... 4 - 183
4.15.1 System configuration and connection condition ............................................................... 4 - 183
4.15.2 Ethernet board/card.......................................................................................................... 4 - 183
4.15.3 Connection cable.............................................................................................................. 4 - 183
4.15.4 Controller setting .............................................................................................................. 4 - 184
4.16 Barcode Reader Connection ....................................................................................................... 4 - 186
4.16.1 System configurations and connection conditions............................................................ 4 - 186
4.16.2 Controller setting .............................................................................................................. 4 - 186
4.16.3 Precautions....................................................................................................................... 4 - 186
4.17 RFID Connection ......................................................................................................................... 4 - 187
4.17.1 System configurations and connection conditions............................................................ 4 - 187
4.17.2 Controller setting .............................................................................................................. 4 - 187
4.17.3 Precautions....................................................................................................................... 4 - 187
FUNCTIONS OF GT SoftGOT1000
5. FUNCTIONS
5.1 Snap Shot ........................................................................................................................................ 5 - 1
5.2 Print ................................................................................................................................................. 5 - 2
5.2.1 Printing ................................................................................................................................. 5 - 2
5.2.2 Performing print preview....................................................................................................... 5 - 3
5.2.3 Performing page setup ......................................................................................................... 5 - 4
5.2.4 Performing print setup .......................................................................................................... 5 - 4
5.3 Property ........................................................................................................................................... 5 - 5
5.4 Resource Data................................................................................................................................. 5 - 6
A - 7
5.5 Displaying File Information in PLC (QCPU, QSCPU Only).............................................................. 5 - 8
5.5.1 Setting method...................................................................................................................... 5 - 8
5.5.2 Precautions for use............................................................................................................... 5 - 9
5.6 Mail Function ................................................................................................................................. 5 - 10
5.6.1 Mail function overview ........................................................................................................ 5 - 10
5.6.2 Operation flow when using the mail function ...................................................................... 5 - 11
5.6.3 How to set up the mail function........................................................................................... 5 - 12
5.6.4 Sending e-mail.................................................................................................................... 5 - 16
5.6.5 Mail history.......................................................................................................................... 5 - 18
5.7 Keyboard Input .............................................................................................................................. 5 - 19
5.7.1 Keyboard input enabling/disabling procedure..................................................................... 5 - 19
5.7.2 When operating the numerical input function or the ASCII input function
from the keyboard of a PC.................................................................................................. 5 - 19
5.7.3 How to use function keys.................................................................................................... 5 - 20
5.7.4 Precautions......................................................................................................................... 5 - 21
5.8 Full Screen Mode........................................................................................................................... 5 - 22
5.8.1 Full screen mode types....................................................................................................... 5 - 22
5.8.2 Setting method.................................................................................................................... 5 - 24
5.8.3 Precautions......................................................................................................................... 5 - 25
5.9 Popup Menu .................................................................................................................................. 5 - 26
5.9.1 Popup menu ineffective/effective........................................................................................ 5 - 26
5.9.2 Precautions......................................................................................................................... 5 - 26
5.10 Starting Up Multiple GT SoftGOT1000 Modules............................................................................ 5 - 27
5.10.1 Startup procedure ............................................................................................................... 5 - 27
5.10.2 Precautions for use............................................................................................................. 5 - 29
5.11 Moving the Window ....................................................................................................................... 5 - 30
5.11.1 Window movement types.................................................................................................... 5 - 30
5.11.2 Setting method.................................................................................................................... 5 - 31
5.12 System Alarm ................................................................................................................................ 5 - 32
5.13 Script Error..................................................................................................................................... 5 - 33
5.14 Object Script Error ......................................................................................................................... 5 - 34
5.15 Application Start-up ....................................................................................................................... 5 - 35
5.15.1 Setting method.................................................................................................................... 5 - 36
5.15.2 Application start-up history ................................................................................................. 5 - 43
5.15.3 Precautions......................................................................................................................... 5 - 44
5.16 Close Menu.................................................................................................................................... 5 - 45
5.16.1 Disabling/enabling the close menu ..................................................................................... 5 - 45
5.17 Interaction with PX Developer ....................................................................................................... 5 - 46
5.17.1 Setting method.................................................................................................................... 5 - 47
5.17.2 PX Developer function call history ...................................................................................... 5 - 52
5.18 Back screen mode ......................................................................................................................... 5 - 53
5.18.1 Setting method.................................................................................................................... 5 - 53
5.19 Scroll Function ............................................................................................................................... 5 - 53
5.19.1 Setting method.................................................................................................................... 5 - 53
5.20 Exit Key.......................................................................................................................................... 5 - 54
5.20.1 Disabling/enabling exit key ................................................................................................. 5 - 54
5.21 SoftGOT-GOT Link Function ......................................................................................................... 5 - 55
A - 8
5.21.1 Project data synchronization .............................................................................................. 5 - 57
5.21.2 Authorization control........................................................................................................... 5 - 60
5.21.3 Control or notification with GOT internal devices ............................................................... 5 - 63
5.21.4 Setting method ................................................................................................................... 5 - 65
5.21.5 Management of GT SoftGOT1000 modules with the SoftGOT-GOT link function
(GT SoftGOT1000 Commander) ........................................................................................ 5 - 72
5.21.6 Precautions......................................................................................................................... 5 - 81
5.22 Monitor-only Mode ......................................................................................................................... 5 - 82
5.22.1 Setting method ................................................................................................................... 5 - 82
APPENDICES
Appendix1 Internal Device Interface Function.......................................................................................App - 1
Appendix.1.1 Development environment ..........................................................................................App - 1
Appendix.1.2 Accessible devices ......................................................................................................App - 1
Appendix.1.3 Internal device interface function.................................................................................App - 2
Appendix.1.4 GDev_OpenMapping (Opening and mapping the internal device shared memory)....App - 4
Appendix.1.5 GDev_Read (Reading from the internal device) .........................................................App - 5
Appendix.1.6 GDev_Write (Writing to the internal device) ................................................................App - 7
Appendix.1.7 GDev_CloseUnMapping
(Unmapping and closing the internal device shared memory) ....................................App - 9
Appendix.1.8 Precautions for the internal device interface function..................................................App - 9
Appendix.1.9 Sample program........................................................................................................App - 10
Appendix2 Troubleshooting.................................................................................................................App - 12
Appendix.2.1 Error message ..........................................................................................................App - 12
Appendix.2.2 Troubleshooting for license key.................................................................................App - 16
Appendix.2.3 Troubleshooting related to mail transmission............................................................App - 18
Appendix.2.4 Troubleshooting for print ...........................................................................................App - 18
Appendix.2.5 Troubleshooting for file save problems .....................................................................App - 19
Appendix.2.6 GOT error code list ....................................................................................................App - 19
Appendix.2.7 Error code list when using the internal device interface function ..............................App - 19
Appendix3 Applicable Project Data .....................................................................................................App - 20
Appendix4 Unsupported Functions .....................................................................................................App - 20
Appendix5 Open Source Software ......................................................................................................App - 21
Appendix.5.1 OpenSSL toolkit ........................................................................................................App - 21
INDEX
REVISIONS
Intellectual Property Rights
A - 9
MANUALS
The following table lists the manual relevant to this product. Refer to each manual for any purpose.
Screen creation software manuals
Connection manuals
Extended and option function manuals
GT SoftGOT1000 manuals
Manual Name Packaging Manual Number
(Model code)
GT Works3 Version1 Installation Procedure Manual Enclosed in product -
GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals) 1/2, 2/2 Stored in DVD-ROM SH-080866ENG
(1D7MB9)
GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Functions) 1/2, 2/2 Stored in DVD-ROM SH-080867ENG
(1D7MC1)
GT Simulator3 Version1 Operating Manual for GT Works3 Stored in DVD-ROM SH-080861ENG
(1D7MB1)
GT Converter2 Version3 Operating Manual for GT Works3 Stored in DVD-ROM SH-080862ENG
(1D7MB2)
Manual Name Packaging Manual Number
(Model code)
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Electric Products) for GT Works3 Stored in DVD-ROM SH-080868ENG
(1D7MC2)
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Non-Mitsubishi Electric Products 1) for GT Works3 Stored in DVD-ROM SH-080869ENG
(1D7MC3)
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Non-Mitsubishi Electric Products 2) for GT Works3 Stored in DVD-ROM SH-080870ENG
(1D7MC4)
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Microcomputer, MODBUS Products, Peripherals) for GT
Works3 Stored in DVD-ROM
SH-080871ENG
(1D7MC5)
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (2 Connection) for GT Works3 Stored in DVD-ROM JY997D39201
Manual Name Packaging Manual Number
(Model code)
GOT1000 Series Gateway Functions Manual for GT Works3 Stored in DVD-ROM SH-080858ENG
(1D7MA7)
GOT1000 Series MES Interface Function Manual for GT Works3 Stored in DVD-ROM SH-080859ENG
(1D7MA8)
GOT1000 Series User's Manual (Extended Functions, Option Functions) for GT Works3 Stored in DVD-ROM SH-080863ENG
(1D7MB3)
Manual Name Packaging Manual Number
(Model code)
GT SoftGOT1000 Version3 Operating Manual for GT Works3 Stored in DVD-ROM SH-080860ENG
(1D7MA9)
A - 10
GT16 manuals
GT15 manuals
GT14 manuals
GT12 manuals
GT11 manuals
GT10 manuals
Manual Name Packaging Manual Number
(Model code)
GT16 User's Manual (Hardware) Stored in DVD-ROM SH-080928ENG
(1D7MD3)
GT16 User's Manual (Basic Utility) Stored in DVD-ROM SH-080929ENG
(1D7MD4)
GT16 Handy GOT User's Manual Stored in DVD-ROM
JY997D41201
JY997D41202
(09R821)
Manual Name Packaging Manual Number
(Model code)
GT15 User's Manual Stored in DVD-ROM SH-080528ENG
(1D7M23)
Manual Name Packaging Manual Number
(Model code)
GT14 User's Manual Stored in DVD-ROM JY997D44801
(09R823)
Manual Name Packaging Manual Number
(Model code)
GT12 User's Manual Stored in DVD-ROM SH-080977ENG
(1D7ME1)
Manual Name Packaging Manual Number
(Model code)
GT11 User's Manual Stored in DVD-ROM JY997D17501
(09R815)
GT11 Handy GOT User's Manual Stored in DVD-ROM
JY997D20101
JY997D20102
(09R817)
Manual Name Packaging Manual Number
(Model code)
GT10 User's Manual Stored in DVD-ROM JY997D24701
(09R819)
A - 11
QUICK REFERENCE
Creating a project
Connecting a controller to the GOT
Transferring data to the GOT
Obtaining the specifications and operation methods of GT Designer3
GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual
(Fundamentals) 1/2, 2/2
Setting available functions on GT Designer3
Creating a screen displayed on the GOT
Obtaining useful functions to increase efficiency of drawing
Setting details for figures and objects
GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Functions)
1/2, 2/2 Setting functions for the data collection or trigger action
Setting functions to use peripheral devices
Simulating a created project on a personal computer GT Simulator3 Version1 Operating Manual for GT Works3
Obtaining information of Mitsubishi Electric products applicable to the
GOT
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Electric
Products) for GT Works3
Connecting Mitsubishi Electric products to the GOT
Connecting multiple controllers to one GOT (Multi-channel function)
Establishing communication between a personal computer and a
controller via the GOT (FA transparent function)
Obtaining information of Non-Mitsubishi Electric products applicable to the
GOT
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Non-Mitsubishi
Electric Products 1) for GT Works3
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Non-Mitsubishi
Electric Products 2) for GT Works3Connecting Non-Mitsubishi Electric products to the GOT
Obtaining information of peripheral devices applicable to the GOT GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Microcomputer,
MODBUS Products, Peripherals) for GT Works3 Connecting peripheral devices including a barcode reader to the GOT
Connecting 2 with GOT GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (2 Connection) for GT
Works3
Writing data to the GOT
GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual
(Fundamentals) 1/2, 2/2 Reading data from the GOT
Verifying a editing project to a GOT project
A - 12
Others
Obtaining specifications (including part names, external dimensions, and
options) of each GOT
GT16 User's Manual (Hardware)
GT16 Handy GOT User's Manual
GT15 User's Manual
GT14 User's Manual
GT12 User's Manual
GT11 User's Manual
GT11 Handy GOT User's Manual
GT10 User's Manual
Installing the GOT
Operating the utility
GT16 User's Manual (Basic Utility)
GT16 Handy GOT User's Manual
GT15 User's Manual
GT14 User's Manual
GT12 User's Manual
GT11 User's Manual
GT11 Handy GOT User's Manual
GT10 User's Manual
Configuring the gateway function GOT1000 Series Gateway Functions Manual for GT Works3
Configuring the MES interface function GOT1000 Series MES Interface Function Manual for GT
Works3
Configuring the extended function and option function GOT1000 Series User's Manual (Extended Functions, Option
Functions) for GT Works3
Using a personal computer as the GOT GT SoftGOT1000 Version3 Operating Manual for GT Works3
A - 13
ABBREVIATIONS AND GENERIC TERMS
GOT
Abbreviations and generic terms Description
GOT1000
Series
GT1695 GT1695M-X Abbreviation of GT1695M-XTBA, GT1695M-XTBD
GT1685 GT1685M-S Abbreviation of GT1685M-STBA, GT1685M-STBD
GT1675
GT1675M-S Abbreviation of GT1675M-STBA, GT1675M-STBD
GT1675M-V Abbreviation of GT1675M-VTBA, GT1675M-VTBD
GT1675-VN Abbreviation of GT1675-VNBA, GT1675-VNBD
GT1672 GT1672-VN Abbreviation of GT1672-VNBA, GT1672-VNBD
GT1665 GT1665M-S Abbreviation of GT1665M-STBA, GT1665M-STBD
GT1665M-V Abbreviation of GT1665M-VTBA, GT1665M-VTBD
GT1662 GT1662-VN Abbreviation of GT1662-VNBA, GT1662-VNBD
GT1655 GT1655-V Abbreviation of GT1655-VTBD
GT16 Abbreviation of GT1695, GT1685, GT1675, GT1672, GT1665, GT1662, GT1655, GT16 Handy GOT
GT1595 GT1595-X Abbreviation of GT1595-XTBA, GT1595-XTBD
GT1585 GT1585V-S Abbreviation of GT1585V-STBA, GT1585V-STBD
GT1585-S Abbreviation of GT1585-STBA, GT1585-STBD
GT157
GT1575V-S Abbreviation of GT1575V-STBA, GT1575V-STBD
GT1575-S Abbreviation of GT1575-STBA, GT1575-STBD
GT1575-V Abbreviation of GT1575-VTBA, GT1575-VTBD
GT1575-VN Abbreviation of GT1575-VNBA, GT1575-VNBD
GT1572-VN Abbreviation of GT1572-VNBA, GT1572-VNBD
GT156 GT1565-V Abbreviation of GT1565-VTBA, GT1565-VTBD
GT1562-VN Abbreviation of GT1562-VNBA, GT1562-VNBD
GT155
GT1555-V Abbreviation of GT1555-VTBD
GT1555-Q Abbreviation of GT1555-QTBD, GT1555-QSBD
GT1550-Q Abbreviation of GT1550-QLBD
GT15 Abbreviation of GT1595, GT1585, GT157 , GT156 , GT155
GT145 GT1455-Q Abbreviation of GT1455-QTBDE, GT1455-QTBD
GT1450-Q Abbreviation of GT1450-QMBDE, GT1450-QMBD, GT1450-QLBDE, GT1450-QLBD
GT14 Abbreviation of GT1455-Q, GT1450-Q
GT1275 GT1275-V Abbreviation of GT1275-VNBA, GT1275-VNBD
GT1265 GT1265-V Abbreviation of GT1265-VNBA, GT1265-VNBD
GT12 Abbreviation of GT1275, GT1265
GT115 GT1155-Q
Abbreviation of GT1155-QTBDQ, GT1155-QSBDQ, GT1155-QTBDA, GT1155-QSBDA,
GT1155-QTBD, GT1155-QSBD
GT1150-Q Abbreviation of GT1150-QLBDQ, GT1150-QLBDA, GT1150-QLBD
GT11 Abbreviation of GT115 , GT11 Handy GOT,
GT105 GT1055-Q Abbreviation of GT1055-QSBD
GT1050-Q Abbreviation of GT1050-QBBD
GT104 GT1045-Q Abbreviation of GT1045-QSBD
GT1040-Q Abbreviation of GT1040-QBBD
GT1030
Abbreviation of GT1030-LBD, GT1030-LBD2, GT1030-LBL, GT1030-LBDW, GT1030-LBDW2,
GT1030-LBLW, GT1030-LWD, GT1030-LWD2, GT1030-LWL, GT1030-LWDW, GT1030-LWDW2,
GT1030-LWLW, GT1030-HBD, GT1030-HBD2, GT1030-HBL, GT1030-HBDW, GT1030-HBDW2,
GT1030-HBLW, GT1030-HWD, GT1030-HWD2, GT1030-HWL, GT1030-HWDW, GT1030-HWDW2,
GT1030-HWLW
GT1020
Abbreviation of GT1020-LBD, GT1020-LBD2, GT1020-LBL, GT1020-LBDW, GT1020-LBDW2,
GT1020-LBLW, GT1020-LWD, GT1020LWD2, GT1020-LWL, GT1020-LWDW, GT1020-LWDW2,
GT1020-LWLW
GT10 Abbreviation of GT105 , GT104 , GT1030, GT1020
A - 14
Communication unit
*1 A9GT-QJ71LP23 + GT15-75IF900 set
*2 A9GT-QJ71BR13 + GT15-75IF900 set
*3 A8GT-J61BT13 + GT15-75IF900 set
Option unit
*1 GT15-CFEX + GT15-CFEXIF + GT15-C08CF set.
GOT1000
Series
Handy
GOT
GT16
Handy
GOT
GT1665HS-V Abbreviation of GT1665HS-VTBD
GT14
Handy
GOT
GT1455HS-Q Abbreviation of GT1455HS-QTBDE
GT1450HS-Q Abbreviation of GT1450HS-QMBDE
GT11
Handy
GOT
GT1155HS-Q Abbreviation of GT1155HS-QSBD
GT1150HS-Q Abbreviation of GT1150HS-QLBD
GT SoftGOT1000 Abbreviation of GT SoftGOT1000
GOT900 Series Abbreviation of GOT-A900 series, GOT-F900 series
GOT800 Series Abbreviation of GOT-800 series
Abbreviations and generic terms Description
Bus connection unit GT15-QBUS, GT15-QBUS2, GT15-ABUS, GT15-ABUS2, GT15-75QBUSL, GT15-75QBUS2L,
GT15-75ABUSL, GT15-75ABUS2L
Serial communication unit GT15-RS2-9P, GT15-RS4-9S, GT15-RS4-TE
RS-422 conversion unit GT15-RS2T4-9P, GT15-RS2T4-25P
Ethernet communication unit GT15-J71E71-100
MELSECNET/H communication unit GT15-J71LP23-25, GT15-J71BR13
MELSECNET/10 communication unit GT15-75J71LP23-Z*1, GT15-75J71BR13-Z*2
CC-Link IE Controller Network communication
unit GT15-J71GP23-SX
CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit GT15-J71GF13-T2
CC-Link communication unit GT15-J61BT13, GT15-75J61BT13-Z*3
Interface converter unit GT15-75IF900
Serial multi-drop connection unit GT01-RS4-M
Connection Conversion Adapter GT10-9PT5S
RS-232/485 signal conversion adapter GT14-RS2T4-9P
Abbreviations and generic terms Description
Printer unit GT15-PRN
Video/RGB unit
Video input unit GT16M-V4, GT15V-75V4
RGB input unit GT16M-R2, GT15V-75R1
Video/RGB input unit GT16M-V4R1, GT15V-75V4R1
RGB output unit GT16M-ROUT, GT15V-75ROUT
Multimedia unit GT16M-MMR
CF card unit GT15-CFCD
CF card extension unit*1 GT15-CFEX-C08SET
External I/O unit GT15-DIO, GT15-DIOR
Sound output unit GT15-SOUT
Abbreviations and generic terms Description
A - 15
Option
Abbreviations and generic terms Description
Memory card
CF card
GT05-MEM-16MC, GT05-MEM-32MC, GT05-MEM-64MC, GT05-MEM-128MC,
GT05-MEM-256MC, GT05-MEM-512MC, GT05-MEM-1GC, GT05-MEM-2GC,
GT05-MEM-4GC, GT05-MEM-8GC, GT05-MEM-16GC
SD card NZ1MEM-2GBSD, NZ1MEM-4GBSD, NZ1MEM-8GBSD, NZ1MEM-16GBSD,L1MEM-2GBSD,
L1MEM-4GBSD
Memory card adaptor GT05-MEM-ADPC
Option function board GT16-MESB, GT15-FNB, GT15-QFNB, GT15-QFNB16M,
GT15-QFNB32M, GT15-QFNB48M, GT11-50FNB, GT15-MESB48M
Battery GT15-BAT, GT11-50BAT
Protective Sheet
For GT16
GT16-90PSCB, GT16-90PSGB, GT16-90PSCW, GT16-90PSGW,
GT16-80PSCB, GT16-80PSGB, GT16-80PSCW, GT16-80PSGW,
GT16-70PSCB, GT16-70PSGB, GT16-70PSCW, GT16-70PSGW,
GT16-60PSCB, GT16-60PSGB, GT16-60PSCW, GT16-60PSGW,
GT16-50PSCB, GT16-50PSGB, GT16-50PSCW, GT16-50PSGW,
GT16-90PSCB-012, GT16-80PSCB-012, GT16-70PSCB-012,
GT16-60PSCB-012, GT16-50PSCB-012, GT16H-60PSC
For GT15
GT15-90PSCB, GT15-90PSGB, GT15-90PSCW, GT15-90PSGW,
GT15-80PSCB, GT15-80PSGB, GT15-80PSCW, GT15-80PSGW,
GT15-70PSCB, GT15-70PSGB, GT15-70PSCW, GT15-70PSGW,
GT15-60PSCB, GT15-60PSGB, GT15-60PSCW, GT15-60PSGW,
GT15-50PSCB, GT15-50PSGB, GT15-50PSCW, GT15-50PSGW
For GT14 GT14-50PSCB, GT14-50PSGB, GT14-50PSCW, GT14-50PSGW
For GT12 GT11-70PSCB, GT11-65PSCB
For GT11 GT11-50PSCB, GT11-50PSGB, GT11-50PSCW, GT11-50PSGW,
GT11H-50PSC
For GT10
GT10-50PSCB, GT10-50PSGB, GT10-50PSCW, GT10-50PSGW,
GT10-40PSCB, GT10-40PSGB, GT10-40PSCW, GT10-40PSGW,
GT10-30PSCB, GT10-30PSGB, GT10-30PSCW, GT10-30PSGW,
GT10-20PSCB, GT10-20PSGB, GT10-20PSCW, GT10-20PSGW
Protective cover for oil GT05-90PCO, GT05-80PCO, GT05-70PCO, GT05-60PCO, GT05-50PCO,
GT16-50PCO, GT10-40PCO, GT10-30PCO, GT10-20PCO
USB environmental protection cover GT16-UCOV, GT16-50UCOV, GT15-UCOV, GT14-50UCOV, GT11-50UCOV
Stand GT15-90STAND, GT15-80STAND, GT15-70STAND, A9GT-50STAND, GT05-50STAND
Attachment GT15-70ATT-98, GT15-70ATT-87, GT15-60ATT-97, GT15-60ATT-96,
GT15-60ATT-87, GT15-60ATT-77, GT15-50ATT-95W, GT15-50ATT-85
Backlight
GT16-90XLTT, GT16-80SLTT, GT16-70SLTT, GT16-70VLTT, GT16-70VLTTA, GT16-70VLTN,
GT16-60SLTT, GT16-60VLTT, GT16-60VLTN, GT15-90XLTT, GT15-80SLTT, GT15-70SLTT,
GT15-70VLTT, GT15-70VLTN, GT15-60VLTT, GT15-60VLTN
Multi-color display board GT15-XHNB, GT15-VHNB
Connector conversion box GT11H-CNB-37S, GT16H-CNB-42S
Emergency stop sw guard cover GT11H-50ESCOV, GT16H-60ESCOV
Wall-hanging fitting GT14H-50ATT
Memory loader GT10-LDR
Memory board GT10-50FMB
Panel-mounted USB port extension GT14-C10EXUSB-4S, GT10-C10EXUSB-5S
A - 16
Software
License key (for GT SoftGOT1000)
Abbreviations and generic terms Description
GT Works3 Abbreviation of the SW DND-GTWK3-E and SW DND-GTWK3-EA
GT Designer3 Abbreviation of screen drawing software GT Designer3 for GOT1000 series
GT Simulator3 Abbreviation of screen simulator GT Simulator3 for GOT1000/GOT900 series
GT SoftGOT1000 Abbreviation of monitoring software GT SoftGOT1000
GT Converter2 Abbreviation of data conversion software GT Converter2 for GOT1000/GOT900 series
GT Designer2 Classic Abbreviation of screen drawing software GT Designer2 Classic for GOT900 series
GT Designer2 Abbreviation of screen drawing software GT Designer2 for GOT1000/GOT900 series
iQ Works Abbreviation of iQ Platform compatible engineering environment MELSOFT iQ Works
MELSOFT Navigator Generic term for integrated development environment software included in the SW DNC-IQWK (iQ
Platform compatible engineering environment MELSOFT iQ Works)
MELSOFT iQ AppPortal SW DND-IQAPL-M type integrated application management software
GX Works3 Abbreviation of SW DND-GXW3-E and SW DND-GXW3-EA type programmable controller
engineering software
GX Works2 Abbreviation of SW DNC-GXW2-E and SW DNC-GXW2-EA type programmable controller
engineering software
Controller simulator
GX Simulator3 Abbreviation of GX Works3 with the simulation function
GX Simulator2 Abbreviation of GX Works2 with the simulation function
GX Simulator Abbreviation of SW D5C-LLT-E(-EV) type ladder logic test tool function software packages
(SW5D5C-LLT (-EV) or later versions)
GX Developer Abbreviation of SW D5C-GPPW-E(-EV)/SW D5F-GPPW-E type software package
GX LogViewer Abbreviation of SW DNN-VIEWER-E type software package
PX Developer Abbreviation of SW D5C-FBDQ-E type FBD software package for process control
MT Works2 Abbreviation of motion controller engineering environment MELSOFT MT Works2(SW DND-MTW2-E)
MT Developer Abbreviation of SW RNC-GSV type integrated start-up support software for motion controller Q series
MR Configurator2 Abbreviation of SW DNC-MRC2-E type Servo Configuration Software
MR Configurator Abbreviation of MRZJW -SETUP E type Servo Configuration Software
FR Configurator Abbreviation of Inverter Setup Software (FR-SW -SETUP-WE)
NC Configurator Abbreviation of CNC parameter setting support tool NC Configurator
FX Configurator-FP Abbreviation of parameter setting, monitoring, and testing software packages for FX3U-20SSC-H
(SW D5C-FXSSC-E)
FX3U-ENET-L Configuration tool Abbreviation of FX3U-ENET-L type Ethernet module setting software (SW1D5-FXENETL-E)
FX Configurator-EN Abbreviation of FX3U-ENET type Ethernet module setting software (SW1D5C-FXENET-E)
RT ToolBox2 Abbreviation of robot program creation software (3D-11C-WINE)
MX Component Abbreviation of MX Component Version (SW D5C-ACT-E, SW D5C-ACT-EA)
MX Sheet Abbreviation of MX Sheet Version (SW D5C-SHEET-E, SW D5C-SHEET-EA)
CPU Module Logging Configuration Tool Abbreviation of CPU Module Logging Configuration Tool (SW1DNN-LLUTL-E)
Abbreviations and generic terms Description
License GT15-SGTKEY-U, GT15-SGTKEY-P
A - 17
Others
Abbreviations and generic terms Description
IAI Abbreviation of IAI Corporation
AZBIL Abbreviation of Azbil Corporation (former Yamatake Corporation)
OMRON Abbreviation of OMRON Corporation
KEYENCE Abbreviation of KEYENCE CORPORATION
KOYO EI Abbreviation of KOYO ELECTRONICS INDUSTRIES CO., LTD.
SHARP Abbreviation of Sharp Corporation
JTEKT Abbreviation of JTEKT Corporation
SHINKO Abbreviation of Shinko Technos Co., Ltd.
CHINO Abbreviation of CHINO CORPORATION
TOSHIBA Abbreviation of TOSHIBA CORPORATION
TOSHIBA MACHINE Abbreviation of TOSHIBA MACHINE CO., LTD.
HITACHI IES Abbreviation of Hitachi Industrial Equipment Systems Co., Ltd.
HITACHI Abbreviation of Hitachi, Ltd.
FUJI Abbreviation of FUJI ELECTRIC CO., LTD.
PANASONIC Abbreviation of Panasonic Corporation
PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL DEVICES SUNX Abbreviation of Panasonic Industrial Devices SUNX Co., Ltd.
YASKAWA Abbreviation of YASKAWA Electric Corporation
YOKOGAWA Abbreviation of Yokogawa Electric Corporation
ALLEN-BRADLEY Abbreviation of Allen-Bradley products manufactured by Rockwell Automation, Inc.
GE Abbreviation of GE Intelligent Platforms
LS IS Abbreviation of LS Industrial Systems Co., Ltd.
MITSUBISHI INDIA Mitsubishi Electric India Pvt. Ltd.
SCHNEIDER Abbreviation of Schneider Electric SA
SICK Abbreviation of SICK AG
SIEMENS Abbreviation of Siemens AG
RKC Abbreviation of RKC INSTRUMENT INC.
HIRATA Abbreviation of Hirata Corporation
MURATEC Abbreviation of Muratec products manufactured by Muratec Automation Co., Ltd.
PLC Abbreviation of programmable controller
Temperature controller Generic term for temperature controller manufactured by each corporation
Indicating controller Generic term for indicating controller manufactured by each corporation
Control equipment Generic term for control equipment manufactured by each corporation
CHINO controller Abbreviation of indicating controller manufactured by CHINO CORPORATION
PC CPU module Abbreviation of PC CPU Unit manufactured by CONTEC CO., LTD
GOT (server) Abbreviation of GOTs that use the server function
GOT (client) Abbreviation of GOTs that use the client function
Windows font Abbreviation of TrueType font and OpenType font available for Windows
(Differs from the True Type fonts settable with GT Designer3)
Intelligent function module Indicates the modules other than the PLC CPU, power supply module and I/O module that are mounted
to the base unit
MODBUS/RTU Generic term for the protocol designed to use MODBUS protocol messages on a serial
communication
MODBUS/TCP Generic term for the protocol designed to use MODBUS protocol messages on a TCP/IP network
A - 18
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
The following symbols are used in this manual.
The above is different from the actual page, as it is provided for explanation only.
[ ] :
:
:
Shows whether the GT16, GT15, GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10, and GT SoftGOT1000 are applicable.
: Applicable : Not applicable
Shows the setting item displayed on the software screen or the GOT screen.
Refers to information required for operation.
Refers to information useful for operation.
Shows a chapter, section, relevant manual, or others of relevant information.
(Fundamentals): GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals) (Functions): GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Functions)
Shows the operation steps. Operate the steps from the step 1.
Black: Applicable Gray: Not applicable
Shows whether the GT16, GT15, GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10, and GT SoftGOT1000 are applicable.
A - 19
A - 20
GT SoftGOT1000
1. OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 1
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
1. OVERVIEW
This manual explains the system configuration, specifications, screen structure, and operating method of monitoring software GT SoftGOT1000 (hereinafter abbreviated as GT SoftGOT1000). GT SoftGOT1000 is the software that has the same functions as the GOT1000 series and is used to display lamps, data, and messages on personal computers and panel controllers. When applying the following program examples to the actual system, make sure to examine the applicability and confirm that it will not cause system control problems.
POINT
Described contents in this manual
This manual describes the operation method for GT SoftGOT1000. For other than operation method, refer to the following manuals.
(1) Installation method of GT SoftGOT1000 For the installation method of GT SoftGOT1000, refer to the following manuals.
GT Works3 Version1 Installation Procedure Manual
(2) Project data creating method of GT Designer3 For the project data creating method of GT Designer3, refer to the following manuals.
GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals)
GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Functions)
1 - 1
1.1 Features
The features of the GOT series and advantages of personal computer and panel computer are available
(1) Interactive use with applications (including MELSOFT)
(a) Interactive use with GT Designer3. Installation of GT SoftGOT1000 and GT Designer3 on the same personal computer allows operations from screen creation to monitoring to be supported by a single personal computer. Immediately after creating or modifying a screen on GT Designer3, the screen can be monitored on GT SoftGOT1000. Therefore, design efficiency is improved greatly.
(b) Interaction with PX Developer With interaction between GT SoftGOT1000 and PX Developer, monitor tool functions for PX Developer can be called on GT SoftGOT1000. GT SoftGOT1000 can also be started on PX Developer, and the functions can be shared. For the monitor tool of PX Developer, refer to the following manual.
PX Developer Version Operating Manual (Monitor Tool)
Install
GT SoftGOT1000
GX Developer
GT Works3 Version
(GT Designer3)
GT SoftGOT1000
License key
CPU direct
connection
Attach
PX DeveloperGT SoftGOT1000
Call a monitor tool function for in PX Developer
on GT SoftGOT1000.
Register GT SoftGOT1000 as a user graphic
screen of PX Developer, and start the registered
GT SoftGOT1000.
1 - 2 1.1 Features
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
(c) Interactive use with Windows applications A Windows application can be started up from GT SoftGOT1000. Also, the data of GT SoftGOT1000 internal devices can be read/written from a user-created application. With interaction between GT SoftGOT1000 and a user-created application, the user can control or manage data by own method.
(2) Flexible response to high-resolution The user can select resolutions from UXGA to VGA and can set a resolution specification, which sets a resolution dot by dot depending on applications. GT SoftGOT1000 supports the following resolutions.
(a) Selectable resolutions UXGA (1600 1200 dots) SXGA (1280 1024 dots) XGA (1024 768 dots) SVGA (800 600 dots) VGA (640 480 dots)
(b) User setting X Y (Resolution specification) (1920 to 640 1200 to 480 dots)
The monitor screen data created for the GOT1000 series is applicable to GT SoftGOT1000. The GT SoftGOT1000 uses monitor screen data created with GT Designer3. By converting the GOT type for GT SoftGOT1000, the monitor screen data used for the GOT1000 series can be used without modification. GT SoftGOT1000 uses the same screens and operations as GOT. Therefore, there will be no discomfort or confusion for the operators and maintenance personnel.
Personal computer
GT SoftGOT1000
User-created application
PLC
Communication with PLC
Screen display (alarm etc.)
User's own data control
Server
Reading/writing
internal device value
User's own control
GOT GT SoftGOT1000
The monitor screen data is compatible.
1.1 Features 1 - 3
Synchronizing GT SoftGOT1000 data with GOT data The SoftGOT-GOT link function enables GT SoftGOT1000 to connect the GOT via Ethernet. And then, the function synchronizes GT SoftGOT1000 data with GOT project data and resource data. When input objects (touch switch, numerical input, and ASCII input) are input or other operation is performed, the simultaneous operation between GT SoftGOT1000 and the GOT must be prevented. The operation must be allowed by either GT SoftGOT1000 or the GOT. GT SoftGOT1000 can monitor a controller connected to the GOT.
5.21 SoftGOT-GOT Link Function
Ethernet
GT SoftGOT1000
GOT Controller
ControllerGT SoftGOT1000 monitors the controller connected to the GOT. GT SoftGOT1000 only monitors the controller with the channel number 1 assigned on the GOT. GT SoftGOT1000 cannot communicate with the controller other than the channel number 1 assigned.
GT SoftGOT1000 reads GOT project data from the GOT, and monitors the controller with the same project data as the read GOT project data.
1 - 4 1.1 Features
SPECIFICATIONS AND OPERATION OF
GT SoftGOT1000
2. SPECIFICATIONS OF GT SoftGOT1000. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 1
3. OPERATION OF GT SoftGOT1000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 1
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S o
ft G
O T
10 0
0
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
2. SPECIFICATIONS OF GT SoftGOT1000
2.1 Operating Environment
The following shows the GT SoftGOT1000 operating environment.
Item Description
Personal computer PC/AT compatible personal computer that the following OSs run on.
PC CPU module manufactured by CONTEC CO., LTD (PPC-852-21G, PPC-852-22F)*6
OS (English, Simplified
Chinese, Traditional
Chinese, or Korean
version)*10
Microsoft Windows 11 Education (64 bit)*2*3*8
Microsoft Windows 11 Enterprise (64 bit)*2*3*8
Microsoft Windows 11 Pro (64 bit)*2*3*8
Microsoft Windows 11 Home (64 bit)*2*3*8
Microsoft Windows 10 Enterprise (64 bit, 32 bit)*2*3*8
Microsoft Windows 10 Pro (64 bit, 32 bit)*2*3*8
Microsoft Windows 10 Home (64 bit, 32 bit)*2*3*8
Microsoft Windows 10 IoT Enterprise 2016 LTSB (64 bit) (English OPK, or English OPK and a language pack for
localization)*2*3*8*11*12
Microsoft Windows 8.1 Enterprise (64 bit, 32 bit)*2*3*8*9
Microsoft Windows 8.1 Pro (64 bit, 32 bit)*2*3*8*9
Microsoft Windows 8.1 (64 bit, 32 bit)*2*3*8*9
Microsoft Windows 8 Enterprise (64 bit, 32 bit)*2*3*8*9
Microsoft Windows 8 Pro (64 bit, 32 bit)*2*3*8*9
Microsoft Windows 8 (64 bit, 32 bit)*2*3*8*9
Microsoft Windows 7 Ultimate (64 bit, 32 bit)*2*3*7*8
Microsoft Windows 7 Enterprise (64 bit, 32 bit)*2*3*7*8
Microsoft Windows 7 Professional (64 bit, 32 bit)*2*3*7*8
Microsoft Windows 7 Home Premium (64 bit, 32 bit)*2*3*8
Microsoft Windows 7 Starter (32 bit)*2*3
CPU Windows 11: 64 bit-compatible processor with dual-core or more or System on a Chip (SoC)*13
Other than Windows 11: Intel Core 2 Duo Processor 2.0 GHz or more recommended*13
Memory
For Windows 11: 4 GB or more recommended
For 64-bit OS other than Windows 11: 2 GB or more recommended
For 32-bit OS other than Windows 11: 1 GB or more recommended
Display Resolution XGA (1024 768 dots) or higher
Hard disk space*1 For installation: 5GB or more recommended
For execution: 512MB or more recommended
Display color High color (16 bits) or more
Hardware*5
When using personal computer
GT15-SGTKEY-U (License key (for USB port))
GT15-SGTKEY-P (License key (for parallel port))
When using PC CPU module
GT15-SGTKEY-U (License key (for USB port))
Software
When creating or editing project data: GT Designer3*4
When using with PX Developer : PX Developer Version 1.14Q or later
(PX Developer Version1.31H or later when using the security level change)
GT Designer3 Version 1.01B or later
Others The mouse, key board, printer, DVD-ROM drive, sound function (sound card), or speaker
2.1 Operating Environment 2 - 1
*1 When using GT Designer3 or PX Developer, free space is required separately.
For the free space required when using GT Designer3, refer to the following manual.
GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals)
For the available space required when using monitor tool functions of PX Developer, refer to the following manual.
PX Developer Version Operating Manual (Monitor Tool)
When using a user-created application, free space is required separately. *2 Administrator authority is required for installing and using GT SoftGOT1000.
To use GT SoftGOT1000 with another application that runs with administrator authority, GT SoftGOT1000 must also run with
administrator authority.
*3 The following functions are not supported.
Activating the application with Windows compatibility mode Fast user switching Change your desktop themes (fonts) Remote desktop Setting the size of text and illustrations on the screen to any size other than [Small-100%]
*4 Use GT Designer3 included in GT Works3 that contains GT SoftGOT1000.
*5 When using GT15-SGTKEY-U, a USB port is required in the personal computer.
When using GT15-SGTKEY-P, a parallel port (Centronics/printer connecter) is required in the personal computer.
*6 Refer to the manual of the PC CPU module.
*7 Windows XP Mode is not supported.
*8 The touch feature is not supported.
*9 Modern UI style is not supported.
*10 A virtual environment such as Hyper-V is not supported.
*11 The following OSs are not supported.
Microsoft Windows 10 IoT Enterprise for Retail or Thin Client
Microsoft Windows 10 IoT Enterprise for Tablets
Microsoft Windows 10 IoT Enterprise for Small Tablets *12 The following lockdown features are not supported.
Unified Write Filter Assigned Access USB Filter Layout Control AppLocker Shell Launcher
*13 ARM64 and ARM32 are not supported.
POINT
(1) Operating environment when using a user-created application A user-created application is used with GT SoftGOT1000. When using a user-created application, therefore, prepare an operating environment where both the user- created application and GT SoftGOT1000 can operate.
(2) Resume function, suspend setting, power saving function, standby mode, and sleep function of the personal computer The following phenomena may occur when the resume function setting, suspend setting, power saving function setting, standby mode setting, and sleep function setting are configured in the personal computer. A communication error occurs when communicating with the PLC CPU. License key becomes unrecognizable. Therefore, do not set the above-mentioned items.
2 - 2 2.1 Operating Environment
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S o
ft G
O T
10 0
0
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
2.2 Specifications
2.2.1 Specifications of the GT SoftGOT1000
The specifications of the GT SoftGOT1000 is shown below.
*1 X and Y are resolution values set by the user.
3.5.1 Environment setup dialog box
POINT
Project data display
(1) Full screen mode If the resolution of the personal computer used is the same as that of GT SoftGOT1000, it is recommended to hide the frame and menu part using the full screen mode function. When not using the full screen mode function, the top/bottom and left/right parts of the display are hidden by the frame and menu part.
(2) GOT type and resolution For the GT SoftGOT1000, set the same resolution as the GOT type of the project data created with GT Designer3. If the resolution settings are different, the project data cannot be read into the GOT.
Virtual drive The GT SoftGOT1000 uses the following folder located on the hard disk of a personal computer as a virtual drive. A virtual drive is created for each module.
Any other folders can be set as the virtual A drive, the virtual B drive, and the virtual E drive. For changing folders for the virtual drives, refer to the following.
3.5 Environment Setup
Item Specifications
Resolution (dots) 640 480, 800 600, 1024 768, 1280 1024, 1600 1200, X Y (Resolution specification)*1
Display color (color) 65536
Memory capacity 57MB
MELSOFT(installation folder)
SGT1000
Multi
00001 Folder for module No.1
Drive Stores a virtual drive
A
E
B
00002 Folder for module No.2
Drive Stores a virtual drive
A
E
B
2.2 Specifications 2 - 3
Resource data storage destination Resource data is stored to the virtual A drive or a user-specified folder with the configuration shown below.
*1 File save destination for each file can be specified in the [File Output (Hard Copy Function)] menu in the Environment Setup
dialog box.
Refer to the following for Environment Setup dialog box.
3.5.1 Environment setup dialog box
The file formats of resource data are described below.
(Continued to next page)
Storage destination Function
Virtual A drive or
user-specified folder
Folder name specified in
project data
Advanced alarm, Alarm history, Logging,
Recipe, Advanced recipe, Report (Print),
Hard copy (File save)*1, Hard copy (Print), Operation log
G1SgtReport Report (Print)
G1SgtHardcopy Hard copy (File save)*1
Hard copy (Print)
Function Folder name File format and file name
Advanced alarm Folder name set in project data
File name set in project data
*****.G1A
File name set in project data
*****.CSV
File name set in project data
*****.TXT
Alarm function Folder name set in project data
File name set in project data
*****.G1H
File name set in project dataa
*****.CSV
Logging Folder name set in project data
File name set in project data
*****.G1L
File name set in project data
*****.CSV
File name set in project data
*****.TXT
Recipe Folder name set in project data File name set in project data
*****.CSV
Advanced recipe Folder name set in project data
File name set in project data
*****.G1P
File name set in project data
*****.CSV
File name set in project data
*****.TXT
Report (Print)*1 G1SgtReport (Fixed) REP00001.CSV - REP00008.CSV
Hard copy (File save)*2
G1SgtHardcopy (Fixed) SNAP0001.BMP - SNAP9999.BMP
SNAP0001.JPG - SNAP9999.JPG
File name set in project data
File name set in project data
*****.BMP
File name set in project data
*****.JPG
Hard copy (Print) G1SgtHardcopy (Fixed) HARDCOPY.BMP (Fixed)
2 - 4 2.2 Specifications
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S o
ft G
O T
10 0
0
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
*1 When using any language other than Japanese and English for the report screen and outputting the data in CSV file, characters
may not be displayed correctly.
Do not use any language other than Japanese and English.
*2 File save destination for each file can be specified in the [File Output (Hard Copy Function)] menu in the Environment Setup
dialog box.
Refer to the following for Environment Setup.
3.5.1 Environment setup dialog box
POINT
Precautions on file names for the virtual drive
As a folder name for the virtual drive, only ASCII characters (excluding |, , and ;) can be used with up to 78 characters. Set the file name with up to 256 characters including the path name for file storage destination and file name to be stored (including extension). Two-byte and one-byte Japanese kana are considered as 2 characters.
2.2.2 License key specifications
To use GT SoftGOT1000, license key is required. License key has the following two types.
Be sure to attach the license key before starting monitoring on GT SoftGOT1000. When starting monitoring without a license key, GT SoftGOT1000 automatically ends in about two hours. Also, from starting monitoring to exiting it, use GT SoftGOT1000 with the license key attached. If the license key is disconnected during monitoring, the GT SoftGOT1000 will exit automatically.
POINT
License key
(1) Before using license key The license key is authentificated by OS as a connected device. Thus, the System Driver (device driver) needs to be installed as other connected devices. As the license key can be accessed via the System Driver, the access to the license key is not allowed when the System Driver is not installed.
(2) License key use target The GT15-SGTKEY-U and GT15-SGTKEY-P are dedicated for GT SoftGOT1000. They cannot be used for GT SoftGOT2.
Function Folder name File format and file name
Operation log function Folder name set in project data
File name set in project data
*****.G1O
File name set in project data
*****.CSV
File name set in project data
*****.TXT
Model name Attachment type
GT15-SGTKEY-U Attached to USB port
GT15-SGTKEY-P Attached to parallel port
2.2 Specifications 2 - 5
2.3 Functions that Cannot Be Used
In GT SoftGOT1000, some functions available in GT16 cannot be used. The following table shows unusable functions.
*1 With the keyboard input function, operations equivalent to the operation panel function can be available.
Function category Function name
Utility functions
GOT setup
GOT main unit
setup
Time setting, Transparent mode,
Clean, Video/RGB setting ,
Multimedia setting, Behavior of duplicate IPs
Display Screen save time, Screen save backlight,
Battery alarm display, Brightness,contrast
Operation
Key sensitivity, Key reaction speed,
Touch panel calibration, Touch detection mode,
USB mouse/keyboard function, SoftGOT-GOT link function
GOT
maintenance
function
Maintenance timing setting, Addtion times reset,
GOT start time, GOT information
Communication setting Communication setting
Ethernet setting
Communication setting Communication setting
Debug Debug
Self check Self check
Data control
Data control Data control
OS/project
information OS/project information
Extension function
System monitor function, Video display function,
RGB display function, Multimedia function,
External I/O function, Operation panel function*1,
Backup/restore function, CNC data I/O function,
CNC manufacturing program editor
function,
Operator authentication
(Fingerprint authentication),
Remote personal computer operation, MELSEC-L troubleshooting function,
Log viewer function, File transfer function (FTP client),
Motion program (SV43) edit, Motion program (SV43) I/O,
VNC server function
Option functions
Ladder monitor function, List editor for MELSEC-A,
List editor for MELSEC-FX, Intelligent module monitor function,
Network monitor function, Q motion monitor function,
Servo amplifier monitor function, CNC monitor function,
Gateway function, MES interface function,
SFC monitor function, Ladder editor function
Motion SFC monitor function
Others FA transparent functions, Human sensor function,
RGB output function
2 - 6 2.3 Functions that Cannot Be Used
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S o
ft G
O T
10 0
0
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
POINT
Utility operability
In GT SoftGOT1000, some functions do not operate even though they can be set. The operability on GT SoftGOT1000 is shown below.
Item Operability on GT
SoftGOT1000
GOT setup
GOT main unit setup
Time setting
Transparent mode -
Clean
Video/RGB setting
Multimedia setting
License management
Behavior of duplicate IPs
Display
Language
Opening screen time
Screen save time -
Screen save backlight -
Battery alarm display -
Brightness, contrast -
Operation
Buzzer volume
Window move buzzer
Security setting
Utility call key
Key sensitivity -
Key reaction speed -
Touch panel calibration -
Touch Detection Mode -
USB mouse/keyboard function -
SoftGOT-GOT link function -
VNC server func. setting -
GOT maintenance function
Maintenance timing setting
Addition times reset
GOT start time
GOT information
Communication setting
Debug
Self check
Data control Data control
Alarm information
Advanced Recipe information
Logging information
Operation log information
Hard copy information
Special data information
Operator information
Fingerprint information
OS/project information
: Operable
: Inoperable
- : Setting is not required on GT SoftGOT1000 (Some
items can be set but do not operate.)
2.3 Functions that Cannot Be Used 2 - 7
2.4 Precautions
2.4.1 Precautions for using the GT Soft GOT1000
Numerical Display When the [View Format] of [Numerical Display] is set to [Real] and if illegal value is stored, illegal value will be displayed on GT Soft GOT1000. (GOT displays [non].)
Time display The clock data of the personal computer is used for clock display when monitoring GT SoftGOT1000. (GOT reads and shows the clock data of the PLC CPU.) When controling a system using clock data, set the same clock data for the PLC CPU and personal computer. GT SoftGOT1000 does not support the daylight saving function. Do not check [Automatically adjust clock for daylight saving changes] on the personal computer.
GT Soft GOT1000 Versions Be sure to use the GT Soft GOT1000 of the same version as the GT Designer3 that the project data is created. When using different versions of GT SoftGOT1000 and GT Designer3, the file may not be opened, functions/settings may be invalid, or the GT Soft GOT1000 may not work correctly. Refer to the following for the project data compatibility.
Appendix3 Applicable Project Data
Printer to output function
(1) Hard copy output destination Hard copy output destination can be specified on GT Designer3 or GT SoftGOT1000. Settings that are required for each hard copy output destination are shown below.
(a) In the case [Printer] is selected as the output destination on the Hard copy setting screen of GT Designer3.
-: Setting ineffective
Hard copy output Setting at GT SoftGOT1000
File save destination
(Hard copy (File Save)) Printing
[Print to printer
(Hard Copy Function)]
on the Page Setup screen
[File Output
(Hard Copy Function)] on the
Environment Setup screen
Virtual A Drive
(GT1sgHardcopy) Yes Check -
Virtual A Drive
(GT1sgHardcopy) No Uncheck -
2 - 8 2.4 Precautions
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S o
ft G
O T
10 0
0
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
(b) In the case [File] is selected as the output destination on the Hard copy setting screen of GT Designer3.
-: Setting ineffective
Refer to the following for hard copy functions.
GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Functions)
Refer to the following for Page Setup.
5.2.3 Performing page setup
Refer to the following for Environment Setup.
3.5 Environment Setup
(2) System alarm during hard copying The system alarm will not be displayed during hard copying. Refer to the following for troubleshooting for the hard copy function.
Appendix.2.4 Troubleshooting for print
Appendix.2.5 Troubleshooting for file save problems
(3) Report function Data cannot be output to a printer directly. Print images (in CSV format) are stored to the virtual A drive of a personal computer once. Output these images in each file to a printer.
Functions in which data are stored in the memory card in advance by the user When registering parts of BMP/JPEG files and document display data, store the data to the virtual A drive, the virtual B drive, or the virtual E drive. (The drive to be used depends on the specifications and setting of the object.) For details of each function, refer to the following manual.
GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Functions)
Except for the virtual drive, GT SoftGOT1000 does not recognize BPM/JPEG files and other files.
*1 The folder name can be changed to another name.
Hard copy output Setting at GT SoftGOT1000
File save destination
(Hard copy (File Save)) Printing
[Print to printer
(Hard Copy Function)]
on the Page Setup screen
[File Output
(Hard Copy Function)] on the
Environment Setup screen
Virtual A Drive
(GT1sgHardcopy) No - Select [Default].
The save file destination that
was specified on the Hard copy
setting screen of GT Designer3
No - Select [Project Data Setting].
MELSOFT(installation folder)
SGT1000
Multi
00001
Drive
00002
A
B
PDFDAT DOCIMG Stores the JPEG files for the document display.
Stores the PDF files for the document display. Image Stores BMP or JPEG files.*1
2.4 Precautions 2 - 9
2.4.2 Precautions on license key
When attaching GT15-SGTKEY-U
(1) Installation/uninstallation of the System Driver Before installing or uninstalling the System Driver, disconnect the GT15-SGTKEY-U. When installing the System Driver with the GT15-SGTKEY-U attached, the installation of USB may be failed. When the installation is failed, uninstall the System Driver after disconnecting the GT15-SGTKEY-U, and install it again.
(2) Use of a USB hub Do not use GT15-SGTKEY-U through a USB hub. When using GT15-SGTKEY-U, connect GT15-SGTKEY-U to a personal computerdirectly.
When attaching GT15-SGTKEY-P
(1) Using GT15-SGTKEY-P The GT15-SGTKEY-P can be used only with the parallel port built in a personal computer as standard. It cannot be used with the parallel port added by extension or a converter.
(2) Using GT15-SGTKEY-P with other devices simultaneously The following devices cannot be used at the same port as the GT15-SGTKEY-P. SCSI interface for parallel port Floppy disc drive, hard disc drive, CD-ROM or ZIP drive connected to parallel port Devices that use a data communication method other than the standard network specification, including
parallel port communication type Interlink and Centronics printer interface
(3) Attaching GT15-SGTKEY-P Connect the GT15-SGTKEY-P between the printer switching device and personal computer.
2 - 10 2.4 Precautions
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
o ft
G O
T 1
00 0
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
3. OPERATION OF GT SoftGOT1000
3.1 Start GT SoftGOT1000
Start GT SoftGOT1000.
1. Select [Start]*1 [MELSOFT]*2 [GT Works3] [GT SoftGOT1000] from the menu of Windows to start GT SoftGOT1000.
*1 Select [All Programs] on the [Start] screen, or select [Start] [All Programs].
*2 [MELSOFT Application] appears for a version of GT Works3 earlier than 1.136S.
POINT
(1) Display position when starting up the GT SoftGOT1000 When GT SoftGOT1000 is started, its window is displayed where the last time it was terminated. However, if GT SoftGOT1000 was illegally terminated, the window is displayed where the last time GT SoftGOT1000 was normally closed. Display position is stored for each CPU number of GT SoftGOT1000.
(2) Automatic startup
GT SoftGOT1000 can be started automatically when Windows is started up by using [Online after starting]. For the setting, refer to the following.
3.12 Automatic Startup
3.1 Start GT SoftGOT1000 3 - 1
Precautions for executing other MELSOFT applications while GT SoftGOT1000 is being operated The User Account Control (UAC) has been introduced in Windows 7 or later. Run other MELSOFT applications using the following procedure.
(1) When User Account Control (UAC) is invalid Specifying [Run as administrator] is not required for running a MELSOFT application.
(2) When User Account Control (UAC) is enabled Select [Run as administrator] to execute the program.
1. Select and right-click the application to execute from the start menu of Windows.
2. Select [Run as administrator] to run the application.
Select [Run as administrator] from the right-click context menu.
3 - 2 3.1 Start GT SoftGOT1000
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
o ft
G O
T 1
00 0
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
(3) When always running an application as an administrator To always run programs as an administrator, set the following setting.
1. Select and right-click the application to execute from the start menu of Windows.
2. Select [Properties].
3. The properties dialog appears. Select the [Compatibility] tab. Select [Run this program as an administrator] in [Privilege Level].
4. Click the [OK] button to close the dialog. For Windows 8, Windows 8.1, Windows 10, and Windows 11, right-click a MELSOFT application used with GT SoftGOT1000 and select [Open file location] from the menu.
Select [Properties] from the right-click menu.
Select [Run this program as an administrator].
3.1 Start GT SoftGOT1000 3 - 3
3.2 Screen Configuration of GT SoftGOT1000
This section describes screen configuration.
Item Description
Title Bar
Displays the project name and/or the module number, or the comment set with GT SoftGOT1000 Commander.
Project name and module number
If GT SoftGOT1000 displays the project data for the first time, the title bar displays [***] as the project name.
If the project title is not set for the project data monitored by GT SoftGOT1000, the title bar displays [No title] as the project
name.
Comment set with GT SoftGOT1000 Commander
The title bar displays the comment set with GT SoftGOT1000 Commander. (The line feeds are disabled, and the comment
is displayed in one line.)
If GT SoftGOT1000 monitors the linked GOT for the first time, the title bar displays [***].
If the comment is not set with GT SoftGOT1000 Commander, the title bar displays [No comments (**.**.**.**)].?**.**.**.**
indicates the IP address of the linked GOT.)
To display the project name and/or the module number, or the comment set with GT SoftGOT1000 Commander, make a
selection in the title bar setting in the [Environment Setup] dialog box.
For the details of the title bar setting, refer to the following.
3.5 Environment Setup
Menu Bar
Operate GT SoftGOT1000 by using a drop-down menu.
For the details of the menu bar, refer to the following.
3.3 Menu Bar
Tool Bar
Operate GT SoftGOT1000 by selecting an icon.
For the details of the tool bar, refer to the following.
3.4 Tool Bar
Status Bar Displays the description of a command or icon, and the connection method, the communication port and the baud rate in the
communication setup.
Title Bar
Tool Bar Menu Bar
Status Bar
Dropdown menu
3 - 4 3.2 Screen Configuration of GT SoftGOT1000
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
o ft
G O
T 1
00 0
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
3.3 Menu Bar
This section describes commands assigned to the menu bar.
Project
The Project menu includes options for project data reading, Snap Shot
and printing.
5. FUNCTIONS
View
The View menu includes the functions for switching the toolbar, menu
bar, and scroll bar between display and nondisplay states. The menu
includes the functions for switching the full screen mode and back
screen mode between enabled and disabled states.
5. FUNCTIONS
Set
The Set menu includes the functions for setting the environment, mail,
application start-up, and PX Developer. The menu includes the
functions for switching the keyboard input, monitor-only mode, popup
menu, close menu, and exit key between enabled and disabled states.
5. FUNCTIONS
Online
The Online menu includes functions for setting monitor start/stop,
starting in online mode enable/disable switching, communication error
dialog display/non-display and communications.
3. OPERATION OF GT SoftGOT1000
3.3 Menu Bar 3 - 5
Tool
The Tool menu includes the function of displaying resource data, file
information in the PLC, GOT project data acquisition, and error
information.
5. FUNCTIONS
Window
The Window menu includes the functions for cascading, minimizing, or
moving windows.
5. FUNCTIONS
Help
The Help menu includes functions of viewing the PDF manual related
to the GT SoftGOT1000 and checking the software version.
3.13 Help
3 - 6 3.3 Menu Bar
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
o ft
G O
T 1
00 0
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
3.4 Tool Bar
This section describes the tool bar.
Name Description
Open a Project Opens the project data created with GT Designer3.
Open a File Opens a single file format project (*.GTW) of GT Designer3 or the GT Designer2 file (*.GTE).
Monitor Start Starts monitoring.
Monitor Stop Stops monitoring.
Resource Data Displays resource data.
Environment Setup Performs environment settings for GT SoftGOT1000.
Communication Setup Performs communication settings for GT SoftGOT1000.
Mail Setup Performs mail settings such as dial-up, send address.
Mail Condition Disables the mail send setting of the project data.
Mail History Displays the operation history of mail sendings.
Application Start-up Setting Allows settings for starting up applications from GT SoftGOT1000.
Application Start-up History Shows operation histories of application start-up.
PX Developer Function Call Setting Performs the PX Developer call settings.
PX Developer Function Call Sub-
Setting Performs the PX Developer call sub-settings.
PX Developer Function Call History Shows operation histories at calling monitor tool functions for in PX Developer.
Keyboard Switches keyboard input enable/disable.
3.4 Tool Bar 3 - 7
3.5 Environment Setup
In Environment Setup, set the resolution, etc. of GT SoftGOT1000.
1. Perform either of the following operations.
Clicking (Environment Setup) Selecting [Set] [Environment Setup] from the menu Right-clicking the mouse to select [Environment Setup] from the menu
2. The Environment Setup dialog box is displayed. Set each item and click the button.
3.5.1 Environment setup dialog box
Action Setup tab
(Continued to next page)
Item Description
Resolution
Select the screen size (resolution: dots) to be monitored.
"640 480", "800 600", "1024 768", "1280 1024", "1600 1200", "X Y"
Set the resolution dot by dot when selecting [X Y].
X: Set the horizontal size (X axis). (1920 dots to 640 dots)
Y: Set the vertical size (Y axis). (1200 dots to 480 dots)
OK
3 - 8 3.5 Environment Setup
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
o ft
G O
T 1
00 0
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
Item Description
Font
Font Control
Select a font language used for monitoring.
When selecting Japanese (supporting Europe) or Chinese (Simplified) (supporting Europe), Latin characters are
displayed in one-byte characters.
Japanese: Japanese characters are displayed.
Japanese (supporting Europe): Japanese characters supporting European characters are displayed.
Chinese (Simplified): Simplified Chinese characters are displayed.
Chinese (Simplified) (supporting Europe): Simplified Chinese characters supporting European characters are
displayed.
Chinese(Traditional) (supporting Europe): Traditional Chinese characters supporting European characters are
displayed.
16dot Standard
Font
Select the font type of 16dot standard font.
[Gothic], [Mincho]
TrueType Numerical
Font
Select a font type of the TrueType numerical font.
[Gothic], [7-Segment]
Use Japanese
optional font
This item is available only when selecting Chinese (Simplified) or Chinese (Simplified) (supporting Europe) for Font
Control.
Do not check this item normally (when displaying in Chinese (Simplified) characters).
When checking this item, objects without Kanji region setting will be displayed in Japanese.
Authentication
Select password authentication or operator authentication.
[Password], [Operator]
Select the same authentication method set in [System Environment] of GT Designer3.
File Output (Hard Copy Function)
Select the output destination for the hard copy file.
Default : Stores files in the virtual A drive (G1SgtHardcopy).
Refer to the following for G1SgtHardcopy.
2.2.1 Resource data storage destination
[Project Data Setting] : Stores files in the file output destination specified on the [Project Data Setting]
screen.
3.5 Environment Setup 3 - 9
Drive Setup tab
(Continued to next page)
Item Description
Virtual A Drive*1
Set a folder in the hard disc drive as the virtual A drive, which is used as the A drive environment of the GOT main
unit.
Default : Stores resource data in the virtual A drive.
Refer to the following for virtual A drive.
2.2.1 Virtual drive
Fixed : Stores resource data in the folder specified by the user.
Select this item when storing resource data to a desired folder.
Clicking the button displays the Browse For Folder dialog.
Select a folder to which resource data is stored.
Virtual B Drive*1
Set a folder in the hard disc drive as the virtual B drive, which is used as the B drive environment of the GOT main
unit.
Default : Stores resource data in the virtual B drive.
Refer to the following for virtual B drive.
2.2.1 Virtual drive
Fixed : Stores resource data in the folder specified by the user.
Select this item when storing resource data to a desired folder.
Clicking the button displays the Browse For Folder dialog.
Select a folder to which resource data is stored.
Browse
Browse
3 - 10 3.5 Environment Setup
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
o ft
G O
T 1
00 0
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
*1 For specifying a virtual drive, do not specify the same folder set as the other virtual drive or virtual drives for other GT
SoftGOT1000.
Doing so may cause malfunctions.
Item Description
Virtual E Drive*1
Set a folder in the hard disc drive as the virtual E drive, which is used as the E drive environment of the GOT main
unit.
Default : Stores resource data in the virtual E drive.
Refer to the following for virtual E drive.
2.2.1 Virtual drive
Fixed: : Stores resource data in the folder specified by the user.
Select this item when storing resource data to a desired folder.
Clicking the button displays the Browse For Folder dialog.
Select a folder to which resource data is stored.
Browse
3.5 Environment Setup 3 - 11
Auxiliary Setup tab
(Continued to next page)
Item Description
Window Move Method
Select the window moving method used when the title bar is not displayed, for example, in the full screen display
function.
Refer to 5.9 for details of window movement.
[Mouse] :Move the mouse to move GT SoftGOT1000 for window movement.
Click the mouse to determine the position.
[Move Dialog] :The Move window dialog box is displayed for window movement, and clicking the up,
down, left or right button moves GT SoftGOT1000 on a 10-dot basis.
A window can also be moved on a panel computer that cannot use a mouse.
Title Bar
Select the data to be displayed on the title bar.
[Default] :Select this item to display the project name and the module number. After the selection, select
items to be displayed.
[Set the comment of GT SoftGOT1000 Commander for the title]
:Select this item to display the comment set with GT SoftGOT1000 Commander.
For how to set the comment, refer to the following.
5.21.5 Management of GT SoftGOT1000 modules with the SoftGOT-GOT link function (GT
SoftGOT1000 Commander)
Delete all resource data after
reading project data.
Check this item to delete all resource data in the A/B drive when completing project data reading.
3 - 12 3.5 Environment Setup
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
o ft
G O
T 1
00 0
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
For details of *1, refer to the following.
*1 Display Screen Size (Full Screen Mode)
When [Display Screen Size (Full Screen Mode)] is set to a smaller size than the size set for [Resolution] in the Environment Setup dialog box, the user can simultaneously use the full-screen GT SoftGOT1000 and other applications.
Displaying the scroll bars enables GT SoftGOT1000 to display the hidden part of the monitor screen.
( 5.19 Scroll Function)
POINT
Screen size in full screen mode
For selecting [User Setting] for [Display Screen Size (Full Screen Mode), [Width] and [Height] can be set with GOT internal devices (Width: GS503, Height: GS504). Input values into the corresponding GOT internal devices, and the screen size changes. For GOT internal devices, refer to the following manual.
GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals)
Item Description
Display dialog when changing to
full screen mode. Check this item to display the confirmation dialog box when full screen changes are carried out.
Display dialog when changing to
back screen mode. Check this item to display the confirmation dialog box when the screen is displayed behind the other screens.
Display dialog when disabling
popup menu. Check this item to display the confirmation dialog box when disabling popup menu.
Display a splash when starting GT
SoftGOT1000. Check the item to display the splash screen when GT SoftGOT1000 starts.
Display dialog when starting GT
SoftGOT1000, specified with the
module that has been activated.
Check this item to display the attention dialog box when restarting GT SoftGOT1000 module that has been
activated.
Display dialog when closing GT
SoftGOT1000. Check this item to display the confirmation dialog box when ending GT SoftGOT1000.
Terminate GT SoftGOT1000 when
shutting down Windows. Check this item to end GT SoftGOT1000 as well as logging off or ending Windows.
Display dialog when using GOT
Link. Select this item to display the confirmation dialog box when synchronizing project data by the GOT.
Display dialog at the start of
monitoring in the monitor-only
mode.
Select this item to display the confirmation dialog box at the start of monitoring in the monitor-only mode.
When the sizes set for [Resolution] and
[Display Screen Size (Full Screen Mode)] are the same
[Resolution] : 1280 1024
[Display Screen Size (Full Screen Mode)] : 1280 1024
When [Display Screen Size (Full Screen Mode)] is
set to a smaller size than the size set for [Resolution]
[Resolution] : 1280 1024
[Display Screen Size (Full Screen Mode)] : 1280 512
3.5 Environment Setup 3 - 13
3.6 Communication Setup
In Communication Setup, set the type of the PLC CPU to be connected, the communication time-out period, etc.
1. Perform either of the following operations.
Clicking (Communication Setup) Select [Online] [Communication Setup] from the menu. Right-click the mouse to select [Communication Setup] from the menu.
2. The Communication Setup dialog box is displayed. Set each item and click the button.
POINT
Communication Setup
Make Communication Setup before starting monitoring. After start of monitoring on GT SoftGOT1000, Communication Setup cannot be changed. (The "Communication Error Dialog" setting can be changed during monitoring.)
OK
3 - 14 3.6 Communication Setup
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
o ft
G O
T 1
00 0
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
3.6.1 Communication setup dialog box
Connection Setup tab
(Continued to next page)
Item Description
Connection
Set the connection method between GT SoftGOT1000 and a controller.
Connection
type
Select the connection type of GT SoftGOT1000.
CPU : Select this option for direct connection to CPU via the RS-232 cable.
USB : Select this option for direct connection to CPU via the USB cable.
C24 : Select this option when computer link connection is used.
NET/H : Select this option when using the MELSECNET/H interface board.
Select [NET/H] when using the GT SoftGOT1000 in MELSECNET/10 mode.
CC IE Control : Select this option when using the CC-Link IE Controller Network interface board.
CC IE Field : Select this option when using the CC-Link IE Field Network interface board.
Ethernet : Select this option when Ethernet connection is used.
BUS : Select [BUS] when the bus connection is used.
Controller
type*1
If [CPU]/[USB]/[C24]/[NET/H]/[CC IE Control]/[CC IE Field]/[Ethernet] is selected as the [connection
method], specify the connection destination.
When [CPU]/[USB] is selected : Selects the type of CPU to be connected.
When [C24] is selected : Selects the type of computer link module or serial communication module
to be connected.
When [NET/H]/[CC IE Control]/[CC IE Field] is selected
: Select the interface board mounted on the personal computer to be used.
When [Ethernet] is selected : Select the model of a programmable controller to be connected.
Click this button to display the [GOT Link Setup] dialog box.
Clicking this button is available only when selecting [Ethernet] and [MELSEC]/[OMRON SYSMAC]/[GOT] for [Connection].
GOT Link Setup dialog box
Connection type
Controller type
3.6 Communication Setup 3 - 15
(Continued to next page)
Item Description
CPU/C24
Set this item when selecting [CPU] or [C24] for [Connection].
Comm. port Choose the communication port on the personal computer side.
COM1 to COM6
Baud rate
Set the transmission speed to/from the CPU.
Set the baud rate to be used.
When connecting a QnA/A series computer link, set the same baud rate as the one set in the computer link
or serial communication module to be used.
For connection with the FXCPU, select the baud rate supported by the connected FXCPU.
When the set baud rate is not supported, communication is made at 9.6kbps.
When selecting a transmission speed that is not supported by OMRON SYSMAC, a communication error
occurs.
Timeout
Set the timeout period and retry count.
Depending on the settings on the [Connection] menu, some items cannot be set.
Host Set the timeout period for host monitor.
"3" to "90" (seconds)
Other
Set the timeout period for other station monitor.
According to the item selected in [Connection], the setting range varies.
When [Ethernet] and [MELSEC] are selected: 1 to 90 (seconds)
Other than the above: 3 to 90 (seconds)
Retry Set the number of retries.
"0" to "10" (times)
CC IE Control/CC IE
Field
Set this item when selecting [CC IE Control] or [CC IE Field] for [Connection].
Monitor Speed Set the monitor speed for CC-Link IE Controller Network or CC-Link IE Field Network.
[High], [Normal], [Low]
Ethernet
Set this item when selecting [Ethernet] for [Connection].
NET No.
Set the network number of GT SoftGOT1000.
When [MELSEC]/[YASKAWA]/[YOKOGAWA]/[TOSHIBA nv]/[SIEMENS S7]/[SIEMENS OP]/[KEYENCE
KV]/[MODBUS/TCP] is selected: 1 to 239
When [OMRON SYSMAC] is selected: 1 to 127
When [GOT] is selected: Not necessary
PC No.
Set the station number of GT SoftGOT1000.
The station number must be different from the PLC No. of the Ethernet module to be monitored.
When [MELSEC] is selected: 1 to 120
When [YASKAWA]/[YOKOGAWA] is selected: 1 to 64
When [OMRON SYSMAC]/[TOSHIBA nv]/[SIEMENS S7]/[SIEMENS OP]/[KEYENCE KV] is selected: 1 to
254
When [MODBUS/TCP] is selected: 1 to 247
When [GOT] is selected: Not necessary
Port No.*2
Set the port number of GT SoftGOT1000.
When [MELSEC] is selected: 1024 to 65535
When [OMRON SYSMAC]/[YASKAWA]/[YOKOGAWA]/[TOSHIBA nv]/[SIEMENS S7]/[SIEMENS OP]/
[KEYENCE KV]/[MODBUS/TCP] is selected: 1024 to 65534 (excluding 5011, 5012, 5013, 49153)
When [GOT] is selected: Not necessary (Automatically detected)
Wait Time Set the transmission wait time to reduce the load on the network and target PLC.
"0" to "10000" (x 10 ms)
Option
Set this item when selecting [CPU] and [YASKAWA] for [Connection].
Host Add.
Specify the host address (the station number of a programmable controller to which connects GT
SoftGOT1000) within the connection network.
[1] to [31]
Wait Time Set the transmission time to reduce the loads of a network and a target programmable controller.
[0] to [30] (x 10ms)
32bit Storage
Select the storage order of 32-bit data.
Low High : The GOT writes data into controller devices in order of data from lower 16 bits to upper 16
bits.
High Low : The GOT writes data into controller devices in order of data from upper 16 bits to lower 16
bits.
Communication Error
Dialog Select this item to display the error dialog box on GT SoftGOT1000 when a communication error occurs.
3 - 16 3.6 Communication Setup
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
o ft
G O
T 1
00 0
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
*1 For using the CNC C70, select [MELSEC-Q].
For using the LJ72GF15-T2, select [MELSEC-L].
*2 For communication via the Ethernet port of the QnUD(V/EH)CPU, the port No. is automatically specified, regadless of the setting.
POINT
Precautions for using device entry mode (When the MELSEC-FX connection)
The precautions for applying the device entry mode are described below. Apply the device entry mode after the adequate debugging.
(1) Devices that can be set An error (Communication time out) may occur if the following device (Bit device) is set. For the device as objects, set other than the devices shown below when applying the device entry mode.
(2) When using the offset function When offset function is applied, the device range above may be monitored during an unintended moment and an error (Communication time out) may occur. Create the project data so that any offset will not operate for the devices above.
(3) Measures for errors The error mentioned by (1) and (2) is displayed in the system alarm. When applying the device entry mode, it is recommended to set system alarm to the project data.
Item Description
Communication Effective
Mode
Select this item to perform efficient readout of PLC devices data with GT SoftGOT1000.
The communication performance may not improve depending on the usage environment and the setting of the project data.
If the communication performance may not improve in the communication effective mode, it is already optimized in the
condition where the communication effective mode is not used, and therefore do not use this function.
This setting is available only when [Ethernet]-[MELSEC]/[GOT] is selected.
Device Entry Mode
Select this item to enable high-speed monitoring on GT SoftGOT1000.
When using the Device Entry Mode during FXCPU connection, the range of devices to be monitored may be restricted, and
monitoring may not be performed properly.
This setting is available only when selecting [CPU] and [MELSEC-Q]/[MELSEC-L]/[MELSEC-FX], or [USB] and [MELSEC-
Q]/[MELSEC-L]]/[MELSEC-FX] for [Connection].
Type of connected CPU Device name (Bit device) Device range
FX0(S) series
FX0N series
Counter contact (C) C224 to C239
C240 to C255
Special auxiliary relay (M) M8240 to M8255
FX1 series
Timer contact (T) T240 to T255
Counter contact (C)
C128 to C143
C224 to C239
C240 to C255
FX1S series Counter contact (C) C224 to C239
FX1N series Counter contact (C) C192 to C207
FX2(C) series Counter contact (C) C192 to C207
FX2N(C) series Counter contact (C) C192 to C207
FX3U(C) series Counter contact (C) C192 to C207
FX3G(C) series Counter contact (C) C192 to C207
FX3S Counter contact (C) C192 to C207
3.6 Communication Setup 3 - 17
(1) GOT Link Setup dialog box
Item Description
Use GOT Link
Select this item to use the SoftGOT-GOT link function.
For the SoftGOT-GOT link function, refer to the following.
5.21 SoftGOT-GOT Link Function
Destination GOT IP Address Set the IP address of the GOT.
Click the [Communication Test] button to execute the communication test with the GOT.
Destination GOT Port No. Set the port No. of the GOT.
Project Data Upload Password
The password setting when reading project data from the GOT is available. (Up to 8 one-byte
alphanumeric characters can be set for a password.)
With the password setting, an authentication is automatically executed when reading project data from the
GOT.
Communication method Set the communication method.
This setting is available only when [Ethernet]-[GOT] is selected.
3 - 18 3.6 Communication Setup
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
o ft
G O
T 1
00 0
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
Barcode Reader SetUp tab Set those items when executing the barcode reader connection. For details of the barcode reader connection, refer to the following.
4.16 Barcode Reader Connection
Item Description
Use Bar Code Select this item to use the barcode reader connection.
Comm. Port
Choose the communication port on the personal computer side. (COM1 to COM16)
When multiple GT SoftGOT1000 modules using barcode reader connection are started, specify a different
communication port for each GT SoftGOT1000 module.
Baud Rate Select the transmission speed. (4.8Kbps/9.6Kbps/19.2Kbps/38.4Kbps/57.6Kbps/115.2Kbps)
Data Bit Select the data length. (7bit/8bit)
Stop Bit Select the stop bit length. (1bit/2bit)
Parity Select the type to check parity. (None/Even/Odd)
3.6 Communication Setup 3 - 19
RFID SetUp tab Set those items when executing the RFID connection. For details of the RFID connection, refer to the following.
4.17 RFID Connection
Item Description
Use RFID Select this item to use the RFID connection.
Comm. Port
Choose the communication port on the personal computer side. (COM1 to COM16)
When multiple GT SoftGOT1000 modules using RFID connection are started, specify a different
communication port for each GT SoftGOT1000 module.
Baud Rate Select the transmission speed. (4.8Kbps/9.6Kbps/19.2Kbps/38.4Kbps/57.6Kbps/115.2Kbps)
Data Bit Select the data length. (7bit/8bit)
Stop Bit Select the stop bit length. (1bit/2bit)
Parity Select the type to check parity. (None/Even/Odd)
Sum Check Select whether to perform sum check. (Done/None)
Retry Set the number of retries to be performed when a communication error occurs.
When receiving no response after retries, the communication times out. (0 to 5 times)
Time Out Set the time required for communication to time out. (3 to 30sec)
Delay Time Set the delay time to lower the load of the network/connected PLC. (0 to 3000ms)
Format
Select the communication format. (10/11/12/15)
Format10: Dedicated protocol (LSRF manufactured by LS Industrial Systems Co., Ltd.)
Format11: Dedicated protocol (ICU-60S manufactured by MARS TECHNO SCIENCE Corp.)
Format12: Dedicated protocol (ICU-215 (Mifare) manufactured by MARS TECHNO SCIENCECorp.)
Format15: Nonprocedural protocol
3 - 20 3.6 Communication Setup
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
o ft
G O
T 1
00 0
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
3.7 Opening the Project
Set a project and start monitoring the project. A GT Designer3 project, a single file format project, or a GT Designer2 file can be set. GT Designer3 project Project data created with GT Designer3 A single file format project (*.GTW) of GT Designer3 Compressed project data created with GT Designer3 GT Designer2 file (*.GTE) Project data created with GT Designer2
3.7.1 Open the GT Designer3 Project
1. Perform either of the following operations.
Click (Open a Project). Select [Project] [Open] [Open a Project.] from the menu. Right-click the mouse and select [Open] [Open a Project.] from the menu.
2. Open a project dialog box is displayed. Set up the following items and click the button.
Item Description
Folder path to save
Enter the path of the location where the workspace is stored.
The save destination path can be set by the [Browse] button also.
Up to 200 characters can be entered.
Workspace/Project List
Displays the workspace or project existing in the same path entered for [Folder path to save].
Double-click the workspace to be opened to display projects stored in the workspace.
Select the project to be opened.
Workspace Name Displays the workspace name where the project selected in [Workspace/Project List] is stored.
Project Name Displays the project name selected in [Workspace/Project List].
Open
3.7 Opening the Project 3 - 21
3. Confirmation dialog box is displayed. (The dialogue box is not displayed if GT SoftGOT1000 is already in online mode.)
4. Selecting starts monitoring of the project monitored previously. (Displays the Utility when opening a project for the first time.) Turn off the power supply to the PLC or disconnect the communication cable that connects the personal computer and PLC in advance if it is not desired to go into online mode with the previous project data or if it is desired to open a project in off-line mode.
Yes
3 - 22 3.7 Opening the Project
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
o ft
G O
T 1
00 0
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
3.7.2 Open a single file format project of GT Designer3/GT Designer2 file
1. Perform either of the following operations.
Click (Open a File). Select [Project] [Open] [Open a File] from the menu. Right-click the mouse and select [Open] [Open a File] from the menu.
2. The Open a file. dialog box is displayed. Set up the following items and click the button.
Item Description
Look in Selects the area where the project data is saved.
File name Sets project data name for monitoring.
Files of type
Selects a file format of the project data.
GT Designer3 file(*.GTW): GTW format
GT Designer2 file(*.GTE): GTE format
Open
3.7 Opening the Project 3 - 23
3. Confirmation dialog box is displayed. (The dialogue box is not displayed if GT SoftGOT1000 is already in online mode.)
4. Selecting starts monitoring of the project monitored previously. (Displays the Utility when opening a project for the first time.) Turn off the power supply to the PLC or disconnect the communication cable that connects the personal computer and PLC in advance if it is not desired to go into online mode with the previous project data or if it is desired to open a project in off-line mode.
Yes
3 - 24 3.7 Opening the Project
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
o ft
G O
T 1
00 0
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
3.8 Starting Monitoring
This section describes how to perform monitoring with the project data monitored previously.
1. Perform either of the following operations.
Click (Monitor Start) Select [Online] [Monitor Start] from the menu. Right-click the mouse and select [Monitor Start] from the menu.
2. Monitoring is started with the project data monitored previously.
POINT
Before monitoring
The following shows the procedure used when not starting monitoring with the project data monitored previously.
(1) When performing a monitoring for the first time Select [Project] [Open] and set a project data to be monitored.
3.7 Opening the Project When performing a monitoring for the first time, performing the operation shown in this section causes GT SoftGOT1000 to display the Utility.
(2) When project data has been changed after previous monitoring Select [Project] [Open] and set the project data to be monitored before starting monitoring.
3.7 Opening the Project
3.8 Starting Monitoring 3 - 25
3.9 Monitoring Operation
On GT SoftGOT1000, touching the touch keys is performed by pressing the mouse button. As the input range of the touch key is narrower than that of the GOT, confirm the input with the buzzer sound after inputting.
3.10 Monitor Stop
This section describes how to stop a monitoring.
1. Perform either of the following operations.
Click (Monitor Stop). Select [Online] [Monitor Stop] from the menu. Right-click the mouse and select [Monitor Stop] from the menu.
2. The monitoring stops.
Select either method.
[Tool bar]
3 - 26 3.9 Monitoring Operation
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
o ft
G O
T 1
00 0
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
3.11 Exiting from GT SoftGOT1000
This section describes how to exit from GT SoftGOT1000.
1. Perform either of the following operations. Select [Project] [Exit] from the menu.
Click the on the tool bar.
Right-click the mouse and select [Exit] from the menu.
2. GT SoftGOT1000 is exited.
POINT
Exiting with GOT internal device
Turn ON the GOT internal device (system data area of GT SoftGOT1000: GS500.b0) to exit from GT SoftGOT1000. Presetting the above device as a touch key enables to exit from GT SoftGOT1000 without selecting the menu. (GT SoftGOT1000 may not be terminated if device ON time is too short. Keep the device ON until GT SoftGOT1000 is terminated.) For details of the GOT internal device, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals)
Select either method.
3.11 Exiting from GT SoftGOT1000 3 - 27
3.12 Automatic Startup
The following explains how to start up GT SoftGOT1000 automatically when Windows is started up by using [Online after starting].
POINT
Before automatic startup
Make sure that the power supply to the connected PLC CPU is turned on before starting up Windows when performing automatic startup.
3.12.1 Automatic startup settings on Windows(R) 7, Windows(R) 8, Windows(R) 8.1, Windows(R) 10, or Windows(R) 11
Configure the automatic startup settings using [Task Scheduler] of Windows.
1. After starting up GT SoftGOT1000, the project data for which the monitoring should be automatically started up is read out and monitored by GT SoftGOT1000.
2. Choose any of the following. [Online] -> [Startup in Online Mode] [Startup in Online Mode] by right-clicking the mouse
3. Close GT SoftGOT1000.
4. On Windows 7, select [Start] [All Programs] [Accessories] [System Tools] [Task Scheduler]. On Windows 8.1 or Windows 8, select [Search] in the charm bar and enter "task". Select [Task Scheduler] from the search results. On Windows 10, enter "task" in the search box shown on the right of the start menu icon to perform a search. Select [Task Scheduler] from the search results. On Windows 11, select the search icon on the taskbar and enter "task" to perform a search. Select [Task Scheduler] from the search results.
5. Select [Create Task] from [Actions] in [Task Scheduler].
6. On the [General] tab, configure the following settings. Set a name for [Name]. Select [Run with highest privileges]. Select the used OS for [Configure for].
7. On the [Triggers] tab, click the [New] button and configure the following settings. Select [At log on] for [Begin the task].
For only Winodws8 or later, select [Delay task for], and set [30 seconds]. (According to the personal computer environment, set the optimum time.)
Select [Enabled].
8. On the [Actions] tab, click [New] button and configure the following settings. Select [Start a program] for [Action]. Specify the executable file of GT SoftGOT1000 for [Program/script].
(Default: C:\Program Files\MELSOFT\SGT1000\SGT1000.exe) To start a GT SoftGOT1000 module by specifying the module number, enter the keyword for the module in [Add
arguments (optional)]. For the keyword for the module number, refer to the following.
5.10.1 Startup procedure
3 - 28 3.12 Automatic Startup
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
o ft
G O
T 1
00 0
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
9. On the [Settings] tab, configure the following settings. Set [If the task fails, restart every] as needed. Change the setting of [Stop the task if it runs longer than] as needed. (Default: 3 days)
10.Click the [OK] button to complete the settings.
3.12 Automatic Startup 3 - 29
3.13 Help
Using Help allows viewing of the GT SoftGOT1000 related PDF manuals and the software version check.
POINT
Before viewing the PDF manual
To view the PDF manual, GT_Manual3 and Adobe Reader must be installed.
Operating method
1. Click an item within [Help].
Viewing a PDF manual (When [Index] is selected)
1. After operation in [Help]->[Index], the following screen appears. Click the manual to be viewed.
* The illustration above is given as an example and different from the actual page.
2. The selected manual is displayed. (For details of the Adobe Reader operating method, refer to Help of Adobe
Reader.)
* The illustration above is given as an example and different from the actual page.
Item Description
Index Displays the PDF manual list.
Connection to MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC FA Global
Website... Connects to the MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC FA Global Website.
About GT SoftGOT1000... Used to check the GT SoftGOT1000 version.
Click.
Switches the current display
to the page of the selected
section.
Returns to INDEX MENU.
3 - 30 3.13 Help
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
o ft
G O
T 1
00 0
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
Confirming GT SoftGOT1000 version (When [About GT SoftGOT1000...] is selected)
1. After operation in [Help]->[About GT SoftGOT1000...], the screen about GT SoftGOT1000 is displayed.
(Example: For Version 3.40S)
Item Description
GT SoftGOT1000 Displays GT SoftGOT1000 version.
Name Displays the name entered during GT SoftGOT1000 installation.
Company Displays the company name entered during GT SoftGOT1000 installation.
Closes the About GT SoftGOT1000 screen.OK
3.13 Help 3 - 31
3 - 32 3.13 Help
CONNECTION BETWEEN GT SoftGOT1000 AND DEVICES
4. CONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 1
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
4. CONNECTION
4.1 Controller that can be Monitored and the Accessible Range
4.1.1 Controller that allows monitoring
The controllers that can be monitored by the GT SoftGOT1000 are indicated below.
(1) MELSEC PLC
(Continued to next page)
Item Type
RCPU
R04CPU, R08CPU, R16CPU, R32CPU, R120CPU,
R08PCPU, R16PCPU, R32PCPU, R120PCPU,
R08SFCPU, R16SFCPU, R32SFCPU, R120SFCPU,
R04ENCPU, R08ENCPU, R16ENCPU, R32ENCPU, R120ENCPU
QCPU QCPU(Q mode)
Q00JCPU, Q00CPU*1, Q01CPU*1, Q02CPU, Q02HCPU,
Q06HCPU, Q12HCPU, Q25HCPU, Q02PHCPU, Q06PHCPU,
Q12PHCPU, Q25PHCPU, Q12PRHCPU, Q25PRHCPU, Q00UJCPU*1,
Q00UCPU*1, Q01UCPU*1, Q02UCPU*1, Q03UDCPU*1, Q04UDHCPU*1,
Q06UDHCPU*1, Q10UDHCPU*1, Q13UDHCPU*1, Q20UDHCPU*1, Q26UDHCPU*1,
Q03UDECPU, Q04UDEHCPU, Q06UDEHCPU, Q10UDEHCPU, Q13UDEHCPU,
Q20UDEHCPU, Q26UDEHCPU, Q50UDEHCPU, Q100UDEHCPU, Q03UDVCPU,
Q04UDVCPU, Q06UDVCPU, Q13UDVCPU, Q26UDVCPU
QCPU(A mode) Q02CPU-A, Q02HCPU-A, Q06HCPU-A
C controller MELSEC iQ-R series R12CCPU-V
Q series Q12DCCPU-V, Q24DHCCPU-V, Q24DHCCPU-VG, Q24DHCCPU-LS, Q26DHCCPU-LS
QSCPU QS001CPU
LCPU L02CPU, L06CPU, L26CPU, L26CPU-BT, L02CPU-P,
L06CPU-P, L26CPU-P, L26CPU-PBT, L02SCPU, L02SCPU-P
QnACPU QnACPU Type Q2ACPU, Q2ACPU-S1, Q3ACPU, Q4ACPU, Q4ARCPU
QnASCPU Type Q2ASCPU, Q2ASCPU-S1, Q2ASHCPU, Q2ASHCPU-S1
ACPU
AnCPU
Type
AnUCPU A2UCPU, A2UCPU-S1, A3UCPU, A4UCPU
AnACPU A2ACPU, A2ACPUP21, A2ACPUR21, A2ACPU-S1, A2ACPUP21-S1,
A2ACPUR21-S1, A3ACPU, A3ACPUP21, A3ACPUR21
AnNCPU
A1NCPU, A1NCPUP21, A1NCPUR21, A2NCPU, A2NCPUP21,
A2NCPUR21, A2NCPU-S1, A2NCPUP21-S1, A2NCPUR21-S1, A3NCPU,
A3NCPUP21, A3NCPUR21
AnSCPU
Type
AnUS(H)CPU A2USCPU, A2USCPU-S1, A2USHCPU-S1
AnS(H)CPU A1SCPU, A1SHCPU, A2SCPU, A2SCPU-S1, A2SHCPU,
A2SHCPU-S1, A1SCPUC24-R2
A1SJ(H)CPU A1SJCPU, A1SJCPU-S3, A1SJHCPU
A1FXCPU A1FXCPU
A0J2HCPU, A0J2HCPU-DC24, A0J2HCPUP21, A0J2HCPUR21, A2CCPU,
A2CCPUC24, A2CCPUC24-PRF, A2CCPUP21, A2CCPUR21, A2CJCPU,
A2CJCPU-S3
MELSEC iQ-F FX5U, FX5UC
FXCPU
FX0 Series, FX0S Series, FX0N Series,
FX1 Series, FX1S Series, FX1N Series, FX1NC Series,
FX2 Series, FX2C Series, FX2N Series, FX2NC Series,
FX3G Series, FX3GC Series, FX3U Series, FX3UC Series, FX3S Series
MELSECNET/H remote I/O station QJ72LP25-25, QJ72LP25G, QJ72BR15
4.1 Controller that can be Monitored and the Accessible Range 4 - 1
*1 The serial communication function is not supported.
(2) Other PLC
(3) CNC
(4) Robot controller
(5) Barcode reader
Item Type
CC-Link IE Field Network head module LJ72GF15-T2
CC-Link IE Field Network Ethernet adapter module NZ2GF-ETB
Motion
controller
CPU
MELSEC iQ-R Series R16MTCPU, R32MTCPU
Q Series Q170MCPU, Q170MSCPU, Q170MSCPU-S1
A Series A273UHCPU, A273UHCPU-S3,
A171SHCPU, A172SHCPU, A173UHCPU, A173UHCPU-S1
Item Type
OMRON PLC
SYSMAC CQM1H CQM1H
SYSMAC CJ1 CJ1H, CJ1G, CJ1M
SYSMAC CJ2 CJ2H(-EIP), CJ2M
SYSMAC CPM CPM2A
SYSMAC CP1 CP1E
SYSMAC C200HX, C200HG C200HE
SYSMAC CS1 CS1H, CS1G, CS1D
SYSMAC CVM1/CV CV500, CV1000, CV2000
CVM1-CPU01, CVM1-CPU11, CVM1-CPU21,
CQM1
KEYENCE PLC KV-700, KV-1000, KV-3000, KV-5000, KV-5500
TOSHIBA
PLC
Unified Controller nv
series type1 Controller (PU811)
YASKAWA PLC
GL60S, GL60H, GL70H, GL120, GL130,
CP-9300MS, MP-920, MP-930, MP-940,
CP-9200(H), PROGIC-8, MP2200, MP2300, MP2300S,
CP-317
YOKOGAWA
PLC
FA-M3
F3SP05, F3SP08, F3FP36, F3SP21, F3SP25,
F3SP35, F3SP28, F3SP38, F3SP53, F3SP58,
F3SP59, F3SP66, F3SP67, F3SP71-4N
FA-M3V F3SP71-4N, F3SP71-4S, F3SP76-7S
SIEMENS PLC SIMATIC S7-300, SIMATIC S7-400
Item Type
CNC C70 Q173NCCPU
MELDAS C6/C64 FCA C6, FCA C64
Item Type
Robot controller CRnQ-700, CR750-Q, CR751-Q, CRnD-700, CR750-D,
CR751-D
Item Type
Barcode reader
For connectable barcode readers and system equipment, refer to the following Technical News.
List of valid devices applicable for GOT1000 series (GOT-A-0010)
For Technical News, contact your local distributor.
4 - 2 4.1 Controller that can be Monitored and the Accessible Range
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
(6) RFID controller
4.1.2 Monitorable controllers
: Applicable : Inapplicable
(Continued to next page)
Item Type
RFID controller
For connectable RFID controllers and system equipment, refer to the following Technical bulletin.
List of valid devices applicable for GOT1000 series (GOT-A-0010)
For Technical News, contact your local distributor.
Controller monitored Bus
connection
CPU direct
connection Computer
link
connection
Ethernet
connection
MODBUS
connection
MELSECNET
connection CC-Link
IE
Controller
CC-Link
IE Field RS-232 USB RTU TCP
MELSEC
NET/H
MELSEC
NET/10
RCPU *18*30 *31 *32
LCPU *22
QCPU
(Q mode)
Other than
redundant
system*12
*16 *17 *15 *18 *3 *3 *25
Redundant
system
(Main base unit)
*2*3*14 *2*3
Redundant
system (Extension
base unit)
QCPU (A mode)
C
controller
MELSEC iQ-R
series *29
Q series
QSCPU
QnACPU *4 *4
ACPU
Other than
A1FXCPU *9 *5*13 *6 *6
A1FXCPU
MELSEC iQ-F
FXCPU *10 *20
Motion
controller
CPU
MELSEC iQ-R
series
Q series*19
A series*1 *7*8 *8*13 *8 *8
MELSECNET/H remote
I/O station *3
CC-Link IE Field Network head
module
CC-Link IE Field Network
Ethernet adapter module*23
OMRON PLC *28 *21*27
KEYENCE PLC
TOSHIBA PLC
4.1 Controller that can be Monitored and the Accessible Range 4 - 3
*1 The motion controller (A series) cannot be connected to the remote I/O station, regardless of the connection method.
*2 Use a MELSECNET/H interface board driver (SW0DNC-MNETH-B) with the version K or later.
*3 Use a PLC CPU or MELSECNET/H network module of function version B or later.
*4 If an A series computer link module/Ethernet module is used for QnACPU, monitoring is not possible with the GT SoftGOT.
*5 The A0J2-C214-S3, A2CCPU and A2CJCPU do not allow computer link connection.
*6 The A2CCPUC24(-PRF), A2CCPU(P21)(R21), A2CJCPU-S3 and A1FXCPU do not allow Ethernet connection and
MELSECNET/10 connection.
*7 When connected to GT SoftGT1000, simultaneous connection with other MELSOFT products (such as GX Developer) is not
allowed.
*8 Applicable only to the A171SHCPU(N), A172SHCPU(N), A173UHCPU, A173UHCPU-S1, A273UHCPU and A273UHCPU-S3
*9 When monitoring AnNCPU(S1), A2SCPU, A0J2HCPU, A2CCPU, the following or later software version is used to write to the
CPU. The earlier software version is unusable.
AnNCPU(S1):Version L or later for the one with link, version H or later for the one without link A2SCPU: Version H or later A0J2HCPU: Version E or later A0J2HCPU-DC24: Version B or later A2CCPU: Version H or later
*10 Only the FX3G series and FX3GC series can be connected with a USB cable.
*11 When connecting MELDAS C6/C64, use the system software version indicated below.
NC system software version D0 or later *12 When configuring a multiple CPU system using Q00CPU, Q01CPU, Q02CPU, Q02HCPU, Q06HCPU,
Q12HCPU, or Q25HCPU, use a CPU of function version B or later.
*13 In the computer link connection using A2SCPU, A2SHCPU, A1SHCPU, A1SJHCPU, A0J2HCPU, or A171SHCPU, use the
software version U or later of the computer link module.
*14 In the QCPU redundant system, the MELSECNET/H extend mode cannot be used.
*15 The connection with a USB cable is available for only the following PLCs.
Q02HCPU, Q06HCPU, Q12HCPU, Q25HCPU, Q12PHCPU, Q25PHCPU, Q12PRHCPU, Q25PRHCPU, Q00UJCPU,
Q00UCPU, Q01UCPU, Q02UCPU, Q03UDCPU, Q04UDHCPU, Q06UDHCPU, Q10UDHCPU, Q13UDHCPU, Q20UDHCPU,
Q26UDHCPU, Q03UDECPU, Q04UDEHCPU, Q06UDEHCPU, Q10UDEHCPU, Q13UDEHCPU, Q20UDEHCPU,
Q26UDEHCPU, Q50UDEHCPU, Q100UDEHCPU, Q03UDVCPU, Q04UDVCPU, Q06UDVCPU, Q13UDVCPU and
Q26UDVCPU
*16 Applicable only with the PC CPU module
*17 Because the Q03UDECPU, Q04UDEHCPU, Q06UDEHCPU, Q10UDEHCPU, Q13UDEHCPU, Q20UDEHCPU, Q26UDEHCPU,
Q50UDEHCPU, Q100UDEHCPU, Q03UDVCPU, Q04UDVCPU, Q06UDVCPU, Q13UDVCPU, Q26UDVCPU, Q04UDPVCPU,
Q06UDPVCPU, Q13UDPVCPU and Q26UDPVCPU, have no serial interface, the direct CPU connection using the serial
connection is not available.
*18 For connection to any of the following CPUs, connect the GOT to the Ethernet interface of a target CPU.
R04CPU, R08CPU, R16CPU, R32CPU, R120CPU, R08SFCPU, R16SFCPU, R32SFCPU, R120SFCPU, Q03UDECPU,
Q04UDEHCPU, Q06UDEHCPU, Q10UDEHCPU, Q13UDEHCPU, Q20UDEHCPU, Q26UDEHCPU, Q50UDEHCPU,
Q100UDEHCPU, Q03UDVCPU, Q04UDVCPU, Q06UDVCPU, Q13UDVCPU, Q26UDVCPU, Q04UDPVCPU, Q06UDPVCPU,
Q13UDPVCPU, Q26UDPVCPU
As with connecting the GOT to the Ethernet module, the Ethernet settings, including the IP address setting, are required.
*19 Only the PLC CPU area (CPU No.1) in the Q170MCPU, Q170MSCPU, and Q170MSCPU-S1 can be monitored. PERIPHERAL I/
F cannot be used.
*20 Compatible with only the FX3U(C) series, FX3G(C) series and FX3S series.
*21 Compatible with only CJ1H, CJ1G, CJ1M, CJ2H(-EIP), CJ2H, CJ2M, CS1H, CS1G and CS1D.
Controller monitored Bus
connection
CPU direct
connection Computer
link
connection
Ethernet
connection
MODBUS
connection
MELSECNET
connection CC-Link
IE
Controller
CC-Link
IE Field RS-232 USB RTU TCP
MELSEC
NET/H
MELSEC
NET/10
YASKAWA PLC
YOKOGAWA PLC *24
SIEMENS PLC
CNC CNC C70
MELDAS C6/C64 *11 *11
Robot
controller
CRnQ-700/
CR750-Q/
CR751-Q
*26
CRnD-700/
CR750-D/
CR751-D
MODBUS/TCP equipment
4 - 4 4.1 Controller that can be Monitored and the Accessible Range
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
*22 The adapter L6ADP-R2 is required for the RS-232 connection of the following PLCs.
L02CPU, L06CPU, L26CPU, L02CPU-P, L06CPU-P, L26CPU-P, L26CPU-PBT
*23 The GOT cannot monitor the host station.
*24 Only STARDOM can be connected.
*25 Compatible with only the universal model QCPU.
*26 The Ethernet connection of robot controller can be established only via the Ethernet module (QJ71E71) or Built-in Ethernet port of
QnUDE, QnUDV and QnUDPV.
*27 Not compatible with the redundant Ethernet.
*28 Only CJ2M-CPU1 supports the direct CPU connection.
*29 This controller has no USB port for connecting a personal computer. Monitor the controller via an RCPU in the multiple CPU
system.
*30 For R04ENCPU, R08ENCPU, R16ENCPU, R32ENCPU, and R120ENCPU, the built-in Ethernet port CPUs (CPU P1, and P1)
and RJ71EN71 can be used.
*31 For R04ENCPU, R08ENCPU, R16ENCPU, R32ENCPU, and R120ENCPU, use RJ71GP21-SX.
*32 For R04ENCPU, R08ENCPU, R16ENCPU, R32ENCPU, and R120ENCPU, the built-in Ethernet port CPUs (P1 and P2),
RJ71EN71, RJ71GF11-T2, RD77GF4, RD77GF8, and RD77GF16 can be used.
4.1 Controller that can be Monitored and the Accessible Range 4 - 5
4.1.3 Access range
This section explains the access range by connection type.
Ethernet connection
Direct CPU conncetion/computer link connection
Bus connection
MELSECNET/H connection, MELSECNET/10 connection
CC-Link IE Controller Network connection
CC-Link IE Field Network connection
The following explains how to refer to the illustrations and tables described in this section.
R : RCPU
Communication units used on relay network 1
Communication units used on relay network 2
L : LCPU Q(Q) : QCPU(Q mode) QS : QSCPU
C6 : MELDAS C6* QnA : QnACPU A : ACPU
Q(A) : QCPU(A mode)
Mnet/10 (H) : MELSECNET/10 or MELSECNET/H connection Mnet (II) : MELSECNET (II) connection Ethernet : Ethernet connection CC IE Cont : CC-Link IE Controller Network connection CC IE Field : CC-Link IE Field Network connection
4 - 6 4.1 Controller that can be Monitored and the Accessible Range
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
Ethernet connection The following shows the access range via the connected station in a configuration in which GT SoftGOT1000 and a station are connected by Ethernet.
POINT
(1) When monitoring other networks (Routing parameter setting) To monitor other networks, setting of routing parameters is required. For the setting of the routing parameters, refer to the following.
4.8 Ethernet Connection
(2) Monitoring the devices of other stations on the network Monitoring devices, such as D and M, of a station on another network slows the display processing. When monitoring devices of other stations, monitor the devices that are assigned to the link relay (B) or link register (W) with the network parameter.
(1) Connecting with RCPU For how to refer to the illustration and table, refer to the following.
4.1.3 Access range
: Accessible, : Not accessible
*1 Only Universal model QCPU is applicable.
*2 The routing parameter cannot be set for a QSCPU, and therefore the GOT cannot access the networks on which the CPU is not
located.
*3 This network is inaccessible only when the CPU of relay station No. 1 is an LCPU.
*4 This network is inaccessible when the CPU of relay station No. 1 is an RCPU or LCPU.
Connected
station Relay station
RCPU Relay network
1
CPU of relay station No. 1 Relay network
2
CPU of relay station No. 2
R L Q
(Q) QS*2
Q
(A) QnA A R L
Q
(Q) QS*2
Q
(A) QnA A
Ethernet
Mnet/10(H)*4
Ethernet
CC IE Cont*3
CC IE Field *1
CC IE Cont
Mnet/10(H)*4
Ethernet
CC IE Cont*3
CC IE Field *1
CC IE Field
Mnet/10(H)*4
Ethernet
CC IE Cont*3
CC IE Field *1
GT SoftGOT1000
CPU of a connected
station
Module for relay network 1
CPU of relay station
No. 1
Module for relay network 1
Module for relay network 2
Relay network 1 Relay network 2
CPU of relay station
No. 2
Module for relay network 2
Ethernet connection
4.1 Controller that can be Monitored and the Accessible Range 4 - 7
(2) Connecting with QCPU or Q series motion controller CPU For how to refer to the illustration and table, refer to the following.
4.1.3 Access range
: Accessible, : Not accessible
*1 Only the PLC CPU area (CPU No.1) is applicable for Q170MCPU and Q170MSCPU.
*2 CNC C70 on other networks cannot be monitored.
*3 AnNCPU cannot be monitored.
Connected
station Relay station
QCPU*1,
QSCPU
Relay network
1
CPU of relay station No. 1 Relay network
2
CPU of relay station No. 2
R L Q
(Q)*2 QS
Q
(A) QnA A R L
Q
(Q)*2 QS
Q
(A) QnA A
Mnet/10(H) *3
Mnet/10(H) *3
Ethernet
CC IE Cont
CC IE Field
Ethernet
Mnet/10(H) *3
Ethernet
CC IE Cont
CC IE Field
CC IE Cont
Mnet/10(H)
Ethernet
CC IE Cont
CC IE Field
CC IE Field
Mnet/10(H)
Ethernet
CC IE Cont
CC IE Field
GT SoftGOT1000
CPU of a connected
station
Module for relay network 1
CPU of relay station
No. 1
Module for relay network 1
Module for relay network 2
Relay network 1 Relay network 2
CPU of relay station
No. 2
Module for relay network 2
Ethernet connection
4 - 8 4.1 Controller that can be Monitored and the Accessible Range
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
(3) Connecting with LCPU This connection is available only when routing parameters can be set on the PLC side. For how to refer to the illustration and table, refer to the following.
4.1.3 Access range
: Accessible, : Not accessible
(4) Connecting with QnACPU or MELDAS C6/C64 For how to refer to the illustration and table, refer to the following.
4.1.3 Access range
: Accessible, : Not accessible
*1 CNC C70 on other networks cannot be monitored.
Connected
station Relay station
LCPU Relay network
1
CPU of relay station No. 1 Relay network
2
CPU of relay station No. 2
R L Q
(Q) QS
Q
(A) QnA A R L
Q
(Q) QS
Q
(A) QnA A
Ethernet
Mnet/10(H)
Ethernet
CC IE Cont
CC IE Field
CC IE Field
Mnet/10(H)
Ethernet
CC IE Cont
CC IE Field
Connected
station Relay station
QnACPU,
MELDAS
C6*
Relay network
1
CPU of relay station No. 1 Relay network
2
CPU of relay station No. 2
R L Q
(Q) QS
Q
(A) QnA
*1 A R L
Q
(Q) QS
Q
(A)
QnA *1
A
Mnet/10(H) Mnet/10(H)
Ethernet
Ethernet Mnet/10(H)
Ethernet
GT SoftGOT1000
CPU of a connected
station
Module for relay network 1
CPU of relay station
No. 1
Module for relay network 1
Module for relay network 2
Relay network 1 Relay network 2
CPU of relay station
No. 2
Module for relay network 2
Ethernet connection
GT SoftGOT1000
CPU of a connected
station
Module for relay network 1
CPU of relay station
No. 1
Module for relay network 1
Module for relay network 2
Relay network 1 Relay network 2
CPU of relay station
No. 2
Module for relay network 2
Ethernet connection
4.1 Controller that can be Monitored and the Accessible Range 4 - 9
(5) Connecting with ACPU Only the connected station can be accessed.
(6) Connecting with FXCPU The stations set with [Ethernet Setting] of GT Designer3 can be accessed.
(7) Connecting with the robot controller (CRnD-700) Only the connected station can be accessed.
(8) Connecting with the CC-Link IE Field Network Ethernet adapter module Only the other stations on the CC-Link IE Field network via a CC-Link IE Field Network Ethernet adapter module can be accessed. For how to refer to the illustration and table, refer to the following.
4.1.3 Access range
: Accessible, : Not accessible
POINT
(1) Host in the Ethernet connection While the GT SoftGOT1000 is handled as the host in MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10 or CC-Link connection, the station (Ethernet module) set as the host in the Ethernet setting of GT Designer3 is handled as the host in Ethernet connection.
(2) Precautions when using the QCPU redundant system When monitoring other networks, do not set the QCPU redundant system as a relay station. If the QCPU redundant system is set as a relay station, the GT SoftGOT1000 cannot switch the monitoring target automatically when the system is switched. (A timeout error occurs due to failed monitoring)
(9) Various settings For the Ethernet setting by GT Designer3, refer to the following.
4.8 Ethernet Connection
Connected
station Relay station
NZ2GF-
ETB
Relay network
1
CPU of relay station No. 1 Relay network
2
CPU of relay station No. 2
R L Q
(Q) QS
Q
(A) QnA A R L
Q
(Q) QS
Q
(A) QnA A
CC IE Field CC IE Field
GT SoftGOT1000
CPU of a connected
station
Module for relay network 1
CPU of relay station
No. 1
Module for relay network 1
Module for relay network 2
Relay network 1 Relay network 2
CPU of relay station
No. 2
Module for relay network 2
Ethernet connection
4 - 10 4.1 Controller that can be Monitored and the Accessible Range
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
Direct CPU conncetion/computer link connection The following shows the access range via the connected station in a configuration in which GT SoftGOT1000 and a station are connected by direct CPU connection or serial communication.
POINT
(1) When monitoring other networks (Routing parameter setting) To monitor other networks, setting of routing parameters is required. For the setting of the routing parameters, refer to the reference manual of the network connected.
(2) Monitoring the devices of other stations on the network Monitoring devices, such as D and M, of a station on another network slows the display processing. When monitoring devices of other stations, monitor the devices that are assigned to the link relay (B) or link register (W) with the network parameter.
(1) Connecting with RCPU For how to refer to the illustration and table, refer to the following.
4.1.3 Access range
: Accessible, : Not accessible
Connected
station Relay station
RCPU Relay network
1
CPU of relay station No. 1 Relay network
2
CPU of relay station No. 2
R L Q
(Q) QS
Q
(A) QnA A R L
Q
(Q) QS
Q
(A) QnA A
Ethernet
Ethernet
CC IE Cont
CC IE Field
CC IE Cont
Ethernet
CC IE Cont
CC IE Field
CC IE Field
Ethernet
CC IE Cont
CC IE Field
Direct CPU connection, serial communication connection
GT SoftGOT1000
CPU of a connected
station
Module for relay network 1
CPU of relay station
No. 1
Module for relay network 1
Module for relay network 2
Relay network 1 Relay network 2
CPU of relay station
No. 2
Module for relay network 2
4.1 Controller that can be Monitored and the Accessible Range 4 - 11
(2) Connecting with QCPU or Q series motion controller CPU For how to refer to the illustration and table, refer to the following.
4.1.3 Access range
: Accessible, : Not accessible
*1 Only Universal model QCPU is applicable.
*2 When QSCPU is connected by USB, access to other stations or other PLCs is unavailable.
*3 Depending on the CPU type, the access range is different.
Refer to the following table.
: Accessible, : Not accessible, : Accessible when the connected station is a control station
Connected
station Relay station
QCPU,
QSCPU
Relay network
1
CPU of relay station No. 1 Relay network
2
CPU of relay station No. 2
R L Q
(Q) QS
Q
(A) QnA A*3 R L
Q
(Q) QS
Q
(A) QnA A*3
*2 Mnet/10(H)
Mnet/10(H)
Ethernet
CC IE Cont
CC IE Field *1
*2 Ethernet
Mnet/10(H)
Ethernet
CC IE Cont
CC IE Field *1
*2 CC IE Cont
Mnet/10(H)
Ethernet
CC IE Cont
CC IE Field *1
*2 CC IE Field *1
Mnet/10(H)
Ethernet
CC IE Cont
CC IE Field *1
Connected station Relay network 1 Relay network 2
AnA(AnN)CPU AnUCPU AnA(AnN)CPU AnUCPU
QCPU
Direct CPU connection, serial communication connection
GT SoftGOT1000
CPU of a connected
station
Module for relay network 1
CPU of relay station
No. 1
Module for relay network 1
Module for relay network 2
Relay network 1 Relay network 2
CPU of relay station
No. 2
Module for relay network 2
4 - 12 4.1 Controller that can be Monitored and the Accessible Range
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
(3) Connecting with LCPU For how to refer to the illustration and table, refer to the following.
4.1.3 Access range
: Accessible, : Not accessible
*1 Only Universal model QCPU is applicable.
*2 This network can be accessed only when the CPU of relay station No. 1 is a QCPU.
Connected
station Relay station
LCPU Relay network
1
CPU of relay station No. 1 Relay network
2
CPU of relay station No. 2
R L Q
(Q) QS
Q
(A) QnA A R L
Q
(Q) QS
Q
(A) QnA A
Ethernet
Mnet/10(H)*2
Ethernet
CC IE Cont*2
CC IE Field *1
CC IE Field *1
Mnet/10(H)*2
Ethernet
CC IE Cont*2
CC IE Field *1
Direct CPU connection, serial communication connection
GT SoftGOT1000
CPU of a connected
station
Module for relay network 1
CPU of relay station
No. 1
Module for relay network 1
Module for relay network 2
Relay network 1 Relay network 2
CPU of relay station
No. 2
Module for relay network 2
4.1 Controller that can be Monitored and the Accessible Range 4 - 13
(4) Connecting with QnACPU or MELDAS C6/C64 For how to refer to the illustration and table, refer to the following.
4.1.3 Access range
: Accessible, : Not accessible
*1 Only the link relay device or link register device assigned to the link parameter can be monitored.
Depending on the type of the connected station, the access range is different. For a master station, its local stations can be monitored. For a local station, only its master station can be monitored. For the master station on the third hierarchy, the master station on the second hierarchy and the local stations on the third
hierarchy can be monitored. For the details of the data link system, refer to the following.
4.1.6 Access range of the data link system (MELSECNET/B, (II))
*2 MELDAS C6* is inaccessible.
Connected
station Relay station
QnACPU,
MELDAS
C6*
Relay network
1
CPU of relay station No. 1 Relay network
2
CPU of relay station No. 2
R L Q
(Q) QS
Q
(A)
QnA,
C6 A R L
Q
(Q) QS
Q
(A)
QnA,
C6 A
Mnet/10
Mnet/10
Mnet()
Ethernet
Mnet()*1 *2
Mnet/10
Mnet()
Ethernet
Ethernet
Mnet/10
Mnet()
Ethernet
Direct CPU connection, serial communication connection
GT SoftGOT1000
CPU of a connected
station
Module for relay network 1
CPU of relay station
No. 1
Module for relay network 1
Module for relay network 2
Relay network 1 Relay network 2
CPU of relay station
No. 2
Module for relay network 2
4 - 14 4.1 Controller that can be Monitored and the Accessible Range
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
(5) Connecting with ACPU or QCPU (A mode) For how to refer to the illustration and table, refer to the following.
4.1.3 Access range
: Accessible, : Not accessible
*1 Depending on the CPU type, the access range is different.
Refer to the following table.
: Accessible, : Not accessible,
: Accessible when the connected station is a control station, : Accessible when the monitored CPU is in a control station
*2 Only the link relay device or link register device assigned to the link parameter can be monitored.
Depending on the type of the connected station, the access range is different. For a master station, its local stations can be monitored. For a local station, only its master station can be monitored. For the master station on the third hierarchy, the master station on the second hierarchy and the local stations on the third
hierarchy can be monitored. For the details of the data link system, refer to the following.
4.1.6 Access range of the data link system (MELSECNET/B, (II))
(6) Connecting with FXCPU Only the connected CPU can be accessed.
(7) Connecting with CNC (CNC C70) or a robot controller (CRnQ-700) Monitor the motion controller CPU (Q series), CNC (CNC C70), or robot controller (CRnQ-700) via the following QCPUs in the multiple CPU system.
Connected
station Relay station
ACPU,
QCPU
(A mode)
Relay network
1
CPU of relay station No. 1 Relay network
2
CPU of relay station No. 2
R L Q
(Q) QS
Q
(A) QnA A R L
Q
(Q) QS
Q
(A) QnA A
Mnet/10*1 Mnet/10(H)
Mnet()
Mnet()*2 Mnet/10(H)
Mnet()
Connected station Relay network 1 Relay network 2
AnA(AnN)CPU AnUCPU AnA(AnN)CPU AnUCPU
AnA(AnN)CPU
AnUCPU
Controller Relay CPU
CNC(CNC C70) Q173NCCPU QnUCPU
Robot controller (CRnQ-700) Q172DRCPU
Direct CPU connection, serial communication connection
GT SoftGOT1000
CPU of a connected
station
Module for relay network 1
CPU of relay station
No. 1
Module for relay network 1
Module for relay network 2
Relay network 1 Relay network 2
CPU of relay station
No. 2
Module for relay network 2
4.1 Controller that can be Monitored and the Accessible Range 4 - 15
(8) Connecting with remote I/O stations in the MELSECNET/H network system When connected to the remote I/O station of the MELSECNET/H network system, the GT SoftGOT1000 can monitor the PLC CPU of the master station. When connecting the GT SoftGOT1000 to the remote I/O station, use the following connection methods.
POINT
Connection to remote I/O station of MELSECNET/B, (II) or /10
The GT SoftGOT1000 cannot be connected to the remote I/O station on the MELSECNET/B, (II) data link system and MELSECNET/10 network system. Connect the GT SoftGOT1000 to the remote I/O station on the MELSECNET/H network system.
(a) Network modules in a remote I/O station The network units (QJ72LP25-25, QJ72LP25G, QP72BR15) of the remote I/O station are handled as PLC CPU. Connect the GT SoftGOT1000 to the RS-232 interface of the network unit. For cables required for connection with the network module and other details, refer to the following.
4.6.2 Connection cable
(b) Display of objects Specify a type including MELSEC-Q (including multiple), or MELSEC-QnU for the controller type on GT Designer3. Then, specify [[NW No.] (Network No. of the remote I/O network) to 1, and specify [Station No.] (Master station) to 0.] as the monitoring target in the network setting of the device setting dialog box. The GT SoftGOT1000 monitors stations on the MELSECNET/H network with the transient transmission. Therefore, a longer time-lag occurs for displaying objects compared with directly monitoring the PLC CPU. For displaying objects with a shorter time-lag, execute the cyclic transmission so that the GT SoftGOT1000 can monitor link devices B and W of the host station set in the MELSECNET/H network. For the settings required for the PLC CPU, refer to the following.
Q corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference Manual (PLC to PLC network)
GT SoftGOT1000 Q J71E
71-100
Q J72LP
25-25
Q J71C
24N
Q33B
Q J71LP
21-25
Q33BP ow
er supply m
odule
P ow
er supply m
odule Direct CPU connection
Network No.1 Station No.1 (remote I/O station)
Network No.1 Station No.0 (master station)
MELSECNET/H remort I/O Network
E m
pty
E m
pty
E m
pty
P LC
C P
U
Monitor target
4 - 16 4.1 Controller that can be Monitored and the Accessible Range
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
(9) Connecting with a head module in the CC-Link IE Field Network system When connected to the head module of the CC-Link IE Field Network system, the GT SoftGOT1000 can monitor the PLC CPU of the master station and local stations. When connecting the GT SoftGOT1000 to the head module, use the following connection methods.
(a) Head module The head module (LJ72GF15-T2) is handled as PLC CPU. For cables required for connection with the head module and other details, refer to the following.
4.6.2 Connection cable
(b) Display of objects Specify a type including MELSEC-QnU for the controller type on GT Designer3. Then, specify [NW No.] (Network No. of the CC-Link IE Field Network) to 1, and specify [Station No.] (Master station) to 0.] as the monitoring target in the network setting of the device setting dialog box. The GT SoftGOT1000 monitors stations on the CC-Link IE Field Network with the transient transmission. Therefore, a longer time-lag occurs for displaying objects compared with directly monitoring the PLC CPU. For displaying objects with a shorter time-lag, execute the cyclic transmission so that the GT SoftGOT1000 can monitor link devices B and W of the host station set in the CC-Link IE Field Network. For the settings required for the PLC CPU, refer to the following.
MELSEC-L CC-Link IE Field Network Head Module User's Manual
GT SoftGOT1000 Q J71G
F11-T2
LJ72G F15-T2
LJ71C 24
LX 40C
6
LY 10R
2
Q33B
E m
pty
E m
pty
CC-Link IE Field Network
P ow
er supply m
odule
P ow
er supply m
odule
P LC
C P
U
Network No. 1, Station No. 1
Network No. 1, Station No. 0
Monitor target
Direct CPU connection
4.1 Controller that can be Monitored and the Accessible Range 4 - 17
Bus connection When the multiple CPU system is created, the PC CPU module can access the other CPUs on the same main base unit. The PC CPU module cannot access CPUs on the other main base units.
POINT
(1) When monitoring other networks (Routing parameter setting) To monitor other networks, setting of routing parameters is required. For the setting of the routing parameters, refer to the reference manual of the network connected.
(2) Monitoring the devices of other stations on the network Monitoring devices, such as D and M, of a station on another network slows the display processing. When monitoring devices of other stations, monitor the devices that are assigned to the link relay (B) or link register (W) with the network parameter.
power supply
1:CPU No.1 2:CPU No.2 3:CPU No.3
PC CPU module (GT SoftGOT1000)
Q series CPU (Q Mode)
1 2 3
4 - 18 4.1 Controller that can be Monitored and the Accessible Range
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
MELSECNET/H connection, MELSECNET/10 connection The following shows the access range via the connected station in a configuration in which GT SoftGOT1000 and a station are connected by MELSECNET/H or MELSECNET/10. The GT SoftGOT1000 is regarded as a normal station and monitors the control station and all normal stations on the network. If the monitoring target is a PLC CPU within a multiple CPU system, CPU No. 1 to CPU No. 4 can be monitored. When monitoring devices of other stations, monitoring of all devices is possible in the PLC CPU to be accessed.
4.1.4When using MELSECNET/10 connection
POINT
(1) When monitoring other networks (Routing parameter setting) To monitor other networks, setting of routing parameters is required. For the setting of the routing parameters, refer to the following.
MELSECNET/H Interface Board User's Manual
Q Corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference Manual (PLC to PLC network)
(2) Monitoring the devices of other stations on the network Monitoring devices, such as D and M, of a station on another network slows the display processing. When monitoring devices of other stations, monitor the devices that are assigned to the link relay (B) or link register (W) with the network parameter.
4.1 Controller that can be Monitored and the Accessible Range 4 - 19
(1) Connecting with QCPU or Q series motion controller CPU For how to refer to the illustration and table, refer to the following.
4.1.3 Access range
: Accessible, : Not accessible
*1 Only Universal model QCPU is applicable.
*2 Only the PLC CPU area (CPU No.1) is applicable for Q170MCPU and Q170MSCPU.
*3 The routing parameter cannot be set for a QSCPU, and therefore the GOT cannot access the networks on which the CPU is not
located.
*4 MELDAS C6* is not applicable.
*5 CNC C70 on other networks cannot be monitored.
*6 This network can be accessed only when the CPU of relay station No. 1 is a QCPU.
Connected
station Relay station
QCPU*2,
QSCPU*3
Relay network
1
CPU of relay station No. 1 Relay network
2
CPU of relay station No. 2
R L Q
(Q)*5 QS*3
Q
(A)
QnA,
C6 A R L
Q
(Q)*5 QS*3
Q
(A)
QnA,
C6 A
Mnet/10(H) *4
Mnet/10(H) *4
Ethernet
CC IE Cont*6
CC IE Field*6 *1
Ethernet
Mnet/10(H) *4
Ethernet
CC IE Cont*6
CC IE Field*6 *1
CC IE Cont
Mnet/10(H)
Ethernet
CC IE Cont*6
CC IE Field*6 *1
CC IE Field *1
Mnet/10(H)
Ethernet
CC IE Cont*6
CC IE Field*6 *1
MELSECNET/H connection, MELSECNET/10 connection
GT SoftGOT1000
CPU of a connected
station
Module for relay network 1
CPU of relay station
No. 1
Module for relay network 1
Module for relay network 2
Relay network 1 Relay network 2
CPU of relay station
No. 2
Module for relay network 2
4 - 20 4.1 Controller that can be Monitored and the Accessible Range
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
(2) Connecting with QnACPU For how to refer to the illustration and table, refer to the following.
4.1.3 Access range
: Accessible, : Not accessible
*1 MELDAS C6* is not applicable.
*2 The routing parameter cannot be set for a QSCPU, and therefore the GOT cannot access the networks on which the CPU is not
located.
*3 CNC C70 on other networks cannot be monitored.
*4 Only Universal model QCPU is applicable.
*5 This network can be accessed only when the CPU of relay station No. 1 is a QCPU.
Connected
station Relay station
QnACPU *1
Relay network
1
CPU of relay station No. 1 Relay network
2
CPU of relay station No. 2
R L Q
(Q) QS*2
Q
(A)
QnA,
C6*3 A R L
Q
(Q) QS*2
Q
(A)
QnA,
C6*3 A
Mnet/10 *1
Mnet/10(H) *1
Ethernet
CC IE Cont*5
CC IE Field*5 *4
Ethernet
Mnet/10(H) *1
Ethernet
CC IE Cont*5
CC IE Field*5 *4
MELSECNET/H connection, MELSECNET/10 connection
GT SoftGOT1000
CPU of a connected
station
Module for relay network 1
CPU of relay station
No. 1
Module for relay network 1
Module for relay network 2
Relay network 1 Relay network 2
CPU of relay station
No. 2
Module for relay network 2
4.1 Controller that can be Monitored and the Accessible Range 4 - 21
(3) Connecting with ACPU or QCPU (A mode) For how to refer to the illustration and table, refer to the following.
4.1.3 Access range
: Accessible, : Not accessible
*1 The routing parameter cannot be set for a QSCPU, and therefore the GOT cannot access the networks on which the CPU is not
located.
Connected
station Relay station
ACPU,
QCPU
(A mode)
Relay network
1
CPU of relay station No. 1 Relay network
2
CPU of relay station No. 2
R L Q
(Q) QS*1
Q
(A) QnA A R L
Q
(Q) QS*1
Q
(A) QnA A
Mnet/10 Mnet/10
MELSECNET/H connection, MELSECNET/10 connection
GT SoftGOT1000
CPU of a connected
station
Module for relay network 1
CPU of relay station
No. 1
Module for relay network 1
Module for relay network 2
Relay network 1 Relay network 2
CPU of relay station
No. 2
Module for relay network 2
4 - 22 4.1 Controller that can be Monitored and the Accessible Range
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
CC-Link IE Controller Network connection The following shows the access range via the connected station in a configuration in which GT SoftGOT1000 and a station are connected by CC-Link IE Controller Network. The GT SoftGOT1000 is regarded as a normal station and monitors the control station and all normal stations on the network. If the monitoring target is a PLC CPU within a multiple CPU system, CPU No. 1 to CPU No. 4 can be monitored. When monitoring devices of other stations, monitoring of all devices is possible in the PLC CPU to be accessed.
4.1.4When using MELSECNET/10 connection
POINT
(1) When monitoring other networks (Routing parameter setting) To monitor other networks, setting of routing parameters is required. For the setting of the routing parameters, refer to the following.
CC-Link IE Controller Network Interface Board User's Manual
MELSEC-Q CC-Link IE Controller Network Reference Manual
(2) Monitoring the devices of other stations on the network Monitoring devices, such as D and M, of a station on another network slows the display processing. When monitoring devices of other stations, monitor the devices that are assigned to the link relay (B) or link register (W) with the network parameter.
4.1 Controller that can be Monitored and the Accessible Range 4 - 23
(1) Connecting with RCPU For how to refer to the illustration and table, refer to the following.
4.1.3 Access range
: Accessible, : Not accessible
*1 The routing parameter cannot be set for a QSCPU, and therefore the GOT cannot access the networks on which the CPU is not
located.
*2 Only Universal model QCPU is applicable.
*3 This network is inaccessible only when the CPU of relay station No. 1 is an LCPU.
*4 This network is inaccessible when the CPU of relay station No. 1 is an RCPU or LCPU.
Connected
station Relay station
RCPU Relay network
1
CPU of relay station No. 1 Relay network
2
CPU of relay station No. 2
R L Q
(Q) QS*1
Q
(A)
QnA,
C6 A R L
Q
(Q) QS*1
Q
(A)
QnA,
C6 A
Ethernet
Ethernet
CC IE Cont*3
CC IE Field
CC IE Cont
Mnet/10*4
Ethernet
CC IE Cont*3
CC IE Field *2
CC IE Field
Mnet/10*4
Ethernet
CC IE Cont*3
CC IE Field *2
CC-Link IE Controller Network connection
GT SoftGOT1000
CPU of a connected
station
Module for relay network 1
CPU of relay station
No. 1
Module for relay network 1
Module for relay network 2
Relay network 1 Relay network 2
CPU of relay station
No. 2
Module for relay network 2
4 - 24 4.1 Controller that can be Monitored and the Accessible Range
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
(2) Connecting with QCPU or Q series motion controller CPU For how to refer to the illustration and table, refer to the following.
4.1.3 Access range
: Accessible, : Not accessible
*1 Only Universal model QCPU is applicable.
*2 The routing parameter cannot be set for a QSCPU, and therefore the GOT cannot access the networks on which the CPU is not
located.
*3 LCPU is accessible only when QJ71E71-100, QJ71E71-B2, or QJ71E71-B5 is used. (Built-in Ethernet port QCPU is
inapplicable.)
*4 CNC C70 on other networks cannot be monitored.
*5 This network can be accessed only when the CPU of relay station No. 1 is a QCPU.
Connected
station Relay station
QCPU,
QSCPU*2
Relay network
1
CPU of relay station No. 1 Relay network
2
CPU of relay station No. 2
R L Q
(Q)*4 QS*2
Q
(A)
QnA,
C6 A R L
Q
(Q)*4 QS*2
Q
(A)
QnA,
C6 A
Mnet/10(H)
Mnet/10(H)
Ethernet
CC IE Cont*5
CC IE Field*5 *1
Ethernet *3
Mnet/10(H)
Ethernet
CC IE Cont*5
CC IE Field *1
CC IE Cont
Mnet/10(H)
Ethernet
CC IE Cont*5
CC IE Field*5 *1
CC IE Field *1
Mnet/10(H)
Ethernet
CC IE Cont*5
CC IE Field *1
CC-Link IE Controller Network connection
GT SoftGOT1000
CPU of a connected
station
Module for relay network 1
CPU of relay station
No. 1
Module for relay network 1
Module for relay network 2
Relay network 1 Relay network 2
CPU of relay station
No. 2
Module for relay network 2
4.1 Controller that can be Monitored and the Accessible Range 4 - 25
CC-Link IE Field Network connection The following shows the access range via the connected station in a configuration in which GT SoftGOT1000 and a station are connected by CC-Link IE Field Network. The GT SoftGOT1000 is regarded as a normal station and monitors the control station and all normal stations on the network. If the monitoring target is a PLC CPU within a multiple CPU system, CPU No. 1 to CPU No. 4 can be monitored. When monitoring devices of other stations, monitoring of all devices is possible in the PLC CPU to be accessed.
4.1.4When using MELSECNET/10 connection
POINT
(1) When monitoring other networks (Routing parameter setting) To monitor other networks, setting of routing parameters is required. For the setting of the routing parameters, refer to the reference manual of the network connected.
MELSEC-L CC-Link IE Field Network Master/Local Module User's Manual
(2) Monitoring the devices of other stations on the network Monitoring devices, such as D and M, of a station on another network slows the display processing. When monitoring devices of other stations, monitor the devices that are assigned to the link relay (B) or link register (W) with the network parameter.
4 - 26 4.1 Controller that can be Monitored and the Accessible Range
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
(1) Connecting with RCPU For how to refer to the illustration and table, refer to the following.
4.1.3 Access range
: Accessible, : Not accessible
*1 The routing parameter cannot be set for a QSCPU, and therefore the GOT cannot access the networks on which the CPU is not
located.
*2 Only Universal model QCPU is applicable.
*3 This network is inaccessible only when the CPU of relay station No. 1 is an LCPU.
*4 This network is inaccessible when the CPU of relay station No. 1 is an RCPU or LCPU.
Connected
station Relay station
RCPU Relay network
1
CPU of relay station No. 1 Relay network
2
CPU of relay station No. 2
R L Q
(Q) QS*1
Q
(A)
QnA,
C6 A R L
Q
(Q) QS*1
Q
(A)
QnA,
C6 A
Ethernet
Ethernet
CC IE Cont*3
CC IE Field
CC IE Cont
Mnet/10*4
Ethernet
CC IE Cont*3
CC IE Field *2
CC IE Field
Mnet/10*4
Ethernet
CC IE Cont*3
CC IE Field *2
CC-Link IE Field Network connection
GT SoftGOT1000
CPU of a connected
station
Module for relay network 1
CPU of relay station
No. 1
Module for relay network 1
Module for relay network 2
Relay network 1 Relay network 2
CPU of relay station
No. 2
Module for relay network 2
4.1 Controller that can be Monitored and the Accessible Range 4 - 27
(2) Connecting with QCPU or Q series motion controller CPU For how to refer to the illustration and table, refer to the following.
4.1.3 Access range
: Accessible, : Not accessible
*1 Only Universal model QCPU is applicable.
*2 Only the PLC CPU area (CPU No.1) is applicable for Q170MCPU and Q170MSCPU.
*3 QSCPU cannot access other networks because routing parameters cannot be set on QSCPU.
*4 CNC C70 on other networks cannot be monitored.
*5 This network can be accessed only when the CPU of relay station No. 1 is a QCPU.
Connected
station Relay station
QCPU*1*2,
QSCPU*3
Relay network
1
CPU of relay station No. 1 Relay network
2
CPU of relay station No. 2
R L Q
(Q)*4 QS*3
Q
(A)
QnA,
C6 A R L
Q
(Q)*4 QS*3
Q
(A)
QnA,
C6 A
Mnet/10(H)
Mnet/10(H)
Ethernet
CC IE Cont*5
CC IE Field*5 *1
Ethernet
Mnet/10(H)
Ethernet
CC IE Cont*5
CC IE Field *1
CC IE Cont
Mnet/10(H)
Ethernet
CC IE Cont*5
CC IE Field*5 *1
CC IE Field *1
Mnet/10(H)
Ethernet
CC IE Cont*5
CC IE Field *2
CC-Link IE Field Network connection
GT SoftGOT1000
CPU of a connected
station
Module for relay network 1
CPU of relay station
No. 1
Module for relay network 1
Module for relay network 2
Relay network 1 Relay network 2
CPU of relay station
No. 2
Module for relay network 2
4 - 28 4.1 Controller that can be Monitored and the Accessible Range
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
(3) Connecting with LCPU For how to refer to the illustration and table, refer to the following.
4.1.3 Access range
: Accessible, : Not accessible
*1 Only Universal model QCPU is applicable.
*2 The routing parameter cannot be set for a QSCPU, and therefore the GOT cannot access the networks on which the CPU is not
located.
*3 This network can be accessed only when the CPU of relay station No. 1 is a QCPU.
POINT
(1) Precautions when using the QCPU redundant system When monitoring other networks, do not set the QCPU redundant system as a relay station. If the QCPU redundant system is set as a relay station, the GT SoftGOT1000 cannot switch the monitoring target automatically when the system is switched. (A timeout error occurs due to failed monitoring)
Connected
station Relay station
LCPU Relay network
1
CPU of relay station No. 1 Relay network
2
CPU of relay station No. 2
R L Q
(Q) QS*2
Q
(A)
QnA,
C6 A R L
Q
(Q) QS*2
Q
(A)
QnA,
C6 A
Ethernet
Mnet/10(H)*3
Ethernet
CC IE Cont*3
CC IE Field *1
CC IE Field *1
Mnet/10(H)*3
Ethernet
CC IE Cont*3
CC IE Field *1
CC-Link IE Field Network connection
GT SoftGOT1000
CPU of a connected
station
Module for relay network 1
CPU of relay station
No. 1
Module for relay network 1
Module for relay network 2
Relay network 1 Relay network 2
CPU of relay station
No. 2
Module for relay network 2
4.1 Controller that can be Monitored and the Accessible Range 4 - 29
4.1.4 System setting examples
The following shows an example of the monitor accessible range of other stations and setting method of monitor devices.
When using the direct CPU connection or computer link connection (without the data link system)
(1) Monitor accessible range of devices (other than B or W) of other stations or other networks Specify the accessing network No. or station as shown in the following table. To monitor B or W of the connected station (host station) assigned with a network parameter, specify the host
station. To monitor another station (other than B or W) or another network, specify the station (network No. and station
No.)
Station to be accessed
Station connected
to GT SoftGOT1000
Network No.1 Network No.2
AnU (1-1) Q (Q mode)
(1-2) AnA (1-3) AnU (1-4) QnA (2-1) AnU (2-2) AnN (2-3) AnU (2-4)
AnU (1-1) Host Other (1-3) Other (1-4) Other (2-2)
Q (Q mode) (1-2) Other (1-1) Host Other (1-4) Other (2-1) Other (2-2) Other (2-4)
AnA (1-3) Other (0-0) Host
AnU (1-4)
(2-2) Other (1-1) Host Host
QnA (2-1) Host
AnN (2-3) Host
AnU (2-4) Other (2-2) Host
How to read the table
Upper line: Accessibility
: Accessible
: Not accessible
Lower line: Network settings
Host
Other (Network No. - Station number)
Control station Control station
Network No.1 Network No.2
AnU (1-1)
Q(Q mode) (1-2)
AnA (1-3)
AnN (2-3)
AnU (2-4)
QnA (2-1)
AnU (1-4) (2-2)
4 - 30 4.1 Controller that can be Monitored and the Accessible Range
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
POINT
Monitoring link device B or W
For monitoring devices B and W that are allocated by the link parameter, use the host device number even when designating devices allocated to another station. Otherwise, the display speed will be reduced.
4.1 Controller that can be Monitored and the Accessible Range 4 - 31
When using the direct CPU connection or computer link connection (with the data link system)
(1) Monitor accessible range of devices (other than B or W) of other stations or other networks Specify the accessing network No. or station as shown in the following table. To monitor B or W of the connected station (host station) assigned with a network parameter, specify the host
station. To monitor another station (other than B or W) or another network, specify the station (network No. and station
No.).
Station to be
accessed
Station
connected to
GT SoftGOT1000
Network No.1 Network No.2 Data link system
QnA (1-1) AnA (1-2) QnA (1-3) AnU (2-1) QnA (2-2) AnU (2-3) AnU (2-4) QnA (M) QnA (L1) AnA (L2)
Q (Q mode) (1-1) Host Other (1-2) Other (1-3) Other (2-1) Other (2-2) Other (2-3) Other (2-4)
Other (1-3)
or
Other (2-2)
AnA (1-2) Host
QnA
(1-3)
(2-2)
Other (1-1) Host Other (2-1) Host Other (2-3) Other (2-4) Host *1
Other (0-2)(M)
AnU (2-1) Host Other (2-3) Other (2-4)
AnU (2-3) Other (2-1) Host Other (2-4)
AnU (2-4) Other (2-1) Other (2-3) Host
QnA (L1) Host
AnA (L2) Host
Control station
AnU (2-4)QnA
(1-3) (2-2) (M)
Network No.2
AnU (2-1)
Network No.1
AnA (1-2)
QnA (L1)
AnA (L2)
Data link system
Control station
Q(Q mode) (1-1)
AnU (2-3)
4 - 32 4.1 Controller that can be Monitored and the Accessible Range
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
*1 When monitoring the data link system, designate the network No. as 0.
POINT
Monitoring link device B or W
For monitoring devices B and W that are allocated by the link parameter, use the host device number even when designating devices allocated to another station. Otherwise, the display speed will be reduced.
How to read the table
Upper line: Accessibility
: Accessible
: Not accessible
Lower line: Network settings
Host
Other (Network No. - Station number)
4.1 Controller that can be Monitored and the Accessible Range 4 - 33
When using MELSECNET/10 connection
(1) Monitor access range for other station devices (other than B and W)
: Accessible : Not accessible
(2) Designating network No. and station number for setting monitor device
(a) Monitoring devices B and W that are allocated by network parameter NW No.: 1, Station number: Host For monitoring devices B and W that are allocated by the link parameter, use the local device number if designating devices allocated to another station. Otherwise, the display speed will be reduced.
(b) Monitoring other stations (other than B and W)
Station to be accessed
Station connected
to GT SoftGOT1000
Network No.1 Network No.2
QnA
(1-1)
Q (Q mode)
(1-2)
GT
SoftGOT1000
(1-3)
AnU
(1-4)
Q (Q mode)
(2-1)
QnA
(2-2)
AnN
(2-3)
AnU
(2-4)
GT SoftGOT1000 (1-3)
Station to be accessed
Station connected
to GT SoftGOT1000
QnA
(1-1)
Q (Q mode)
(1-2)
GT
SoftGOT1000
(1-3)
AnU
(1-4)
How to read the table 1, Other (2)
NW No. Station number
SoftGOT1000 (1-3) 1, Other (1) 1, Other (2) 1, Other (4)
GT Soft GOT1000
(1-3)
QnA (1-1)
AnU (1-4) (2-4)
Q (Q mode) Network No. 1 Network No. 2 (1-2)
Q (Q mode) (2-1)
QnA (2-2)
AnN (2-3)
4 - 34 4.1 Controller that can be Monitored and the Accessible Range
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
4.1.5 How to monitor redundant system
This section explains the restrictions on the connection methods and other information applicable when the QCPU redundant system is monitored by the GT SoftGOT1000.
In a redundant system, the monitoring can be performed with the monitoring target specified as the control system or the standby system on the GT SoftGOT1000. By specifying the monitoring target PLC CPU as the control system of the redundant system, the monitoring target is automatically changed to the PLC CPU in the control system when system switching occurs. To enable this automatic changing of the monitoring target at the GT SoftGOT1000, settings are required in the GT Designer3.
Q redundant setting
Monitor target
MELSECNET/H remote I/O network
CPU direct connection
Station No. 0 (Multiplexed remote master station)
Q 25P
R H
C P
U
Q J71LP
21-25
Q J71B
R 11
Q J71E
71-100
Q J61B
T11N
Station No. 1 (Multiplexed remote sub master station)
Standby system
(System B)
Q 25P
R H
C P
U
Q J71LP
21-25
Q J71B
R 11
Q J71E
71-100
Q J61B
T11N
Station No. 2 (remote I/O station)
Tracking cable
Q J72LP
25-25
Q J71C
24N
The GT SoftGOT1000 monitors the control system PLC CPU.
When an error occurs in System A, System B switches from standby system to control system.
Monitor target
MELSECNET/H remote I/O network
CPU direct connection
Station No. 0 (Multiplexed remote master station)
Standby system
(System A)
Q 25P
R H
C P
U
Q J71LP
21-25
Q J71B
R 11
Q J71E
71-100
Q J61B
T11N
Station No. 1 (Multiplexed remote sub master station)
Q 25P
R H
C P
U
Q J71LP
21-25
Q J71B
R 11
Q J71E
71-100
Q J61B
T11N
Station No. 2 (remote I/O station)
Tracking cable
Q J72LP
25-25
Q J71C
24N
The GT SoftGOT1000 monitors the PLC CPU of the new control system after system switching.
E m
pty
E m
pty
P ow
er supply m
odule
P ow
er supply m
odule
E m
pty
E m
pty
P ow
er supply m
odule
P ow
er supply m
odule
E m
pty
E m
pty
P ow
er supply m
odule
E m
pty
E m
pty
P ow
er supply m
odule
Control system
(System A)
Control system
(System B)
GT Soft GOT1000
GT Soft GOT1000
4.1 Controller that can be Monitored and the Accessible Range 4 - 35
The following connection methods are available for the QCPU redundant system.
Connection to remote I/O station in MELSECNET/H network system
Connection to remote I/O station in MELSECNET/H network system
Direct CPU connection
Direct CPU connection
MELSECNET/H connection, MELSECNET/10 connection (Network system)
MELSECNET/H and MELSECNET/10 connections (network systems)
CC-Link IE Controller Network connection (Network system)
CC-Link IE Controller Network connection (network system)
Ethernet connection
Ethernet connection
Connection to the redundant type extension base unit
(1) Computer link connection (Serial communication module mounted on the redundant type extension base unit)
(1) Computer link connection (Connection to the Serial communication module mounted on the redundant type extension base unit)
(2) Ethernet connection (Ethernet module mounted on the redundant type extension base unit)
(2) Ethernet connection (Connection to the Ethernet module mounted on redundant type extension base unit)
For details of PLC CPUs that can be monitored in each connection method of GT SoftGOT1000, refer to the following.
4.1.2 Monitorable controllers
4 - 36 4.1 Controller that can be Monitored and the Accessible Range
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
The following table shows the features of each connection method.
Connection type Before system switching After system switching
Direct CPU connection
(Remote I/O station of
MELSECNET/H network
system)
The monitoring target is automatically changed to the control
system PLC CPU.
Direct CPU connection
By the Q redundant setting, the GT SoftGOT1000
automatically changes the monitoring target to the PLC CPU
in the control system.*1
Monitor the PLC CPU of the control system by GT
SoftGOT1000 1). Monitor the PLC CPU of the control system by GT
SoftGOT1000 2).
GT Soft GOT1000
Control system
Multiplexed remote master station
MELSECNET/H remote I/O network
Standby system
Multiplexed remote sub master station
Remote I/O station
GT Soft GOT1000
Standby system
MELSECNET/H remote I/O network
Remote I/O station
Multiplexed remote master station
Multiplexed remote sub master station
Control system
GT Soft GOT1000
Control system
MELSECNET/H remote I/O network
Standby system
Remote I/O station
Multiplexed remote master station
Multiplexed remote sub-master station
GT Soft GOT1000
Multiplexed remote master station
MELSECNET/H remote I/O network
Standby system
Remote I/O station
Multiplexed remote sub-master station
Control system
GT Soft GOT1000
1)
GT Soft GOT1000
2)
Control system
MELSECNET/H remote I/O network
Standby system
Remote I/O station
Multiplexed remote master station
Multiplexed remote sub-master station
GT Soft GOT1000
1)
GT Soft GOT1000
2)
MELSECNET/H remote I/O network
Remote I/O station
Control systemStandby system
Multiplexed remote master station
Multiplexed remote sub-master station
4.1 Controller that can be Monitored and the Accessible Range 4 - 37
*1 To monitor the control system after the system switching without the Q redundant setting, change the cable connection from the
PLC CPU in the previous control system to the control system after system switching.
*2 To monitor the control system after the system switching without the Q redundancy setting, refer to the following.
Switch the monitor target to the control system using the script function
Connection type Before system switching After system switching
MELSECNET/H
connection, MELSECNET/
10 connection
(Network system)
By the Q redundant setting, the GT SoftGOT1000
automatically changes the monitoring target to the PLC CPU
in the control system.*2
CC-Link IE Controller
Network connection
(Network system)
By the Q redundant setting, the GT SoftGOT1000
automatically changes the monitoring target to the PLC CPU
in the control system.*2
Ethernet connection
By the Q redundant setting, the GT SoftGOT1000
automatically changes the monitoring target to the PLC CPU
in the control system.*2
Computer link connection
(Serial communication
module mounted on the
redundant type extension
base unit)
Ethernet connection
(Ethernet module mounted
on the redundant type
extension base unit)
GT Soft GOT1000
Station No.3 (normal station)
MELSECNET/H PLC to PLC network (MELSECNET/H mode or MELSECNET/10 mode)
Station No.1 (control station)
Station No.2 (normal station)
Control system
Standby system
GT Soft GOT1000
Station No.3 (normal station)
MELSECNET/H PLC to PLC network (MELSECNET/H mode or MELSECNET/10 mode)
Station No.1 (normal station)
Station No.2 (sub control station)
Control system
Standby system
GT Soft GOT1000
Station No.3 (normal station)
CC-Link IE Controller Network
Station No.1 (control station)
Station No.2 (normal station)
Control system
Standby system
GT Soft GOT1000
Station No.3 (normal station)
CC-Link IE Controller Network
Station No.1 (normal station)
Station No.2 (sub control station)
Control system
Standby system
GT Soft GOT1000
Station No. 3
Ethernet
Station No. 1 Station No. 2
Control system
Standby system
GT Soft GOT1000
Station No. 3
Ethernet
Station No. 1 Station No. 2
Standby system
Control system
GT Soft GOT1000
1)
GT Soft GOT1000
2)
Control system
Station No. 1
Station No. 2
Serial communication module
Ethernet module
Serial communication connection
Ethernet connection
GT Soft GOT1000
1)
GT Soft GOT1000
2)
Control system Standby system
Station No. 1
Station No. 2
Serial communication module
Ethernet module
Serial communication connection
Ethernet connection
4 - 38 4.1 Controller that can be Monitored and the Accessible Range
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
POINT
Precautions for monitoring the QCPU redundant system
(1) A system alarm may be detected when the system is switched in a redundant system. When Q redundant setting is made : "450 Path has changed or timeout occured in redundant system." When Q redundant setting is not made : "402 Communication timeout. Confirm communication pathway or
modules." However, even if the error occurs, the GT SoftGOT1000 automatically resumes monitoring and there are no problems in the monitoring operation.
(2) The system alarm is displayed when the system is switched due to cable disconnection etc. (when the path is changed). The system alarm is not displayed when the system is switched by the user.
(3) When the Q redundant setting is not made, the GT SoftGOT1000 does not automatically change the monitoring target even if system switching occurs in the redundant system. When the GT SoftGOT1000 is connected to the standby system, data written to a device are overwritten by the data of the control system, failing to be reflected. In this case, when data are written to a device in the standby system normally, the system alarm "315 Device writing error. Correct device." is not detected.
(4) Do not check-mark the [Comm. Error Dialog] in [Communication Setup] from [Online], for GT SoftGOT1000. If [Comm. Error Dialog] is checked, a communication error dialog box appears and the monitor stops when some error occurs in the communication path.
3.6 Communication Setup
(5) For monitoring the QCPU redundant system when connecting to MELSECNET/H, use QCPU of function version D or later, with the upper five digits later than "07102". Also, use GX Developer of Version 8.29F or later.
(6) A message "Unable to communicate with CPU." is displayed when the system switching occurs while an option function such as the ladder monitor is used.
(7) In the MELSECNET/H connection or MELSECNET/10 connection, when the control station of the MELSECNET/H network or MELSECNET/10 network fails and is taken over by a station outside the QCPU redundant system, the timeout is detected as the system alarm. If this occurs, the monitor display speed may slow down.
(8) In the direct CPU connection, the GT SoftGOT1000 fails to automatically change the monitoring target in the following cases.
When the power supply to the CPU where the GT SoftGOT1000 is connected is OFF When the cable connecting the GT SoftGOT1000 with the CPU is broken When the tracking is disabled
(9) If the Q redundant setting is made for a system that is not a QCPU redundant system, no error occurs at the start up of the GT SoftGOT1000 and the GT SoftGOT1000 operates normally. In this case, if an abnormality (such as powering OFF, or communication timeout error) occurs at the PLC CPU for which the Q redundant setting has been made, the PLC CPU may operate in a different way from the monitoring target change mode that was set in the Q redundant setting.
4.1 Controller that can be Monitored and the Accessible Range 4 - 39
Connection to remote I/O station in MELSECNET/H network system This section explains the direct CPU connection that connects the GT SoftGOT1000 to the remote I/O station of the MELSECNET/H network system. The following shows an example of connecting the GT SoftGOT1000 to the remote I/O station of the MELSECNET/H network system.
(1) Connection method Connect the GT SoftGOT1000 to the RS-232 interface of the network module (QJ72LP25-25, QJ72LP25G, QJ72BR15) on the remote I/O station of the MELSECNET/H network system.
(2) GT Designer3 setting Set GT Designer3 as follows.
In this case, the GT SoftGOT1000 monitoring is performed by transient transmission of the MELSECNET/H network system.Therefore, a longer time-lag occurs for displaying objects compared with directly monitoring the PLC CPU. For displaying objects with a shorter time-lag, execute the cyclic transmission so that the GT SoftGOT1000 can monitor link devices B and W of the host station set in the MELSECNET/H network.
(3) Monitoring target change when system switching occurs in a redundant system When the system switching occurs, the multiplexed remote sub master station switched to the control system takes over the master operation of MELSECNET/H. Since the GT SoftGOT1000 monitors the master station, the monitoring target is automatically changed to the PLC CPU that is operating as the master.
Setting item Settings
Controller Type MELSEC-QnA/Q/QS, MELDAS C6*
Device setting
(Network setting)
Host Host
Remote master
station
Other (NW No. 1 (network No. of remote I/O network),
Station No. 0 (master station))
Q Redundant Setting Do not set the item.
Monitor target
MELSECNET/H remote I/O network
CPU direct connection
Network No. 1, Station No. 0 (Multiplexed remote master station)
Control system (System A)
Q 25P
R H
C P
U
Q J71LP
21-25
Q J71B
R 11
Q J71E
71-100
Q J61B
T11N
Network No. 1, Station No. 1 (Multiplexed remote sub master station)
Standby system (System B)
Q 25P
R H
C P
U
Q J71LP
21-25
Q J71B
R 11
Q J71E
71-100
Q J61B
T11N
Q J72LP
25-25
Q J71C
24NNetwork No. 1, Station No. 2 (Remote I/O station)
E m
pty
E m
pty
P ow
er supply m
odule
E m
pty
P ow
er supply m
odule
E m
pty
P ow
er supply m
odule
GT SoftGOT1000
4 - 40 4.1 Controller that can be Monitored and the Accessible Range
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
Direct CPU connection This section describes the direct CPU connection by which a GT SoftGOT1000 is connected to a PLC CPU in the redundant system. Two methods for the CPU direct connection, using one or two GT SoftGOT1000 are available.
(1) When using one GT SoftGOT1000
(a) Connection method Connect the GT SoftGOT1000 and the control system PLC CPU (Q12PRHCPU, Q25PRHCPU) of the redundant system with an RS-232 cable or USB cable.
(b) GT Designer3 setting Set GT Designer3 as follows.
(c) Monitoring target change when system switching occurs in a redundant system When the system switching occurs, the PLC CPU (other station) of the control system after system switching takes over the host station operation. Since the GT SoftGOT1000 monitors the control system, the monitoring target is automatically changed to other station.
POINT
To monitor the control system without Q redundant setting
If the system switching occurs when the Q redundant setting is not made, the GT SoftGOT1000 cannot change the monitoring target at the occurrence of system switching since it monitors the connected PLC CPU (host station). As a contermeasure, change the cable connection from the PLC CPU in the previous control system to the control system after system switching.
Setting item Settings
Controller Type MELSEC-QnA/Q/QS, MELDAS C6*
Device setting
(Network setting) Host Host
Q Redundant Setting Q redundant setting
Monitor target
MELSECNET/H remote I/O network
CPU direct connection
Network No. 1, Station No. 0 (Multiplexed remote master station)
Control system (System A)
Q 25P
R H
C P
U
P ow
er supply m
odule
Q J71LP
21-25
Q J71B
R 11
Q J71E
71-100
Q J61B
T11N
E m
pty
P ow
er supply m
odule
E m
pty
P ow
er supply m
odule
E m
pty
E m
pty Network No. 1, Station No. 1 (Multiplexed remote sub master station)
Standby system (System B)
Q J72LP
25-25
Q J71C
24NNetwork No. 1, Station No. 2 (remote I/O station)
Q 25P
R H
C P
U
Q J71LP
21-25
Q J71B
R 11
Q J71E
71-100
Q J61B
T11N GT SoftGOT1000
4.1 Controller that can be Monitored and the Accessible Range 4 - 41
(2) When using two GT SoftGOT1000 Connect a GT SoftGOT1000 to each PLC CPU to respond to the system switching.
(a) Connection method Connect GT SoftGOT1000 to the RS-232 interface of the control system and standby system CPU modules (Q12PRHCPU, Q25PRHCPU) of the redundant system.
(b) GT Designer3 setting Set GT Designer3 as follows.
(c) Monitoring target change when system switching occurs in a redundant system When the system switching occurs, the GT SoftGOT1000 cannot change the monitor target automatically in response to the system switching. The GT SoftGOT1000 that is connected to the control system CPU module after system switching continues the monitoring. Different from the case using one GT SoftGOT1000, no cable reconnection is required.
POINT
To automatically change the monitoring target after system switching using one GT SoftGOT1000, make the Q redundant settings.
Q redundant setting
Setting item Settings
Controller Type MELSEC-QnA/Q/QS, MELDAS C6*
Device setting
(Network setting) Host Host
Q Redundant Setting Do not set the item.
Monitor target
Network No. 1, Station No. 0 (Multiplexed remote master station)
Network No. 1, Station No. 1 (Multiplexed remote sub master station)
Network No. 1, Station No. 2 (remote I/O station)
P ow
er supply m
odule
P ow
er supply m
odule
P ow
er supply m
odule
MELSECNET/H remote I/O network
CPU direct connection
Control system (System A)
E m
pty
Q 25P
R H
C P
U
Q J71LP
21-25
Q J71B
R 11
Q J71E
71-100
Q J61B
T11N
Standby system (System B)
Q J72LP
25-25
Q J71C
24N
E m
pty
Q 25P
R H
C P
U
Q J71LP
21-25
Q J71B
R 11
Q J71E
71-100
Q J61B
T11N
E m
pty
E m
pty
CPU direct connection
GT SoftGOT1000 1) GT SoftGOT1000 2)
4 - 42 4.1 Controller that can be Monitored and the Accessible Range
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
(3) Precautions when connecting a GT SoftGOT1000 directly to a PLC CPU in the redundant system without making Q redundant setting
(a) As the GT SoftGOT1000 monitors exclusively the PLC CPU that is directly connected to, the monitor target cannot be changed in response to the system switching of the redundant system. To change the target monitor in response to the system switching, change the target of the connection cable between the GT SoftGOT1000 and PLC CPU to the other PLC CPU, or configure the system using GT SoftGOT1000 connected to each PLC CPU.
(b) In CPU direct connection, when monitoring a PLC CPU in the redundant system, only the PLC CPU that is directly connected to the GT SoftGOT1000 can be monitored.
(c) When connected to the standby system PLC CPU, the writing of the GT SoftGOT1000 to a device in the connected PLC CPU is not reflected. Design a monitor screen that disables writing to the standby system. In the redundant system, the tracking function transfers device data from control system to standby system. When the tracking function is enabled, the device value of the standby system PLC CPU is overwritten by the device value transferred from the control system to the standby system even if the GT SoftGOT1000 writes to the standby system PLC CPU (Numerical input, Ascii input, Script, Recipe, or others).
As countermeasures to the above, perform the following. Display a monitor screen which indicates that "the connected PLC CPU is the standby system" on a GT
SoftGOT1000 when connecting the GT SoftGOT1000 to the standby system PLC CPU. To display the specified monitor screen when connecting the GT SoftGOT1000 to the standby system
PLC CPU, use the special relay SM1515 (Control status identification flag) of the PLC CPU. (When the SM1515 is OFF, the connected PLC CPU is the standby system)
Control the operation of each object by the SM1515, which is set for the operation condition. For the screen switching device, use a GT SoftGOT1000 internal device.
If a device of the PLC CPU is used, the Status Observation operation of the GT SoftGOT1000 may be disabled since the device data of the PLC CPU will is overwritten by the device value transferred with the redundant system tracking function.
Numerically input D100=100 from the GT SoftGOT1000.
1) D100=100
2) D100=5
Tracks D100=5 from control system to standby system.
P ow
er supply m
odule
P ow
er supply m
odule
P ow
er supply m
odule
MELSECNET/H remote I/O network
CPU direct connection CPU direct connection
Control system (System A)
E m
pty
E m
pty
E m
pty
E m
pty
Q 25P
R H
C P
U
Q J71LP
21-25
Q J71B
R 11
Q J71E
71-100
Q J61B
T11N
Standby system (System B)
Q J72LP
25-25
Q J71C
24N
Q 25P
R H
C P
U
Q J71LP
21-25
Q J71B
R 11
Q J71E
71-100
Q J61B
T11N
GT SoftGOT1000 1) GT SoftGOT1000 2)
1.2.
4.1 Controller that can be Monitored and the Accessible Range 4 - 43
The following diagram shows an example of screen setting using SM1515. System configuration example: when using one GT SoftGOT1000
Create a monitor screen on the base screen 1 that performs the following operations for when connecting a GT SoftGOT1000 to control system and standby system. 1) When connecting to the control system, the monitor screen displays a message calling a touch switch
operation, by which the screen switches to the next screen. 2) When connecting to the standby system, the monitor screen displays a message calling the reconnection of
the connection cable.
1) When connecting to the control system 2) When connecting to the standby system
Control system (System A)
Q25PRH CPU
QJ71 BR11
Standby system (System B)
Station No. 0
Q25PRH CPU
QJ71 BR11
Station No. 1
QJ72 BR15
Station No. 2
GT SoftGOT1000
4 - 44 4.1 Controller that can be Monitored and the Accessible Range
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
1. Set the screen switching device of the base screen. Choose [Common] [GOT Environmental Setting] [Screen Switching/Window], and set the internal device GD100 as the base screen switching device. (Do not use PLC CPU devices for the screen switching device. If used, the Status Observation operation of the GT SoftGOT1000 may be disabled since the device data of the PLC CPU is overwritten by the device value transferred with the redundant system tracking function)
2. Set the Status Observation. Make the setting so that the base screen 1 is displayed when the connected PLC CPU is the standby system (SM1515 is OFF) in the project specified by selecting [Common] [Status Observation].
Create the status observation in the project on the Project tab.
Condition 1 : SM1515 (while OFF) When the SM1515 is OFF, the connected PLC CPU is the standby system.
Operation : GD100=1 The screen switches to the base screen 1.
4.1 Controller that can be Monitored and the Accessible Range 4 - 45
3. Set the comment display on the base screen 1. Set a comment to be displayed on the base screen 1 depending on the system status (ON/OFF of the SM1515) of the connected PLC CPU using the Comment Display (Bit). Select [Object] [Comment Display] [Bit Comment] and set Comment Display (Bit).
Dvice/Style tab
Device : SM1515
Shape : None
Comment tab : Basic Comment
Comment Display Type Text (ON) : The operation status is control system.
Touch the screen to display the next screen.
Comment Display Type Text (OFF) : The operation status is standby system.
Reconnect the PLC connection cable to the control system CPU.
1) Dvice/Style tab screen 2) Comment tab screen (ON status)
3) Comment tab screen (OFF status)
4 - 46 4.1 Controller that can be Monitored and the Accessible Range
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
4. Set the touch switches on the base screen 1. By using the go to screen switch function, set a touch switch for shifting the screen to the next screen with a screen touch, when the connected PLC CPU is the control system (SM1515 is ON). Select [Object] [Switch] [Go To Screen Switch] and set the screen switching function. Set the same size for the touch switch as the base screen size so that touching any place of the screen enables the switch operation.
Next Screen tab
Screen Type : Base
Go To Screen : Fixed 2
Style tab
Display Style : None (Shape)
Trigger tab
Trigger Type : ON
Trigger Device : SM1515
1) Next Screen tab 2) Style tab screen 3) Trigger tab screen
The following shows the created base screen 1.
4.1 Controller that can be Monitored and the Accessible Range 4 - 47
MELSECNET/H and MELSECNET/10 connections (network systems) This section explains the MELSECNET/H and MELSECNET/10 connections (network systems) that connect the GT SoftGOT1000 to the MELSECNET/H and MELSECNET/10 network system. The following provides an example of connecting the GT SoftGOT1000 set as a normal station to the MELSECNET/ H network system.
(1) Connection method Connect the MELSECNET/H network system to the GT SoftGOT1000.
(2) GT Designer3 setting Set GT Designer3 as follows.
(3) Monitoring target change when system switching occurs in a redundant system When system switching occurs, the network module station No. 2 changes from the normal station to the sub control station and takes over the control of the MELSECNET/H network system. Since the GT SoftGOT1000 monitors the control system, the monitoring target is automatically changed to the network module station No. 2.
POINT
To monitor the control system without Q redundant setting
When system switching occurs, the network module station No. 2 changes from the normal station to the sub control station and takes over the control of the MELSECNET/H network system. Since the GT SoftGOT1000 monitors the station of the specified station number, the monitoring target cannot be changed to the station No. 2 in response to the system switching. As a countermeasure, create a screen to monitor the PLC CPU of the control system by switching the station numbers between System A and System B using the script function.
Switch the monitor target to the control system using the script function
Setting item Settings
Controller Type MELSEC-QnA/Q/QS, MELDAS C6*
Device setting
(Network setting) Other station
Other (NW No. 1 (network No. of PLC to PLC network),
Station No. ** (** indicates the station number of the control system. Station No. 1, in the
above example))
Q Redundant Setting Q redundant setting
Monitor target
MELSECNET/H remote I/O network E
m pty
E m
pty
Network No. 1, Station No. 1 (Control station)
Control system
(System A)
Q 25P
R H
C P
U
Q J71LP
21-25
Q J71B
R 11
Q J71E
71-100
Q J61B
T11N
Standby system
(System B) Q
25P R
H C
P U
Q J71LP
21-25
Q J71B
R 11
Q J71E
71-100
Q J61B
T11N
Q J72LP
25-25
Q J71C
24N
Network No. 1, Station No. 3 (Normal station)
Network No. 1, Station No. 2 (Normal station)
MELSECNET/H PLC to PLC network (MELSECNET/H mode or MELSECNET/10 mode)
P ow
ersupply m
odule
GT SoftGOT1000
E m
pty
P ow
er supply m
odule
P ow
er supply m
odule
E m
pty
4 - 48 4.1 Controller that can be Monitored and the Accessible Range
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
CC-Link IE Controller Network connection (network system) This section explains the CC-Link IE Controller Network connection (network system) that connects the GT SoftGOT1000 to the CC-Link IE Controller Network. The following shows an example of connecting the GT SoftGOT1000 set as a normal station to the CC-Link IE Controller Network.
(1) Connection method Connect the GT SoftGOT1000 to the CC-Link IE Controller Network.
(2) GT Designer3 setting Set GT Designer3 as described below.
(3) Monitoring target change when system switching occurs in a redundant system When system switching occurs, the network module station No.2 changes from a normal station to the sub control station, and the system with the module takes over the control of the CC-Link IE Controller Network as the control system. Since the GT SoftGOT1000 monitors the control system, the monitoring target is automatically changed to the network module station No. 2.
Setting item Settings
Controller Type MELSEC-QnA/Q/QS, MELDAS C6*
Device setting
(Network) Other station
Other (NW No.1 (Network No. of CC-Link IE Controller Network),
Station No. ** (** indicates the station number of the control system. Station No. 1 in the
above example))
Q Redundant Setting Q redundant setting
Q 25P
R H
C P
U
Q J71LP
21-25
Q J71G
P 21-S
X
Q J71E
71-100
Q J61B
T11N
Q 25P
R H
C P
U
Q J71LP
21-25
Q J71G
P 21-S
X
Q J71E
71-100
Q J61B
T11N
Q J72LP
25-25
Q J71C
24N
Network No. 1, Station No. 1 (Control station)
Network No. 1, Station No. 3 (Normal station)
Monitor target
Network No. 1, Station No. 2 (Normal station)CC-Link IE Controller Network
P ow
er supply m
odule
P ow
er supply m
odule
Standby system
(System B)
E m
pty
E m
ptyControl system
(System A)
MELSECNET/H remote I/O network
P ow
er supply m
odule
E m
pty
E m
pty
GT SoftGOT1000
4.1 Controller that can be Monitored and the Accessible Range 4 - 49
Ethernet connection This section explains the Ethernet connection that connects the GT SoftGOT1000 to the Ethernet network system. The following shows an example of connecting the GT SoftGOT1000 to the Ethernet network.
(1) Connection method Connect the Ethernet network system to the GT SoftGOT1000.
(2) GT Designer3 setting Set GT Designer3 as follows.
(3) Monitoring target change when system switching occurs in a redundant system When system switching occurs, Ethernet module station No. 2 takes over the control of the Ethernet network system as the control system. Since the GT SoftGOT1000 monitors the control system, he monitoring target is automatically changed to the Ethernet module station No. 2.
POINT
To monitor the control system without Q redundant setting
When system switching occurs, the network module station No. 2 changes from the normal station to the sub control station and takes over the control of the MELSECNET/H network system. Since the GT SoftGOT1000 monitors the station of the specified station number, the monitoring target cannot be changed to the station No. 2 in response to the system switching. As a countermeasure, create a screen to monitor the PLC CPU of the control system by switching the station numbers between System A and System B using the script function.
Switch the monitor target to the control system using the script function
Setting item Settings
Controller Type MELSEC-QnA/Q/QS, MELDAS C6*
Device setting
(Network setting)
Host Host
Other station
Other (NW No. 1 (network No. of Ethernet),
Station No. ** (** indicates the station number of the control system. Station No. 1, in the
above example))
Q Redundant Setting Q redundant setting
Monitor target
MELSECNET/H remote I/O network
P ow
ersupply m
odule
E m
pty
Network No. 1, Station No. 1
Control system
(System A)
E m
pty
Q 25P
R H
C P
U
Q J71LP
21-25
Q J71B
R 11
Q J71E
71-100
Q J61B
T11N
E m
pty Standby system
(System B)
Q 25P
R H
C P
U
Q J71LP
21-25
Q J71B
R 11
Q J71E
71-100
Q J61B
T11N
Q J72LP
25-25
Q J71C
24N
Network No. 1, Station No. 3
Network No. 1, Station No. 2
Ethernet
P ow
ersupply m
odule
P ow
ersupply m
odule
E m
pty
GT SoftGOT1000
4 - 50 4.1 Controller that can be Monitored and the Accessible Range
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
Connection to the redundant type extension base unit
(1) Computer link connection (Connection to the Serial communication module mounted on the redundant type extension base unit) This section explains the computer link connection for connecting the GT SoftGOT1000 to the serial communication module mounted on the redundant type extension base unit. The following shows an example of connecting the GT SoftGOT1000 to the serial communication module mounted on the redundant type extension base unit.
(a) Connection method Connect the GT SoftGOT1000 to the serial communication module (QJ71C24N) mounted on the redundant type extension base unit.
(b) GT Designer3 setting Set GT Designer3 as follows.
(c) Monitoring target change when system switching occurs in a redundant system When the system switching occurs, the GT SoftGOT1000 automatically changes the monitoring target to the PLC CPU switched to the control system.
Setting item Settings
Controller Type MELSEC-QnA/Q/QS, MELDAS C6*
Device setting
(Network setting) Host Host
Q Redundant Setting Do not set the item.
Computer link connection
Redundant type extension base unit
Monitor target
Control system (System A)
Standby system (System B)
P ow
er supply m
odule
P ow
er supply m
odule
P ow
er supply m
odule
Q 25P
R H
C P
U
Q J71C
24N
Q 25P
R H
C P
U
Q J71B
R 11
Q J71B
R 11
E m
pty
E m
pty
E m
pty
E m
pty
E m
pty
E m
pty
E m
pty
GT SoftGOT1000
4.1 Controller that can be Monitored and the Accessible Range 4 - 51
(2) Ethernet connection (Connection to the Ethernet module mounted on redundant type extension base unit) This section explains the Ethernet connection for connecting the GT SoftGOT1000 to the Ethernet module mounted on the redundant type extension base unit. The following shows an example of connecting the GT SoftGOT1000 to the Ethernet module mounted on the redundant type extension base unit.
(a) Connection method Connect the GT SoftGOT1000 to the Ethernet module (QJ71E71-100, QJ71E71-B5, QJ71E71-B2, LJ71E71-100) mounted on the redundant type extension base unit.
(b) GT Designer3 setting Set GT Designer3 as follows.
(c) Monitoring target change when system switching occurs in a redundant system When the system switching occurs, the GT SoftGOT1000 automatically changes the monitoring target to the PLC CPU switched to the control system.
Setting item Settings
Controller Type MELSEC-QnA/Q/QS, MELDAS C6*
Device setting
(Network setting) Other station
Other (NW No.2 (Network No. of Ethernet),
Station No.** (** indicates the station No. of the Ethernet module. Station No.1 in the above
example))
Q Redundant Setting Do not set the item.
Monitor target
Control system (System A)
Standby system (System B)
P ow
er supply m
odule
P ow
er supply m
odule
P ow
er supply m
odule
Q 25P
R H
C P
U
Q J71E71-100
Q 25P
R H
C P
U
Q J71B
R 11
Q J71B
R 11
E m
pty
E m
pty
E m
pty
E m
pty
E m
pty
E m
pty
E m
pty
Ethernet connection
Redundant type extension base unit
Network No.2, Station No.1 (Ethernet module)
Network No. 2, Station No. 2 GT SoftGOT1000
4 - 52 4.1 Controller that can be Monitored and the Accessible Range
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
Q redundant setting The following explains the setting for automatically change the monitoring target of the GT SoftGOT1000 when monitoring a QCPU redundant system.
POINT
Before making the Q redundant setting
In the Q redundant setting, do not set stations other than redundant CPUs.
1. Select [Common] [Controller Setting] [Q Redundant] from the menu.
2. The setting dialog box appears. Make the settings with reference to the following explanation.
3. Make the settings for the Q redundant setting. In the Q Redundant Setting dialog box, settings can be made for each channel of the controller.
(Example: Ethernet connection (Station No. 5), redundant CPU pair No. 1 and No. 2, redundant CPU station No. 1 to 4)
For details of *1, refer to the explanation below.
Item Contents
Target at its own Station
(0-FF)
Select this item to monitor the control system as a host station.
(In Ethernet connection, not available even when selected)
Pair No.*1
NW No.
Set the network No. (1 to 225) for each of pair numbers (1 to 64).
Upper row: Setting for the first redundant CPU.
Lower row: Setting for the second redundant CPU.
(The same value as the value set for the first redundant CPU is displayed)
Station
No.
Set the station No. (1 to 63) of the redundant CPU for each of pair numbers (1 to 64).
Upper row: Setting for the first redundant CPU.
Lower row: Setting for the second redundant CPU.
(The value of "Setting for the first redundant CPU" + 1 is displayed)
New Create a new pair No.
Duplicate Copies one setting of the selected pair number to append it at the last line.
Delete Deletes one setting of the selected pair.
After deletion, the succeeding pair numbers are renumbered to fill the deleted pair number.
Delete All Deletes the setting of all pair numbers.
Copy All Copies the Q redundant setting on the selected CH No. tab.
Paste All Pastes the copied Q redundant setting in the selected CH No. tab.
4.1 Controller that can be Monitored and the Accessible Range 4 - 53
*1 Pair number
Redundant CPU pair means the redundant CPUs (System A / System B) in the redundant system configuration. Pair number is the number assigned to each redundant CPU pair.
Example: Ethernet connection (Pair No. 1 and Pair No. 2)
POINT
Precautions for making Q redundant setting
Pay attention to the following items when making the Q redundant setting. In the setting, station Nos. of the System A CPU and System B CPU must be adjacent numbers to be set as a
pair. As long as adjacent numbers are used, allocation of them to the System A CPU and System B CPU may be determined as desired.
Pairing of the last station No. and station No. 1 (Example: Station No. 64 and station No. 1) is not allowed. Make sure that the QCPU in the station for which Q redundant setting is made is a redundant CPU.
If any of the QCPUs to which the Q redundant setting is made is not a redundant CPU, the GT SoftGOT1000 fails to automatically change the monitoring target to the control system when the system is switched.
When making the Q redundant setting for MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10, or Ethernet connections, check the station Nos. of network modules before the setting. If the settings of the Q redundant setting and the actual network module station Nos. are not matched, the GT SoftGOT1000 fails to automatically change the monitoring target to the control system when the system is switched.
The redundant pair number setting is necessary in the Q redundant setting when the monitoring target changes automatically at the system switching with the host station specified in Ethernet connection. (The "Target at its own Station (0-FF)" function of the Q redundant setting is not valid in Ethernet connection.)
Redundant CPU pair (No.1)
Ethernet (Network No.1)
Station No.1
Station No.5
Station No.2
Q25PRHCPU
Power supply m
odule
Power supply m
odule
Q J71E71-100
Q25PRHCPU
Q J71E71-100
Redundant CPU pair (No.2)
Station No.3
Station No.4
Q25PRHCPU
Power supply m
odule
Power supply m
odule
Q J71E71-100
Q25PRHCPU
Q J71E71-100
GT SoftGOT1000
4 - 54 4.1 Controller that can be Monitored and the Accessible Range
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
Switch the monitor target to the control system using the script function The following explains how to create a script screen which is used for the MELSECNET/H connection and automatically changes the monitoring target (Station No.) at the occurrence of system switching even if the Q redundant setting is not made. The script executes the station number switching function or screen switching function. The following shows the advantages and disadvantages of the station number switching function and screen switching function.
The following explains how to use each function.
(1) Method for using the station number switching function
(a) As a feature of this function, monitor screens for Station No. 1 (control system) and Station No. 2 (standby system) can be created on one screen.
(b) If the system switching occurs, the GT SoftGOT1000 can change the monitoring target to the control system PLC CPU on the same monitor screen.
(c) To achieve this, the script of the GT SoftGOT1000 monitors the special relay SM1515 (Control system identification flag) of the PLC CPU and stores the station number of the latest control system into the station number switching device.
(d) Restrictions: Some objects do not allow the station number to be switched.
GT Designer3 Version 1 Screen Design Manual
(e) Setting method System configuration example
Function Advantage Disadvantage
Station number switching
function
The monitor screens for Station No. 1 (control system)
and Station No. 2 (standby system) can be created on one
screen.
Some objects do not allow the station number to be
switched.
Screen switching function All objects can be used since monitor screens are created
for each station number.
Monitor screens must be created separately for Station
No. 1 (control system) and Station No. 2 (standby
system).
Connected module Network No. Station No.
MELSECNET/H network module of control system
1
1
MELSECNET/H network module of standby system 2
GT SoftGOT1000 connected to MELSECNET/H network 3
MELSECNET/H (MELSECNET/H mode or MELSECNET/10 mode) Network No. 1
Station No. 3
Control system
(System A)
Q25PRH CPU
QJ71 BR11
Standby system (System B)
Station No. 1
Q25PRH CPU
QJ71 BR11
Station No. 2
GT SoftGOT1000
4.1 Controller that can be Monitored and the Accessible Range 4 - 55
1. Set the station number switching device. Select [Common] [Controller Setting] [Station No. Switching], and set the internal device GD100 as the station number switching device.
2. Set the status observation. Make the settings so that the station number is switched when the faulty station information (SW70) of MELSECNET/H turns ON in the project specified by selecting [Common] [Status Observation].
Create the status observation in the project on the Project tab.
Condition 1 : SW70.b0 (while ON) When b0 is ON, Station No. 1 is abnormal.
Operation : GD100=2 Station No. is changed to 2.
Condition 1 : SW70.b1 (while ON) When b1 is ON, Station No. 2 is abnormal.
Operation : GD100=1 Station No. is changed to 1.
Condition 1 : GD100==0 The value of the Station No. changing device is 0.
Condition 2 : SW56<=2 The current control station is a redundant CPU.
Operation : GD100=SW56 Station No. is changed to a current control station.
Condition 1 : GD100==0 The value of the Station No.changing device is 0.
Condition 2 : SW56>2 The current control station is not a redundant CPU.
Operation : GD100=1 Station No. is changed to a current control station in normal condition.
Set here.
4 - 56 4.1 Controller that can be Monitored and the Accessible Range
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
POINT
Setting for the status observation function
For the status observation function, hexadecimals cannot be used. To use the status observation function, set the N/W No. and the station No. of the PLC CPU in [Unsigned BIN]. (For the status observation function, set [Unsigned BIN] for [Storing Device])
Example: When N/W No.: 1 and Station No.: 1 (0101H) Set "257". When N/W No.: 10 and Station No.: 10 (0A0AH) Set "2570".
3. Create a monitor screen. In the device setting (network setting) of each object, set Network No. 1 and Station No. 1 of the control system.
4. Validate the station number switching function. On the Basic tab screen specified by selecting [Screen] [Screen Property], select the item [Switch Station No.] to validate the station number changing function. Make this setting for each monitor screen.
5. Change the station number switching device value in the script. By selecting [Common] [Script] [Script], create a script for each monitor screen that checks the SM1515 status of the current monitor station, and if it is OFF (standby system), changes the station number switching device value. Set the trigger type of the script as [Ordinary] or [Sampling(about 3s)].
// If the monitoring target is a standby station, the Station No. is changed. if([b:SM1515]==OFF){ //Is the monitoring target standby?
if([w:GD100]==1){ //The Station No. is 1 to 2. [w:GD100]=2;
}else{ //The Station No. is 2 to 1. [w:GD100]=1;
} }
Check here.
4.1 Controller that can be Monitored and the Accessible Range 4 - 57
Set the created script for each screen on the Screen tab.
HINT When the MELSECNET/H network is connected to the redundant system only, SW56 (current control station) can be set as the station number switching device. In this case, even if the system switching occurs, the GT SoftGOT1000 always monitors the station number that is currently the control station.
(2) Method for using the screen changing function
(a) As a feature of this function, monitor screens are created for each station number. When the system switching occurs, the GT SoftGOT1000 can change the monitoring target to the control system PLC CPU on the other monitor screen.
(b) To achieve this, the script of the GT SoftGOT1000 monitors the special relay SM1515 (Control system identification flag) of the PLC CPU and stores the screen number corresponding to the latest station number of the control system into the screen switching devices.
(c) Precautions: There are the following 8 different screen switching devices.Set the screen switching devices for all screens to be used. Base screen switching device Overlap window 1 switching device Overlap window 2 switching device Overlap window 3 switching device Overlap window 4 switching device Overlap window 5 switching device Superimpose window 1 switching device Superimpose window 2 switching device
(d) Setting method System configuration example
Connected module Network No. Station No.
MELSECNET/H network module of control system
1
1
MELSECNET/H network module of standby system 2
GT SoftGOT1000 connected to MELSECNET/H network 3
MELSECNET/H (MELSECNET/H mode) Network No. 1
Station No. 3 Control system
(System A)
Q25PRH CPU
QJ71 BR11
Standby system (System B)
Station No. 1
Q25PRH CPU
QJ71 BR11
Station No. 2
GT SoftGOT1000
4 - 58 4.1 Controller that can be Monitored and the Accessible Range
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
1. Set the screen switching device of the base screen. Select [Common] [GOT Environmental Setting] [Screen Switching/Window], and set the internal device GD100 as the base screen switching device.
2. Set the status observation. Set the status observation so that the station number is switched when the faulty station information (SW70) of MELSECNET/H turns ON in the project specified by choosing [Common] [Status Observation].
Condition 1 : SW70.b0 (while ON) Station No. 1 is abnormal.
Condition 2 : GD100<100
Operation : GD100= GD100+100 Station No. is changed to 2.
Condition 1 : SW70.b1 (while ON) Station No. 2 is abnormal.
Condition 2 : GD100>100
Operation : GD100= GD100-100 Station No. is changed to 1.
Condition 1 : GD100==0 The value of the screen changing device is 0.
Condition 2 : SW56==1 The current control station is Station No. 1.
Operation : GD100=2 Screen No. is changed to 2 (for Station No. 1).
Condition 1 : GD100==0 The value of the screen changing device is 0.
Condition 2 : SW56==2 The current control station is Station No. 2.
Operation : GD100=102 Screen No. is changed to 102 (for Station No. 2).
Condition 1 : GD100==0 The value of the screen changing device is 0.
Condition 2 : SW56>2 The current control station is not a redundant CPU.
Operation : GD100=2 Screen No. is changed to 2 (for Station No. 1).
4.1 Controller that can be Monitored and the Accessible Range 4 - 59
3. Set monitor screens. Create a monitor screen with each object whose network setting is Station No. 1 on Screen No. 2 to 3. Create a monitor screen with each object whose network setting is Station No. 2 on Screen No. 102 to 103.
4. Change the screen switching device value in the script. By selecting [Common] [Script] [Script], create a script for each monitor screen that checks the SM1515 status of the current monitor station, and if it is OFF (standby system), changes the station number switching device value. Set the trigger type of the script as [Ordinary] or [Sampling(about 3s)].
Screen scripts
// The script of Screen No. 2 to 3 (for Station No.1)
// If the monitoring target is a standby station, the screen is changed to the other one.
if ([1-1: b: SM1515]==OFF){
//Is Station No.1 standby?
if([w: GD100]<100){
[w: GD100]= [w: GD100]+100;
//The screen is changed from Station No.1 to 2.
}
}
// The script of Screen No. 102 to 103 (for Station No.2)
// If the monitoring target is a standby station, the screen is changed to the other one.
if ([1-2: b: SM1515]==OFF){
//Is Station No.2 standby?
if([w: GD100]>100){
[w: GD100]= [w: GD100]-100;
//The screen is changed from Station No.2 to 1.
}
}
Script screen of Screen No. 2 (for Station 1) Script screen of Screen No. 102 (for Station 2)
4 - 60 4.1 Controller that can be Monitored and the Accessible Range
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
4.1.6 Access range of the data link system (MELSECNET/B, (II))
(1) CPU direct connection, Computer link connection
(a) When connecting to the master station
Local stations can be monitored. When the PLC CPU of the local station is QnACPU, devices other than B and W that are allocated by the link parameter cannot be monitored.
(b) When connecting to the local station
The master station can be monitored. However, when the PLC CPU of the local station is QnACPU, devices other than B and W that are allocated by the link parameter cannot be monitored.
Other local stations cannot be monitored.
(c) When connecting to the master station on the third layer
The master station on the second layer and local stations on the third layer can be monitored. However, when the PLC CPU of the local station is QnACPU, devices other than B and W that are allocated by the link parameter cannot be monitored.
Local stations on the second layer cannot be monitored.
(d) When connecting to ACPU or QnACPU Only other stations with the same PLC CPU type of the connected station can be monitored.
(2) Monitoring devices of other stations If devices of other stations on the data link system are monitored, the display speed will be significantly reduced. Therefore monitor the link relay (B) and link register (W) that are allocated by the link parameter.
L3
M
L1
L2
GT SoftGOT1000
GT SoftGOT1000
L1
L2
M
L3
GT SoftGOT1000 L3
M
L1
L2 m
2
1 3
4.1 Controller that can be Monitored and the Accessible Range 4 - 61
(3) Setting method of monitor device The following example describes the method of setting the network No. and the station numbers when setting monitor devices .
(a) Monitoring the connected station (host station) and B and W allocated by the link parameter Specify the host station. For monitoring devices B and W that are allocated by the link parameter, use the host device number even when designating devices allocated to another station. Otherwise, the display speed will be reduced.
(b) Monitoring devices of other stations Network No.: 0, Station number: Refer to the following table.
Setting of the station No.
Station to be accessed
Station connected
to GT SoftGOT1000
M L1 L2
m L3 1 2 3
M Host Other 1 Other 2 Other 3
L1 Other 0 Host
L2
m Other 0 Host Other 1 Other 2 Other 3
L3 Other 0 Host
1 Other 0 Host
2 Other 0 Host
3 Other 0 Host
GT SoftGOT1000
L3
M
L1
L2 m
2
1 3
4 - 62 4.1 Controller that can be Monitored and the Accessible Range
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
4.2 Type of PC to Be Used
The system configuration and connection conditions differ according to the type of the PC used with GT SoftGOT1000.
PC/AT compatible PC Connect a PC/AT compatible PC with the controller using a cable. Use an interface board according to the communication type.
PC CPU Mount a PC CPU to the base unit of Q series PLC CPU. Bus connection is available between PC CPUs on the same base unit. In other connection types, connect a PC CPU with the controller using a cable.
4.3 Connectable Devices
Applicable CPU Refer to the following for PLC CPUs that can be monitored from GT SoftGOT1000.
4.1.1 Controller that allows monitoring
Controllers that can be monitored in each connection type Refer to the following for GT SoftGOT1000 connection types and PLC CPUs that can be monitored in each connection type.
4.1.2 Monitorable controllers
4.4 Converter/Cable to Be Used
Converter/Cable used in GT SoftGOT1000 The converter/cable used for the GX Developer can be applied to the GT SoftGOT1000.
PC CPUPC/AT compatible PC
4.2 Type of PC to Be Used 4 - 63
4.5 Bus Connection
4.5.1 System configurations and connection conditions
*1 Connect the PC CPU with a PLC CPU on the same base unit as the PC CPU.
*2 When starting up multiple GT SoftGOT1000 modules, monitoring is enabled on the multiple screens.
4.5.2 GT SoftGOT1000 setting
When communicating GT SoftGOT1000 to a PLC in bus connection, communication setup is required. Refer to the following for performing GT SoftGOT1000 communication setup.
3.6.1 Communication setup dialog box
PLC
Connection cable Max. distance GT SoftGOT1000 Number of connectable
equipmentModel name Communication
type
QCPU (Q mode) Bus *1 *1 PC CPU 1*2
Main base PLC CPU PC CPU
4 - 64 4.5 Bus Connection
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
4.6 Direct CPU Connection
4.6.1 System configurations and connection conditions
*1 For the motion controller CPU (Q series), only the PLC CPU area (CPU No.1) in the Q170MCPU and Q170MSCPU can be
monitored.
*2 When starting up multiple GT SoftGOT1000 modules, monitoring is enabled on the multiple screens.
*3 RS-232 (via a QCPU in the multiple CPU system)
USB (same as QCPU (Q mode))
PLC
Connection cable Max. distance GT SoftGOT1000 Number of connectable equipment*2 Model name
Communication
type
RCPU USB
USB 1)
USB 4)
USB 6)
5m
PC/AT compatible
PC
PC CPU
1
QCPU (Q mode) RS-232
USB
RS-232 1)
USB 1)
USB 2)
USB 3)
USB 4)
USB 5)
RS-232:3m
USB:3m
1
(2 units are connectable when using
both RS-232 and USB connections.)
QCPU (A mode) RS-232 RS-232 1) 3m 1
C controller Same as QCPU (Q mode)*3
QSCPU USB USB 5) 3m
PC/AT compatible
PC
PC CPU
1
LCPU RS-232
USB
RS-232 1)
USB 1)
USB 2)
RS-232:3m
USB:3m
1
(2 units are connectable when using
both RS-232 and USB connections.)
QnACPU RS-422 RS-422 1) 15m 1
ACPU RS-422 RS-422 1) 15m 1
MELSEC iQ-F RS-232 RS-232 2) 4.5m 1
FXCPU
RS-232
RS-422
USB*5
RS-232 2)
RS-422 1)
RS-422 2)
USB 1)
RS-232:4.5m
RS-422:4.5m
USB:3m
1
Motion
controller CPU
MELSEC iQ-R
series USB
USB 1)
USB 4)
USB 6)
5m 1
Q series*1 RS-232
USB
RS-232 1)
USB 1)
USB 2)
USB 3)
USB 4)
USB 5)
RS-232:3m
USB:3m
1
(2 units are connectable when using
both RS-232 and USB connections.)
A series RS-422 RS-422 1) 15m 1
MELSECNET/H remote I/O station RS-232 RS-232 1) 3m 1
CC-Link IE Field Network head unit RS-232 USB 1)
USB 2) 3m 1
CNC C70 Same as QCPU (Q mode)*4
CRnQ-700, CR750-Q, CR751-Q
PLC CPU GT SoftGOT1000
Connection cable
4.6 Direct CPU Connection 4 - 65
*4 Access the CPU via a QCPU in the multiple CPU system.
*5 For the FX3G series and the FX3GC series, the connection with a USB cable is available.
4.6.2 Connection cable
RS-232 1)
(1) MITSUBISHI SYSTEM & SERVICE product
*1 For the motion controller CPU (Q series), only the PLC CPU area (CPU No.1) in the Q170MCPU and Q170MSCPU can be
monitored.
*2 The adapter L6ADP-R2 is required for the connection with LCPU.
RS-232 2)
(1) MITSUBISHI SYSTEM & SERVICE product
Use the cables to connect to the function extension board or function adaptor of MELSEC iQ-F and FXCPU. The following table shows the available communication types.
(a) The following communication types are available in the GT01-C30R2-9S.
RS-232 cable*1*2
Controller: MINI-DIN 6-pin Personal computer: D-sub 9-pin
GT01-C30R2-6P (3m)
RS-232 cable
GT01-C30R2-9S(3m)
GT01-C30R2-25P(3m)
Model name Function expansion board Function adapter PC side connector
FX5U FX5-232-BD - 9-pin D-sub
FX5U,
FX5UC - FX5-232ADP 9-pin D-sub
FX3U series,
FX3UC series
(FX3UC- -LT)
FX3U-232-BD -
9-pin D-subFX3U-232-BD, FX3U-485-BD,
FX3U-422-BD, FX3U-USB-BD,
FX3U-CNV-BD
FX3U-232ADP, FX3U-232ADP-MB
FX3UC series
(FX3UC- /D,
FX3UC- /DSS)
- FX3U-232ADP, FX3U-232ADP-MB 9-pin D-sub
FX3S series
FX3G-232BD -
9-pin D-sub -
FX3S-CNV-ADP + FX3U-232ADP,
FX3U-232ADP-MB
FX3G series
FX3G-232BD -
9-pin D-sub -
FX3S-CNV-ADP + FX3U-232ADP,
FX3U-232ADP-MB
FX3GC series - FX3U-232ADP, FX3U-232ADP-MB 9-pin D-sub
FX2N series FX2N-232-BD -
9-pin D-sub FX2N-CNV-BD FX2NC-232ADP
FX1NC,
FX2NC series - FX2NC-232ADP 9-pin D-sub
4 - 66 4.6 Direct CPU Connection
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
(b) The following communication types are available in the GT01-C30R2-25P.
FX1S, FX1N series FX1N-232-BD -
9-pin D-sub FX1N-CNV-BD FX2NC-232ADP
Model name Function expansion board Function adapter PC side connector
FX3U series,
FX3UC series
(FX3UC- -LT)
FX3U-232-BD -
25-pin D-subFX3U-232-BD, FX3U-485-BD,
FX3U-422-BD, FX3U-USB-BD,
FX3U-CNV-BD
FX3U-232ADP, FX3U-232ADP-MB
FX3UC series
(FX3UC- /D,
FX3UC- /DSS)
- FX3U-232ADP, FX3U-232ADP-MB 25-pin D-sub
FX3S series
FX3G-232BD -
25-pin D-sub -
FX3S-CNV-ADP + FX3U-232ADP,
FX3U-232ADP-MB
FX3G series
FX3G-232BD -
25-pin D-sub -
FX3S-CNV-ADP + FX3U-232ADP,
FX3U-232ADP-MB
FX3GC series - FX3U-232ADP, FX3U-232ADP-MB 25-pin D-sub
FX2N series
FX2N-CNV-BD FX0N-232ADP 9-pin D-sub
FX2N-232-BD - 25-pin D-sub
FX2N-CNV-BD FX2NC-232ADP
FX1NC,
FX2NC series
- FX0N-232ADP 9-pin D-sub
- FX2NC-232ADP 25-pin D-sub
FX1S, FX1N series
FX1N-CNV-BD FX0N-232ADP 9-pin D-sub
FX1N-232-BD - 25-pin D-sub
FX1N-CNV-BD FX2NC-232ADP
Model name Function expansion board Function adapter PC side connector
4.6 Direct CPU Connection 4 - 67
RS-422 1)
(1) MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC product
*1 A straight cable for conversion between 9-pin D-sub and 25-pin D-sub is required separately.
*2 How to distinguish products compatible with QnACPU, ACPU.
Check the model name label of the cable.
*3 When connecting the FX-232AWC-H to the FX3UC/FX3UCPU, transmission speed of 9600/19200/38400/57600/115200 bps is
available.
When connecting the FX-232AWC or FX-232AW, either of transmission speed of 9600/19200bps is available.
PLC CPU Side(RS-422 cable) RS-232/RS-422 Converter*3 PC side (RS-232 cable)
FX-422CAB (0.3m), FX-422CAB-150 (1.5m)
(For connecting to QnACPU, ACPU, motion controller
CPU (A series), FX1CPU, FX2CPU, or FX2cCPU)
FX-232AW
FX-232AWC
FX-232AWC-H
(FX series only)
F2-232CAB(3m)*1*2
(For the 25-pin D-sub connector of the PC side)
F2-232CAB-1(3m)*2
(For the 9-pin D-sub connector of the PC side)
FX-422CAB0 (1.5m)
(For connecting to FX0/FX0S/FX0N/FX1S/FX1N/FX2N/
FX1NC/FX2NC/FX3UC/FX3U/FX3G/FX3GCCPU) AC30N2A(3m)*1
(For the 25-pin D-sub connector of the PC side)
F2-232CAB Y990C*****
F2-232CAB-1 Y990C*****
F2-232CAB(F/FX/A) Y990C*****
F2-232CAB-1(F/FX/A) Y990C*****
Icompatible products Compatible products (with indication of F/FX/A)
4 - 68 4.6 Direct CPU Connection
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
RS-422 2)
(1) MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC product
*1 Drivers respectively stored in the CD-ROMs included in the FX-USB-AW and FX3U-USB-BD must be installed on the personal
computer for using the converters. (The converters can be used by assigning the USB-serial conversion driver to the COM
number.)
USB cable 1) With RCPU, LCPU, Universal model QCPU, FXCPU, or CC-Link IE Field Network head module
(1) MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC product
(2) Product manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric System & Service Co., Ltd.
Refer to the following for FXCPU-applicable USB cables other than the above.
FX3G USER'S MANUAL [Hardware Edition]
RS-232/RS-422 Converter PC side (RS-232 cable)
(Use the cable included in the FX-USB-AW.)
(Use the cable included in the FX3U-USB-BD.)
USB cable
Controller: USB Mini-B Personal computer: USB TYPE-A
MR-J3USBCBL3M (3m)
USB cable
Controller: USB Mini-B Personal computer: USB TYPE-A
GT09-C30USB-5P (3m)
FX-USB-AW*1
FX3U-USB-BD*1
(FX3UC/FX3U only)
4.6 Direct CPU Connection 4 - 69
USB cable 2) With LCPU, Universal model QCPU or CC-Link IE Field Network head module
(1) Product manufactured by ELECOM CO., LTD. (Recommended Product)
(2) Product manufactured by LOAS CO., LTD. (Recommended Product)
USB cable 3) With Universal model QCPU
(1) Product manufactured by ELECOM CO., LTD. (Recommended Product)
USB cable 4) With RCPU or Universal model QCPU
(1) Product manufactured by BUFFALO KOKUYO SUPPLY INC. (Recommended Product)
USB cable 5) With Basic model QCPU, High Performance model QCPU, Process CPU, Redundant CPU, QSCPU
(1) Product manufactured by ELECOM CO., LTD. (Recommended Product)
USB cable
Controller: USB Mini-B Personal computer: USB TYPE-A
USB-M53 (3m)
USB cable
Controller: USB Mini-B Personal computer: USB TYPE-A
ZUM-430 (3m)
USB cable/USB conversion adapter
Controller: USB Mini-B Personal computer: USB TYPE-A
+
AD-USBBFTM5M USB2-30 (3m)
USB cable/USB conversion adapter
Controller: USB Mini-B Personal computer: USB TYPE-A
+
AUXUBM5 AU2-30(3m)
USB cable
Controller: USB TYPE-B Personal computer: USB TYPE-A
USB2-30 (3m)
4 - 70 4.6 Direct CPU Connection
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
(2) Product manufactured by BUFFALO KOKUYO SUPPLY INC. (Recommended Product)
USB cable 6) With Universal model RCPU
(1) Product manufactured by SANWA SUPPLY INC. (Recommended Product)
4.6.3 GT SoftGOT1000 setting
When communicating GT SoftGOT1000 to a PLC in CPU direct connection, communication setup is required. Refer to the following for performing GT SoftGOT1000 communication setup.
3.6.1 Communication setup dialog box
USB cable
Controller: USB TYPE-B Personal computer: USB TYPE-A
AU2-30 (3m)
USB cable
Controller: USB Mini-B Personal computer: USB TYPE-A
KU-AMB530(3m) or KU-AMB550(5m)
4.6 Direct CPU Connection 4 - 71
4.6.4 Precautions
Converters/cables
(1) Specifications and precautions for converters/cables Refer to the manuals for each product for the specifications and precautions for converters/cables.
(2) Inserting and removing a converter/cable that receives electricity from the 5VDC power Turn the PLC CPU side power OFF before inserting and removing the converter/cable that receives electricity from the PLC CPU side 5VDC power.
(3) Inserting and removing a converter/cable that does not receive electricity from the 5VDC power Refer to the following procedures (a) to (g) when inserting and removing the peripheral device or cable that does not receive electricity from the PLC side 5VDC power (receives from an external power supply).
(a) Make sure to touch the static discharge wrist strap or grounded metal before operation and discharge electrostatic from cables, human body or others.
(b) Turn off the PC.
(c) Turn off the converter. Ground the FG terminal if provided.
(d) Insert and remove the converter/cable connected to the PC and PLC.
(e) Turn on the converter.
(f) Turn on the PC.
(g) Start the software package.
USB cable
(1) Before using USB cable The USB cable can be used with the USB driver already installed.
(2) Number of connectable programmable controllers when using USB cable A single programmable controller can be connected when using the USB cable. The following shows the system configurations, which do not meet the above conditions.
(3) Precautions for connecting programmable controller Connect or remove the USB cable, reset a programmable controller or turn the power on/off after stop the monitor.
( 3.10 Monitor Stop)
If operated without stop, a communication timeout occurs, which cannot be fixed. If not fixed, remove the USB cable completely. After 5 seconds or more, reconnect the cable. (The error may occur at first communication after the above operation. From the next time, the programmable controller functions normally.)
QCPU (Q mode)
USB cable
QCPU (Q mode) USB cable
Connecting from a personal computer with multiple USB ports to
multiple QCPUs (Qmode)
QCPU (Q mode)
USB cable USB cable
QCPU (Q mode)
USB cable
Connecting from a personal computer to multiple QCPUs (Q mode)
through USB hub
USB hub
4 - 72 4.6 Direct CPU Connection
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
4.7 Computer Link Connection
4.7.1 System configurations and connection conditions
PLC
Connection cable Max.
distance GT SoftGOT1000
Number of
connectable
equipment*1Model name Communication unit Communication
type
RCPU RJ71C24,
RJ71C24-R2
RS-232
RS-232 1)
15m
PC/AT compatible
PC
PC CPU
1
QCPU (Q mode)
QJ71C24,
QJ71C24-R2,
QJ71C24N,
QJ71C24N-R2,
QJ71CMO,
QJ71CMON
QCPU (A mode)
A1SJ71UC24-R2,
A1SJ71UC24-PRF,
A1SJ71C24-R2,
A1SJ71C24-PRF
RS-232 2)
C controller*4
MELSEC
iQ-R series
RJ71C24,
RJ71C24-R2
RS-232 1)
Q series
QJ71C24,
QJ71C24-R2,
QJ71C24N,
QJ71C24N-R2,
QJ71CMO,
QJ71CMON
LCPU LJ71C24,
LJ71C24-R2 RS-232 1)
QnACPU
AJ71QC24,
AJ71QC24-R2,
AJ71QC24N,
AJ71QC24N-R2,
A1SJ71QC24,
A1SJ71QC24-R2,
A1SJ71QC24N,
A1SJ71QC24N-R2
RS-232 2)
ACPU
AJ71C24-S8,
AJ71UC24,
A1SJ71C24-R2,
A1SJ71C24-PRF,
A1SJ71UC24-R2,
A1SJ71UC24-PRF
RS-232 2)
GT SoftGOT1000PLC CPU
Connection cable
Serial communication
module Computer link
module
4.7 Computer Link Connection 4 - 73
*1 When starting up multiple GT SoftGOT1000 modules, monitoring is enabled on the multiple screens.
*2 For the motion controller CPU (Q series), only the PLC CPU area (CPU No.1) in the Q170MCPU and Q170MSCPU can be
monitored.
*3 The multiple CPU system with the QCPU (Q mode) is mounted on.
*4 Use the serial port of a serial communication module controlled by another CPU on the multiple CPU.
4.7.2 Serial communication module, computer link module
The following table shows connectable serial communication modules and computer link modules. Connection via RS-422 communication cannot be used.
*1 For the motion controller CPU (Q series), only the PLC CPU area (CPU No.1) in the Q170MCPU and Q170MSCPU can be
monitored.
Motion controller
CPU
MELSEC
iQ-R series
RJ71C24,
RJ71C24-R2
RS-232
RS-232 1)
15m
PC/AT compatible
PC
PC CPU
1
Q series*2
QJ71C24,
QJ71C24-R2,
QJ71C24N,
QJ71C24N-R2,
QJ71CMO,
QJ71CMON
RS-232 1)
A series
AJ71C24-S8,
AJ71UC24,
A1SJ71C24-R2,
A1SJ71C24-PRF,
A1SJ71UC24-R2,
A1SJ71UC24-PRF
RS-232 2)
CNC C70*3
Same as QCPU (Q mode) CRnQ-700*3
Item Model name
RCPU RJ71C24, RJ71C24-R2
QCPU (Q mode) QJ71C24, QJ71C24-R2, QJ71C24N, QJ71C24N-R2, QJ71CMO, QJ71CMON
QCPU (A mode) A1SJ71UC24-R2, A1SJ71UC24-PRF, A1SJ71C24-R2, A1SJ71C24-PRF
LCPU LJ71C24, LJ71C24-R2
QnACPU AJ71QC24, AJ71QC24-R2, AJ71QC24N, AJ71QC24N-R2, A1SJ71QC24, A1SJ71QC24-R2,
A1SJ71QC24N, A1SJ71QC24N-R2
ACPU AJ71C24-S8, AJ71UC24, A1SJ71C24-R2, A1SJ71C24-PRF, A1SJ71UC24-R2, A1SJ71UC24-PRF
Motion controller CPU (MELSEC iQ-R series) RJ71C24, RJ71C24-R2
Motion controller CPU (Q series)*1 QJ71C24, QJ71C24-R2, QJ71C24N, QJ71C24N-R2, QJ71CMO, QJ71CMON
Motion controller CPU (A series) AJ71C24-S8, AJ71UC24, A1SJ71C24-R2, A1SJ71C24-PRF, A1SJ71UC24-R2, A1SJ71UC24-PRF
PLC
Connection cable Max.
distance GT SoftGOT1000
Number of
connectable
equipment*1Model name Communication unit Communication
type
4 - 74 4.7 Computer Link Connection
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
4.7.3 Connection cable
RS-232 1)
(1) Connection example which can turn ON/OFF CD signal (No. 1 pin)
(2) Connection example which cannot turn ON/OFF CD signal (No. 1 pin) Connection example for exercising CD code control or DTR/DSR control.
RS-232 2)
(1) MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC product
*1 When the port on the PC side is 9-pin D-sub, a 9-25 pin converter is required separately.
RS-232 cable
Controller: D-sub 25-pin Personal computer: D-sub 25-pin
AC30N2A(3m)*1
Cable Connection and Signal Direction (Connection example for full duplex/half duplex communication)
RS(RTS)
SD(TXD)
RD(RXD)
DSR(DR)
SG
DTR(ER)
CD
CS(CTS)
-
CD
RD(RXD)
SD(TXD)
DTR(ER)
SG
DSR(DR)
RS(RTS)
CS(CTS)
-
7
3
2
6
5
4
1
8
9
PLC side
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
GT SoftGOT1000 side
Cable Connection and Signal Direction (Connection example for full duplex)
RS(RTS)
SD(TXD)
RD(RXD)
DSR(DR)
SG
DTR(ER)
CD
CS(CTS)
-
CD
RD(RXD)
SD(TXD)
DTR(ER)
SG
DSR(DR)
RS(RTS)
CS(CTS)
-
7
3
2
6
5
4
1
8
9
PLC side
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
GT SoftGOT1000 side
4.7 Computer Link Connection 4 - 75
(2) User-created QnA Series (large-scale QC24(N))
(a) Example of connection to an external device that allows the CD signal (No. 8 pin) to be turned ON/OFF
* DC code control or DTR/DSR control is enabled by connecting the QC24 (N) to an external device as shown above.
(b) Example of connection to an external device that does not allow the CD signal (No. 8 pin) to be turned ON/ OFF
* DC code control or DTR/DSR control is enabled by connecting the QC24 (N) to an external device as shown above.
QnA Series (compact-scale QC24(N))
(a) Example of connection to an external device that allows the CD signal (No.1 pin) to be turned ON/OFF
* DC code control or DTR/DSR control is enabled by connecting the QC24 (N) to an external device as shown above.
Cable Connection and Signal Direction (Connection example for full duplex/half duplex communication)
CS(CTS)
SD(TXD)
RD(RXD)
DSR(DR)
SG
DTR(ER)
RS
CD
FG
CD
RD(RXD)
SD(TXD)
DTR(ER)
SG
DSR(DR)
RS(RTS)
CS(CTS)
-
5
2
3
6
7
20
4
8
1
PLC side
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
GT SoftGOT1000 side
Cable Connection and Signal Direction (Connection example for full duplex)
CS(CTS)
SD(TXD)
RD(RXD)
DSR(DR)
SG
DTR(ER)
RS
CD
FG
CD
RD(RXD)
SD(TXD)
DTR(ER)
SG
DSR(DR)
RS(RTS)
CS(CTS)
-
5
2
3
6
7
20
4
8
1
PLC side
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
GT SoftGOT1000 side
Cable Connection and Signal Direction (Connection example for full duplex/half duplex communication)
RS(RTS)
SD(TXD)
RD(RXD)
DSR(DR)
SG
DTR(ER)
CD
CS(CTS)
-
CD
RD(RXD)
SD(TXD)
DTR(ER)
SG
DSR(DR)
RS(RTS)
CS(CTS)
-
7
3
2
6
5
4
1
8
9
PLC side
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
GT SoftGOT1000 side
4 - 76 4.7 Computer Link Connection
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
(b) Example of connection to an external device that does not allow the CD signal (No. 1 pin) to be turned ON/ OFF
* DC code control or DTR/DSR control is enabled by connecting the QC24 (N) to an external device as shown above.
A series
(a) Connection example 1 when the C24 (computer link module) has a 25-pin connector
(b) Connection example 2 when the C24 (computer link module) has a 25-pin connector
* When performing a communication in the connection shown above, the CD signal is not required to be connected. For the RS-
232C CD terminal check setting (set by the buffer memory address "10BH"), specify "without CD terminal check (writing "1")"
Cable Connection and Signal Direction (Connection example for full duplex)
RS(RTS)
SD(TXD)
RD(RXD)
DSR(DR)
SG
DTR(ER)
CD
CS(CTS)
-
CD
RD(RXD)
SD(TXD)
DTR(ER)
SG
DSR(DR)
RS(RTS)
CS(CTS)
-
7
3
2
6
5
4
1
8
9
PLC side
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
GT SoftGOT1000 side
Cable Connection and Signal Direction
FG
RD(RXD)
SD(TXD)
RS
CD
DTR(ER)
SG
CS(CTS)
DSR(DR)
FG
SD(TXD)
RD(RXD)
RS
CS(CTS)
DSR(DR)
SG
CD
DTR(ER)
1
3
2
4
8
20
7
5
6
PLC side
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
20
GT SoftGOT1000 side
Cable Connection and Signal Direction
FG
RD(RXD)
SD(TXD)
RS
CD
DTR(ER)
SG
CS(CTS)
DSR(DR)
FG
SD(TXD)
RD(RXD)
RS
CS(CTS)
DSR(DR)
SG
CD
DTR(ER)
1
3
2
4
8
20
7
5
6
PLC side
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
20
GT SoftGOT1000 side
4.7 Computer Link Connection 4 - 77
(c) Connection example 1 when the C24 (computer link module) has a 9-pin connector
(d) Connection example 2 when the C24 (computer link module) has a 9-pin connector
*1 DC code control or DTR/DSR control is enabled by connecting the DTR and DSR signals of the computer link module to an
external device as shown above.
*2 When performing a communication in the connection shown above, the CD signal is not required to be connected.
For the RS-232C CD terminal check setting (set by the buffer memory address "10BH"), specify "without CD terminal check
(writing "1")".
Cable Connection and Signal Direction
CS(CTS)
SD(TXD)
RD(RXD)
DSR(DR)
SG
DTR(ER)
RS(RTS)
CD
-
CD
RD(RXD)
SD(TXD)
DTR(ER)
SG
DSR(DR)
RS(RTS)
CS(CTS)
-
8
3
2
6
5
4
7
1
9
PLC side
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
GT SoftGOT1000 side
Cable Connection and Signal Direction
CD
SD(TXD)
RD(RXD)
DSR(DR)
SG
DTR(ER)
RS(RTS)
CS(CTS)
-
CD
RD(RXD)
SD(TXD)
DTR(ER)
SG
DSR(DR)
RS(RTS)
CS(CTS)
-
1
3
2
6
5
4
7
8
9
PLC side
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
GT SoftGOT1000 side
4 - 78 4.7 Computer Link Connection
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
4.7.4 GT SoftGOT1000 side
When communicating GT SoftGOT1000 to a PLC in computer link connection, communication setup is required. The following table shows the transmission specifications for a serial communication module or a computer link module.
Refer to the following for performing GT SoftGOT1000 communication setup.
3.6.1 Communication setup dialog box
4.7.5 Controller setting
When connecting to serial communication module (MELSEC iQ series, Q series, L series) No switch setting is required for the serial communication module (MELSEC iQ series, Q series, L series). (GOT monitors via it without making switch setting in the I/O assignment setting of GX Developer.) The following settings are also available for monitoring, according to the CH (interface) of the module to be connected with GT SoftGOT1000. For the GX Developer operating method, refer to the GX Developer Operating Manual.
Model name
Settings
Transmission
speed Data length Stop bit Parity bit Sum check
Serial communication
module
(MELSEC iQ-R series)
RJ71C24,
RJ71C24-R2
9600bps/
19200bps/
38400bps/
57600bps/
115200bps
8 bits 1 bit Yes (odd) Yes
Serial communication
module
(Q series)
QJ71C24,
QJ71C24-R2,
QJ71C24N,
QJ71C24N-R2,
QJ71CMO,
QJ71CMON
Serial communication
module
(L series)
LJ71C24,
LJ71C24-R2
Serial communication
module
(QnA series)
AJ71QC24N,
AJ71QC24N-R2,
A1SJ71QC24N,
A1SJ71QC24N-R2
AJ71QC24,
AJ71QC24-R2,
A1SJ71QC24,
A1SJ71QC24-R2
9600bps/
19200bps
Computer link module
AJ71C24-S8,
AJ71UC24,
A1SJ71C24-R2,
A1SJ71C24-PRF,
A1SJ71UC24-R2,
A1SJ71UC24-PRF
Channel where GT
SoftGOT1000 is connected
Settings
Switch 1 Switch 2 Switch 3 Switch 4 Switch 5
CH1 0000 0000 0000
CH2 0000 0000 0000
4.7 Computer Link Connection 4 - 79
When connecting to serial communication module (QnA series)
*1 38400 bps, 57600 bps and 115200 bps can be set only for the following modules.
AJ71QC24N AJ71QC24N-R2 A1SJ71QC24N A1SJ71QC24N-R2
When connecting to computer link module
(1) AJ71C24-S8
Switch Baud rate (Transmission speed)*1
9600bps 19200bps 38400bps 57600bps 115200bps
Station number switch 0
Mode switch 5
sw01 OFF
sw02 ON
sw03 ON
sw04 OFF
sw05 OFF
sw06 ON
sw07 ON
sw08 OFF
sw09 ON OFF ON OFF ON
sw10 OFF ON ON ON ON
sw11 ON ON ON OFF OFF
sw12 OFF OFF OFF ON ON
Switch
RS-232 communication
Baud rate (Transmission speed)
9600bps 19200bps
Station number switch 0
Mode switch 1
sw11 OFF
sw12 ON
sw13 ON OFF
sw14 OFF ON
sw15 ON ON
sw16 ON
sw17 OFF
sw18 OFF
sw21 ON
sw22 ON
sw23 OFF
sw24 OFF
4 - 80 4.7 Computer Link Connection
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
(2) AJ71UC24
(3) A1SJ71UC24-R2, A1SJ71C24-R2, A1SJ71UC24-PRF and A1SJ71C24-PRF
Switch
RS-232 communication
Baud rate (Transmission speed)
9600bps 19200bps
Station number switch 0
Mode switch 1
sw11 OFF
sw12 ON
sw13 ON OFF
sw14 OFF ON
sw15 ON ON
sw16 ON
sw17 OFF
sw18 OFF
sw21 ON
sw22 ON
sw23 ON
sw24 OFF
Switch
RS-232 communication
Baud rate (Transmission speed)
9600bps 19200bps
Station number switch No applicable switch
Mode switch 1
SW01 No applicable switch
SW02 No applicable switch
sw03 OFF
sw04 ON
sw05 ON OFF
sw06 OFF ON
sw07 ON ON
sw08 ON
sw09 ON
sw10 OFF
sw11 OFF
sw12 ON
4.7 Computer Link Connection 4 - 81
4.8 Ethernet Connection
4.8.1 System configurations and connection conditions
PLC Connection
cable*4 Max. distance
GT
SoftGOT1000
Number of connectable
equipment*2
Model name Ethernet module Communication
type
Personal
computer*6 PLC*7
RCPU (Built-in Ethernet port)*8
Ethernet Twisted pair
cable
100m
(max. segment
length)
PC/AT
compatible PC
PC CPU
128 128 RJ71EN71
QCPU (Q mode)
(Built-in Ethernet port)*8
Ethernet Twisted pair
cable
100m
(max. segment
length)
PC/AT
compatible PC
PC CPU 128*5 128
QJ71E71,
QJ71E71-B2,
QJ71E71-B5,
QJ71E71-100
QCPU (A mode)
AJ71E71-S3,
A1SJ71E71-B2-S3,
A1SJ71E71-B5-S3,
AJ71E71N-T,
AJ71E71N-B5,
AJ71E71N-B2,
AJ71E71N3-T,
AJ71E71N-B5T,
A1SJ71E71N-T,
A1SJ71E71N-B2,
A1SJ71E71N-B5,
A1SJ71E71N-B5T,
A1SJ71E71N3-T
Ethernet Twisted pair
cable
100m
(max. segment
length)
PC/AT
compatible PC
PC CPU
128 128
C controller
MELSEC
iQ-R series
(Built-in Ethernet port)*8
Ethernet Twisted pair
cable
100m
(max. segment
length)
PC/AT
compatible PC
PC CPU
1 128 RJ71EN71
Q series
(Built-in Ethernet port)*8
Ethernet Twisted pair
cable
100m
(max. segment
length)
PC/AT
compatible PC
PC CPU
16 128 QJ71E71,
QJ71E71-B2,
QJ71E71-B5,
QJ71E71-100
QSCPU
QJ71E71,
QJ71E71-B2,
QJ71E71-B5,
QJ71E71-100
Ethernet Twisted pair
cable
100m
(max. segment
length)
PC/AT
compatible PC
PC CPU
128 128
LCPU (Built-in Ethernet port)*8
Ethernet Twisted pair
cable
100m
(max. segment
length)
PC/AT
compatible PC
PC CPU
16 128 LJ71E71-100
Ethernet modulePLC CPU GT SoftGOT1000
Connection cable
4 - 82 4.8 Ethernet Connection
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
QnACPU
AJ71QE71,
AJ71QE71-B5,
AJ71QE71N-T,
AJ71QE71N-B2,
AJ71QE71N-B5,
AJ71QE71N-B5T,
AJ71QE71N3-T,
A1SJ71QE71-B2,
A1SJ71QE71-B5,
A1SJ71QE71N-T,
A1SJ71QE71N-B2,
A1SJ71QE71N-B5,
A1SJ71QE71N-B5T,
A1SJ71QE71N3-T Ethernet Twisted pair
cable
100m
(max. segment
length)
PC/AT
compatible PC
PC CPU
128 128
ACPU
AJ71E71-S3,
A1SJ71E71-B2-S3,
A1SJ71E71-B5-S3,
AJ71E71N-T,
AJ71E71N-B5,
AJ71E71N-B2,
AJ71E71N3-T,
AJ71E71N-B5T,
A1SJ71E71N-T,
A1SJ71E71N-B2,
A1SJ71E71N-B5,
A1SJ71E71N-B5T,
A1SJ71E71N3-T
MELSEC iQ-F (Built-in Ethernet port)*8 Ethernet Twisted pair
cable
100m
(max. segment
length)
PC/AT
compatible PC
PC CPU
8 128
FXCPU FX3U-ENET-L,
FX3U-ENET-ADP Ethernet
Twisted pair
cable
100m
(max. segment
length)
PC/AT
compatible PC
PC CPU
2 128
Motion
controller CPU
MELSEC
iQ-R series RJ71EN71
Ethernet Twisted pair
cable
100m
(max. segment
length)
PC/AT
compatible PC
PC CPU
128 128
Q series*1
QJ71E71,
QJ71E71-B2,
QJ71E71-B5,
QJ71E71-100
A series
AJ71E71-S3,
A1SJ71E71-B2-S3,
A1SJ71E71-B5-S3,
AJ71E71N-T,
AJ71E71N-B5,
AJ71E71N-B2,
AJ71E71N3-T,
AJ71E71N-B5T,
A1SJ71E71N-T,
A1SJ71E71N-B2,
A1SJ71E71N-B5,
A1SJ71E71N-B5T,
A1SJ71E71N3-T
CC-Link IE Field Network
Ethernet adapter module (Built-in Ethernet port)*8
CNC C70*3 (Built-in Ethernet port)*8
PLC Connection
cable*4 Max. distance
GT
SoftGOT1000
Number of connectable
equipment*2
Model name Ethernet module Communication
type
Personal
computer*6 PLC*7
4.8 Ethernet Connection 4 - 83
*1 For the motion controller CPU (Q series), only the PLC CPU area (CPU No.1) in the Q170MCPU and Q170MSCPU can be
monitored.
*2 When starting up multiple GT SoftGOT1000 modules, monitoring is enabled on the multiple screens.
*3 Ethernet is connected to Display I/F.
*4 The destination connected with the twisted pair cable varies with the configuration of the applicable Ethernet network system.
Connect to the Ethernet module, hub, transceiver, or other system equipment corresponding to the applicable Ethernet network
system.
Use cables, connectors, and hubs that meet the IEEE802.3 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX standard.
*5 Number of connectable equipment is 16 for Q03UDECPU, Q04UDEHCPU, Q06UDEHCPU, Q10UDEHCPU, Q13UDEHCPU,
Q20UDEHCPU, Q26UDEHCPU, Q50UDEHCPU, Q100UDEHCPU, Q03UDVCPU, Q04UDVCPU, Q06UDVCPU, Q13UDVCPU,
Q26UDVCPU, Q04UDPVCPU, Q06UDPVCPU, Q13UDPVCPU and Q26UDPVCPU.
*6 This column shows the number of personal computers that can be connected to one PLC.
*7 This column shows the number of PLCs that can be connected to one personal computer.
*8 For the applicable CPUs, refer to the following.
4.8.2 Built-in Ethernet port CPU, Ethernet module, Ethernet board/card
4 - 84 4.8 Ethernet Connection
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
4.8.2 Built-in Ethernet port CPU, Ethernet module, Ethernet board/card
The following table shows connectable Built-in Ethernet port CPUs, Ethernet modules, and Ethernet boards/cards.
Built-in Ethernet port CPU, Ethernet module
*1 For the motion controller CPU (Q series), only the PLC CPU area (CPU No.1) in the Q170MCPU and Q170MSCPU can be
monitored.
*2 To use the FX3U-ENET-L or FX3U-ENET with the FX3UC, the FX2NC-CNV-IF or FX3UC-1PS-5V is required.
*3 To use the FX3U-ENET-ADP, the FX3U-CNV-BD, FX3U-422-BD, or FX3U-232-BD is required.
*4 Version 3.10 or later is required.
*5 The built-in Ethernet port CPUs (CPU P1, and P1) can be used.
Item Model name
RCPU Built-in Ethernet port CPU
R04CPU, R08CPU, R16CPU, R32CPU, R120CPU, R16MTCPU, R32MTCPU, R08PCPU, R16PCPU,
R32PCPU, R120PCPU, R08SFCPU, R16SFCPU, R32SFCPU, R120SFCPU, R04ENCPU*5,
R08ENCPU*5, R16ENCPU*5, R32ENCPU*5, R120ENCPU*5
Ethernet module RJ71EN71
QCPU (Q mode) Built-in Ethernet port CPU
Q03UDECPU, Q04UDEHCPU, Q06UDEHCPU, Q10UDEHCPU, Q13UDEHCPU, Q20UDEHCPU,
Q26UDEHCPU, Q50UDEHCPU, Q100UDEHCPU, Q03UDVCPU, Q04UDVCPU, Q06UDVCPU,
Q13UDVCPU, Q26UDVCPU, Q04UDPVCPU, Q06UDPVCPU, Q13UDPVCPU, Q26UDPVCPU
Ethernet module QJ71E71, QJ71E71-B2, QJ71E71-B5, QJ71E71-100
QCPU (A mode)
AJ71E71-S3, A1SJ71E71-B2-S3, A1SJ71E71-B5-S3, AJ71E71N-T, AJ71E71N-B5, AJ71E71N-B2,
AJ71E71N3-T, AJ71E71N-B5T, A1SJ71E71N-T, A1SJ71E71N-B2, A1SJ71E71N-B5, A1SJ71E71N-B5T,
A1SJ71E71N3-T
C controller
(MELSEC iQ-R
series)
Built-in Ethernet port CPU R12CCPU-V
Ethernet module RJ71EN71
C controller
(Q series)
Built-in Ethernet port CPU Q12DCCPU-V, Q24DHCCPU-V, Q24DHCCPU-LS, Q26DHCCPU-LS, Q24DHCCPU-VG
Ethernet module QJ71E71, QJ71E71-B2, QJ71E71-B5, QJ71E71-100
QnACPU
AJ71QE71, AJ71QE71-B5, AJ71QE71N-T, AJ71QE71N-B2, AJ71QE71N-B5, AJ71QE71N-B5T,
AJ71QE71N3-T, A1SJ71QE71-B2, A1SJ71QE71-B5, A1SJ71QE71N-T, A1SJ71QE71N-B2,
A1SJ71QE71N-B5, A1SJ71QE71N-B5T, A1SJ71QE71N3-T
ACPU
AJ71E71-S3, A1SJ71E71-B2-S3, A1SJ71E71-B5-S3, AJ71E71N-T, AJ71E71N-B5, AJ71E71N-B2,
AJ71E71N-B2, AJ71E71N3-T, AJ71E71N-B5T, A1SJ71E71N-T, A1SJ71E71N-B2, A1SJ71E71N-B5,
A1SJ71E71N-B5T, A1SJ71E71N3-T
LCPU Built-in Ethernet port CPU L02CPU, L06CPU, L26CPU, L26CPU-BT, L02CPU-P, L06CPU-P, L26CPU-P, L26CPU-PBT
Ethernet module LJ71E71-100
Motion controller CPU (MELSEC iQ-R series) RJ71EN71
Motion controller CPU (Q series)*1 QJ71E71, QJ71E71-B2, QJ71E71-B5, QJ71E71-100
Motion controller CPU (A series)
AJ71E71-S3, A1SJ71E71-B2-S3, A1SJ71E71-B5-S3, AJ71E71N-T, AJ71E71N-B5, AJ71E71N-B2,
AJ71E71N-B2, AJ71E71N3-T, AJ71E71N-B5T, A1SJ71E71N-T, A1SJ71E71N-B2, A1SJ71E71N-B5,
A1SJ71E71N-B5T, A1SJ71E71N3-T
MELSEC iQ-F FX5U, FX5UC
FXCPU FX3U-ENET-L*2, FX3U-ENET*2, FX3U-ENET-ADP*3*4
4.8 Ethernet Connection 4 - 85
Ethernet board/card Applicable Ethernet bords/cards are shown in the following.
POINT
When using PC CPU module
A interface board is not required. For the system configuration of the PC CPU module, refer to the manual of the PC CPU module.
4.8.3 Connection cable
Use a cable applicable to the Ethernet module or the Ethernet board/card to be used.
4.8.4 Controller setting
POINT
Ethernet connection
(1) Before Ethernet connection Read the manual for the Ethernet module to be used thoroughly and understand it fully before setting up the Ethernet connection.
(2) Time-out error If many devices (including GT SoftGOT1000) are connected, line traffic may become dense, causing a time- out error. If a time-out error occurs, reduce the number of connected devices or increase the time-out value in the Communication Setup of GT SoftGOT1000.
When using Built-in Ethernet port RCPU (one-to-one connection, multiple connection) The setting items and precautions are shown below for communicating GT SoftGOT1000 to Built-in Ethernet port RCPU. This section explains the system configuration to monitor the host as shown below. When monitoring other stations, follow the same procedure as the host.
Manufacturer Model name Remarks
3COM EthernetLink LAN PC Card Ethernet board/card
- Ethernet board built in the personal computer as standard Ethernet board
:5006
:1 :3 :192.168.3.18
N/W No.
PLC 2
PLC 1
PC No. IP address Port No. :5006 (Fixed)
:1 :2 :192.168.3.40
:5006 (Fixed)
:1 :1 :192.168.3.39
<Built-in Ethernet port RCPU> Other station
N/W No. PC No. IP address Port No.
N/W No. PC No. IP address Port No.
4 - 86 4.8 Ethernet Connection
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
POINT
Setting items
Refer to the following for how to set the N/W No., PLC No./PC No., IP address and port No. of the Ethernet module and GT SoftGOT1000.
(7) Settings with GT Designer3 and GT SoftGOT1000
(1) Before setting
(a) Monitoring the CPUs on other networks Monitoring the CPUs on other networks requires the routing parameter to be set. Refer to the following for how to set the routing parameters.
(4) Routing setting
(7) Settings with GT Designer3 and GT SoftGOT1000
(b) Precautions for communication When multiple network devices (including a GT SoftGOT1000 module) are connected to the same
segment, the network load increases, possibly degrading the communication performance between the GT SoftGOT1000 module and PLC. The following countermeasures may improve the communication performance. Use a switching hub. Configure the system compliant with the high-speed 100BASE-TX (100Mbps) standard. Reduce the number of devices monitored by GT SoftGOT1000.
When multiple GT SoftGOT1000 modules are connected to the same Ethernet network, set a different PLC number for each module.
When a GT SoftGOT1000 module is used with the GOT, do not set IP address 192.168.0.18 for the GT SoftGOT1000 module. Doing so may cause a communication error on the GOT.
(2) Compatible models
(3) Setting on GX Works3 (Module parameter setting) Set the Built-in Ethernet port for the module parameter setting. (multiple connection only) To make communications with GX Works3, ask the person in charge of the network about the IP address setting to confirm, and set the IP address. Set the other items according to the system used. For the details of the settings, refer to the following.
GX Works3 Operating Manual
Set IP Address of PLC1 in [IP Address].
Compatible models
R04CPU, R08CPU, R16CPU, R32CPU, R120CPU,
R16MTCPU, R32MTCPU, R08PCPU, R16PCPU, R32PCPU,
R120PCPU, R08SFCPU, R16SFCPU, R32SFCPU, R120SFCPU,
R04ENCPU, R08ENCPU, R16ENCPU, R32ENCPU, R120ENCPU
Set IP Address for PLC1.
4.8 Ethernet Connection 4 - 87
(4) Routing setting Up to 64 [Transfer Network No.]s can be set. The same [Transfer Network No.] cannot be set twice or more. The host (GOT) can access up to 64 [Transfer Network No.]s as a request source.
POINT
Routing parameter setting for the request source
The GOT at the request source also requires the routing parameter setting. Refer to the following for routing parameter setting.
(7) Settings with GT Designer3 and GT SoftGOT1000
(5) Setting on the personal computer Set the IP address.
(6) Communications check
(a) Ping test
When ready to communicate, execute the Ping command at the command prompt on the Windows.
When connections are OK C:\>ping 192. 168. 3. 39 Reply from 192. 168. 3. 39:bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=32
When connections are not good C:\>ping 192. 168. 3. 39 Request timed out.
When the Ping test is not verified, check the connections of the cable and module, and settings, including
the IP address, for Windows.
Item Range
Transfer Network No. 1 to 239
Relay Network No. 1 to 239
Relay Station No. 0 to 120
4 - 88 4.8 Ethernet Connection
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
(b) Station monitoring function For details on the station monitoring function, refer to the following manual.
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Electric Products) for GT Works3
(7) Settings with GT Designer3 and GT SoftGOT1000
(a) Setting on GT Designer3 Ethernet setting
Set the Ethernet setting dialog box on GT Designer3 as shown below. Up to 128 Ethernet settings can be configured.
Item Description Range
Host Indicate the host station. (The host station is indicated as *.) -
N/W No. Set the network number of the target Ethernet module. 1 to 239
PLC No. Set the station number of the target Ethernet module. 1 to 120
Type Set the type of the target Ethernet module. RCPU
IP address Set the IP address of the target Ethernet module. 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255
Port No. Set the port number of the target Ethernet module. 5006
Communication Select a communication method. UDP
4.8 Ethernet Connection 4 - 89
Routing Parameter Setting Set the routing parameter in the Routing Information Setting dialog box of GT Designer3. Up to 64 [Transfer Network No.]s can be set. The same [Transfer Network No.] cannot be set twice or more. The host (GOT) can access up to 64 [Transfer Network No.]s as a request source.
POINT
Routing parameter setting
Communication within the host network does not require routing parameter setting.
Refer to the following for details of routing parameter setting.
MELSEC iQ-R Ethernet User's Manual (Application)
POINT
Routing parameter setting for the relay station
The PLC at the relay station also requires the routing parameter setting. Refer to the following for routing parameter setting.
(4) Routing setting
(b) Setting on GT SoftGOT1000 Communication setup
Set the communication setup dialog box of GT SoftGOT1000. For details on the communication setting, refer to the following manual.
3.6.1 Communication setup dialog box
Item Range
Transfer Network No. 1 to 239
Relay Network No. 1 to 239
Relay Station No. 0 to 120
4 - 90 4.8 Ethernet Connection
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
When using Ethernet module (MELSEC iQ-R series) The setting items and precautions are shown below for communicating GT SoftGOT1000 to the PLC CPU via the Ethernet module (MELSEC iQ-R series). This section explains the system configuration to monitor the host as shown below. When monitoring other stations, follow the same procedure as the host.
POINT
Setting items
Refer to the following for how to set the N/W No., PLC No./PC No., IP address and port No. of the Ethernet module (MELSEC iQ-R series) and GT SoftGOT1000.
(7) Settings with GT Designer3 and GT SoftGOT1000
(1) Before setting
(a) Monitoring the CPUs on other networks Monitoring the CPUs on other networks requires the routing parameter to be set. Refer to the following for how to set the routing parameters.
(4) Routing setting
(7) Settings with GT Designer3 and GT SoftGOT1000
(b) Precautions for communication When multiple network devices (including a GT SoftGOT1000 module) are connected to the same
segment, the network load increases, possibly degrading the communication performance between the GT SoftGOT1000 module and PLC. The following countermeasures may improve the communication performance. Use a switching hub. Configure the system compliant with the high-speed 100BASE-TX (100Mbps) standard. Reduce the number of devices monitored by GT SoftGOT1000.
When multiple GT SoftGOT1000 modules are connected to the same Ethernet network, set a different PLC number for each module.
When a GT SoftGOT1000 module is used with the GOT, do not set IP address 192.168.0.18 for the GT SoftGOT1000 module. Doing so may cause a communication error on the GOT.
(2) Compatible models
Compatible models
RJ71EN71
N/W No. PC No.
: 5001
Host
N/W No. PLC No. IP address Port No. : 5001 (Fixed)
: 1 : 3 : 192.168.3.40
Other station
N/W No. PLC No.
: 5001 (Fixed)
: 1 : 2 : 192.168.3.39IP address
Port No.
Port No. IP address
PLC 2
PLC 1
4.8 Ethernet Connection 4 - 91
(3) Setting on GX Works3 (Module parameter setting) Set the Ethernet module (MELSEC iQ-R series) of the module parameter setting. (multiple connection only) To make communications with GX Works3, ask the person in charge of the network about the IP address setting to confirm, and set the IP address. Set the other items according to the system used. For the details of the settings, refer to the following.
GX Works3 Operating Manual
Set IP Address of PLC1 in [IP Address].
(4) Routing setting Up to 64 [Transfer Network No.]s can be set. The same [Transfer Network No.] cannot be set twice or more. The host (GOT) can access up to 64 [Transfer Network No.]s as a request source.
Item Range
Transfer Network No. 1 to 239
Relay Network No. 1 to 239
Relay Station No. 0 to 120
Set IP Address for PLC1.
4 - 92 4.8 Ethernet Connection
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
POINT
Routing parameter setting for the request source
The GOT at the request source also requires the routing parameter setting. Refer to the following for routing parameter setting.
(7) Settings with GT Designer3 and GT SoftGOT1000
(5) Setting on the personal computer Set the IP address.
(6) Communications check
(a) Ping test
When ready to communicate, execute the Ping command at the command prompt on the Windows.
When connections are OK C:\>ping 192. 168. 3. 19 Reply from 192. 168. 3. 19:bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=32
When connections are not good C:\>ping 192. 168. 3. 19 Request timed out.
When the Ping test is not verified, check the connections of the cable and module, and settings, including
the IP address, for Windows.
(b) Station monitoring function For details on the station monitoring function, refer to the following manual.
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Electric Products) for GT Works3
4.8 Ethernet Connection 4 - 93
(7) Settings with GT Designer3 and GT SoftGOT1000
(a) Setting on GT Designer3 Ethernet setting
Set the Ethernet setting dialog box on GT Designer3 as shown below. Up to 128 Ethernet settings can be configured.
Item Description Range
Host Indicate the host station. (The host station is indicated as *.) -
N/W No. Set the network number of the target Ethernet module. 1 to 239
PLC No. Set the station number of the target Ethernet module. 1 to 120
Type Set the type of the target Ethernet module. RJ71EN71
IP address Set the IP address of the target Ethernet module. 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255
Port No. Set the port number of the target Ethernet module. 5001
Communication Select a communication method. UDP
4 - 94 4.8 Ethernet Connection
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
Routing Parameter Setting Set the routing parameter in the Routing Information Setting dialog box of GT Designer3. Up to 64 [Transfer Network No.]s can be set. The same [Transfer Network No.] cannot be set twice or more. The host (GOT) can access up to 64 [Transfer Network No.]s as a request source.
POINT
Routing parameter setting
Communication within the host network does not require routing parameter setting.
Refer to the following for details of routing parameter setting.
MELSEC iQ-R Ethernet User's Manual (Application)
POINT
Routing parameter setting for the relay station
The PLC at the relay station also requires the routing parameter setting. Refer to the following for routing parameter setting.
(4) Routing setting
(b) Setting on GT SoftGOT1000 Communication setup
Set the communication setup dialog box of GT SoftGOT1000. For details on the communication setting, refer to the following manual.
3.6.1 Communication setup dialog box
Item Range
Transfer Network No. 1 to 239
Relay Network No. 1 to 239
Relay Station No. 0 to 120
4.8 Ethernet Connection 4 - 95
When using Built-in Ethernet port MELSEC iQ-F (one-to-one connection, multiple connection) The setting items and precautions shown below are for the communication from GT SoftGOT1000 via Built-in Ethernet port MELSEC iQ-F. This section explains the system configuration to monitor the host as shown below. When monitoring other stations, follow the same procedure as the host.
POINT
Setting items
Refer to the following for how to set the N/W No., PLC No./PC No., IP address and port No. of the CPU module and GT SoftGOT1000.
(7) Settings with GT Designer3 and GT SoftGOT1000
(1) Before setting
(a) Precautions for monitoring The CPUs on other networks cannot be monitored.
(b) Precautions for communication When multiple network devices (including a GT SoftGOT1000 module) are connected to the same
segment, the network load increases, possibly degrading the communication performance between the GT SoftGOT1000 module and PLC. The following countermeasures may improve the communication performance. Use a switching hub. Configure the system compliant with the high-speed 100BASE-TX (100Mbps) standard. Reduce the number of devices monitored by GT SoftGOT1000.
When multiple GT SoftGOT1000 modules are connected to the same Ethernet network, set a different PLC number for each module.
When a GT SoftGOT1000 module is used with the GOT, do not set IP address 192.168.0.18 for the GT SoftGOT1000 module. Doing so may cause a communication error on the GOT.
(2) Compatible models
Compatible models
FX5U, FX5UC
<Built-in Ethernet port MELSEC iQ-F> Other station
<Built-in Ethernet port MELSEC iQ-F> Other station
N/W No. PC No. IP address Port No. :5562 (Fixed)
:1 :2 :192.168.3.251
N/W No. PC No. IP address Port No. :5562 (Fixed)
:1 :1 :192.168.3.250
N/W No. PC No. IP address Port No. :5001
:1 :3 :192.168.3.18
PLC 1
4 - 96 4.8 Ethernet Connection
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
(3) Setting on GX Works3 (Module parameter setting) Set the Built-in Ethernet port for the module parameter setting. (multiple connection only) To make communications with GX Works3, ask the person in charge of the network about the IP address setting to confirm, and set the IP address. Set the other items according to the system used. For the details of the settings, refer to the following.
GX Works3 Operating Manual
Set IP Address of PLC1 in [IP Address].
(4) Setting on the personal computer Set the IP address.
(5) Communications check
(a) Ping test
When ready to communicate, execute the Ping command at the command prompt on the Windows.
When connections are OK C:\>ping 192. 168. 3. 251 Reply from 192. 168. 3. 251:bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=32
When connections are not good C:\>ping 192. 168. 3. 251 Request timed out.
When the Ping test is not verified, check the connections of the cable and module, and settings, including
the IP address, for Windows.
(b) Station monitoring function For details on the station monitoring function, refer to the following manual.
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Electric Products) for GT Works3
Set IP Address for PLC1.
4.8 Ethernet Connection 4 - 97
(6) Settings with GT Designer3 and GT SoftGOT1000
(a) Setting on GT Designer3 Ethernet setting
Set the Ethernet setting dialog box on GT Designer3 as shown below. Up to 128 Ethernet settings can be configured.
(b) Setting on GT SoftGOT1000 Communication setup
Set the communication setup dialog box of GT SoftGOT1000. For details on the communication setting, refer to the following manual.
3.6.1 Communication setup dialog box
Item Description Range
Host Indicate the host station. (The host station is indicated as *.) -
N/W No. Set the network number of the target Ethernet module. 1 to 239
PLC No. Set the station number of the target Ethernet module. 1 to 120
Type Set the type of the target Ethernet module. FX5CPU
IP address Set the IP address of the target Ethernet module. 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255
Port No. Set the port number of the target Ethernet module. 5562
Communication Select a communication method. TCP
4 - 98 4.8 Ethernet Connection
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
When using Built-in Ethernet port QCPU (one-to-one connection, multiple connection) The setting items and precautions are shown below for communicating GT SoftGOT1000 to Built-in Ethernet port QCPU. This section explains the system configuration to monitor the host as shown below. When monitoring other stations, follow the same procedure as the host.
POINT
Setting items
Refer to the following for how to set the N/W No., PLC No./PC No., IP address and port No. of the Ethernet module and GT SoftGOT1000.
(7) Settings with GT Designer3 and GT SoftGOT1000
(1) Before setting
(a) Monitoring the CPUs on other networks Monitoring the CPUs on other networks requires the routing parameter to be set. Refer to the following for how to set the routing parameters.
(4) Routing setting
(7) Settings with GT Designer3 and GT SoftGOT1000
(b) Precautions for communication When multiple network devices (including a GT SoftGOT1000 module) are connected to the same
segment, the network load increases, possibly degrading the communication performance between the GT SoftGOT1000 module and PLC. The following countermeasures may improve the communication performance. Use a switching hub. Configure the system compliant with the high-speed 100BASE-TX (100Mbps) standard. Reduce the number of devices monitored by GT SoftGOT1000.
When multiple GT SoftGOT1000 modules are connected to the same Ethernet network, set a different PLC number for each module.
When a GT SoftGOT1000 module is used with the GOT, do not set IP address 192.168.0.18 for the GT SoftGOT1000 module. Doing so may cause a communication error on the GOT.
:5001
:1 :3 :192.168.0.18
N/W No. PC No. IP address Port No. :5006 (Fixed)
:1 :1 :192.168.0.1
:5006 (Fixed)
:1 :2 :192.168.0.2
<Built-in Ethernet port QCPU> Other station
N/W No. PC No. IP address Port No.
N/W No. PC No. IP address Port No.
4.8 Ethernet Connection 4 - 99
(2) Compatible models
(3) Setting on GX Developer (Q parameter setting) Set the Built-in Ethernet port for the Q parameter setting. (multiple connection only)
Compatible models
Q03UDECPU, Q04UDEHCPU, Q06UDEHCPU, Q10UDEHCPU, Q13UDEHCPU,
Q20UDEHCPU, Q26UDEHCPU, Q50UDEHCPU, Q100UDEHCPU, Q03UDVCPU,
Q04UDVCPU, Q06UDVCPU, Q13UDVCPU, Q26UDVCPU, Q04UDPVCPU,
Q06UDPVCPU, Q13UDPVCPU, Q26UDPVCPU
Item Setting Screen Examples
Built-in Ethernet port
Open settings
To make communications with GX Developer, ask the person in charge of the network
about the IP address setting to confirm, and set the IP address.
Set the other items according to the specifications of other nodes and applications
connected to the Ethernet module.
4 - 100 4.8 Ethernet Connection
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
(4) Routing Parameter Setting Up to 64 [Transfer Network No.]s can be set. The same [Transfer Network No.] cannot be set twice or more. The host (GOT) can access up to 64 [Transfer Network No.]s as a request source.
POINT
Routing parameter setting for the request source
The GOT at the request source also requires the routing parameter setting. Refer to the following for routing parameter setting.
(7) Settings with GT Designer3 and GT SoftGOT1000
(5) Setting on the personal computer Set the IP address.
(6) Communications check
(a) Ping test
When ready to communicate, execute the Ping command at the command prompt on the Windows.
When connections are OK C:\>ping 192. 168. 0. 2 Reply from 192. 168. 0. 2:bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=32
When connections are not good C:\>ping 192. 168. 0. 2 Request timed out.
When the Ping test is not verified, check the connections of the cable and module, and settings, including
the IP address, for Windows.
Item Range
Transfer Network No. 1 to 239
Relay Network No. 1 to 239
Relay Station No. 0 to 120
4.8 Ethernet Connection 4 - 101
POINT
Ping test
The ping test can also be performed with GX Developer (SW6D5C-GPPW 6.01B or later). For details of the ping test, refer to the following.
GX Developer Version Operating Manual
(b) Station monitoring function For details on the station monitoring function, refer to the following manual.
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Electric Products) for GT Works3
(7) Settings with GT Designer3 and GT SoftGOT1000
(a) Setting on GT Designer3 Ethernet setting
Set the Ethernet setting dialog box on GT Designer3 as shown below. Up to 128 Ethernet settings can be configured.
Item Description Range
Host Indicate the host station. (The host station is indicated as *.) -
N/W No. Set the network number of the target Ethernet module. 1 to 239
PLC No. Set the station number of the target Ethernet module. 1 to 64
Type Set the type of the target Ethernet module. QnUD(P)V/QnUDEH
IP address Set the IP address of the target Ethernet module. 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255
Port No. Set the port number of the target Ethernet module. 5006
Communication Select a communication method. UDP
4 - 102 4.8 Ethernet Connection
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
Routing Parameter Setting Set the routing parameter in the Routing Information Setting dialog box of GT Designer3. Up to 64 [Transfer Network No.]s can be set. The same [Transfer Network No.] cannot be set twice or more. The host (GOT) can access up to 64 [Transfer Network No.]s as a request source.
POINT
Routing parameter setting
Communication within the host network does not require routing parameter setting.
Refer to the following for details of routing parameter setting.
Q Corresponding Ethernet Interface Module User's Manual (Application)
POINT
Routing parameter setting for the relay station
The PLC at the relay station also requires the routing parameter setting. Refer to the following for routing parameter setting.
(4) Routing setting
(b) Setting on GT SoftGOT1000 Communication setup
Set the communication setup dialog box of GT SoftGOT1000. For details on the communication setting, refer to the following manual.
3.6.1 Communication setup dialog box
Item Range
Transfer Network No. 1 to 239
Relay Network No. 1 to 239
Relay Station No. 0 to 120
4.8 Ethernet Connection 4 - 103
When using Ethernet module (Q series, L series) The setting items and precautions are shown below for communicating GT SoftGOT1000 to the PLC CPU via the Ethernet module. This section explains the system configuration to monitor the host as shown below. When monitoring other stations, follow the same procedure as the host.
POINT
Setting items
Refer to the following for how to set the N/W No., PLC No./PC No., IP address and port No. of the Ethernet module and GT SoftGOT1000.
(7) Settings with GT Designer3 and GT SoftGOT1000
(1) Before setting
(a) Monitoring the CPUs on other networks Monitoring the CPUs on other networks requires the routing parameter to be set. Refer to the following for how to set the routing parameters.
(4) Routing setting
(7) Settings with GT Designer3 and GT SoftGOT1000
(b) Precautions for communication When multiple network devices (including a GT SoftGOT1000 module) are connected to the same
segment, the network load increases, possibly degrading the communication performance between the GT SoftGOT1000 module and PLC. The following countermeasures may improve the communication performance. Use a switching hub. Configure the system compliant with the high-speed 100BASE-TX (100Mbps) standard. Reduce the number of devices monitored by GT SoftGOT1000.
When multiple GT SoftGOT1000 modules are connected to the same Ethernet network, set a different PLC number for each module.
When a GT SoftGOT1000 module is used with the GOT, do not set IP address 192.168.0.18 for the GT SoftGOT1000 module. Doing so may cause a communication error on the GOT.
(2) Compatible models
Compatible models
QJ71E71-100, QJ71E71-B5, QJ71E71-B2, QJ71E71, LJ71E71-100
N/W No. PC No.
: 5001
Host
GT SoftGOT1000 : 1 : 3 : 192.168.0.3
N/W No. PLC No. IP address Port No. : 5001 (Fixed)
: 1 : 1 : 192.168.0.1
Other station
N/W No. PLC No.
: 5001 (Fixed)
: 1 : 2 : 192.168.0.2IP address
Port No.
Port No. IP address
Ethernet module
Ethernet module
4 - 104 4.8 Ethernet Connection
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
(3) Setting on GX Developer (Network parameter setting) Parameter setting can be made from the MELSECNET/ETHERNET network parameter setting screen. Set the network type, first I/O No., network No., group No., station number, mode and operation setting.
Item Setting Screen Examples
Ethernet Parameters
Operation Setting
To make communications with GX Developer, ask the person in charge of the network
about the IP address setting to confirm, and set the IP address.
Set the other items according to the specifications of other nodes and applications
connected to the Ethernet module compatible with QCPU or LCPU.
The following are the operation setting items that can be set on GX Developer.
[Communication data code]: Either the binary code or ASCII code can be specified.
[Initial timing]: Communications can be made from GX Developer even when the PLC
CPU is in the STOP status.
[Enable Write at RUN time]: The online change or device test can be performed with GX
Developer.
4.8 Ethernet Connection 4 - 105
(4) Routing Parameter Setting Up to 64 [Transfer Network No.]s can be set. The same [Transfer Network No.] cannot be set twice or more. The host (GOT) can access up to 64 [Transfer Network No.]s as a request source.
POINT
Routing parameter setting for the request source
The GOT at the request source also requires the routing parameter setting. Refer to the following for routing parameter setting.
(7) Settings with GT Designer3 and GT SoftGOT1000
(5) Setting on the personal computer Set the IP address.
(6) Communications check
(a) Ping test
When ready to communicate, execute the Ping command at the command prompt on the Windows.
When connections are OK C:\>ping 192. 168. 0. 2 Reply from 192. 168. 0. 2:bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=32
When connections are not good C:\>ping 192. 168. 0. 2 Request timed out.
When the Ping test is not verified, check the connections of the cable and module, and settings, including
the IP address, for Windows.
Item Range
Transfer Network No. 1 to 239
Relay Network No. 1 to 239
Relay Station No. 0 to 120
4 - 106 4.8 Ethernet Connection
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
POINT
Ping test
The ping test can also be performed with GX Developer (SW6D5C-GPPW 6.01B or later). For details of the ping test, refer to the following.
GX Developer Version Operating Manual
(b) Station monitoring function For details on the station monitoring function, refer to the following manual.
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Electric Products) for GT Works3
(7) Settings with GT Designer3 and GT SoftGOT1000
(a) Setting on GT Designer3 Ethernet setting
Set the Ethernet setting dialog box on GT Designer3 as shown below. Up to 128 Ethernet settings can be configured.
Item Description Range
Host Indicate the host station. (The host station is indicated as *.) -
N/W No. Set the network number of the target Ethernet module. 1 to 239
PLC No. Set the station number of the target Ethernet module. 1 to 64
Type Set the type of the target Ethernet module. QJ71E71/LJ71E71
IP address Set the IP address of the target Ethernet module. 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255
Port No. Set the port number of the target Ethernet module. 5001
Communication Select a communication method. UDP
4.8 Ethernet Connection 4 - 107
Routing Parameter Setting Set the routing parameter in the Routing Information Setting dialog box of GT Designer3. Up to 64 [Transfer Network No.]s can be set. The same [Transfer Network No.] cannot be set twice or more. The host (GOT) can access up to 64 [Transfer Network No.]s as a request source.
POINT
Routing parameter setting
Communication within the host network does not require routing parameter setting.
Refer to the following for details of routing parameter setting.
Q Corresponding Ethernet Interface Module User's Manual (Application)
POINT
Routing parameter setting for the relay station
The PLC at the relay station also requires the routing parameter setting. Refer to the following for routing parameter setting.
(4) Routing setting
(b) Setting on GT SoftGOT1000 Communication setup
Set the communication setup dialog box of GT SoftGOT1000. For details on the communication setting, refer to the following manual.
3.6.1 Communication setup dialog box
Item Range
Transfer Network No. 1 to 239
Relay Network No. 1 to 239
Relay Station No. 0 to 120
4 - 108 4.8 Ethernet Connection
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
When using Built-in Ethernet port LCPU (one-to-one connection, multiple connection) The setting items and precautions are shown below for communicating GT SoftGOT1000 to Built-in Ethernet port LCPU. This section explains the system configuration to monitor the host as shown below. When monitoring other stations, follow the same procedure as the host.
POINT
Setting items
Refer to the following for how to set the N/W No., PLC No./PC No., IP address and port No. of the CPU module and GT SoftGOT1000.
(6) Settings with GT Designer3 and GT SoftGOT1000
(1) Before setting
(a) Precautions for monitoring The CPUs on other networks cannot be monitored.
(b) Precautions for communication When multiple network devices (including a GT SoftGOT1000 module) are connected to the same
segment, the network load increases, possibly degrading the communication performance between the GT SoftGOT1000 module and PLC. The following countermeasures may improve the communication performance. Use a switching hub. Configure the system compliant with the high-speed 100BASE-TX (100Mbps) standard. Reduce the number of devices monitored by GT SoftGOT1000.
When multiple GT SoftGOT1000 modules are connected to the same Ethernet network, set a different PLC number for each module.
When a GT SoftGOT1000 module is used with the GOT, do not set IP address 192.168.0.18 for the GT SoftGOT1000 module. Doing so may cause a communication error on the GOT.
(2) Compatible models
Compatible models
L02CPU, L06CPU, L26CPU, L26CPU-BT, L02CPU-P,
L06CPU-P, L26CPU-P, L26CPU-PBT
N/W No.: 1 PC No.: 3 IP address: 192.168.0.18 Port No.: 5001
N/W No.: 1 PC No.: 1 IP address: 192.168.0.1 Port No.: 5006 (Fixed)
N/W No.: 1 PC No.: 2 IP address: 192.168.0.2 Port No.: 5006 (Fixed)
4.8 Ethernet Connection 4 - 109
(3) Setting on GX Developer (L parameter setting) Set the Built-in Ethernet port for the L parameter setting. (multiple connection only)
(4) Setting on the personal computer Set the IP address.
Item Setting Screen Examples
Built-in Ethernet port
To make communications with GX Developer, ask the person in charge of the network
about the IP address setting to confirm, and set the IP address.
Set the other items according to the specifications of other nodes and applications
connected to the Ethernet module.
Open settings
4 - 110 4.8 Ethernet Connection
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
(5) Communications check
(a) Ping test
When ready to communicate, execute the Ping command at the command prompt on the Windows.
When connections are OK C:\>ping 192. 168. 0. 2 Reply from 192. 168. 0. 2:bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=32
When connections are not good C:\>ping 192. 168. 0. 2 Request timed out.
When the Ping test is not verified, check the connections of the cable and module, and settings, including
the IP address, for Windows.
POINT
Ping test
The ping test can also be performed with GX Developer (SW6D5C-GPPW 6.01B or later). For details of the ping test, refer to the following.
GX Developer Version Operating Manual
(b) Station monitoring function For details on the station monitoring function, refer to the following manual.
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Electric Products) for GT Works3
4.8 Ethernet Connection 4 - 111
(6) Settings with GT Designer3 and GT SoftGOT1000
(a) Setting on GT Designer3 Ethernet setting
Set the Ethernet setting dialog box on GT Designer3 as shown below. Up to 128 Ethernet settings can be configured.
(b) Setting on GT SoftGOT1000 Communication setup
Set the communication setup dialog box of GT SoftGOT1000. For details on the communication setting, refer to the following manual.
3.6.1 Communication setup dialog box
Item Description Range
Host Indicate the host station. (The host station is indicated as *.) -
N/W No. Set the network number of the target Ethernet module. 1 to 239
PLC No. Set the station number of the target Ethernet module. 1 to 64
Type Set the type of the target Ethernet module. LCPU
IP address Set the IP address of the target Ethernet module. 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255
Port No. Set the port number of the target Ethernet module. 5006
Communication Select a communication method. UDP
4 - 112 4.8 Ethernet Connection
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
When using C Controller module For communications with GT SoftGOT1000 via C Controller module, setting items and precautions are described below. This section explains the system configuration to monitor the host as shown below. When monitoring other stations, follow the same procedure as the host.
POINT
Setting items
Refer to the following for how to set the N/W No., PLC No./PC No., IP address and port No. of C Controller module and GT SoftGOT1000.
(6) Settings on GT Designer3 and GT SoftGOT1000
(1) Before setting
(a) Precautions for monitoring GT SoftGOT1000 cannot monitor CPUs on the other networks.
(b) Precautions for communication When multiple network devices (including a GT SoftGOT1000 module) are connected to the same
segment, the network load increases, possibly degrading the communication performance between the GT SoftGOT1000 module and PLC. The following countermeasures may improve the communication performance. Use a switching hub. Configure the system compliant with the high-speed 100BASE-TX (100Mbps) standard. Reduce the number of devices monitored by GT SoftGOT1000.
When multiple GT SoftGOT1000 modules are connected to the same Ethernet network, set a different PLC number for each module.
When a GT SoftGOT1000 module is used with the GOT, do not set IP address 192.168.0.18 for the GT SoftGOT1000 module. Doing so may cause a communication error on the GOT.
(2) Compatible models
Compatible models
R12CCPU-V, Q12DCCPU-V, Q24DHCCPU-V, Q24DHCCPU-VG, Q26DHCCPU-LS,
Q24DHCCPU-LS
N/W No. PC No. IP address Port No. :5001
:1 :3 :192.168.0.3
N/W No. PC No. IP address Port No. :5006 (Fixed)
:1 :1 :192.168.0.1
N/W No. PC No. IP address Port No. :5006 (Fixed)
:1 :2 :192.168.0.2
4.8 Ethernet Connection 4 - 113
(3) Setting on C Controller setting utility (Parameter setting) Set the parameter on C Controller setting utility. Use SW3PVC-CCPU-J Ver.3.05F or later for the C Controller setting utility. For details of the C Controller setting utility, refer to the following manual.
C Controller Module User's Manual (Utility Operation, Programming)
Item Setting Screen Examples
Connection settings
If the IP address of the C controller module has been changed, input the changed IP
address or host name.
If the account of the C controller module has been changed, input the changed user name
and password.
Online operation
Detailed settings
System settings
4 - 114 4.8 Ethernet Connection
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
(4) Setting on personal computer Set the IP address.
(5) Communications check
(a) Ping test When C Controller module is ready for communications, execute the Ping command with the command
prompt of Windows.
When the Ping test is verified C:\>Ping 192. 168. 0. 2 Reply from 192.168.0.2:bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=32
When the Ping test is not verified C:\>Ping 192. 168. 0. 2 Request timed out.
When the Ping test is not verified, check the connections of the cable and module, and settings, including
the IP address, for Windows.
(b) Station monitoring function For details on the station monitoring function, refer to the following manual.
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Electric Products) for GT Works3
4.8 Ethernet Connection 4 - 115
(6) Settings on GT Designer3 and GT SoftGOT1000
(a) Setting on GT Designer3 Ethernet setting
Set the Ethernet setting dialog box on GT Designer3 as shown below. Up to 128 Ethernet settings can be configured.
*1: Set the same value as that of GOT N/W No.
*2: Set a value different from that of the GOT PLC No. and the PLC No. of other PLCs on the same network.
(b) Setting on GT SoftGOT1000 Communication Setup
Make the settings in the Communication Setup dialog box of GT SoftGOT1000. Refer to the following for details of Communication Setup.
3.6.1 Communication setup dialog box
Item Description Range
Host Indicate the host station. (The host station is indicated as *.) -
N/W No. Set the network number of the target C Controller module. 1 to 239*1
PLC No. Set the station number of the target C Controller module. 1 to 64*2
Type Set the type of the target C Controller module. QnD(H)CCPU
IP address Set the IP address of the target C Controller module. 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255
Port No. Set the port number of the target C Controller module. 5006 (fixed)
Communication Select a communication method. UDP (fixed)
4 - 116 4.8 Ethernet Connection
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
When using Ethernet module (QnA series) The setting items and precautions are shown below for communicating GT SoftGOT1000 to the PLC CPU via the Ethernet module (QnA series). This section explains the system configuration to monitor the host as shown below. When monitoring other stations, follow the same procedure as the host.
POINT
Setting items
Refer to the following for how to set the N/W No., PLC No./PC No., IP address and port No. of the Ethernet module and GT SoftGOT1000.
(8) Settings with GT Designer3 and GT SoftGOT1000
(1) Before setting
(a) Monitoring the CPUs on other networks Monitoring the CPUs on other networks requires the routing parameter to be set. Refer to the following for how to set the routing parameters.
(5) Routing Parameter Setting
(8) Settings with GT Designer3 and GT SoftGOT1000
(b) Precautions for communication Only communications within the same segment are applicable.
No communications via a router or gateway can be monitored. When multiple network devices (including a GT SoftGOT1000 module) are connected to the same
segment, the network load increases, possibly degrading the communication performance between the GT SoftGOT1000 module and PLC. The following countermeasures may improve the communication performance. Use a switching hub. Configure the system compliant with the high-speed 100BASE-TX (100Mbps) standard. Reduce the number of devices monitored by GT SoftGOT1000.
When multiple GT SoftGOT1000 modules are connected to the same Ethernet network, set a different PLC number for each module.
When a GT SoftGOT1000 module is used with the GOT, do not set IP address 192.168.0.18 for the GT SoftGOT1000 module. Doing so may cause a communication error on the GOT.
PLC No. : 1 : 2 : 192.168.0.2 : 5001 (Fixed)
Port No. IP address PLC No.
: 1 : 1 : 192.168.0.1 : 5001 (Fixed)
N/W No. PC No.
: 1 : 3 : 192.168.0.3 : 5001
Port No. IP address
Port No. IP address
Ethernet module (QnA series)
Ethernet module (QnA series)
4.8 Ethernet Connection 4 - 117
(2) Compatible models*1
*1 When using AJ71QE71, AJ71QE71-B5, A1SJ71QE71-B2 or A1SJ71QE71-B5, use a module or PLC CPU of function version B
or later.
(3) Ethernet module (QnA series) switch settings Operation mode setting switch: 0 (online) Automatic start mode: SW3 ON
When SW3 is ON, initial processing is performed independently of Y19 (initial processing request). Communications are also enabled if the CPU module is stopped. For the initial processing using Y19 (initial processing request), create the program for initial processing while referring to the "For QnA Ethernet Interface Module User's Manual".
(4) Setting on GX Developer (Network parameter setting) On the MELSECNET/Ethernet setting screen of network parameter, set the network type, starting I/O No., network No., group No., station number and IP address.
Compatible models
AJ71QE71N3-T, AJ71QE71N-B5, AJ71QE71N-B2, AJ71QE71N-T, AJ71QE71N-B5T,
AJ71QE71, AJ71QE71-B5, A1SJ71QE71N3-T, A1SJ71QE71N-B5, A1SJ71QE71N-B2,
A1SJ71QE71N-T, A1SJ71QE71N-B5T, A1SJ71QE71-B5, A1SJ71QE71-B2
Item Setting screen example
Ethernet Parameters
IP Address Setting
4 - 118 4.8 Ethernet Connection
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
(5) Routing Parameter Setting Up to 64 [Transfer Network No.]s can be set. The same [Transfer Network No.] cannot be set twice or more. The host (GOT) can access up to 64 [Transfer Network No.]s as a request source.
POINT
Routing parameter setting for the request source
The GOT at the request source also requires the routing parameter setting. Refer to the following for routing parameter setting.
(8) Settings with GT Designer3 and GT SoftGOT1000
(6) Setting on the personal computer Set the IP address.
Item Range
Transfer Network No. 1 to 239
Relay Network No. 1 to 239
Relay Station No. 0 to 120
4.8 Ethernet Connection 4 - 119
(7) Communications check
(a) Ping test
When ready to communicate, execute the Ping command at the command prompt on the Windows.
When connections are OK C:\>ping 192. 168. 0. 2 Reply from 192. 168. 0. 2:bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=32
When connections are not good C:\>ping 192. 168. 0. 2 Request timed out.
When the Ping test is not verified, check the connections of the cable and module, and settings, including
the IP address, for Windows.
POINT
Ping test
The ping test can also be performed with GX Developer (SW6D5C-GPPW 6.01B or later). For details of the ping test, refer to the following.
GX Developer Version Operating Manual
(b) Station monitoring function For details on the station monitoring function, refer to the following manual.
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Electric Products) for GT Works3
4 - 120 4.8 Ethernet Connection
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
(8) Settings with GT Designer3 and GT SoftGOT1000
(a) Setting on GT Designer3 Ethernet setting
Set the Ethernet setting dialog box on GT Designer3 as shown below. Up to 128 Ethernet settings can be configured.
Routing Parameter Setting Set the routing parameter in the Routing Information Setting dialog box of GT Designer3. Up to 64 [Transfer Network No.]s can be set. The same [Transfer Network No.] cannot be set twice or more. The host (GOT) can access up to 64 [Transfer Network No.]s as a request source.
POINT
Routing parameter setting
Communication within the host network does not require routing parameter setting.
Item Description Range
Host Indicate the host station. (The host station is indicated as *.) -
N/W No. Set the network number of the target Ethernet module. 1 to 239
PLC No. Set the station number of the target Ethernet module. 1 to 64
Type Set the type of the target Ethernet module. AJ71QE71
IP address Set the IP address of the target Ethernet module. 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255
Port No. Set the port number of the target Ethernet module. 5001
Communication Select a communication method. UDP
4.8 Ethernet Connection 4 - 121
Refer to the following for details of routing parameter setting.
For QnA Ethernet Interface Module User's Manual
POINT
Routing parameter setting for the relay station
The PLC at the relay station also requires the routing parameter setting. Refer to the following for routing parameter setting.
(5) Routing Parameter Setting
(b) Setting on GT SoftGOT1000 Communication setup
Set the communication setup dialog box of GT SoftGOT1000. For details on the communication setting, refer to the following manual.
3.6.1 Communication setup dialog box
Item Range
Transfer Network No. 1 to 239
Relay Network No. 1 to 239
Relay Station No. 0 to 120
4 - 122 4.8 Ethernet Connection
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
When using Ethernet module (A series) The setting items and precautions are shown below for communicating GT SoftGOT1000 to the PLC CPU via the Ethernet module (A series). This section explains the system configuration to monitor the host as shown below. When monitoring other stations, follow the same procedure as the host.
POINT
Setting items
The N/W No. and PLC No. to be specified for Ethernet connection to the E71 should be those set as desired on GT Designer3. Refer to the following for how to set the N/W No., PLC No./PC No., IP address and port No. of the Ethernet module and GT SoftGOT1000.
(7) Settings with GT Designer3 and GT SoftGOT1000
The following shows the procedure for performing communications via E71.
(1) Before setting
(a) Monitoring precautions The connection target cannot be monitored via MELSECTNET/10 or MELSECNET/H.
(b) Communication precautions Only communications within the same segment can be monitored.
No communications via a router or gateway can be monitored. When multiple network devices (including a GT SoftGOT1000 module) are connected to the same
segment, the network load increases, possibly degrading the communication performance between the GT SoftGOT1000 module and PLC. The following countermeasures may improve the communication performance. Use a switching hub. Configure the system compliant with the high-speed 100BASE-TX (100Mbps) standard. Reduce the number of devices monitored by GT SoftGOT1000.
When multiple GT SoftGOT1000 modules are connected to the same Ethernet network, set a different PLC number for each module.
When a GT SoftGOT1000 module is used with the GOT, do not set IP address 192.168.0.18 for the GT SoftGOT1000 module. Doing so may cause a communication error on the GOT.
N/W No. : 1
Port No. : 5001
IP address : 192.168.0.2 PLC No. : 2
N/W No. : 1
Port No. : 5001
IP address : 192.168.0.1 PLC No. : 1
N/W No. : 1
Port No. : 5001
IP address : 192.168.0.3 PC No. : 3
Ethernet module (A series)
Ethernet module (A series)
4.8 Ethernet Connection 4 - 123
(2) Compatible models
(3) E71 switch settings
(4) Sequence programs Initial processing and communication line open processing sequence programs are needed. Necessary communication parameters and sequence program examples are given below.
(a) Communication parameters The following are the communication parameter setting examples for the host side.
*1 Value specified for application setting
The user can change the settings of 1), 2) and 3).
4), 5) and 6) are fixed settings. The following shows details of the application setting.
1): Fixed buffer application
0: For send/no communication 1: For receive
2): Existence check
0: No 1: Yes
3): Paring open
0: No 1: Yes
4): Communication system (Set to 1: UDP/IP)
5): Fixed buffer communication (Set to 0: With procedure)
0: With procedure 1: Without procedure
6): Open system (Set to 00: Active, UDP/IP)
*2: The other node port number is a fixed setting.
The user can change the other settings.
Compatible models
AJ71E71N3-T, AJ71E71N-B5, AJ71E71N-B2, AJ71E71N-T, AJ71E71N-B5T,
AJ71E71-S3, A1SJ71E71N3-T, A1SJ71E71N-B5, A1SJ71E71N-B2, A1SJ71E71N-T,
A1SJ71E71N-B5T, A1SJ71E71-B5-S3, A1SJ71E71-B2-S
Switch
AJ71E71N3-T, AJ71E71N-B5,
A1SJ71E71-B2-S3, A1SJ71E71-B5-S3
AJ71E71N-B2, AJ71E71N-T,
AJ71E71N-B5T, AJ71E71-S3,
A1SJ71E71N3-T, A1SJ71E71N-B5,
A1SJ71E71N-B2, A1SJ71E71N-T,
A1SJ71E71N-B5T
Operation mode setting switch 0 (Online mode) 0 (Online mode)
Exchange condition
setting switch
Data code setting SW2 OFF (Binary code) SW2 OFF (Binary code)
CPU exchange timing setting SW7 ON (Online change enabled) SW3 ON (Online change enabled)
Setting item Set value
Application setting*1 100H
IP address of E71 192.168.0.2
E71 port number 5001
IP address of other node FFFFFFFFH
Other node port number*2 FFFFH
b12b15 b14 b13 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5)6) 1)2)3)4)
4 - 124 4.8 Ethernet Connection
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
(b) Sequence program In a communications-ready status, the E71's RUN LED comes on and RDY LED flickers.
(5) Setting on the personal computer Set the IP address.
(6) Communications check
(a) Ping test
When ready to communicate, execute the Ping command at the command prompt on the Windows.
When connections are OK C:\>ping 192. 168. 0. 2 Reply from 192. 168. 0. 2:bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=32
When connections are not good C:\>ping 192. 168. 0. 2 Request timed out.
When the Ping test is not verified, check the connections of the cable and module, and settings, including
the IP address, for Windows.
IP address of Ethernet module(192.168.0.2)
Initial request
COM. ERR turned off request
Clear the initial fault code.
Set to the permit of communication while stopping the PLC CPU.
Communication format(UDP/IP)
Port No. of Ethernet module(5001)
IP address of GT SoftGOT (When GT SoftGOT is used, FFFFFFFFH) Port No. of GT SoftGOT (When GT SoftGOT is used, FFFFH)
Read the initial fault code.
Request to open
Normal completed initial
No. 1 open completed
Initial request
COM. ERR turned off command
Initial fault detection
WDT ERR detection
Turned on at first scan only while running
WDT ERR detection
* Initial processing
* Opening processing of communication line
4.8 Ethernet Connection 4 - 125
POINT
Ping test
The ping test can also be performed with GX Developer (SW6D5C-GPPW 6.01B or later). For details of the ping test, refer to the following.
GX Developer Version Operating Manual
(b) Station monitoring function For details on the station monitoring function, refer to the following manual.
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Electric Products) for GT Works3
(7) Settings with GT Designer3 and GT SoftGOT1000
(a) Setting on GT Designer3 Ethernet setting
Set the Ethernet setting dialog box on GT Designer3 as shown below. Up to 128 Ethernet settings can be configured.
(b) Setting on GT SoftGOT1000 Communication setup
Set the communication setup dialog box of GT SoftGOT1000. For details on the communication setting, refer to the following manual.
3.6.1 Communication setup dialog box
Item Description Range
Host Indicate the host station. (The host station is indicated as *.) -
N/W No. Set the network number of the target Ethernet module. 1 to 239
PLC No. Set the station number of the target Ethernet module. 1 to 64
Type Set the type of the target Ethernet module. AJ71QE71
IP address Set the IP address of the target Ethernet module. 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255
Port No. Set the port number of the target Ethernet module. 1024 to 65534
Communication Select a communication method. UDP
4 - 126 4.8 Ethernet Connection
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
When using Ethernet module (FX series) The setting items and precautions are shown below for communicating GT SoftGOT1000 to the PLC CPU via the Ethernet module (FX series). This section explains the system configuration to monitor the host as shown below. When monitoring other stations, follow the same procedure as the host
For FX3U-ENET-L
For FX3U-ENET
POINT
Setting items
Refer to the following for how to set the N/W No., PLC No./PC No., IP address and port No. of the Ethernet module and GT SoftGOT1000.
(8) Settings with GT Designer3 and GT SoftGOT1000
Port No. IP address PC No.
: 1 : 2 : 192.168.0.2 : 5551 (Fixed)
Port No. IP address PC No.
: 1 : 1 : 192.168.0.1 : 5551 (Fixed)
N/W No.
Port No. IP address PC No.
: 1 : 3 : 192.168.0.3 : 5001
Ethernet module (FX series)
Ethernet module (FX series)
Port No. IP address PC No.
: 1 : 2 : 192.168.0.2 : 5551 (Fixed)
Port No. IP address PC No.
: 1 : 1 : 192.168.0.1 : 5551 (Fixed)
N/W No.
Port No. IP address PC No.
: 1 : 3 : 192.168.0.3 : 5001
Ethernet module (FX series)
Ethernet module (FX series)
4.8 Ethernet Connection 4 - 127
(1) Before setting
(a) Precautions for monitoring The CPUs on other networks cannot be monitored.
(b) Precautions for communication When multiple network devices (including a GT SoftGOT1000 module) are connected to the same
segment, the network load increases, possibly degrading the communication performance between the GT SoftGOT1000 module and PLC. The following countermeasures may improve the communication performance. Use a switching hub. Configure the system compliant with the high-speed 100BASE-TX (100Mbps) standard. Reduce the number of devices monitored by GT SoftGOT1000.
When multiple GT SoftGOT1000 modules are connected to the same Ethernet network, set a different PLC number for each module.
When a GT SoftGOT1000 module is used with the GOT, do not set IP address 192.168.0.18 for the GT SoftGOT1000 module. Doing so may cause a communication error on the GOT.
(2) Compatible models
Compatible models
FX3U-ENET-L FX3U-ENET FX3U-ENET-ADP
4 - 128 4.8 Ethernet Connection
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
(3) Setting with FX Configurator-EN-L or FX Configurator-EN (network parameter setting) Set the Ethernet parameter with FX Configurator-EN-L or FX Configurator-EN. GX Developer Ver.8.88S or later is required to use the FX Configurator-EN-L. For the details of the FX Configurator-EN-L, refer to the following manual.
FX Configurator-EN-L Operation Manual
To use FX Configurator-EN, GX-Developer Ver.8.25B or later is required. For details of FX Configurator-EN, refer to the following manual.
FX Configurator-EN Operation Manual
Item Setting Screen Examples
Ethernet Module settings
Set the Ethernet station No. in the Ethernet module setting.
Set the station No. of the Ethernet module not to overlap with the station No. of GT
SoftGOT1000.
Operation settings
Since the port No. 5551 is used, the operation , regardless of the settings, is as follows.
Communication data code setting: [Binary code]
Initial timing: [Always wait for OPEN] (Communication is applicable while stopping the
PLC CPU.)
Open settings
4.8 Ethernet Connection 4 - 129
(4) Setting on the personal computer Set the IP address.
(5) Communications check
(a) Ping test
When ready to communicate, execute the Ping command at the command prompt on Windows.
When connections are OK C:\>ping 192. 168. 0. 2 Reply from 192. 168. 0. 2:bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=32
When connections are not good C:\>ping 192. 168. 0. 2 Request timed out.
When the Ping test is not verified, check the connections of the cable and module, and settings, including
the IP address, for Windows.
POINT
Ping test
A ping test can be performed also with FX Configurator-EN-L or FX Configurator-EN. For details of the ping test, refer to the following.
FX Configurator-EN-L Operation Manual
FX Configurator-EN Operation Manual
(b) Station monitoring function For details on the station monitoring function, refer to the following manual.
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Electric Products) for GT Works3
4 - 130 4.8 Ethernet Connection
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
(6) Settings with GT Designer3 and GT SoftGOT1000
(a) Setting on GT Designer3 Ethernet setting
Set the Ethernet setting dialog box on GT Designer3 as shown below. Up to 128 Ethernet settings can be configured.
(b) Setting on GT SoftGOT1000 Communication setup
Set the communication setup dialog box of GT SoftGOT1000. For details on the communication setting, refer to the following manual.
3.6.1 Communication setup dialog box
Item Description Range
Host Indicate the host station. (The host station is indicated as *.) -
N/W No. Set the network number of the target Ethernet module. 1 to 239
PLC No. Set the station number of the target Ethernet module. 1 to 64
Type Set the type of the target Ethernet module. FX
IP address Set the IP address of the target Ethernet module. 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255
Port No. Set the port number of the target Ethernet module. 5551
Communication Select a communication method. TCP
4.8 Ethernet Connection 4 - 131
When using CNC C70 (Q17nNCCPU) For communications with GT SoftGOT1000 via the Display I/F of the CNC C70, setting items and precautions are described below. This section explains the system configuration to monitor the host as shown below.
POINT
Before creating Display I/F connection
(1) Display I/F connection For the Display I/F connection, read the following manual carefully, and fully understand the details.
C70 Setup Manual
(2) Setting items Refer to the following for how to set the N/W No., IP address, and port No. of the CNC C70 and GT SoftGOT1000.
When using CNC C70 (Q17nNCCPU)
(1) Before setting
(a) Precautions for monitoring GT SoftGOT1000 cannot monitor CPUs on the other networks.
(b) Precautions for communication When multiple network devices (including a GT SoftGOT1000 module) are connected to the same
segment, the network load increases, possibly degrading the communication performance between the GT SoftGOT1000 module and PLC. The following countermeasures may improve the communication performance. Use a switching hub. Configure the system compliant with the high-speed 100BASE-TX (100Mbps) standard. Reduce the number of devices monitored by GT SoftGOT1000.
When multiple GT SoftGOT1000 modules are connected to the same Ethernet network, set a different PLC number for each module.
When a GT SoftGOT1000 module is used with the GOT, do not set IP address 192.168.0.18 for the GT SoftGOT1000 module. Doing so may cause a communication error on the GOT.
(2) Compatible models
Compatible models
Q173NCCPU
N/W No. PC No. IP address Port No. : 5001
: 1 : 3 : 192.168.0.18
N/W No. PC No. IP address Port No. : 5001 (Fixed)
: 1 : 2 : 192.168.0.19
4 - 132 4.8 Ethernet Connection
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
(3) Setting with remote monitor tool (IP address setting)
: Required : Set if necessary : Not required
(4) Setting on personal computer Set the IP address.
(5) Communication check
(a) Ping test The INIT.LED of the CNC C70 turns on when the CNC C70 is ready for communications. When the CNC C70 is ready for communications, execute the Ping command with the command prompt of
Windows.
When the Ping test is verified C:\>Ping 192. 168. 0. 19
Reply from 192.168.0.19:bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=32
When the Ping test is not verified C:\>Ping 192. 168. 0. 19
Request timed out.
When the Ping test is not verified, check the connections of the cable and module, and settings, including
the IP address, for Windows.
Item Setting Setting
(with GOT connected)
IP address 192.168.0.19
Subnet mask 255.255.255.0
Gateway address 0.0.0.0
Port number 64758 (Fixed)
Speed auto/10M 0 (Fixed)
4.8 Ethernet Connection 4 - 133
(b) Station monitoring function For details on the station monitoring function, refer to the following manual.
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Electric Products) for GT Works3
(6) Settings on GT Designer3 and GT SoftGOT1000
(a) Setting on GT Designer3 Ethernet setting
Set the Ethernet setting dialog box on GT Designer3 as shown below. Up to 128 Ethernet settings can be configured.
(b) Setting on GT SoftGOT1000 Communication setup
Set the communication setup dialog box of GT SoftGOT1000. For details on the communication setting, refer to the following manual.
3.6.1 Communication setup dialog box
Item Description Range
Host Indicate the host station. (The host station is indicated as *.) -
N/W No. Set the network number of the target Ethernet module. 1 to 239
PLC No. Set the station number of the target Ethernet module. 1 to 64
Type Set the type of the target Ethernet module. Q17nNC
IP address Set the IP address of the target Ethernet module. 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255
Port No. Set the port number of the target Ethernet module. 5001
Communication Select a communication method. UDP
4 - 134 4.8 Ethernet Connection
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
When using CC-Link IE Field Network Ethernet adapter module The setting items and precautions are shown below for communicating GT SoftGOT1000 to the PLC CPU via the CC-Link IE Field Network Ethernet adapter module.
POINT
Setting items
Refer to the following for how to set the N/W No., PLC No./PC No., IP address and port No. of the CC-Link IE Field Network Ethernet adapter module and GT SoftGOT1000.
(8) Settings on GT Designer3 and GT SoftGOT1000
The following shows the procedure for communicating GT SoftGOT1000 to the PLC CPU via the CC-Link IE Field Network Ethernet adapter module.
(1) Before setting
(a) Precautions for monitoring The GOT cannot monitor the host station.
(b) Monitoring the CPUs on other networks Monitoring the CPUs on other networks requires the routing parameter to be set. Refer to the following for how to set the routing parameters.
(4) Routing Parameter Setting
(8) Settings on GT Designer3 and GT SoftGOT1000
(c) Precautions for communication When multiple network devices (including a GT SoftGOT1000 module) are connected to the same
segment, the network load increases, possibly degrading the communication performance between the GT SoftGOT1000 module and PLC. The following countermeasures may improve the communication performance. Use a switching hub. Configure the system compliant with the high-speed 100BASE-TX (100Mbps) standard. Reduce the number of devices monitored by GT SoftGOT1000.
When multiple GT SoftGOT1000 modules are connected to the same Ethernet network, set a different PLC number for each module.
When a GT SoftGOT1000 module is used with the GOT, do not set IP address 192.168.0.18 for the GT SoftGOT1000 module. Doing so may cause a communication error on the GOT.
N/W No. PC No. IP address
Port No. :5001 (Fixed)
:3 :1 :192.168.3.18
Network type N/W No. PC No. Total stations :2
:CC IE Field (Master station) :1 :0
HUB
IP address N/W No. Station No.
:192.168.3.30 :3 :30
Network type N/W No. PC No.
:CC IE Field (Local station) :1 :0
Ethernet
CC-Link IE Field Network
4.8 Ethernet Connection 4 - 135
(2) Compatible models
(3) Setting on GX Developer (Network parameter setting) Parameter setting can be made from the Ethernet/CC IE/MELSECNET network parameter setting screen. Set the network type, network No., total stations and station number.
(4) Routing Parameter Setting Up to 64 [Transfer Network No.]s can be set. The same [Transfer Network No.] cannot be set twice or more. The host (GOT) can access up to 64 [Transfer Network No.]s as a request source.
Compatible models
NZ2GF-ETB
Item Setting Screen Examples
Ethernet parameter
Setting item Range
Transfer Network No. 1 to 239
Relay Network No. 1 to 239
Relay Station No. 0 to 120
4 - 136 4.8 Ethernet Connection
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
POINT
Routing parameter setting for the request source
The GOT at the request source also requires the routing parameter setting. Refer to the following for routing parameter setting.
(8) Settings on GT Designer3 and GT SoftGOT1000
(5) Parameter setting Set the parameter with the Ethernet adapter unit setting tool. For details of the Ethernet adapter unit setting tool, refer to the following manual.
CC-Link IE Field Network Ethernet Adapter Module User's Manual
(6) Setting on personal computer Set the IP address.
(7) Communications check
(a) Ping test When C Controller module is ready for communications, execute the Ping command with the command
prompt of Windows.
When the Ping test is verified C:\>Ping 192. 168. 0. 2 Reply from 192.168.0.2:bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=32
When the Ping test is not verified
Item Setting Screen Examples
CC-Link IE Field
Network Setting
For the network No., set the same value as the setting on the PLC side.
For the station No., set a value other than the setting on the PLC side.
Ethernet Setting
Set the IP address within the following range.
192.168. 3. 30
Set the fourth octet within the range from 1 to 64.
Set the third octet within the range from 1 to 239.
4.8 Ethernet Connection 4 - 137
C:\>Ping 192. 168. 0. 2 Request timed out.
When the Ping test is not verified, check the connections of the cable and module, and settings, including
the IP address, for Windows.
POINT
Ping test
The ping test can also be performed with GX Developer (SW6D5C-GPPW 6.01B or later). For details of the ping test, refer to the following.
GX Developer Version Operating Manual
(b) Station monitoring function For details on the station monitoring function, refer to the following manual.
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Electric Products) for GT Works3
(8) Settings on GT Designer3 and GT SoftGOT1000
(a) Setting on GT Designer3 Ethernet setting
Set the Ethernet setting dialog box on GT Designer3 as shown below. Up to 128 Ethernet settings can be configured.
*1 Set according to the third octet (network No.) of the Ethernet adapter unit IP address.
*2 Set according to the fourth octet (PC No.) of the Ethernet adapter unit IP address.
*3 Set according to the Ethernet adapter unit IP address.
Item Description Range
Host Indicate the host station. (The host station is indicated as *.) -
N/W No.*1 Set the network number of the CC-Link IE Field Network Ethernet
adapter module. 1 to 239
PLC No.*2 Set the station number of the CC-Link IE Field Network Ethernet
adapter module. 1 to 64
Type Set the type of the CC-Link IE Field Network Ethernet adapter module. NZ2GF-ETB
IP address*3 Set the IP address of the CC-Link IE Field Network Ethernet adapter
module. 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255
Port No. Set the port number of the CC-Link IE Field Network Ethernet adapter
module. 5001
Communication Select a communication method. UDP
4 - 138 4.8 Ethernet Connection
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
Routing Parameter Setting Set the routing parameter in the Routing Information Setting dialog box of GT Designer3. Up to 64 [Transfer Network No.]s can be set. The same [Transfer Network No.] cannot be set twice or more. The host (GOT) can access up to 64 [Transfer Network No.]s as a request source.
POINT
Routing parameter setting
Communication within the host network does not require routing parameter setting.
Refer to the following for details of routing parameter setting.
Q Corresponding Ethernet Interface Module User's Manual (Application)
POINT
Routing parameter setting for the relay station
The PLC at the relay station also requires the routing parameter setting. Refer to the following for routing parameter setting.
(4) Routing Parameter Setting
(b) Setting on GT SoftGOT1000 Communication setup
Set the communication setup dialog box of GT SoftGOT1000. For details on the communication setting, refer to the following manual.
3.6.1 Communication setup dialog box
Setting item Range
Transfer Network No. 1 to 239
Relay Network No. 1 to 239
Relay Station No. 0 to 120
4.8 Ethernet Connection 4 - 139
4.9 MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10 Connection
4.9.1 System configurations and connection conditions
*1 For the motion controller CPU (Q series), only the PLC CPU area (CPU No.1) in the Q170MCPU and Q170MSCPU can be
monitored.
*2 Distance between stations for using QSI optical cable and 5C-2V coaxial cable.
The overall distance and distance between stations differs according to the type and the number of total stations for the cable to
be used.
For details on the cable, refer to the following manual.
Q corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference Manual (PLC to PLC network)
*3 When starting up multiple GT SoftGOT1000 modules, monitoring is enabled on the multiple screens.
*4 Applicable when using one MELSECNET/H board per personal computer.
Up to four MELSECNET/H boards can be mounted per personal computer.
*5 The multiple CPU system with the QCPU (Q mode) is mounted on.
PLC Max. distance GT SoftGOT1000
Number of connectable
equipmentModel name Network module Communication type
QCPU
QJ71LP21,
QJ71LP21-25,
QJ71LP21S-25,
QJ71BR11,
AJ71LP21,
A1SJ71LP21,
AJ71BR11,
A1SJ71BR11 MELSECNET/H
MELSECNET/10
Optical fiber cable:
1km*2
Coaxial cable:
500m*2
PC/AT compatible PC
PC CPU
Optical fiber cable: 64*3*4
Coaxial cable: 32*3*4
C controller
QJ71LP21-25,
QJ71LP21S-25,
QJ71BR11
QSCPU
QJ71LP21,
QJ71LP21-25,
QJ71LP21S-25,
QJ71BR11
QnACPU
AJ71QLP21,
AJ71QLP21S,
A1SJ71QLP21,
A1SJ71QLP21S,
AJ71QBR11,
A1SJ71QBR11 MELSECNET/10
ACPU
AJ71LP21,
A1SJ71LP21,
AJ71BR11,
A1SJ71BR11
Motion controller
CPU
Q series*1
QJ71LP21,
QJ71LP21-25,
QJ71LP21S-25,
QJ71BR11
MELSECNET/H
MELSECNET/10
A series
AJ71LP21,
A1SJ71LP21,
AJ71BR11,
A1SJ71BR11
MELSECNET/10
CNC C70*5
Same as QCPU (Q mode) CRnQ-700*5
PLC CPU MELSECNET/H network module, MELSECNET/10 network module
GT SoftGOT1000
Connection cable
4 - 140 4.9 MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10 Connection
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
4.9.2 Network module, interface board
The following shows connectable network modules and interface boards.
Network module
(1) MELSECNET/H
*1 Use function version B or later of the MELSECNET/H network module and CPU.
(2) MELSECNET/10
*1 Use function version B or later of the MELSECNET/H network module and CPU.
Interface board
Refer to the following manual for the settings of the interface board.
MELSECNET/H Interface Board User's Manual (For SW0DNC-MNETH-B)
POINT
When using PC CPU module
A interface board is not required. For the system configuration of the PC CPU module, refer to the manual of the PC CPU module.
Item Model name
Optical loop Coaxial bus
QCPU (Q mode)*1
QJ71LP21, QJ71LP21-25, QJ71LP21S-25 QJ71BR11*1QSCPU
Motion controller CPU (Q Series)
C controller QJ71LP21-25, QJ71LP21S-25 QJ71BR11*1
Item Model name
Optical loop Coaxial bus
QCPU(Q mode)*1 QJ71LP21, QJ71LP21-25, QJ71LP21S-25 QJ71BR11*1
C controller QJ71LP21-25, QJ71LP21S-25 QJ71BR11*1
QCPU(A mode) AJ71LP21, A1SJ71LP21 AJ71BR11, A1SJ71BR11
QSCPU QJ71LP21, QJ71LP21-25, QJ71LP21S-25 QJ71BR11*1
QnACPU AJ71QLP21, AJ71QLP21S, A1SJ71QLP21,
A1SJ71QLP21S AJ71QBR11, A1SJ71QBR11
ACPU AJ71LP21, A1SJ71LP21 AJ71BR11, A1SJ71BR11
Motion controller CPU (Q mode) QJ71LP21, QJ71LP21-25, QJ71LP21S-25 QJ71BR11*1
Motion controller CPU (A mode) AJ71LP21, A1SJ71LP21 AJ71BR11, A1SJ71BR11
Type Model name Bus format Driver
MELSECNET/H
Q80BD-J71LP21-25 (Optical loop), Q80BD-J71LP21G (Optical loop),
Q80BD-J71LP21S-25 (Optical loop, with external power supply
function), Q80BD-J71BR11 (Coaxial loop)
PCI SWODNC-MNETH-B
Q81BD-J71LP21-25 (Coaxial loop) PCI Express
4.9 MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10 Connection 4 - 141
4.9.3 Connection cable
The cables are the same as the fiber-optic cables and coaxial cables used in the MELSECNET/H or MELSECNET/10 network system. Refer to the following for details of cables.
Q corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference Manual (PLC to PLC network)
4.9.4 GT SoftGOT1000 setting
When communicating GT SoftGOT1000 to a PLC in MELSECNET/H or MELSECNET/10 network system, communication setup is required. Refer to the following for performing GT SoftGOT1000 communication setup.
3.6.1 Communication setup dialog box
4.9.5 Controller setting
For the settings of the MELSECNET/H network module and MELSECNET/10 network module, refer to the following.
Q corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference Manual (PLC to PLC network)
4 - 142 4.9 MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10 Connection
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
4.10 CC-Link IE Controller Network Connection
4.10.1 System configurations and connection conditions
*1 For the motion controller CPU (Q series), only the PLC CPU area (CPU No.1) in the Q170MCPU and Q170MSCPU can be
monitored.
*2 Distance between stations for using the fiber-optic cable (core/cladding = 50/125(m)).
The overall distance and distance between stations differs according to the type and the number of total stations for the cable to
be used.
For details on the cable, refer to the following manual.
CC-Link IE Controller Network Reference Manual
*3 When starting up multiple GT SoftGOT1000 modules, monitoring is enabled on the multiple screens.
*4 The multiple CPU system with the QCPU (Q mode) is mounted on.
4.10.2 Network module, interface board
The following shows connectable network modules and interface boards.
Network module
PLC Max. distance GT SoftGOT1000
Number of connectable
equipmentModel name Network module Communication type
RCPU RJ71GP21-SX
CC-Link IE Controller
Network 550m*2
PC/AT compatible PC
PC CPU 120*3
QCPU QJ71GP21-SX,
QJ71GP21S-SX
C controller
MELSEC iQ-R
series RJ71GP21-SX
Q series QJ71GP21-SX,
QJ71GP21S-SX
QSCPU QJ71GP21-SX,
QJ71GP21S-SX
Motion controller
CPU
MELSEC iQ-R
series RJ71GP21-SX
Q Series*1 QJ71GP21-SX,
QJ71GP21S-SX
CNC C70*4
Same as QCPU (Q mode) CRnQ-700*4
Item Model name
RCPU RJ71GP21-SX
C controller MELSEC iQ-R series
QCPU (Q mode)
QJ71GP21-SX, QJ71GP21S-SX C controller Q Series
QSCPU
Motion controller CPU Q Series
PLC CPU CC-Link IE Controller Network module GT SoftGOT1000
Connection cable
4.10 CC-Link IE Controller Network Connection 4 - 143
Interface board
Refer to the following manual for the settings of the interface board.
CC-Link IE Controller Network Interface Board User's Manual (For SW1DNC-MNETG-B)
POINT
When using PC CPU module
An interface board is not required. For the system configuration of the PC CPU module, refer to the manual of the PC CPU module.
4.10.3 Connection cable
The cables are the same as the fiber-optic cables used in the CC-Link IE Controller Network. Refer to the following for details of cables.
CC-Link IE Controller Network Reference Manual
4.10.4 GT SoftGOT1000 setting
When communicating GT SoftGOT1000 to a PLC in CC-Link IE Controller Network, communication setup is required. Refer to the following for performing GT SoftGOT1000 communication setup.
3.6.1 Communication setup dialog box
4.10.5 Controller setting
For the settings of the CC-Link IE Controller Network module, refer to the following.
CC-Link IE Controller Network Reference Manual
Type Model name Bus format Driver
CC-Link IE Controller
Q80BD-J71GP21-SX, Q80BD-J71GP21S-SX PCI
SW1DNC-MNETG-BQ81BD-J71GP21-SX (Coaxial loop),
Q81BD-J71GP21S-SX (Optical loop, with external power supply function) PCI Express
4 - 144 4.10 CC-Link IE Controller Network Connection
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
4.11 CC-Link IE Field Network Connection
4.11.1 System configurations and connection conditions
*1 Compatible with only the universal model QCPU.
*2 The multiple CPU system with the QCPU (Q mode) is mounted on.
*3 For the motion controller CPU (Q series), only the PLC CPU area (CPU No.1) in the Q170MCPU and Q170MSCPU can be
monitored.
*4 When starting up multiple GT SoftGOT1000 modules, monitoring is enabled on the multiple screens.
*5 The destination connected with the twisted pair cable varies with the configuration of the applicable Ethernet network system.
Connect to the Ethernet module, hub, transceiver, or other system equipment corresponding to the applicable Ethernet network
system.
Use cables, connectors, and hubs that meet the IEEE802.3 1000BASE-T, ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B (category 5e) standard.
PLC
connection cable *5 Max. distance GT
SoftGOT1000
Number of
connectable
equipmentModel name Network module Communication
type
RCPU
RJ71GF11-T2,
RJ71EN71,
RD77GF4,
RD77GF8,
RD77GF16
CC-Link IE
Field Network
Ethernet cable that
meets
the 1000BASE-T
standard:
Category 5e or
higher,
(double-shielded,
STP)
straight cable.
100m
(Maximum
segment length)
PC/AT
compatible PC
PC CPU 120*4
QCPU(Q mode) *1 QJ71GF11-T2
C controller
MELSEC iQ-R
series
RJ71GF11-T2,
RJ71EN71,
RD77GF4,
RD77GF8,
RD77GF16
Q series QJ71GF11-T2
QSCPU QS0J71GF11-T2
LCPU LJ71GF11-T2
Motion
controller CPU
MELSEC iQ-R
series
RJ71GF11-T2,
RJ71EN71,
RD77GF4,
RD77GF8,
RD77GF16
Q Series*3 QJ71GF11-T2
CNC C70*2
Same as QCPU (Q mode) CRnQ-700*2
GT SoftGOT1000PLC CPU
Connection cable
CC-Link IE Field Network module
4.11 CC-Link IE Field Network Connection 4 - 145
4.11.2 Network module, interface board
The following shows connectable network modules and interface boards.
Network module
Interface board
Refer to the following manual for the settings of the interface board.
CC-Link IE Field Network Interface Board User's Manual(For SW1DNC-CCIEF-B)
POINT
When using PC CPU module
An interface board is not required. For the system configuration of the PC CPU module, refer to the manual of the PC CPU module.
4.11.3 GT SoftGOT1000 setting
When communicating GT SoftGOT1000 to a PLC in the CC-Link IE Field Network system, communication setup is required. Refer to the following for performing GT SoftGOT1000 communication setup.
3.6.1 Communication setup dialog box
4.11.4 Controller setting
For the settings of the CC-Link IE Field Network module, refer to the following.
CC-Link IE Field Network Master/Local Module User's Manual
Item Model name
RCPU RJ71GF11-T2, RJ71EN71, RD77GF4, RD77GF8,
RD77GF16C controller MELSEC iQ-R series
QCPU (Q mode)
QJ71GF11-T2C controller Q series
Motion controller CPU Q Series
QSCPU QS0J71GF11-T2
LCPU LJ71GF11-T2
Type Model name Bus format Driver
CC-Link IE Field Q81BD-J71GF11-T2 PCI Express SW1DNC-CCIEF-B
4 - 146 4.11 CC-Link IE Field Network Connection
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
4.12 CNC Connection
4.12.1 Direct CPU connection
System configurations and connection conditions
*1 When starting up multiple GT SoftGOT1000 modules, monitoring is enabled on the multiple screens.
Connection cable The user is required to make a conversion cable for connecting to the MELDAS C6/C64. The following describes the connection diagram for each cable and specifications of connectors.
(1) RS-232 1)
(a) Connection diagram
(b) Connector specifications PC side connector
Use the connector compatible with the PC side. MELDAS C6/C64 side connector
Use the connector compatible with MELDAS C6/C64 side. For details, refer to the following manual.
User's Manual for the MELDAS C6/C64
(c) Precautions for creating cables The length of the conversion cable must be 15m or shorter.
GT SoftGOT1000 setting When communicating GT SoftGOT1000 to a MELDAS C6/C64 in CPU direct connection, communication setup is required. Refer to the following for performing GT SoftGOT1000 communication setup.
3.6.1 Communication setup dialog box
PLC Connection cable Max. distance GT SoftGOT1000
Number of connectable
equipmentModel name Communication type
MELDAS C6/C64 RS-232 RS-232 1) 15m PC/AT compatible PC
PC CPU 1*1
GT SoftGOT1000MELDAS C6/C64
Connection cable
GT SoftGOT1000 side
1
6
16
-
11
-
-
18
-
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
GND
SD
RD(RXD)
-
GND
-
-
ER(DTR)
-
GND
RD(RXD)
SD(TXD)
-
GND
DR(DSR)
-
CS(CTS)
-
MELDAS C6/C64 side (20 pin half pitch)
*1
4.12 CNC Connection 4 - 147
4.12.2 Ethernet connection
System configurations and connection conditions
*1 When starting up multiple GT SoftGOT1000 modules, monitoring is enabled on the multiple screens.
*2 The destination connected with the twisted pair cable varies with the configuration of the applicable Ethernet network system.
Connect to the Ethernet module, hub, transceiver or other system equipment corresponding to the applicable Ethernet network
system.
Use cables, connectors, and hubs that meet the IEEE802.3 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX standard.
Connection cable Use a cable applicable to the Ethernet module to be used.
Controller setting The setting items and precautions are shown below for communicating GT SoftGOT1000 to the MELDAS C6/C64. This section describes the system configuration to monitor the host station as shown below.
POINT
Setting items
Refer to the following for how to set the N/W No., PLC No./PC No., IP address and port No. of the MELDAS C6/ C64 and GT SoftGOT1000.
(7) Settings with GT Designer3 and GT SoftGOT1000
PLC
Connection cable*2 Max. distance GT
SoftGOT1000
Number of
connectable
equipmentModel name Extension unit Communication type
MELDAS C6/C64 FCU6-EX875 Ethernet Twisted pair cable
100m
(max. segment
length)
PC/AT
compatible PC 128*1
Connection cable
GT SoftGOT1000 MELDAS C6/C64
Extension unit
N/W No.
PC No.
:1
:2 :192.168.0.2
:5001
N/W No.
PC No.
:1
:1 :192.168.0.1
:5001
:1
:3 :192.168.0.3
:5001
Other station
Host
Port No.
IP address
IP address Port No.
N/W No.
PC No.
Port No.
IP address
4 - 148 4.12 CNC Connection
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
The following shows the procedure for communicating GT SoftGOT1000 to the MELDAS C6/C64.
(1) Before setting
(a) Precautions for monitoring GT SoftGOT1000 cannot monitor CPUs on the other networks.
(b) Precautions for communication When multiple network devices (including a GT SoftGOT1000 module) are connected to the same
segment, the network load increases, possibly degrading the communication performance between the GT SoftGOT1000 module and PLC. The following countermeasures may improve the communication performance. Use a switching hub. Configure the system compliant with the high-speed 100BASE-TX (100Mbps) standard. Reduce the number of devices monitored by GT SoftGOT1000.
When multiple GT SoftGOT1000 modules are connected to the same Ethernet network, set a different PLC number for each module.
When a GT SoftGOT1000 module is used with the GOT, do not set IP address 192.168.0.18 for the GT SoftGOT1000 module. Doing so may cause a communication error on the GOT.
(2) Compatible models
(3) Network parameter setting Set the network parameters by peripheral devices and write them to the MELDAS C6/C64. The following shows an example of the parameter setting for GX Developer. Set the start I/O No. that corresponds to the extension slot to be connected with the Ethernet unit. When using two extension slots, unit numbers are assigned as shown in the following figures from 1) to 3).
(a) Start I/O No.
Compatible models
FCA C6, FCA C64
Extension
slot
Start I/O
No. Mounting position of extension unit
EXT1 0200
EXT2 0280
EXT3 0300
EXT2
EXT1
Unit2
Unit1
EXT3
EXT1
EXT2
EXT3
EXT1
(e)When mounted in EXT2 only (f)When mounted in EXT3 only
EXT2
EXT3
(a)When mounted in EXT1 and EXT2 (b)When mounted in EXT1 and EXT3 (c)When mounted in EXT2 and EXT3
(d)When mounted in EXT1 only
Unit2
Unit2 Unit1 Unit1
Unit1Unit1 Unit1
4.12 CNC Connection 4 - 149
(b) Example of GX Developer setting
For details of the parameter setting, refer to the following.
MELDAS C6/C64 NETWORK MANUAL BNP-B2373
POINT
IP address setting
The IP address setting on GX Developer is invalid. Set the IP address by the 7-segment LED and rotary switch of the MELDAS C6/C64 side, referring to the next page.
4 - 150 4.12 CNC Connection
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
(4) MELDAS C6/C64 side parameter setting Set the IP address, gateway address, subnet mask, and port No. for the 7-segment LED and rotary switch of the MELDAS C6/C64 side, and then check the settings. For details of the parameter setting, refer to the following.
MELDAS C6/C64 NETWORK MANUAL BNPB2373 IV Setting the Ethernet IP Address
(5) Setting on the personal computer Set the IP address.
(6) Communications check
(a) Ping test
When ready to communicate, execute the Ping command at the command prompt on the Windows.
When connections are OK C:\>ping 192. 168. 0. 2 Reply from 192. 168. 0. 2:bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=32
When connections are not good C:\>ping 192. 168. 0. 2 Request timed out.
When the Ping test is not verified, check the connections of the cable and module, and settings, including
the IP address, for Windows.
(b) Station monitoring function For details on the station monitoring function, refer to the following manual.
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Electric Products) for GT Works3
7-segment LED
Rotary switch
4.12 CNC Connection 4 - 151
(7) Settings with GT Designer3 and GT SoftGOT1000
(a) Setting on GT Designer3 Ethernet setting
Set the Ethernet setting dialog box on GT Designer3 as shown below. Up to 128 Ethernet settings can be configured.
(b) Setting on GT SoftGOT1000 Communication setup
Set the communication setup dialog box of GT SoftGOT1000. For details on the communication setting, refer to the following manual.
3.6.1 Communication setup dialog box
Item Description Range
Host Indicate the host station. (The host station is indicated as *.) -
N/W No. Set the network number of the target Ethernet module. 1 to 239
PLC No. Set the station number of the target Ethernet module. 1 to 64
Type Set the type of the target Ethernet module. AJ71QE71
IP address Set the IP address of the target Ethernet module. 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255
Port No. Set the port number of the target Ethernet module. 5001
Communication Select a communication method. UDP
4 - 152 4.12 CNC Connection
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
4.13 Robot Controller Connection
4.13.1 System configurations and connection conditions
*1 When starting up multiple GT SoftGOT1000 modules, monitoring is enabled on the multiple screens.
*2 The destination connected with the twisted pair cable varies with the configuration of the applicable Ethernet network system.
Connect to the Ethernet module, hub, transceiver or other system equipment corresponding to the applicable Ethernet network
system.
Use cables, connectors, and hubs that meet the IEEE802.3 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX standard.
4.13.2 Connection cable
Use a cable applicable to the robot controller to be used.
4.13.3 Controller setting
For communications between GT SoftGOT1000 and the robot controller, the following setting items and precautions are described below. This section describes the system configuration to monitor to the host as shown below.
POINT
Setting items
Refer to the following for how to set the N/W No., PLC No./PC No., IP address, and port No. of the robot controller and GT SoftGOT1000.
(6) Settings on GT Designer3 and GT SoftGOT1000
PLC Connection cable*2 Max. distance GT SoftGOT1000
Number of connectable
equipmentModel name Communication type
CRnD-700, CR750-D,
CR751-D Ethernet Twisted pair cable
100m
(max. segment length)
PC/AT compatible PC
PC CPU 1*1
GT SoftGOT1000 Robot controller
Connection cable
N/W No.
PC No.
IP address
Port No. :5001
:1 :1
:192.168.0.18
N/W No.
PC No.
IP address
Port No. :5001
:1
:2
:192.168.0.19
4.13 Robot Controller Connection 4 - 153
The following shows the procedures for communications with the robot controller.
(1) Before setting
(a) Precautions for monitoring GT SoftGOT1000 cannot monitor other stations. GT SoftGOT1000 cannot monitor CPUs on the other networks.
(b) Precautions for communication When multiple network devices (including a GT SoftGOT1000 module) are connected to the same
segment, the network load increases, possibly degrading the communication performance between the GT SoftGOT1000 module and PLC. The following countermeasures may improve the communication performance. Use a switching hub. Configure the system compliant with the high-speed 100BASE-TX (100Mbps) standard. Reduce the number of devices monitored by GT SoftGOT1000.
When multiple GT SoftGOT1000 modules are connected to the same Ethernet network, set a different PLC number for each module.
When a GT SoftGOT1000 module is used with the GOT, do not set IP address 192.168.0.18 for the GT SoftGOT1000 module. Doing so may cause a communication error on the GOT.
(2) Compatible models
(3) Parameter settings for robot controller Set the robot controller parameter settings with the R32TB, R56TB, or RT ToolBox2.
POINT
Robot controller
For details of the robot controller, refer to the following manual.
Manual for the robot controller
(a) For RT ToolBox2
: Required : Set if necessary : Not required
Compatible models
CRnD-700, CR750-D, CR751-D
Item Setting Setting
(with GOT connected)
NETIP 192.168.0.19
GOTPORT 5001
4 - 154 4.13 Robot Controller Connection
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
(b) For R32TB or R56TB
: Required : Set if necessary : Not required
(4) Setting on personal computer Set the IP address.
(5) Communication check
(a) Ping test When the CNC C70 is ready for communications, execute the Ping command with the command prompt of
Windows.
When the Ping test is verified
C: \>Ping 192. 168. 0. 19
Reply from 192.168.0.19:bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=32
When the Ping test is not verified
C: \>Ping 192. 168. 0. 19
Request timed out.
When the Ping test is not verified, check the connections of the cable and unit, and settings, including the
IP address, for Windows.
(b) Station monitoring function For details on the station monitoring function, refer to the following manual.
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Electric Products) for GT Works3
Item Setting Setting
(with GOT connected)
NETIP 192.168.0.19
GOTPORT 5001
(For R56TB)
4.13 Robot Controller Connection 4 - 155
(6) Settings on GT Designer3 and GT SoftGOT1000
(a) Setting on GT Designer3 Ethernet setting
Set the Ethernet setting dialog box on GT Designer3 as shown below. Up to 128 Ethernet settings can be configured.
(b) Setting on GT SoftGOT1000 Communication setup
Set the communication setup dialog box of GT SoftGOT1000. For details on the communication setting, refer to the following manual.
3.6.1 Communication setup dialog box
Item Description Range
Host Indicate the host station. (The host station is indicated as *.) -
N/W No. Set the network number of the target Ethernet module. 1 to 239
PLC No. Set the station number of the target Ethernet module. 1 to 64
Type Set the type of the target Ethernet module. CRnD-700
IP address Set the IP address of the target Ethernet module. 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255
Port No. Set the port number of the target Ethernet module. 5001
Communication Select a communication method. UDP
4 - 156 4.13 Robot Controller Connection
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
4.14 Third Party PLC Connections
4.14.1 OMRON PLC
Serial connection
(1) System configurations and connection conditions
*1 For the applicable CPUs, refer to the following.
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Non-Mitsubishi Electric Products 1) for GT Works3
PLC
Connection cable Max. distance GT SoftGOT1000
Number of
connectable
equipmentModel name Communication unit Communication type
SYSMAC CQM1H CQM1-SCB41
RS-232 RS-232 1)
RS-232 2) 15m
PC/AT compatible
PC
PC CPU
1
SYSMAC CJ1
CJ1W-SCU21,
CJ1W-SCU41,
CJ1W-SCU21-V1,
CJ1W-SCU41-V1
SYSMAC CJ2
CP1W-CIF01,
CJ1W-SCU21-V1,
CJ1W-SCU41-V1
SYSMAC CP1
CP1W-CIF01,
CJ1W-SCU21,
CJ1W-SCU41,
CJ1W-SCU21-V1,
CJ1W-SCU41-V1
SYSMAC
C200H-LK201-V1,
C200HW-COM02,
C200HW-COM05,
C200HW-COM06
SYSMAC CS1
CS1W-SCU21,
CS1W-SCU21-V1,
CS1W-SCB21,
CS1W-SCB41,
CS1W-SCB21-V1,
CS1W-SCB41-V1
SYSMAC CVM1/CV (Built-in serial port)*1
CQM1 (Built-in serial port)*1
CPM2A CPM1-CIF01
OMRON PLC GT SoftGOT1000
Connection cable
4.14 Third Party PLC Connections 4 - 157
(2) Connection cable
(a) MITSUBISHI SYSTEM & SERVICE product RS-232 1)
(b) Using an RS-232 cable prepared by user The following describes the connection diagram, connector and others for each cable. Connection diagram
RS-232 2)
Connector specifications
Precautions for creating cables The length of the cable must be 15m or less.
(3) GT SoftGOT1000 setting When communicating GT SoftGOT1000 to an OMRON PLC, communication setup is required.
*1 Transmission speed supported by the PLC must be set.
*2 The settings on the PLC and GT SoftGOT1000 must be the same.
Refer to the following for performing GT SoftGOT1000 communication setup.
3.6.1 Communication setup dialog box
(4) Controller setting For the OMRON PLC side setting, refer to the following manual.
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Non-Mitsubishi Electric Products 1) for GT Works3
RS-232 cable
GT09-C30R20101-9P(3m) (For the 9-pin D-sub connector of the PC side)
1) PC side connector Use the connector compatible with the PC side.
2) Omron PLC CPU side connector Use the connector compatible with Omron PLC CPU side. For details, refer to the following manual.
User's Manual for Omron PLC CPU
Item*2 Setting
Transmission speed*1 9600/19200/38400/57600/115200bps
Data length 7bits
Stop bit 2bits
Parity Even
Communication condition format Individual
Host link station No. 00
FG
SD
RD
RS
SG
CS
-
FR
ER
CD
RD(RXD)
SD(TXD)
ER(DTR)
SG
DR(DSR)
RS(RTS)
CS(CTS)
-
1
2
3
4
9
5
6
7
8
OMRON PLC side
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
GOT side
4 - 158 4.14 Third Party PLC Connections
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
Ethernet connection
(1) System configurations and connection conditions
*1 To use GT SoftGOT1000 module together with another GT SoftGOT1000 module or a different application, set the different
number for each port No.
*2 There is no restriction for the number of GOTs. However, if the number of GOTs increases, the communication becomes high-
loaded, and it may affect the communication performance.
*3 The number of connectable personal computers includes the number of total GT SoftGOT 1000 modules started in a personal
computer.
*4 The destination connected with the twisted pair cable varies with the configuration of the applicable Ethernet network system.
Connect to the Ethernet module, hub, transceiver or other system equipment corresponding to the applicable Ethernet network
system.
Use cables, connectors, and hubs that meet the IEEE802.3 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX standard.
*5 The CJ2H-CPU6 -EIP or CJ2M-CPU3 can be connected by using its Ethernet port or an Ethernet module.
*6 This column shows the number of personal computers that can be connected to one PLC.
*7 This column shows the number of PLCs that can be connected to one personal computer.
*8 Available only when CS1D is used.
(2) Ethernet module and Ethernet board/card The following shows connectable Ethernet modules and Ethernet boards/cards.
(a) Ethernet module
(b) Ethernet board/card Use the same Ethernet board and card as those for connecting to MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC PLC.
4.8.2 Built-in Ethernet port CPU, Ethernet module, Ethernet board/card
POINT
When using PC CPU module
A interface board is not required. For the system configuration of the PC CPU module, refer to the manual of the PC CPU module.
(3) Connection cable Use a cable applicable to the Ethernet module or the Ethernet board/card to be used.
PLC
Connection cable*4 Max. distance GT SoftGOT1000
Number of connectable
equipment
Model name Ethernet module Communication
type
Personal
computer*6 PLC*7
SYSMAC CJ1 CS1W-ETN21
Ethernet Twisted pair cable
100m
(max. segment
length)
PC/AT compatible
PC
PC CPU
UDP: No
limitation*1*2
TCP: 16*1*3
UDP: 128
TCP: 10
SYSMAC CJ2*5
SYSMAC CS1 CS1W-ETN21,
CS1D-ETN21D*8
Item Model name
CS1H, CS1G CS1W-ETN21
CS1D CS1W-ETN21, CS1D-ETN21D
CJ1H, CJ1M, CJ1G, CJ2H(-EIP), CJ2M CJ1W-ETN21
OMRON PLC Ethernet module GT SoftGOT1000
Connection cable
4.14 Third Party PLC Connections 4 - 159
(4) Controller setting
POINT
Precautions for Ethernet connection
(1) OMRON PLC For details of OMRON PLCs, refer to the following manual.
User's manual for OMRON PLC CPU
(2) Precautions for Ethernet connection Specify the N/W No. and the PLC No. of the OMRON PLC connected to the GOT via the Ethernet connection. The specified N/W No. and the PLC No. must be the same as those set on GT Designer3. For the settings of N/W No., PC No., IP address and port No. of the Ethernet module and GT SoftGOT1000, refer to the following.
(8) Settings on GT Designer3 and GT SoftGOT1000.
(a) Before setting When multiple network devices (including a GT SoftGOT1000 module) are connected to the same
segment, the network load increases, possibly degrading the communication performance between the GT SoftGOT1000 module and PLC. The following countermeasures may improve the communication performance. Use a switching hub. Configure the system compliant with the high-speed 100BASE-TX (100Mbps) standard. Reduce the number of devices monitored by GT SoftGOT1000.
When multiple GT SoftGOT1000 modules are connected to the same Ethernet network, set a different PLC number for each module.
When a GT SoftGOT1000 module is used with the GOT, do not set IP address 192.168.0.18 for the GT SoftGOT1000 module. Doing so may cause a communication error on the GOT.
(5) Setting of programmable controller side For settings for each part of programmable controller, refer to the following manual.
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Non-Mitsubishi Electric Products 1) for GT Works3
(6) Setting on the personal computer Set the IP address.
(7) Communications check
(a) Ping test
Execute the Ping command with Command Prompt of Windows when the preparations for communication are complete.
When the Ping test is verified C:\>Ping 192. 168. 0. 2 Reply from 192.168.0.2:bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=32
When the Ping test is not verified C:\>Ping 192. 168. 0. 2 Request timed out.
If the Ping test is not verified, check connections of the cable and unit, Windows side IP address and other settings.
(b) Station monitoring function For details on the station monitoring function, refer to the following manual.
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Non-Mitsubishi Electric Products 1) for GT Works3
4 - 160 4.14 Third Party PLC Connections
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
(8) Settings on GT Designer3 and GT SoftGOT1000.
(a) Setting on GT Designer3 Ethernet setting
Set the Ethernet setting dialog box on GT Designer3 as shown below. Up to 128 Ethernet settings can be configured.
(b) Setting on GT SoftGOT1000 Communication setup
Set the communication setup dialog box of GT SoftGOT1000. For details on the communication setting, refer to the following manual.
3.6.1 Communication setup dialog box
Item Description Range
Host Indicate the host station. (The host station is indicated as *.) -
N/W No. Set the network number of the target Ethernet module. 1 to 127
PLC No. Set the station number of the target Ethernet module. 1 to 254
Type Select [OMRON]. OMRON
IP address Set the IP address of the target Ethernet module. IP address of programmable
controller side
Port No. Set the port number of the target Ethernet module. 256 to 65534
Communication Select a communication method. UDP, TCP
4.14 Third Party PLC Connections 4 - 161
4.14.2 KEYENCE PLC
Ethernet connection
(1) System configurations and connection conditions
*1 To use GT SoftGOT1000 module together with another GT SoftGOT1000 module or a different application, set the different
number for each port No.
*2 When the number of connected equipment is increased, the load on the communication is increased. This may affect the
communication performance.
*3 The number of connectable personal computers includes the number of total GT SoftGOT1000 modules started in a personal
computer.
*4 The destination connected with the twisted pair cable varies with the configuration of the applicable Ethernet network system.
Connect to the Ethernet module, hub, transceiver or other system equipment corresponding to the applicable Ethernet network
system.
Use cables, connectors, and hubs that meet the IEEE802.3 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX standard.
*5 This column shows the number of personal computers that can be connected to one PLC.
*6 This column shows the number of PLCs that can be connected to one personal computer.
(2) Ethernet module and Ethernet board/card The following shows connectable Ethernet modules and Ethernet boards/cards.
(a) Ethernet module
(b) Ethernet board/card Use the same Ethernet board and card as those for connecting to MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC PLC.
4.8.2 Built-in Ethernet port CPU, Ethernet module, Ethernet board/card
POINT
When using PC CPU module
A interface board is not required. For the system configuration of the PC CPU module, refer to the manual of the PC CPU module.
(3) Connection cable Use a cable applicable to the Ethernet module or the Ethernet board/card to be used.
PLC
Connection cable*4 Max. distance GT SoftGOT1000
Number of connectable
equipment
Model name Ethernet module Communication
type
Personal
computer*5 PLC*6
KV-700, KV-1000,
KV-3000, KV-5000,
KV-5500
KV-LE20V,
KV-LE21V Ethernet Twisted pair cable
100m
(max. segment
length)
PC/AT compatible
PC
PC CPU
UDP: 1*1
TCP: 15*1*2*3
UDP: 128
TCP: 128
Item Model name
Ethernet module KV-LE20V, KV-LE21V
Connection cable
GT SoftGOT1000Ethernet moduleKEYENCE PLC
4 - 162 4.14 Third Party PLC Connections
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
(4) Controller setting
POINT
Precautions for setting items
(1) KEYENCE PLC For details of KEYENCE PLCs, refer to the following manual.
User's manual for KEYENCE PLC CPU
(2) Precautions for Ethernet connection Specify the N/W No. and the PLC No. of the KEYENCE PLC connected to the GOT via the Ethernet connection. The specified N/W No. and the PLC No. must be the same as those set on GT Designer3. For the settings of N/W No., PLC No./PC No., IP address and port No. of the Ethernet module and GT SoftGOT1000, refer to the following.
(8) Settings on GT Designer3 and GT SoftGOT1000.
(a) Before setting When multiple network devices (including a GT SoftGOT1000 module) are connected to the same
segment, the network load increases, possibly degrading the communication performance between the GT SoftGOT1000 module and PLC. The following countermeasures may improve the communication performance. Use a switching hub. Configure the system compliant with the high-speed 100BASE-TX (100Mbps) standard. Reduce the number of devices monitored by GT SoftGOT1000.
When multiple GT SoftGOT1000 modules are connected to the same Ethernet network, set a different PLC number for each module.
When a GT SoftGOT1000 module is used with the GOT, do not set IP address 192.168.0.18 for the GT SoftGOT1000 module. Doing so may cause a communication error on the GOT.
(5) Setting of programmable controller side For settings for each part of programmable controller, refer to the following manual.
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Non-Mitsubishi Electric Products 1) for GT Works3
(6) Setting on the personal computer Set the IP address.
(7) Communications check
(a) Ping test
Execute the Ping command with Command Prompt of Windows when the preparations for communication are complete.
When the Ping test is verified C:\>Ping 192. 168. 0. 2 Reply from 192.168.0.2:bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=32
When the Ping test is not verified C:\>Ping 192. 168. 0. 2 Request timed out.
If the Ping test is not verified, check connections of the cable and unit, Windows side IP address and other settings.
(b) Station monitoring function For details on the station monitoring function, refer to the following manual.
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Non-Mitsubishi Electric Products 1) for GT Works3
4.14 Third Party PLC Connections 4 - 163
(8) Settings on GT Designer3 and GT SoftGOT1000.
(a) Setting on GT Designer3 Ethernet setting
Set the Ethernet setting dialog box on GT Designer3 as shown below. Up to 64 Ethernet settings can be configured.
(b) Setting on GT SoftGOT1000 Communication setup
Set the communication setup dialog box of GT SoftGOT1000. For details on the communication setting, refer to the following manual.
3.6.1 Communication setup dialog box
Item Description Range
Host Indicate the host station. (The host station is indicated as *.) -
N/W No. Set the network number of the target Ethernet module. 1 to 239
PLC No. Set the station number of the target Ethernet module. 1 to 254
Type Select [KEYENCE]. KEYENCE
IP address Set the IP address of the target Ethernet module. IP address of programmable
controller side
Port No. Set the port number of the target Ethernet module. 1024 to 5010, 5014 to 49152,
49154 to 65534
Communication Displays the communication method. UDP, TCP
4 - 164 4.14 Third Party PLC Connections
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
4.14.3 TOSHIBA PLC
Ethernet connection
(1) System configurations and connection conditions
*1 To use GT SoftGOT1000 module together with another GT SoftGOT1000 module or a different application, set the different
number for each port No.
*2 There is no restriction for the number of GOTs. However, if the number of GOTs increases, the communication becomes high-
loaded, and it may affect the communication performance.
*3 The number of connectable personal computers includes the number of total GT SoftGOT 1000 modules started in a personal
computer.
*4 The destination connected with the twisted pair cable varies with the configuration of the applicable Ethernet network system.
Connect to the Ethernet module, hub, transceiver or other system equipment corresponding to the applicable Ethernet network
system.
Use cables, connectors, and hubs that meet the IEEE802.3 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX standard.
*5 This column shows the number of personal computers that can be connected to one PLC.
*6 This column shows the number of PLCs that can be connected to one personal computer.
(2) Ethernet module and Ethernet board/card The following shows connectable Ethernet modules and Ethernet boards/cards.
(a) Ethernet module
(b) Ethernet board/card Use the same Ethernet board and card as those for connecting to MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC PLC.
4.8.2 Built-in Ethernet port CPU, Ethernet module, Ethernet board/card
POINT
When using PC CPU module
A interface board is not required. For the system configuration of the PC CPU module, refer to the manual of the PC CPU module.
(3) Connection cable Use a cable applicable to the Ethernet module or the Ethernet board/card to be used.
PLC Connection
cable*4 Max. distance GT SoftGOT1000
Number of connectable
equipment
Model name Ethernet module Communication
type
Personal
computer*5 PLC*6
Unified Controller nv
series EN811 Ethernet Twisted pair cable
100m
(max. segment
length)
PC/AT compatible
PC
PC CPU
No
limitation*1*2*3 32
Item Model name
Unified Controller nv series EN811
TOSHIBA PLC Ethernet module GT SoftGOT1000
Connection cable
4.14 Third Party PLC Connections 4 - 165
(4) Controller setting
POINT
Precautions for Ethernet connection
(1) TOSHIBA PLC For the details of TOSHIBA PLCs, refer to the following manual.
User's manual for TOSHIBA PLC
(2) Precautions for Ethernet connection Specify the N/W No. and the PLC No. of the TOSHIBA PLC connected to the GOT via the Ethernet connection. The specified N/W No. and the PLC No. must be the same as those set on GT Designer3. For the settings of N/W No., PC No., IP address and port No. of the Ethernet module and GT SoftGOT1000, refer to the following.
(8) Settings on GT Designer3 and GT SoftGOT1000.
(a) Before setting When multiple network devices (including a GT SoftGOT1000 module) are connected to the same
segment, the network load increases, possibly degrading the communication performance between the GT SoftGOT1000 module and PLC. The following countermeasures may improve the communication performance. Use a switching hub. Configure the system compliant with the high-speed 100BASE-TX (100Mbps) standard. Reduce the number of devices monitored by GT SoftGOT1000.
When multiple GT SoftGOT1000 modules are connected to the same Ethernet network, set a different PLC number for each module.
When a GT SoftGOT1000 module is used with the GOT, do not set IP address 192.168.0.18 for the GT SoftGOT1000 module. Doing so may cause a communication error on the GOT.
(5) Setting of programmable controller side For settings for each part of programmable controller, refer to the following manual.
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Non-Mitsubishi Electric Products 1) for GT Works3
(6) Setting on the personal computer Set the IP address.
(7) Communications check
(a) Ping test
Execute the Ping command with Command Prompt of Windows when the preparations for communication are complete.
When the Ping test is verified C:\>Ping 192. 168. 0. 2 Reply from 192.168.0.2:bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=32
When the Ping test is not verified C:\>Ping 192. 168. 0. 2 Request timed out.
If the Ping test is not verified, check connections of the cable and unit, Windows side IP address and other settings.
(b) Station monitoring function For details on the station monitoring function, refer to the following manual.
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Non-Mitsubishi Electric Products 1) for GT Works3
4 - 166 4.14 Third Party PLC Connections
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
(8) Settings on GT Designer3 and GT SoftGOT1000.
(a) Setting on GT Designer3 Ethernet setting
Set the Ethernet setting dialog box on GT Designer3 as shown below. Up to 128 Ethernet settings can be configured.
(b) Setting on GT SoftGOT1000 Communication setup
Set the communication setup dialog box of GT SoftGOT1000. For details on the communication setting, refer to the following manual.
3.6.1 Communication setup dialog box
Item Description Range
Host Indicate the host station. (The host station is indicated as *.) -
N/W No. Set the network number of the target Ethernet module. 1 to 239
PLC No. Set the station number of the target Ethernet module. 1 to 254
Type Select [TOSHIBA]. TOSHIBA
IP address Set the IP address of the target Ethernet module. IP address of programmable
controller side
Port No. Set the port number of the target Ethernet module. 256 to 65534
Communication Select a communication method. UDP
4.14 Third Party PLC Connections 4 - 167
4.14.4 YASKAWA PLC
Serial connection
(1) System configurations and connection conditions
*1 For the applicable CPUs, refer to the following.
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Non-Mitsubishi Electric Products 2) for GT Works3
*2 The maximum transmission speed of 218IF-02 is 115200bps. However, the maximum transmission speed selectable from the
GOT is 57600bps.
PLC Connection
cable
Max.
distance GT SoftGOT1000
Number of
connectable
equipment Model name
MODBUS module
Communication module
Communication
type
GL60S, GL60H, GL70H JAMSC-IF60,
JAMSC-IF61
RS-232
RS-232 1)
RS-232 3)
15m PC/AT compatible PC
PC CPU 1
GL120, GL130 (Built-in serial port)*1 RS-232 1)
RS-232 3)
CP-9300MS
(CP-9300M compatible/
non-compatible) (Built-in serial port)*1
RS-232 2)
RS-232 5)
CP-9200(H) (Built-in serial port)*1 RS-232 1)
RS-232 3)
PROGIC-8
For
connecting
to port 1 (Built-in serial port)*1
RS-232 1)
RS-232 3)
For
connecting
to port 2 (Built-in serial port)*1 RS-232 4)
MP-920
(Built-in serial port)*1 RS-232 1)
RS-232 3)
217IF RS-232 1)
RS-232 3)
MP-930 (Built-in serial port)*1 RS-232 1)
RS-232 3)
MP-940 (Built-in serial port)*1 RS-232 6)
CP-9200SH, CP-317 CP-217IF
For connecting
to CN1
RS-232 1)
RS-232 3)
For connecting
to CN2 RS-232 7)
MP2200, MP2300,
MP2300S
217IF-01,
218IF-01,
218IF-02*2
RS-232 1)
RS-232 3)
YASKAWA PLC GT SoftGOT1000
Connection cable
4 - 168 4.14 Third Party PLC Connections
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
(2) MEMOBUS modules and communications modules The following table shows connectable MEMOBUS Modules and Communications Modules. Connection via RS-422 communication cannot be used.
(3) Connection cable
(a) MITSUBISHI SYSTEM & SERVICE product RS-232 1)
RS-232 2)
(b) Using an RS-232 cable prepared by user The following describes the connection diagram, connector and others for each cable. Connection diagram
RS-232 3)
Item Model name
GL-60S, GL-60H, GL-70H JAMSC-IF60 JAMSC-IF61
MP920/NSC40 217IF
CP-9200SH, CP-317 CP-217IF
MP2000
JEPMC-MP2200 217IF-01, 218IF-01, 218-IF02
JEPMC-MP2300 217IF-01, 218IF-01, 218-IF02
JEPMC-MP2300S 217IF-01, 218IF-01, 218-IF02
RS-232 cable
GT09-C30R20201-9P (3m) (For the 9-pin D-sub connector of the personal computer side)
RS-232 cable
GT09-C30R20203-9P (3m) (For the 9-pin D-sub connector of the personal computer side)
FG
TXD
RXD
DSR
GND
DTR
RTS
CTS
EST
1
2
3
6
7
9
4
5
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
CD
RD(RXD)
SD(TXD)
ER(DTR)
SG
DR(DSR)
RS(RTS)
CS(CTS)
-
YASKAWA products side GOT side
4.14 Third Party PLC Connections 4 - 169
RS-232 4)
RS-232 5)
RS-232 6)
FG
TXD
RXD
DSR
GND
DTR
RTS
CTS
NC
1
2
3
6
7
9
4
5
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
CD
RD(RXD)
SD(TXD)
ER(DTR)
SG
DR(DSR)
RS(RTS)
CS(CTS)
-
YASKAWA products side GOT side
FG
TXD
RXD
RTS
GND
DSR
OP/CTS
PWR
DTR
1
2
3
4
7
6
5
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
CD
RD(RXD)
SD(TXD)
ER(DTR)
SG
DR(DSR)
RS(RTS)
CS(CTS)
-
YASKAWA products side GOT side
Clamped on hood
TXD
RXD
RTS
GND
-
CTS
1
3
12
14
2
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
CD
RD(RXD)
SD(TXD)
ER(DTR)
SG
DR(DSR)
RS(RTS)
CS(CTS)
-
YASKAWA products side GOT side
4 - 170 4.14 Third Party PLC Connections
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
RS-232 7)
Connector specification
Precautions for creating cables The length of the cable must be 15m or less.
(4) GT SoftGOT1000 setting When communicating GT SoftGOT1000 to a YASKAWA PLC, communication setup is required.
*1 The baud rate supported by the programmable controller must be set.
*2 The settings on the programmable controller and GT SoftGOT1000 must be the same.
Refer to the following for performing GT SoftGOT1000 communication setup.
3.6.1 Communication setup dialog box
(5) Controller setting For the programmable controller side setting, refer to the following manual.
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Non-Mitsubishi Electric Products 2) for GT Works3
POINT
Send delay time
Set the transmission wait time as shown below when connecting to the programmable controller of CP-9200(H) or CP-9300MS.
1) Personal computer side connecter Use the connector compatible with the personal computer side.
2) YASKAWA PLC CPU side connector Use the connector compatible with YASKAWA PLC CPU side. For details, refer to the following manual.
User's manual for YASKAWA PLC CPU
Item*2 Setting
Comm. port COM1 to COM6
Baud Rate*1 9600/19200/38400/57600bps
Host Add. 1 to 31
Wait Time 0 to 300ms
Model name Send delay time
CP-9200(H) 30ms or more
CP-9300MS For connecting to port 0 10ms or more
For connecting to port 1 30ms or more
FG
TXD
RXD
DSR
SG
DTR
RS
CS
CD
1
2
3
6
7
20
4
5
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
CD
RD(RXD)
SD(TXD)
ER(DTR)
SG
DR(DSR)
RS(RTS)
CS(CTS)
-
YASKAWA products side GOT side
4.14 Third Party PLC Connections 4 - 171
Ethernet connection
(1) System configurations and connection conditions
*1 To use GT SoftGOT1000 module together with another GT SoftGOT1000 module or a different application, set the different
number for each port No.
*2 The number of connectable personal computers includes the number of total GT SoftGOT 1000 modules started in a personal
computer.
*3 The destination connected with the twisted pair cable varies with the configuration of the applicable Ethernet network system.
Connect to the Ethernet module, hub, transceiver or other system equipment corresponding to the applicable Ethernet network
system.
Use cables, connectors, and hubs that meet the IEEE802.3 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX standard.
*4 This column shows the number of personal computers that can be connected to one PLC.
*5 This column shows the number of PLCs that can be connected to one personal computer.
(2) Communications Module, Ethernet board/card The following table shows connectable communication modules and Ethernet board/card.
(a) Communications Module
(b) Ethernet board/card Use the same Ethernet board and card as those for connecting to MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC PLC.
4.8.2 Built-in Ethernet port CPU, Ethernet module, Ethernet board/card
POINT
When using PC CPU module
A interface board is not required. For the system configuration of the PC CPU module, refer to the manual of the PC CPU module.
(3) Connection cable Use a cable applicable to the Ethernet module or the Ethernet board/card to be used.
PLC
Connection cable*3 Max. distance GT SoftGOT1000
Number of connectable
equipment
Model name Communications
Module
Communication
type
Personal
computer*4 PLC*5
MP920 218IF
Ethernet Twisted pair cable
100m
(max. segment
length)
PC/AT compatible
PC
PC CPU 10*1*2
UDP: 128
TCP: 10
MP2200, MP2300,
MP2300S
218IF-01,
218IF-02
CP-317 218TXB
Item Model name
For MP920 218IF
For MP2200, MP2300, MP2300S 218IF-01, 218IF-02
CP-317 218TXB
YASKAWA PLC Communications Module GT SoftGOT1000
Connection cable
4 - 172 4.14 Third Party PLC Connections
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
(4) Controller setting
POINT
Precautions for Ethernet connection
(1) YASKAWA PLC For details on YASKAWA PLC, refer to the following manual.
User's manual for YASKAWA PLC CPU
(2) Precautions for Ethernet connection The N/W No. and PLC No. are specified when connecting to the YASKAWA PLC via the Ethernet connection. In such cases, set the N/W No. and PLC No. arbitrarily on GT Designer3. For how to set the N/W No., PLC No./PC No., IP address and port No. of the Ethernet module and GT SoftGOT1000, refer to the following.
(8) Settings on GT Designer3 and GT SoftGOT1000.
(a) Before setting When multiple network devices (including a GT SoftGOT1000 module) are connected to the same
segment, the network load increases, possibly degrading the communication performance between the GT SoftGOT1000 module and PLC. The following countermeasures may improve the communication performance. Use a switching hub. Configure the system compliant with the high-speed 100BASE-TX (100Mbps) standard. Reduce the number of devices monitored by GT SoftGOT1000.
When multiple GT SoftGOT1000 modules are connected to the same Ethernet network, set a different PLC number for each module.
When a GT SoftGOT1000 module is used with the GOT, do not set IP address 192.168.0.18 for the GT SoftGOT1000 module. Doing so may cause a communication error on the GOT.
(5) Setting of programmable controller side For settings for each part of programmable controller, refer to the following manual.
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Non-Mitsubishi Electric Products 2) for GT Works3
(6) Setting on the personal computer Set the IP address.
(7) Communications check
(a) Ping test
Execute the Ping command with Command Prompt of Windows when the preparations for communication are complete.
When the Ping test is verified C:\>Ping 192. 168. 0. 2 Reply from 192.168.0.2:bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=32
When the Ping test is not verified C:\>Ping 192. 168. 0. 2 Request timed out.
If the Ping test is not verified, check connections of the cable and unit, Windows side IP address and other settings.
(b) Station monitoring function For details on the station monitoring function, refer to the following manual.
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Non-Mitsubishi Electric Products 2) for GT Works3
4.14 Third Party PLC Connections 4 - 173
(8) Settings on GT Designer3 and GT SoftGOT1000.
(a) Setting on GT Designer3 Ethernet setting
Set the Ethernet setting dialog box on GT Designer3 as shown below. Up to 128 Ethernet settings can be configured.
(b) Setting on GT SoftGOT1000 Communication setup
Set the communication setup dialog box of GT SoftGOT1000. For details on the communication setting, refer to the following manual.
3.6.1 Communication setup dialog box
Item Description Range
Host Indicate the host station. (The host station is indicated as *.) -
N/W No. Set the network number of the target Ethernet module. 1 to 239
PLC No. Set the station number of the target Ethernet module. 1 to 64
Type Select [YASKAWA]. YASKAWA
IP address Set the IP address of the target Ethernet module. IP address of programmable
controller side
Port No. Set the port number of the target Ethernet module. 256 to 65534
Communication Select a communication method. UDP, TCP
4 - 174 4.14 Third Party PLC Connections
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
4.14.5 YOKOGAWA PLC
Ethernet connection
(1) System configurations and connection conditions
*1 To use GT SoftGOT1000 module together with another GT SoftGOT1000 module or a different application, set the different
number for each port No.
*2 The number of connectable personal computers includes the number of total GT SoftGOT 1000 modules started in a personal
computer.
*3 The destination connected with the twisted pair cable varies with the configuration of the applicable Ethernet network system.
Connect to the Ethernet module, hub, transceiver or other system equipment corresponding to the applicable Ethernet network
system.
Use cables, connectors, and hubs that meet the IEEE802.3 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX standard.
*4 This column shows the number of personal computers that can be connected to one PLC.
*5 This column shows the number of PLCs that can be connected to one personal computer.
*6 For the applicable CPUs, refer to the following.
(2) Ethernet Interface Module and Ethernet board/card
(2) Ethernet Interface Module and Ethernet board/card The following table shows connectable Ethernet Interface Modules and Ethernet boards/cards.
(a) Ethernet Interface Module
(b) Ethernet board/card Use the same Ethernet board and card as those for connecting to MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC PLC.
4.8.2 Built-in Ethernet port CPU, Ethernet module, Ethernet board/card
POINT
When using PC CPU module
A interface board is not required. For the system configuration of the PC CPU module, refer to the manual of the PC CPU module.
(3) Connection cable Use a cable applicable to the Ethernet module or the Ethernet board/card to be used.
PLC
Connection cable*3 Max. distance GT SoftGOT1000
Number of connectable
equipment
Model name Ethernet Interface
Module
Communication
type
Personal
computer*4 PLC*5
FA-M3, FA-M3V
(Sequence CPU
module with built-in
network functions)*6 Ethernet Twisted pair cable
100m
(max. segment
length)
PC/AT compatible
PC
PC CPU
UDP: 128*1
TCP: 81*2
UDP: 128
TCP: 10F3LE01-5T,
F3LE11-0T,
F3LE12-0T
Item Model name
For FA-M3 F3LE01-5T, F3LE11-0T, F3LE12-0T
Sequence CPU module with built-in network functions F3SP66, F3SP67, F3SP71-4N, F3SP71-4S, F3SP76-7S
YOKOGAWA PLC Ethernet Interface Module
GT SoftGOT1000
Connection cable
4.14 Third Party PLC Connections 4 - 175
(4) Controller setting
POINT
Precautions for setting items
(1) YOKOGAWA PLC For details on YOKOGAWA PLC, refer to the following manual.
User's manual for YOKOGAWA PLC CPU
(2) Precautions for Ethernet connection The N/W No. and PLC No. are specified when connecting to the YOKOGAWA PLC via the Ethernet. In such cases, set the N/W No. and PLC No. arbitrarily on GT Designer3. Refer to the following for how to set the N/W No., PLC No./PC No., IP address and port No. of the Ethernet module and GT SoftGOT1000
(8) Settings on GT Designer3 and GT SoftGOT1000
(a) Before setting When multiple network devices (including a GT SoftGOT1000 module) are connected to the same
segment, the network load increases, possibly degrading the communication performance between the GT SoftGOT1000 module and PLC. The following countermeasures may improve the communication performance. Use a switching hub. Configure the system compliant with the high-speed 100BASE-TX (100Mbps) standard. Reduce the number of devices monitored by GT SoftGOT1000.
When multiple GT SoftGOT1000 modules are connected to the same Ethernet network, set a different PLC number for each module.
When a GT SoftGOT1000 module is used with the GOT, do not set IP address 192.168.0.18 for the GT SoftGOT1000 module. Doing so may cause a communication error on the GOT.
(5) Setting of programmable controller side For settings for each part of the programmable controller, refer to the following manual.
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Non-Mitsubishi Electric Products 2) for GT Works3
(6) Setting on the personal computer Set the IP address.
(7) Communications check
(a) Ping test
Execute the Ping command with Command Prompt of Windows when the preparations for communication are complete.
When the Ping test is verified C:\>Ping 192. 168. 0. 2 Reply from 192.168.0.2:bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=32
When the Ping test is not verified C:\>Ping 192. 168. 0. 2 Request timed out.
If the Ping test is not verified, check connections of the cable and unit, Windows side IP address and other settings.
(b) Station monitoring function For details on the station monitoring function, refer to the following manual.
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Non-Mitsubishi Electric Products 2) for GT Works3
4 - 176 4.14 Third Party PLC Connections
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
(8) Settings on GT Designer3 and GT SoftGOT1000
(a) Setting on GT Designer3 Ethernet setting
Set the Ethernet setting dialog box on GT Designer3 as shown below. Up to 128 Ethernet settings can be configured.
*1 Set the IP address and the communication method set for the PLC.
*2 Set the port number of the higher-level link service used for the PLC.
(b) Setting on GT SoftGOT1000 Communication setup
Set the communication setup dialog box of GT SoftGOT1000. For details on the communication setting, refer to the following manual.
3.6.1 Communication setup dialog box
Item Description Range
Host Indicate the host station. (The host station is indicated as *.) -
N/W No. Set the network number of the target Ethernet module. 1 to 239
PC No. Set the station number of the target Ethernet module 1 to 64
Type Select [YOKOGAWA]. YOKOGAWA
IP address*1 Set the IP address of the target Ethernet module. IP address of programmable
controller side
Port No.*2 Set the port number of the target Ethernet module. 12289, 12291
Communication*1 Select a communication method. UDP, TCP
4.14 Third Party PLC Connections 4 - 177
4.14.6 SIEMENS PLC
Ethernet connection
(1) System configurations and connection conditions
*1 To use GT SoftGOT1000 module together with another GT SoftGOT1000 module or a different application, set the different
number for each port No.
*2 If the number of GOTs increases, the communication becomes high-loaded, and it may affect the communication performance.
*3 The number of connectable personal computers includes the number of total GT SoftGOT 1000 modules started in a personal
computer.
*4 The destination connected with the twisted pair cable varies with the configuration of the applicable Ethernet network system.
Connect to the Ethernet module, hub, transceiver or other system equipment corresponding to the applicable Ethernet network
system.
Use cables, connectors, and hubs that meet the IEEE802.3 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX standard.
*5 This column shows the number of personal computers that can be connected to one PLC.
*6 This column shows the number of PLCs that can be connected to one personal computer.
*7 For the applicable CPUs, refer to the following.
(2) Ethernet module and Ethernet board/card
PLC Connection
cable*4 Max. distance
GT
SoftGOT1000
Number of connectable equipment
Model name Ethernet module Communication
type
Personal
computer*5 PLC*6
SIMATIC S7-300
CP343-1 IT,
CP343-1,
CP343-1 Lean,
CP343-1
Advanced
Ethernet
(Controller Type:
FETCH/WRITE)
Twisted pair
cable
100m
(max. segment
length)
PC/AT
compatible PC
PC CPU
32 or less
(recommended to
16 units or
less)*1*2*3
16 or less
SIMATIC S7-400 CP443-1 IT,
CP443-1
SIMATIC S7-200 CP 243-1,
CP 243-1 IT
Ethernet
(Controller Type:
OP
communication)
32 or less
(recommended to
16 units or
less)*1*2*3
128 or less
SIMATIC S7-300
CP 343-1,
CP 343-1 Lean,
CP 343-1
Advanced-IT
SIMATIC S7-400
CP 443-1,
CP 443-1
Advanced-IT
SIMATIC S7-1200 (Built-in Ethernet
port)*7
SIEMENS PLC Ethernet module GT SoftGOT1000
Connection cable
4 - 178 4.14 Third Party PLC Connections
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
(2) Ethernet module and Ethernet board/card The following shows connectable Ethernet modules and Ethernet boards/cards.
(a) Ethernet Module Controller Type: FETCH/WRITE
Controller Type: OP communication
(b) Ethernet board/card Use the same Ethernet board and card as those for connecting to MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC PLC.
4.8.2 Built-in Ethernet port CPU, Ethernet module, Ethernet board/card
POINT
When using PC CPU module
A interface board is not required. For the system configuration of the PC CPU module, refer to the manual of the PC CPU module.
(3) Connection cable Use a cable applicable to the Ethernet module or the Ethernet board/card to be used.
(4) Controller setting
POINT
Precautions for Ethernet connection
(1) SIEMENS PLC For the details of SIEMENS PLCs, refer to the following manual.
User's manual for SIEMENS PLC
(2) Precautions for Ethernet connection Specify the N/W No. and the PLC No. of the SIEMENS PLC connected to the GOT via the Ethernet connection. The specified N/W No. and the PLC No. must be the same as those set on GT Designer3. For the settings of N/W No., PC No., IP address and port No. of the Ethernet module and GT SoftGOT1000, refer to the following.
(8) Settings on GT Designer3 and GT SoftGOT1000.
Item Model name
SIMATIC S7-300 CP343-1 IT, CP343-1, CP343-1 Lean, CP343-1 Advanced
SIMATIC S7-400 CP443-1 IT, CP443-1
Item Model name
SIMATIC S7-200 CP 243-1, CP 243-1 IT
SIMATIC S7-300 CP 343-1, CP 343-1 Lean, CP 343-1 Advanced-IT
SIMATIC S7-400 CP 443-1, CP 443-1 Advanced-IT
4.14 Third Party PLC Connections 4 - 179
(a) Before setting When multiple network devices (including a GT SoftGOT1000 module) are connected to the same
segment, the network load increases, possibly degrading the communication performance between the GT SoftGOT1000 module and PLC. The following countermeasures may improve the communication performance. Use a switching hub. Configure the system compliant with the high-speed 100BASE-TX (100Mbps) standard. Reduce the number of devices monitored by GT SoftGOT1000.
When multiple GT SoftGOT1000 modules are connected to the same Ethernet network, set a different PLC number for each module.
When a GT SoftGOT1000 module is used with the GOT, do not set IP address 192.168.0.18 for the GT SoftGOT1000 module. Doing so may cause a communication error on the GOT.
(5) Setting of programmable controller side For settings for each part of programmable controller, refer to the following manual.
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Non-Mitsubishi Electric Products 2) for GT Works3
(6) Setting on the personal computer Set the IP address.
(7) Communications check
(a) Ping test
Execute the Ping command with Command Prompt of Windows when the preparations for communication are complete.
When the Ping test is verified C:\>Ping 192. 168. 0. 2 Reply from 192.168.0.2:bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=32
When the Ping test is not verified C:\>Ping 192. 168. 0. 2 Request timed out.
If the Ping test is not verified, check connections of the cable and unit, Windows side IP address and other settings.
(b) Station monitoring function For details on the station monitoring function, refer to the following manual.
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Non-Mitsubishi Electric Products 2) for GT Works3
4 - 180 4.14 Third Party PLC Connections
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
(8) Settings on GT Designer3 and GT SoftGOT1000.
(a) Setting on GT Designer3 Ethernet setting (Controller Type: FETCH/WRITE)
Set the Ethernet setting dialog box on GT Designer3 as shown below. Up to 64 Ethernet settings can be configured.
Item Description Range
Host Indicate the host station. (The host station is indicated as *.) -
N/W No. Set the network number of the target Ethernet module. 1 to 239
PLC No. Set the station number of the target Ethernet module. 1 to 254
Type Select [SIEMENS S7]. SIEMENS S7
IP address Set the IP address of the target Ethernet module. IP address of programmable
controller side
FETCH Port No. Set the FETCH port No. of the connected Ethernet module. 1024 to 65534
WRITE Port No. For the WRITE port No. of the connected Ethernet module, the value
that the FETCH port No. is incremented by one is set automatically. 1025 to 65535
Communication Displays the communication method. TCP
4.14 Third Party PLC Connections 4 - 181
Ethernet setting (Controller Type: OP communication) Set the Ethernet setting dialog box on GT Designer3 as shown below. Up to 64 Ethernet settings can be configured.
*1 The model S7-1200 OP has no setting for the connection No./rack No. or module position/slot No.
(b) Setting on GT SoftGOT1000 Communication setup
Set the communication setup dialog box of GT SoftGOT1000. For details on the communication setting, refer to the following manual.
3.6.1 Communication setup dialog box
Item Description Range
Host Indicate the host station. (The host station is indicated as *.) -
N/W No. Set the network number of the target Ethernet module. 1 to 239
PLC No. Set the station number of the target Ethernet module. 1 to 254
Type Set a PLC type to be connected.
S7-200 OP
S7-300/400 OP
S7-1200 OP
IP address Set the IP address of the target Ethernet module. IP address of programmable
controller side
Port No. Displays the port number of the destination Ethernet module. 102
Connection No./Rack
No.*1 Set the connection No./rack No. which is set in the PLC side. 0 to 7
Module Position/Slot
No.*1 Set the module position/slot No. which is set in the PLC side.
S7-200 OP: 0 to 6
S7-300/400 OP: 0 to 31
Communication Displays the communication method. TCP
4 - 182 4.14 Third Party PLC Connections
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
4.15 MODBUS(R)/TCP Connection
4.15.1 System configuration and connection condition
*1 When starting up multiple GT SoftGOT1000 modules, monitoring is enabled on the multiple screens.
*2 The destination connected with the twisted pair cable varies with the configuration of the applicable Ethernet network system.
Connect to the Ethernet module, hub, transceiver or other system equipment corresponding to the applicable Ethernet network
system.
Use cables, connectors, and hubs that meet the IEEE802.3 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX standard.
*3 For the connectable MODBUS/TCP equipment, refer to the following Technical News.
List of Valid Devices Applicable for GOT1000 Series with MODBUS Connection (GOT-A-0037)
For Technical News, contact your local distributor.
*4 This column shows the number of personal computers that can be connected to one PLC.
*5 This column shows the number of PLCs that can be connected to one personal computer.
*6 For details, refer to the MODBUS/TCP equipment manual.
4.15.2 Ethernet board/card
The Ethernet port built in the personal computer can be used. Use an Ethernet board or an Ethernet card applicable to the MODBUS/TCP equipment to be connected.
POINT
When using PC CPU module
A interface board is not required. For the system configuration of the PC CPU module, refer to the manual of the PC CPU module.
4.15.3 Connection cable
Use a cable applicable to the Ethernet module or the MODBUS/TCP equipment to be used.
Model name Communication
type Connection cable*2 Max. distance GT SoftGOT1000
Number of connectable equipment
Personal computer*4 PLC*5
MODBUS/TCP
equipment*3 Ethernet Twisted pair cable
100m
(max. segment length)
PC/AT compatible PC
PC CPU 128*1
Depends on the
MODBUS/TCP
equipment used*6
GT SoftGOT1000
Connection cable
MODBUS/TCP equipment
4.15 MODBUS(R)/TCP Connection 4 - 183
4.15.4 Controller setting
Settings on GT Designer3 and GT SoftGOT1000
(1) Setting on GT Designer3 Ethernet setting
Set the Ethernet setting dialog box on GT Designer3 as shown below. Up to 128 Ethernet settings can be configured.
(2) Setting on GT SoftGOT1000 Communication setup
Set the communication setup dialog box of GT SoftGOT1000. For details on the communication setting, refer to the following manual.
3.6.1 Communication setup dialog box
MODBUS/TCP equipment settings For the MODBUS/TCP equipment settings, refer to the manual of the MODBUS/TCP equipment used.
Item Description Range
Host Indicate the host station. (The host station is indicated as *.) -
N/W No. Set the network number of the target Ethernet module. 1 to 239
PC No. Set the station number of the target Ethernet module 1 to 64
Type Select [MODBUS/TCP]. MODBUS/TCP
IP address Set the IP address of the target MODBUS/TCP equipment. IP address of the MODBUS/TCP
equipment side
Port No. Displays the port number of the MODBUS/TCP equipment. 1 to 65535
Communication Displays the connection method. TCP
4 - 184 4.15 MODBUS(R)/TCP Connection
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
MODBUS communication control function on the GOT special register (GS device) This function is to prevent the communication response delay that occurs because the devices on the MODBUS network differ from each other in network specification. This function is effective for the MODBUS network conditions as described below:
When only a part of function codes is supported (Example: "0F" is not supported) When the maximum transfer size of function code is small (Example: The maximum number of coil read times
is 1000)
(1) Communication setting The device (GS579.b0) switches between two communication settings. When GS579.b0 is off, the communication setting 1 (GS570 to GS576) is applied. When GS579.b0 is on, the communication setting 2 (GS590 to GS596) is applied. The following shows the communication setting.
GS device
Description Set valueCommunication
setting 1
Communication
setting 2
GS570 GS590 Command selection
Bit0: 0 Using Function Code "0F"
1 Not using Function Code "0F"
Bit1: 0 Using Function Code "10"
1 Not using Function Code "10"
GS571 GS591
Function Code "01"
Specification for the max. number of coil
read times
0:1000
1 to 2000: Specify the maximum number.
Other than above: 2000
GS572 GS592
Function Code "02"
Specification for the max. number of input
relay read times
0:1000
1 to 2000: Specify the maximum number.
Other than above: 2000
GS573 GS593
Function Code "03"
Specification for the max. number of
holding register read times
0:125
1 to 125: Specify the maximum number.
Other than above: 125
GS574 GS594
Function Code "04"
Specification for the max. number of input
register read times
0:125
1 to 125: Specify the maximum number.
Other than above: 125
GS575 GS595
Function Code "0F"
Specification for the max. number of
multiple-coil write times
0:800
1 to 800: Specify the maximum number.
Other than above: 800
When Bit0 of GS570 is "1", the function code "0F" is not used,
and therefore the setting of GS575 will be disabled.
GS576 GS596
Function Code "10"
Specification for the max. number of
multiple-holding register write times
0:100
1 to 100: Specify the maximum number.
Other than above: 100
When Bit1 of GS570 is "1", the function code "10F" is not used,
and therefore the setting of GS576 will be disabled.
4.15 MODBUS(R)/TCP Connection 4 - 185
4.16 Barcode Reader Connection
4.16.1 System configurations and connection conditions
*1 For connectable bar code readers, system equipment, available bar code types and connection cables, refer to the following
Technical News.
List of valid devices applicable for GOT1000 series (GOT-A-0010)
For Technical News, contact your local distributor.
4.16.2 Controller setting
Barcode function setting on GT Designer3 Before connecting the barcode reader, make the barcode function and system data settings. For details, refer to the following manual.
GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Functions)
Setting on GT SoftGOT1000 Set the [Communication Setup] dialog box of GT SoftGOT1000. For details on the [Communication Setup] dialog box, refer to the following manual.
3.6.1 Communication setup dialog box
Barcode reader setting For details on the barcode reader setting, refer to the following manual.
Manual of the barcode reader used
4.16.3 Precautions
Using barcode reader connection on multiple started GT SoftGOT1000 modules A barcode reader cannot be used by multiple started GT SoftGOT1000 modules or other applications simultaneously. The barcode reader communicates with the GT SoftGOT1000 which first establishes the connection.
Controller Connection cable GT SoftGOT1000 Number of connectable equipment
Barcode reader*1 Varies according to the specifications of
the barcode reader used.*1 PC/AT compatible PC
PC CPU
1 barcode reader for 1 GT
SoftGOT1000 module
GT SoftGOT1000
Connection cable
Barcode reader
GT SoftGOT1000 module No.1
GT SoftGOT1000 module No.2
Barcode reader 1
Connecting
Barcode reader 1
Connecting
Barcode reader 2
GT SoftGOT1000 module No.1
GT SoftGOT1000 module No.2Connection with the second barcode reader enabled
Connection not enabled
1) Example of connection failure with two modules started
2) Example of succeeded connection with two modules started
4 - 186 4.16 Barcode Reader Connection
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
4.17 RFID Connection
4.17.1 System configurations and connection conditions
*1 For connectable RFID controllers, system equipment, and connection cables, refer to the following Technical News.
List of valid devices applicable for GOT1000 series (GOT-A-0010)
For Technical News, contact your local distributor.
4.17.2 Controller setting
RFID function setting on GT Designer3 Before connecting the RFID controller, make the RFID function and system data settings. For details, refer to the following manual.
GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Functions)
Setting on GT SoftGOT1000 Set the [Communication Setup] dialog box of GT SoftGOT1000. For details on the [Communication Setup] dialog box, refer to the following manual.
3.6.1 Communication setup dialog box
RFID controller setting For details on the RFID controller setting, refer to the following manual.
Manual of the RFID controller used
4.17.3 Precautions
Using RFID connection on multiple started GT SoftGOT1000 modules An RFID controller cannot be used by multiple started GT SoftGOT1000 modules or other applications simultaneously. The RFID controller communicates with the GT SoftGOT1000 which first establishes the connection.
Controller Connection cable GT SoftGOT1000 Number of connectable equipment
RFID controller*1 Varies according to the specifications of
the RFID controller used.*1 PC/AT compatible PC
PC CPU
1 RFID controller for 1 GT
SoftGOT1000 module
GT SoftGOT1000
Connection cable
RFID controller
RFID controller 1 RFID controller 1
RFID controller 2
1) Example of connection failure with two modules started
2) Example of succeeded connection with two modules started
Connecting
GT SoftGOT1000 module No.1
GT SoftGOT1000 module No.2
Connection with the second RFID controller enabled
GT SoftGOT1000 module No.1
GT SoftGOT1000 module No.2
Connecting
Connection not enabled
4.17 RFID Connection 4 - 187
4 - 188 4.17 RFID Connection
FUNCTIONS OF GT SoftGOT1000
5. FUNCTIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 1
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
5. FUNCTIONS
5.1 Snap Shot
The screen image being monitored is saved into BMP or JPEG format file.
1. Perform the following operation. Select [Project] [Snap Shot...] from the menu.
2. The save as dialog box is displayed. Set the following items and click the button.
Item Description
Save in Selects the area where the file is saved.
File name Selects the file name to be saved.
Save as type
Selects a format of the file.
Bitmap Files (*.bmp) : BMP format
JPEG Files (*.jpg) : JPEG format
Save
5.1 Snap Shot 5 - 1
5.2 Print
The screen image being monitored is output to a printer.
5.2.1 Printing
1. Perform the following operation. Select [Project] [Print...] from the menu.
2. The print dialog box of Windows is displayed. Click the button to start printing.OK
5 - 2 5.2 Print
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
5.2.2 Performing print preview
1. Perform the following operation. Select [Project] [Print Preview] from the menu.
2. Print Preview is displayed.
5.2 Print 5 - 3
5.2.3 Performing page setup
1. Perform the following operation. Select [Project] [Page Setup] from the menu.
2. The page setup dialog box is displayed. Set the following items and click the button.
5.2.4 Performing print setup
1. Perform the following operation. Select [Project] [Print Setup...] from the menu.
2. The Print Setup dialog box of Windows is displayed.
3. Configure the settings for the printer (selecting a printer, paper size, direction of printing) and click the button.
Item Description
Margin Set the margins on a page to be printed.
Reverse screen image Select this item to reverse the colors of screen image when printing.
Reverse Mode
Set the reverse mode for screen image.
Color : Reverse all the colors of screen image to be printed.
Black and White : Reverse the black and white colors of screen image to be printed.
Print to printer (Hard Copy Function) Check this item to output data to a printer using the hard copy function.
OK
OK
5 - 4 5.2 Print
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
5.3 Property
The project title, project ID and data size of project data being monitored are displayed.
1. Perform the following operation. Select [Project] [Properties...] from the menu.
2. The Properties dialog box is displayed.
HINT
When the properties dialog box is displayed before starting monitoring
When the properties dialog box is displayed before starting monitoring, the project data path, project title, project ID and data size of project data monitored previously are displayed. (If project data has not been loaded, the project data path, project title, project ID and data size are not displayed.)
Item Description
Project Data Path Displays the path of the read project data.
Project Title Displays the project title.
Project ID Displays the project ID.
Data Size Displays the data size of project data.
5.3 Property 5 - 5
5.4 Resource Data
It is possible to reference data of the following object functions stored in the hard disk of the personal computer:
1. Perform the following operation. Select [Tool] [Resouce Data] from the menu. Right-click the mouse to select [Tool] [Resource Data].
2. The Refer to Resource Data dialog box is displayed.
Advanced alarm, Alarm history, Logging, Recipe,
Advanced recipe, Report (Print), Hard copy (File save), Hard copy (Print),
Operation log
Item Description
Look in Selects the location to which the resource data is stored.
File name Specifies the file to be read.
Files of type
Selects the file format of the resource data.
CSV Files (*.csv) : CSV format
Unicode Text Files (*.txt) : Unicode text file format
Bitmap Files (*.bmp) : BMP format
JPEG Files (*.jpg) : JPEG format
5 - 6 5.4 Resource Data
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
POINT
Resource data
Data cannot be updated while being referenced. (The data is held.) (The held data is reflected when the print data is updated after the data reference is over.)
Use the format shown in Example 1 if tables are created in the report function. Tables with the format shown in Example 2 cannot be properly displayed in CSV files.
If the [Fail in the start of application.] message is displayed during data reference, check the application relating setting or hard disk/memory capacity.
A B
X
Y
1 2
3 4
A B
X
Y
1 2
3 4
A B
X
Y
1 2
3 4
A B
X
Y
1 2
3 4
Table created with
GT Designer2 CSV file table
CSV file table
(Example 2) Table created with
GT Designer2
(Example 1)
5.4 Resource Data 5 - 7
5.5 Displaying File Information in PLC (QCPU, QSCPU Only)
GT SoftGOT1000 displays the file information in the connected PLC (QCPU or QSCPU).
POINT
(1) Requirements to display file information The file information is displayed when the host station is set to a MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC PLC (QCPU or QSCPU) and GT SoftGOT1000 is in the online mode after monitoring is started.
(2) Displaying the dialog box by using the GOT special register (GS device) Turning on the PLC file display signal (GS500.b2) displays the [File Information in PLC] dialog box.
5.5.1 Setting method
1. Perform either of the following operations. Select [Tool] [File Information in PLC] from the menu. Right-click the mouse and select [Tool] [File Information in PLC] from the menu.
2. The File Information in PLC dialog box is displayed. Set the connection setup by referring to the table on the next page, and then click the button.
3. With successful communication, the PLC CPU model, the default target memory ([Program memory/Device memory]), and the file information in the memory are displayed.
4. To display file information in a memory other than the program memory/device memory, change the target memory.
Connection
5 - 8 5.5 Displaying File Information in PLC (QCPU, QSCPU Only)
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
5.5.2 Precautions for use
(1) Communication processing of monitor screen while file information is displayed Displaying file information in the PLC interrupts communication processing of the monitor screen. Therefore, communication processing of the monitor screen takes more time.
(2) When connecting to redundant system Even if system switching occurs, the currently displayed file list is not updated. To display the file information in
the new monitor target, set the connection setup and click the button again.
(3) Updating read information Even if the program and others are updated on the PLC side while the File Information in PLC dialog box is displayed, the currently displayed file list is not updated.
To display the latest file information, click the button again to update the displayed information.
Item Description
Connection Setup Set the connected station to the host station or another station.
(The default is [Host].)
Host Check this item to set the connected station to the host station.
Other Check this item to set the connected station to another station.
NET No.
When the connected station is set to another station, set the network No. of the PLC that has the file information to be
displayed.
[0] to [239] (The default is [1].)
PC No.
When the connected station is set to another station, set the station No. of the PLC that has the file information to be
displayed.
[1] to [255] (The default is [1].)
CPU No. Select the target CPU No.
[0] to [4] (The default is [0].)
PLC Information Displays the file information in the target PLC CPU.
Target
Select the PLC CPU memory that has files to be displayed on the GOT.
[Program memory/Device memory], [Memory card(RAM)], [Memory card(ROM)],
[Standard RAM], [Standard ROM]
(The default is [Program memory/Device memory].)
PLC Type Displays the target PLC CPU model.
Name Displays the names of the files.
Type
Displays the types of the files. (The files are displayed in the order of type priorities starting from the left as shown
below.)
[Program], [Device comment], [Parameter], [Device init], [File register]
Title Displays the titles of the files.
Date Displays the last modified dates of the files.
Time Displays the last modified time of the files.
Size Displays the sizes of the files.
Connection
Connection
5.5 Displaying File Information in PLC (QCPU, QSCPU Only) 5 - 9
5.6 Mail Function
POINT
Before using the mail function
When using the mail function, e-mail is sent from GT SoftGOT1000, so mail software is not required on the sending side. To use the mail function, a contract with a service provider and set up the environment so that e-mail can be sent is required.
5.6.1 Mail function overview
It is possible to send messages from GT SoftGOT1000 to personal computers and mobile phones. The mail function can only be used in the following object functions: Alarm history display function System alarm
(1) Using the alarm history display function It is possible to send error and recovery information at error/recovery of stations using the alarm history display function.
(2) Using system alarms An error definition is sent at system alarm occurrence. The system alarm transmission of GT SoftGOT1000 differs from the alarm list display function (system alarm) of the GOT. It does not require the alarm list display function (system alarm) to be set in the monitor screen data. Turn on/off the checkboxes in the Mail Condition dialog box to select whether this function will be used or not.
Personal computer
Mobile phone
E-mail is sent.
E-mail is sent.
Error occurrence or recovery
Personal computer (GT SoftGOT1000)
Personal computer
Mobile phone
E-mail is sent.
E-mail is sent.
Error occurrence
Personal computer (GT SoftGOT1000)
5 - 10 5.6 Mail Function
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
5.6.2 Operation flow when using the mail function
*1: Setting need not be made when system alarm transmission is used.
Start
Create the monitor screen data using GT Designer3
(Define the mail transmission settings by each object function*1).
Set the mail destination.
Test the mail transmission.
Check the mail transmission conditions as necessary.
Read in the monitor screen data and start monitoring.
End
(E-mail is sent to personal computers or mobile phones
when the conditions are met.)
Start up GT SoftGOT1000.
GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals)
GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Functions)
GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals)
5.6.3 How to set up the mail function
5.6.3 How to set up the mail function
5.6.3 How to set up the mail function
3.7 Opening the Project
5.6 Mail Function 5 - 11
5.6.3 How to set up the mail function
The following explains how to set up the mail function to send e-mail using GT SoftGOT1000.
Mail setup Used to set the mail send destination and perform a mail transmission test.
1. Perform the following operation.
Click (Mail Setup). Select [Set] [Mail Setup] [Mail Setup] from the menu. Right-click the mouse to select [Set] [Mail Setup] from the menu.
2. The Mail Setup dialog box is displayed.
(Continued to next page)
Item Description
Dial-up Set whether or not to send e-mail via dialup.
(The default is [Manual].)
Auto
Check this radio button to send e-mail via dialup.
If [Auto] is checked, a connection to the mail server is made and e-mail is sent when the mail conditions are
established.
The connection to the server is canceled after e-mail is sent.
It is necessary to set [Entry,] [Retry,] and [Interval.]
Manual
(No Dial-up)
Check this radio button to send e-mail without using dialup.
If [Manual] is set, the connection to the mail server is always active when e-mail is sent.
The connection to the server is not canceled even after e-mail is sent.
Entry Select the dialup connection entry name in Windows.
Refer to the Help function in Windows for how to create a dial up entry.
Retry Set the number of retries made if a dialup fails.
"0" to "10" (The default is "1.")
Interval Set the interval between retries.
"1" to "10" (minutes) (The default is "1.")
5 - 12 5.6 Mail Function
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
*1 If more than one address is entered, they should be separated with a space or a comma.
Up to 32 addresses are applicable to each setting.
Up to 64 characters can be used for one address.
POINT
Mail settings
(1) Precautions for mail settings The setting contents made by selecting [Common] [Gateway] [Mail...] in GT Designer3 are not reflected on GT SoftGOT1000.
(2) Dialup settings
Refer to the manual of the service provider and the Help function in Windows for how to set the dialup network connection.
(3) Setup GT SoftGOT1000 is not compatible with the SSL encrypted communication (SMTP over SSL, TLS) when sending e-mails. For the items to be set, check the server specifications.
Item Description
Mail Header Enter the origin, destination, server name, and title of mail.
FROM Enter the address of the mail origin.
TO*1 Enter the address of the mail destination.
CC*1 Enter the address of the mail destination (copy). (E-mail can be sent even this field is blank.)
BCC*1 Enter the address of the mail destination (blind copy). (E-mail can be sent even this field is blank.)
Subject Enter the title of the mail.
Setup
Enable the check box and enter the necessary information if POP3 authentication is required when
sending e-mail.
(The check box is disabled by default.)
SMTP Port Enter the port No. for SMTP.
SMTP Enter the SMTP server name.
Require SMTP Authentication
Enable the check box and enter the necessary information if SMTP Server authentication is required when
sending e-mail.
(The default is "Use SMTP Authentication")
Use SMTP Authentication Check the SMTP Server circumstances automatically and send according to following precedence.
[SMTP-AUTH CRAM-MD5] [SMTP-AUTH LOGIN] [SMTP-AUTH PLAIN]
Use POP before
SMTP Send by Use POP before SMTP to the POP3 server set.
User Name Enter the user name.
Password Enter the password corresponding to the user name.
POP3 Server Enter the POP3 server name used for [Use POP before SMTP].
Delay time
Specify the send interval between e-mails.
"1" to "10" (seconds) (The default is "0.")
The mail server may restrict you to send many e-mails at once to avoid suspicious e-mails.
With this setting, e-mails are sent at specified intervals.
Create Mail History Enable this check box to create a mail transmission history.
(The check box is disabled by default.)
Mail Test Test e-mail is sent to the destination by clicking the [Send] button.
OK Used to update the settings and close the dialog box.
Cancel Used to cancel the settings and close the dialog box.
Apply Used to update the settings.
5.6 Mail Function 5 - 13
(a) Mail test It is possible to check whether e-mail can be sent properly before starting monitoring by GT SoftGOT1000. In the mail test, the following sample massage of GT SoftGOT1000 is sent to the destination based on the definition set in the Mail Setup dialogue box. GT SoftGOT1000 sample message displayed at the destination.
POINT
Mail history
If [Create mail history] is checked in the Mail Setup dialogue box, the status of the mail test is saved as one of the history data items. Refer to the following for mail history.
5.6.5 Mail history
GT SoftGOT1000 TEST MAIL
This is a test message.
5 - 14 5.6 Mail Function
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
Mail Condition Set the mail send conditions. If the mail transmission is set with GT SoftGOT1000, it is possible to set not to send e-mail for certain functions without modifying the monitor screen data. Disable the functions for which e-mail is not to be sent. (Check boxes are enabled by default.)
1. Perform the following operation.
Click (Mail Condition). Select [Set] [Mail Setup] [Mail Condition] from the menu. Right-click the mouse to select [Set] [Mail Condition].
2. The Mail Condition dialog box is displayed.
POINT
Precautions for setting mail conditions
If the mail function is not set by Alarm history display function, this setting is ignored for that function (e-mail is not sent even if the check boxes are checked). Refer to the GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Functions) for how to set objects.
Item Description
Mail Condition Set whether the mail function will be used or not with each function.
Alarm History Turn on this checkbox to use the alarm history display function with the mail function.
System Alarm
Turn on this checkbox to use the system alarm with the mail function.
After turning it on, set the transmission interval (10 to 120 minutes) for the case where the same error occurs two or
more times in a row.
Example: When the error transmission interval is set to 15 minutes
If the same system alarm occurs again within the time set as the transmission interval, e-mail will not be sent at and after the second time.
If a different system alarm occurs within the time set as the transmission interval, e-mail will be sent.
System alarm 1)
In 5 minutes GT SoftGOT1000
System alarm 1)
Personal
computer
System alarm 1)
System alarm 1)
In 5 minutes GT SoftGOT1000
System alarm 2)
Personal
computer
System alarm 1)
System alarm 2)
5.6 Mail Function 5 - 15
5.6.4 Sending e-mail
When e-mail is sent from GT SoftGOT1000 to the target device, the reception header part shown at the destination displays a message that shows that the e-mail is from GT SoftGOT1000. Example of display in the reception header part at the destination
POINT
Precautions for mail sending
The format and contents of the display of e-mail sent vary depending on the mailer specifications used at the destination. When e-mail is sent to a mobile phone, the display may vary depending on the specifications (screen size) of the mobile phone. GT SoftGOT1000 can send up to 64 e-mails at once.
(1) When sending e-mail using the alarm history display function If an alarm occurs in GT SoftGOT1000, the time and information of the alarm are sent to the destination by e- mail. Moreover, if the alarm recovers, the time and information of the alarm recovery are sent to the destination by e- mail. For the details of the alarm history display functions, refer to the GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Functions).
(a) Example of the header part display in the mail send destination when an alarm occurred
1) The comment entered in the alarm history display function is displayed. 2) The content of detailed display entered in the alarm history display function is displayed. [Detailed Information] is not displayed if the detail display setting of the alarm history display function has not been made or if it has been made to the base screen or window screen. [detail comment nothing] appears under [Detailed Information] Set the details to be displayed in the comment window in order to display the [Detailed Information].
From:****************
To:******************
Cc:******************
Subject:GT SoftGOT1000 Mail.
:
X-Mailer:GT SoftGOT1000(Version3)
[Alarm history: Occurrence Notification]
[Occurrence Data and Time]
2005/10/12 14:23:13
[Alarm Information]
An error occurred in the tank.
[Detailed Information]
The hydraulic pressure of tank is low.
1)
2)
5 - 16 5.6 Mail Function
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
(b) Example of display at destination (when an alarm recovered)
(2) When sending e-mail using System Alarm At communication error occurrence, the error occurrence time and error information are sent to the destination by mail.
(a) Destination display example (at error occurrence)
[Alarm History: Restoration Notification]
[Restored Time]
2005/10/12 15:05:47
[Restoration Information]
Alarm of the tank has been restored.
[Detailed Information]
The hydraulic pressure of tank is low.
[System Alarm]
402 Communication timeout. Confirm communication pathway or modules. 2005/11/22 11:24:25
5.6 Mail Function 5 - 17
5.6.5 Mail history
It is possible to reference the operation history data of the e-mail sent from GT SoftGOT1000. It is also possible to reference the errors generated at the time e-mail was sent.
The mail history data can be displayed using Notepad or a similar editor in Windows.
How to reference mail history The following explains how to reference the mail history data.
1. Perform the following operation.
Click (Mail History). Select [Set] [Mail Setup] [Mail History] from the menu. Right-click the mouse to select [Set] [Mail History] from the menu.
2. The mail history information is displayed.
(a) Example of mail history data display
POINT
Mail history
The mail history cannot be referenced if the data does not exist. To create a mail history, enable [Create Mail History] in the Mail Setup dialogue box. For the Mail Setup dialog box, refer to the following.
5.6.3 How to set up the mail function
The mail history data is not deleted even if GT SoftGOT1000 is exited. The unnecessary history data is required to delete by the user.
:
2006/09/25 15:10:52 No.1 POP:##### Searching...
2006/09/25 15:10:52 No.1 POP:##### Connecting...
2006/09/25 15:10:52 No.1 POP:##### Connection is completed.
2006/09/25 15:10:52 No.1 SMTP:##### Searching...
2006/09/25 15:10:52 No.1 SMTP:##### Connecting...
2006/09/25 15:10:52 No.1 SMTP:##### Connection is completed.
2006/09/25 15:10:52 No.1 Mail was sent successfully.
:
5 - 18 5.6 Mail Function
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
5.7 Keyboard Input
The following can be operated using the keyboard input function. For the numerical input and the ASCII input, characters and values can be input with a keyboard. Operations, including displaying a ladder with the alarm history, can be operated with function keys of a keyboard.
5.7.1 Keyboard input enabling/disabling procedure
1. When switching the keyboard input enable/disable, perform the following operation.
Click (Keyboard). Select [Set] [Keyboard] from the menu. Right-click the mouse to select [Set] [Keyboard] from the menu.
5.7.2 When operating the numerical input function or the ASCII input function from the keyboard of a PC
When using the numerical input function or the ASCII input function, numeric values/ASCII codes can be entered from the keyboard of a PC. The following lists the operation when each key is pressed.
Type of key Operation when entering a numeric value Operation when entering ASCII code
Erases the least significant digit and shifts the entire content one digit to the right.
Writes to a device, displays the cursor, moves the cursor, and closes the current dialog
box.
Cancels the operation.
Reverses the sign.
Inputs a decimal point.
Numeric key Inputs numeric values (0 to 9). Inputs ASCII code, shift JIS code, and
letters.Alphabetic key Input alphabetic letters (A to F).
Arrow key Moves the cursor.
Kanji conversion
Former candidate
Next candidate
Select/No conversion
Erases a character being input.
+ , + Moves the cursor in the object.
+ Increment
+ Decrement
Back Space
Enter
Esc
-
.
Home
PageUp
PageDown
End
Delete
Ctrl Ctrl
Ctrl
Ctrl
5.7 Keyboard Input 5 - 19
5.7.3 How to use function keys
With assigning key codes to the following function keys, objects, including the alarm history, can be operated with a keyboard. F1 to F8 Shift + F1 to F8 Ctrl + F1 to F8 Ctrl + Shift + F1 to F8 For applicable key codes for objects, refer to the following manual.
GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals)
(1) How to assign key codes Key codes are assigned in the OperationPanel screen on GT Designer3 For settings in the OperationPanel dialog box, refer to the following manual.
GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals)
Assign key codes to Shift + Ctrl + F1 to F8.
Assign key codes to Ctrl + F1 to F8.
Assign key codes to Shift + F1 to F8.
Assign key codes to F1 to F8.
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8
5 - 20 5.7 Keyboard Input
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
5.7.4 Precautions
(1) When displaying a window screen on a base screen When displaying a window screen on a base screen, and the alarm list display function or the alarm history display function has been set up on both the screens, key input is enabled for the alarm list display function or the alarm history display function on the base screen.
(2) When a touch switch to which the simultaneous press disable setting has been made is ON The touch switch will not operate when pressing a key in the case the simultaneous press disable setting has been made to the touch switch and the touch switch is ON.
(3) Precautions on screen saving
(a) When the screen save is set on GT SoftGOT1000, the monitor screen does not turn black as GOT even though the screen save operates. (The monitor screen keeps the same screen as before setting the screen save.) When the monitor screen is clicked for canceling the screen save, clicking the screen is not recognized as input operations, including clicking touch switches. Be sure not to make incorrectly inputs.
(b) When the screen saves for GT SoftGOT1000 and Windows operate, canceling the screen saves must be executed respectively.
(4) Keyboard inputs
(a) The keyboard input function is not compatible with the utility screen. Operate the utility screen with the mouse.
(b) Do not use software keyboards (keyboard applications).
(5) Precautions for function keys
(a) Function keys cannot be used during clicking the mouse.
(b) For an input with a function key, the input is executed when the function key is released. As a result, operations are not correctly executed even though the following are set on GT Designer3. Setting [Operation Timing] of [Action of Go To Screen Switch] in [Screen Switching/Window] of
[Environmental Setting]. Setting [Momentary] for the action of the bit in the Action tab of the Edit Action/Key Code screen for the
operation panel setting Setting [Auto Repeat] in the Trigger tab of the Edit Action/Key Code screen for the operation panel
setting
(c) When input methods, including IME of Windows, are enabled, inputs with function keys cannot be executed.
For inputs with function keys, disable input methods, including IME of Windows.
5.7 Keyboard Input 5 - 21
5.8 Full Screen Mode
The full monitor screen of GT SoftGOT1000 can be displayed on the personal computer screen.
POINT
Precautions on the full screen mode
When using the full screen mode function, such operations as exiting from GT SoftGOT1000 cannot be performed, since the menu bar, toolbar and status bar of GT SoftGOT1000 are hidden. To perform operations of the menu bar and toolbar, use the mouse right-click menu.
5.8.1 Full screen mode types
There are the following types of full screen mode function.
(1) Full screen 1 Only a monitor screen is displayed fully on the screen. Use this function with the personal computer or panel computer where a mouse and keyboard are connected.
The operations performed on the menu bar and toolbar can
be performed by right-clicking a mouse.
Double-click on the monitor screen with holding down the
key to minimize the screen.
Press the key (function key) to exit from GT
SoftGOT1000.
When the full screen mode function is not use
When the full screen mode function is used
When the full screen mode function is used, the part of the frame is hidden and the full monitor screen can be displayed on the personal computer.
When the full screen mode function is not used, the part of the frame is displayed.
Shift
F12
5 - 22 5.8 Full Screen Mode
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
(2) Full screen 2 A monitor screen is displayed fully on the screen, and a small dialog is displayed. GT SoftGOT1000 can be minimized/exited in the small dialog. Since GT SoftGOT1000 can be exited on the monitor screen, it can be used for the panel computer where a mouse and keyboard are not connected.
(3) Full screen 3 A monitor screen is displayed fully on the screen, and a small dialog is also displayed. GT SoftGOT1000 can be opened/monitored/minimized/exited in the small dialog. Since GT SoftGOT1000 can be exited on the monitor screen, it can be used for the panel computer where a mouse and keyboard are not connected.
POINT
Exiting the full screen mode
Turning ON the GOT internal device (system information area of GT SoftGOT1000: GS500.b0) exit GT SoftGOT1000. By setting the above device as a touch switch, GT SoftGOT1000 can be exited without using a mouse and keyboard. For details of the GOT internal device, refer to the following manual
GT Designer 3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals)
The following operations can be performed in the small
dialog.
Min: Minimizes GT SoftGOT1000.
Exit: Exits GT SoftGOT1000.
The operations performed on the menu bar and toolbar can
be performed by right-clicking a mouse.
Double-click on the monitor screen holding down the
key to minimize the screen.
Press the key (function key) to exit from GT
SoftGOT1000.
The following operations can be performed in the small
dialog.
Open: Opens a project.
Online: Starts monitoring. (Cannot be selected during
monitoring.)
Min: Minimizes GT SoftGOT1000.
Exit: Exits GT SoftGOT1000.
The operations performed on the menu bar and toolbar can
be performed by right-clicking the mouse.
Double-click on the monitor screen holding down the
key to minimize the screen.
Press the key (function key) to exit from GT
SoftGOT1000.
Shift
F12
Shift
F12
5.8 Full Screen Mode 5 - 23
5.8.2 Setting method
The full screen mode can be set either before or after starting GT SoftGOT1000.
Setting before starting GT SoftGOT1000
1. Select [Start]*1 [MELSOFT]*2 [GT Works3] from the menu of Windows, right-click [GT SoftGOT1000] , and select [Properties].
*1 Select [All Programs] on the [Start] screen, or select [Start] [All Programs].
*2 [MELSOFT Application] appears for a version of GT Works3 earlier than 1.136S.
2. As the GT SoftGOT1000 properties appear, choose the shortcut tab and add the keyword of the mode to be used to [Target].
*1 A one-byte blank is required to be prefixed to "-".
When displaying the screen in full screen 1
3. After addition, click the button.
4. When GT SoftGOT1000 is started next, GT SoftGOT1000 is started in the full screen mode.
5. When you cancel the full screen mode, delete the keyword added to [Target].
HINT
When starting the GT SoftGOT1000 with the specified module number in the full-screen mode
The specified module of GT SoftGOT1000 can be started in the full-screen by entering the keyword for both full screen mode and module No. in the [Target] of [GT SoftGOT1000 Properties]. (There are no rules for the order of entering keywords.) Ex) When starting module No. 3 in the full-screen 1
Refer to the following for module keyword.
5.10 Starting Up Multiple GT SoftGOT1000 Modules
Keyword Description
-NOFRAME*1 Displays the screen in full screen 1.
-NOFRAMEDLG*1 Displays the screen in full screen 2.
-NOFRAMEDLGMENU*1 Displays the screen in full screen 3.
OK
C:\Program Files\MELSOFT\SGT1000\SGT1000.exe -SGT3 -NOFRAME
A one-byte space is necessary
in front of keyword
5 - 24 5.8 Full Screen Mode
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
Setting after starting GT SoftGOT1000
1. Select either of the following. Select [View] [Full Screen Mode] from the menu. Right-click the mouse to select [View] [Full Screen Mode] from the menu.
2. The GT SoftGOT1000 is displayed in full screen 1 mode.
3. To cancel the full screen mode, right-click the mouse to select [View] [Full Screen Mode] from the menu.
POINT
Enabling and disabling full screen mode with GOT internal device
The full screen mode of GT SoftGOT1000 can be switched between enabled and disabled states by turning on and off the GOT internal device (GS500.b1).
ON: GT SoftGOT1000 is displayed in the full screen mode. OFF: The full screen mode of GT SoftGOT1000 is canceled.
For GOT internal devices, refer to the following manual.
GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals)
5.8.3 Precautions
(1) Small dialog The small dialog is movable but cannot be closed. It is always displayed on the front position.
(2) Switching to the standard screen display When the GT SoftGOT1000 was started with a keyword, the screen cannot be switched to the standard screen display. ([Full Screen Mode] in the menu is displayed in gray.)
(3) Full screen mode setting The full screen mode setting is valid even when exiting the GT SoftGOT1000 and restarting it.
(4) Display position in full screen mode When switching to full screen mode under the environment where the resolution of the PC display and GT SoftGOT1000 are different, the GT SoftGOT1000 window is displayed so that the upper-left corner of the window is on the upper-left of the PC display.
(5) When displaying the screen in full screen mode after starting the GT SoftGOT1000 When displaying the screen in full screen mode after starting the GT SoftGOT1000, the screen is displayed in full screen 1. To display the screen in full screen 2 or 3, set the full screen mode with the procedure shown in 5.8 Full Screen Mode.
5.8 Full Screen Mode 5 - 25
5.9 Popup Menu
The right-click of the mouse can be disabled (the menu can be hidden). When the Popupmenu is set to be disabled, the menu is not displayed if you right-click the mouse. This setting is also enabled when you exit and then restart GT SoftGOT1000.
5.9.1 Popup menu ineffective/effective
1. Perform the following operation. Select [Set] [Popup Menu] from the menu. Right-click the mouse to select [Set] [Popup Menu] from the menu.
2. The right-click of the mouse is disabled.
3. When you want to enable the right-click of the mouse again, choose [Set] - [Popup Menu].
5.9.2 Precautions
When the full screen mode and Popupmenu disable are set, the operations of the menu bar and mouse right-click menu cannot be performed. Therefore, the pop-up menu cannot be enabled until the full screen mode is canceled. When you want to enable the pop-up menu, cancel the full screen mode in the following method.
(a) When the keyword of the full screen mode was added to the property of the GT SoftGOT1000 icon.
After exiting GT SoftGOT1000 (pressing the key or turning ON the GOT internal device GS500.b0), delete the added keyword.
(b) When the full screen mode was executed from the menu.
As the full screen mode is canceled by pressing the + key, enable the Popupmenu from the menu.
F12
Alt F9
5 - 26 5.9 Popup Menu
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
5.10 Starting Up Multiple GT SoftGOT1000 Modules
Multiple modules of GT SoftGOT1000 can be started up simultaneously by a single computer. Each module of GT SoftGOT1000 is started up as an "n" module, and can be monitored by different connection types. (Module numbers appear in the title bar. Module numbers can be shown or hidden by the Environment Setup screen.)
5.10.1 Startup procedure
Take one of the following procedures to start up multiple modules of GT SoftGOT1000.
(1) When starting up multiple modules in the order of module numbers If the GT SoftGOT1000 modules are started up by the normal startup procedures, they will start up in the order of module numbers (Module No. 1, No. 2, No. 3...).
(2) When starting up the specified module Take the following procedures to start up the specified GT SoftGOT1000 module (e.g., module No. 3 only).
1. Select [Start]*1 [MELSOFT]*2 [GT Works3] from the menu of Windows, right-click [GT SoftGOT1000] , and select [Properties].
*1 Select [All Programs] on the [Start] screen, or select [Start] [All Programs].
*2 [MELSOFT Application] appears for a version of GT Works3 earlier than 1.136S.
GT SoftGOT1000 module No.1
is direct CPU connection
GT SoftGOT1000 module No.2
is Ethernet connection
GT SoftGOT1000
module No.1
GT SoftGOT1000
module No.2
5.10 Starting Up Multiple GT SoftGOT1000 Modules 5 - 27
2. Enter the keyword for the module to be started up at the end of the character strings in the [Target] field on the Shortcut tab on [GT SoftGOT1000 Properties] that appears.
*1 A single-byte space is required before "_".
When starting up module No. 3
3. Press the button after entering the module number.
4. The specified module of GT SoftGOT1000 will start up at the next startup.
5. Delete the keyword that was entered in the [Target] field when not specifying the module No.
Keyword Description
-SGTn*1 Specifies the number of the module to be started up.
Set the number of the module to be started up to "n". (1 to 32767)
OK
5 - 28 5.10 Starting Up Multiple GT SoftGOT1000 Modules
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
HINT
Starting up multiple GT SoftGOT1000 modules
(1) When starting up multiple GT SoftGOT1000 modules by specifying the module numbers Create a shortcut for each module to start up multiple GT SoftGOT1000 modules by specifying each module number.
(2) When multiple GT SoftGOT1000 modules are started up in the full screen mode If multiple modules of GT SoftGOT1000 are started up in the full screen mode, only the very front screen is accessible. To access other windows, rearrange the windows so that the window of the module to be operated is at the very front. Refer to the following section for how to move the windows.
5.11 Moving the Window
(3) When starting the GT SoftGOT1000 with the specified module number in the full-screen mode The specified module of GT SoftGOT1000 can be started in the full-screen by entering the keyword for both full screen mode and module No. in the [Target] of [GT SoftGOT1000 Properties]. (There are no rules for the order of entering keywords.) Ex) When starting module No. 3 in the full-screen 1
Refer to the following for the keyword for the full screen mode.
5.8 Full Screen Mode
5.10.2 Precautions for use
(1) Monitoring speed when starting up multiple GT SoftGOT1000 modules When starting up multiple GT SoftGOT1000 modules, the monitoring speed may be reduced according to the performance of the personal computer. It is recommended to not activate five or more modules. (The number of modules can be specified between 1 and 32767.)
(2) GOT internal device when multiple modules are started up GOT internal device for each module is controlled separately. GOT internal device cannot be shared by different modules.
(3) Data save location when multiple applications are started up Data save location for each module is controlled separately.
(4) Monitoring a third party PLC when starting up multiple modules When connected to the third party PLC and the same COM port is designated as the monitor target for multiple GT SoftGOT1000 modules, only the first GT SoftGOT1000 module that starts monitoring is allowed to communicate. Communication of the GT SoftGOT 1000 module that begins monitoring later will time out.
C:\Program Files\MELSOFT\SGT1000\SGT1000.exe -SGT3 -NOFRAME
A one-byte space is necessary
in front of keyword
5.10 Starting Up Multiple GT SoftGOT1000 Modules 5 - 29
5.11 Moving the Window
GT SoftGOT1000 can be moved by operating the mouse. GT SoftGOT1000 can also be moved when the full screen display function, where the title bar is not displayed, is used.
5.11.1 Window movement types
There are the following window movement types.
(1) Cascade Cascades the windows of the active GT SoftGOT1000. (These windows may not necessarily be in the order of
module numbers, depending on the Windows specifications.)
(2) Minimize all windows Minimizes all the windows of the active GT SoftGOT1000 modules.
5 - 30 5.11 Moving the Window
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
(3) Window movement A window is moved in either of the following methods. Set the moving method in Environment setup. For details of Environment Setup, refer to the following.
3.5 Environment Setup
5.11.2 Setting method
1. Perform the following operation. Select [Window] [Cascade] / [Mimimize All Windows] / [Move Window] from the menu. Right-click the mouse to select [Window] [Cascade] / [Mimimize All Windows] / [Move Window] from the
menu.
2. Move GT SoftGOT1000 in the selected moving method.
Movement with mouse
Setting the cursor of the mouse to the Move mode and moving
the mouse also moves GT SoftGOT1000 with the motion of the
mouse.
Clicking the mouse cancels the Move mode.
Movement with Move buttons
The UP, DOWN, LEFT or RIGHT button in the [Move window]
dialog box moves GT SoftGOT1000 on a 10-dot every clicking.
A window can also be moved on a panel computer that cannot
use a mouse.
5.11 Moving the Window 5 - 31
5.12 System Alarm
System alarm is displayed. If system alarm is not set to project data, it can be confirmed with this dialog box.
1. Perform the following operation. Select [Tool] [System Alarm] from the menu. Right-click the mouse to select [Tool] [System Alarm] from the menu.
2. The System Alarm dialog box is displayed.
*1 Refer to the following manual for list of system alarm.
Appendix.2.6 GOT error code list
POINT
About system alarm to be displayed
Only the error detected by GOT is displayed on the system alarm dialog box. Set the system alarm display in the project data for checking errors of the PLC CPU and network.
Error messages are displayed in English. To display them in other languages, configure the following setting. Setting the system alarm display in the project data Setting the system language switching device
Error messages cannot be cleared with the GOT error reset signal (system signal 1-1.b13). Error messages can be cleared only with the [Clear] button.
Item Description
System Alarm*1 Error contents are displayed.
Displayed error message is cleared.
However, it is redisplayed when the error keeps occuring. Clear
5 - 32 5.12 System Alarm
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
5.13 Script Error
Script error information is displayed.
1. Perform the following operation. Select [Tool] [Script Error] menu. Right-click the mouse to select [Tool] [Script Error] from the menu.
2. The Script Error Info. dialog box is displayed.
*1 Refer to the following manual for script function.
GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Functions)
Item Description
Script No. *1 Script No. where error occurs is displayed.
Error No. Error code of occurring error is displayed.
Error Message Error contents are displayed.
Script is executed again.
Displayed error message is cleared.
However, it is redisplayed when the error keeps occuring.
Retry
Clear
5.13 Script Error 5 - 33
5.14 Object Script Error
Object script error information is displayed.
1. Perform the following operation. Select [Tool] [Object Script Error] from the menu. Right-click the mouse to select [Tool] [Object Script Error] from the menu.
2. The Object Script Error Info. dialog box is displayed.
*1 Refer to the following manual for object script function and corrective actions for error messages.
GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Functions)
Item Description
Script User ID *1 User ID of the object script where error occurs is displayed.
Error No. Error code of occurring error is displayed.
Error Message Error contents are displayed.
Object script is executed again.
Displayed error message is cleared.
However, it is redisplayed when the error keeps occuring.
Retry
Clear
5 - 34 5.14 Object Script Error
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
5.15 Application Start-up
Various applications (such as Microsoft Excel) can be started from GT SoftGOT1000 while GT SoftGOT1000 monitor is running. A file to be started up can be specified. This allows reference to the resource data of each function in CSV or BMP format.
An application can be started up by clicking a touch switch, for example.
POINT
Trigger and setting points of application start-up
For the application start-up, GOT internal devices are used as a trigger to start applications. Set the trigger in the [APP Setup 1]/[APP Setup 2]/[Advanced APP Setup] tabs of the [Application Start-up Setting] dialog box. The following shows the GOT internal devices to be used in each tab and the number of applications whose start- up setting can be set.
For details of GOT internal devices and the method of device settings, refer to the following manual.
GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals)
Tub Description Reference
APP Setup 1 Up to 16 applications can be allotted for the device GS501. 5.15.1 APP Setup 1/APP
Setup 2 tabAPP Setup 2 Up to 16 applications can be allotted for the device GS502.
Advanced APP Setup Up to 8160 applications can be allotted for the devices GS505 to GS507. 5.15.1 Advanced APP Setup
tub
5.15 Application Start-up 5 - 35
5.15.1 Setting method
1. Follow the procedure below.
Select [Set] [Application Start-up Setting] from the menu.
Right-click the mouse, and select [Set] [Application Start-up Setting] from the menu.
2. The Application Start-up Setting dialog box is displayed. Make the settings referring to the explanation below.
APP Setup 1/APP Setup 2 tab
Item Description
Application to be allotted to the device
GS501
Application to be allotted to the device
GS502
Specify an application to be allotted to the bit of device GS501 or GS502.Up to 32 applications can
be allotted.
Applications allotted start up when these bits turn ON.
The bits which were turned ON will automatically turn OFF after the application is started up.
File Name
Specify the path to the application to be started up by typing (Up to 1023 characters can be
entered.) or clicking .
Available file extensions are as follows:
* .exe, * .com, * .bat
Option
By specifying a file name, the specified file is opened simultaneously with start-up of the
application.
Also, the mode or processing of the application can be specified by specifying options for the
application.
(Availability of options differs depending on the application.) For options available for each
application, refer to the manual or Help of the application to be used.
Up to 1023 characters can be entered in [Option].
Test
Click this button to check if the set application operates normally.
Before executing monitoring with the GT SoftGOT1000, click this button to confirm the normal
operation of the set application.
5 - 36 5.15 Application Start-up
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
POINT
Using environment variables
Using the environment variables (Path) provided by Windows, paths no longer need to be set each time.
For details of environment variables, refer to the manual or Help of Windows. The following shows an example setting of environment variables.
1. Select [Start] [Control Panel] [Performance and Maintenance] [System].
2. Display the Advanced tab and then select [Environment Variables].
3. Select [Path] from [System variables] and click [Edit].
4. Add the path to an executable file to Variable value. (To set multiple paths, place ; (semi-colon) between paths.) Example) Specifying a file located in C:\Program Files\MyProgram
5.15 Application Start-up 5 - 37
Advanced APP Setup tub
POINT
(1) Creation and storage destination of Advanced APP setup file When GT SoftGOT1000 is started, an Advanced APP setup file (AppStartSet.csv) is created for each module. Example) Path of the Advanced APP setup file when starting the module No.1. C:\Program Files\MELSOFT\SGT1000\Multi\00001\AppStartSet.csv The advanced application setting can be changed by editing the Advanced APP setup file directly.
(2) Setting check The setting check may take few minutes according to the file size of the Advanced APP setup file (AppStartSet.csv). Click [No] in the confirmation dialog box when not executing the setting check. Returns to the Advanced APP Setup tab.
Item Description
Advanced APP Setup
Click this item to open the Advanced APP setup file (AppStartSet.csv).
Use the program for opening CSV files, which is set in the personal computer, to open the Advanced APP setup file.
Allot GOT internal devices and applications in the Advanced APP setup file.
(1) Advanced application settings
(2) Setting method of Advanced APP setup file
(3) Precautions for advanced application settings
Setting check Click this item to check the setting contents of the Advanced APP setup file (AppStartSet.csv).
5 - 38 5.15 Application Start-up
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
(1) Advanced application settings In the advanced application settings, use the combination of the following two triggers for the application start- up. Trigger 1: Values of GS505 (1 to 255) Trigger 2: Bit ON of either GS506.b0 to b15 or GS507.b0 to b15
Up to 8160 application start-up settings can be set by the combination of Trigger 1 and Trigger 2.
The application starts when both Trigger 1 and Trigger 2 are approved. After the application starts, 0 is stored to GS505. Bits of Trigger 2 which were turned ON (GS506.b0 to b15 and GS507.b0 to b15) will automatically turn OFF.
(2) Setting method of Advanced APP setup file In the Advanced APP setup file, rows and columns are referred to as Record and Field, respectively. For Record, up to 8160 settings can be set by the combination of Trigger 1 and Trigger 2. The following explains the method of setting the Advanced APP setup file in case of opening the file with
Microsoft Excel.
Item Description
Record One Record is configured with Field 1 to 5.
Field 1
Set whether to enable or disable the setting of record.
0: enable
1: disable
Field 2 Set Trigger 1 to start the application.
Set the value of GS505 as Trigger 1. (1 to 255)
Field 3
Set Trigger 2 to start the application.
Set the bit position of GS506/GS507 as Trigger 2. (0 to 31)
GS506.b0 to b15 :0 to 15
GS507.b0 to b15 :16 to 31
Field 4
Set the path of the application to be started.
The following applications can be started.
* .exe, * .com, * .bat
Up to 1023 characters can be input.
Field 5
By specifying a file name, the specified file is opened simultaneously with start-up of the application.
Also, the mode or processing of the application can be specified by specifying options for the application.
Up to 1023 characters can be entered in [Option].
Availability of options differs depending on the application.
For options available for each application, refer to the manual or Help of the application to be used.
255 patterns
Values of GS505 1 2
255 254 253
GS506
b0 b1 b14 b15 GS507
b0 b1 b14 b15
Trigger 1
32 patterns
= 8160
Trigger 2
Field 1 Field 4Field 2 Field 5Field 3
Record
5.15 Application Start-up 5 - 39
Example) When the following two records are set
In the status that 100 is stored in GS505, the application (EXCEL.EXE) set in Setting 1 starts when GS506.b15 is turned ON. In the status that 200 is stored in GS505, the application (WINWORD.EXE) set in Setting 2 starts when GS506.b15 is turned ON.
(3) Precautions for advanced application settings
(a) Settings of Field 1 to 3 which disable record The record including Field 1 to 3 in the following status is disabled. The value is not set. Invalid characters are included. A value outside of the range is set.
(b) Settings of Field 4 in which an error occurs at the application startup The record including Field 4 in the following status causes an error at the application startup. The path is not set. Invalid characters are included. The specified file does not exist. The specified file cannot be executed.
(c) Settings of Field 5 in which an error occurs at the application startup The record including Field 5 in the following status causes an error at the application startup. A line feed is included.
(d) When multiple records with the same setting exist When multiple records have the same settings of Field 2 and 3, only the top record is valid.
(e) When Field 5 does not exist When the settings are configured correctly for Field 1 to Field 4 in the record, and when Field 5 does not exist, Field 5 is processed with no data. Although Field 5 does not exist, the record is processed.
(f) When the record begins with a semicolon The record is invalid.
Item Description
Setting 1
Trigger 1: 100
Trigger 2: 15 (GS506.b15)
Application to be started: EXCEL.EXE
Setting 2
Trigger 1: 200
Trigger 2: 15 (GS506.b15)
Application to be started: WINWORD.EXE
Setting 1 Setting 2
5 - 40 5.15 Application Start-up
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
Auxiliary Setup tab
For details of * 1, refer to the next page.
Item Description
Action of when startup condition satisfied *1
Select how the application that was started up from GT SoftGOT1000 behaves when its start-up
condition is satisfied again.
Activate an application in motion:
Select this item to make an application that is already in motion active.
Separately start another application:
Select this item to start up the same application in addition to the one currently running.
Exit the applications when exiting GT
SoftGOT1000 *1
Check this item to terminate GT SoftGOT1000 together with applications that were started up from
GT SoftGOT1000.
Note that applications that are started up after checking [Separately start another application] in
[Action of when startup condition satisfied] are not terminated.
Create application start-up history *1
Check this item to store a startup status of an application in a history. Data that can be stored in a
history differ by the selection made in [Action of when startup condition satisfied].
For details of data storable in a history, refer to the following.
5.15.2 Application start-up history
Display a dialog when application start-up
error is detected. Check this item to display an error dialog box when an error occurs at application start-up.
5.15 Application Start-up 5 - 41
*1 Action of when startup condition satisfied
When a setting is changed while GT SoftGOT1000 is operating, the setting after change is valid only for applications started up after the change. For this reason, even when [Exit the applications when exiting GT SoftGOT1000.] is enabled, some applications may not be terminated simultaneously with termination of GT SoftGOT1000.
Example) When changed from [Activate an application in motion] to [Separately start another application]
Example) When changed from [Separately start another application] to [Activate an application in motion]
Timing of setting
and starting up
Images of application
starting up
Set to [Activate an application in motion] Set to [Separately start another application]
Start-up Start-up Start-up
Simultaneous
termination with GT
SoftGOT1000
Store information involving
activation processing/
termination processing to the
application start-up history
Start-up Active Active
Available
Available
Not available
The application currently
running must be terminated
before starting the same
application separately.
Set to [Activate an
application in motion] Set to [Separately start
another application]
Start-up
Timing of setting
and starting up
Simultaneous
termination
with GT SoftGOT1000
Images of application
starting up
Not available
Start-up
Not available
Start-up
Start-upStart-upStart-upStart-up
Active
Only (3) can be terminated simultaneously
Available only for (3)
The setting after change is valid only for
applications that are started up after
[Activate an application in motion] is set.
Store information
involving activation
processing/ termination
processing to the application
start-up history
5 - 42 5.15 Application Start-up
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
5.15.2 Application start-up history
Information involving application start-ups can be stored in a history.
Information storable in a history The following lists information storable in a history. Successful application start-ups Erroneous application start-ups
Activation processing of applications *1 Termination processing of applications*1
*1 This applies only for applications that are started up after [Activate an application in motion] is selected in [Action of when startup
condition satisfied].
Referring to history data The following explains how to refer to history data.
1. Follow the procedure below.
Select [Set] [Application Start-up History] from the menu.
Right-click the mouse, and select [Set] [Application Start-up History] from the menu.
2. History data are displayed.
POINT
History data
Any application start-up history cannot be referred to when no history data are stored. To create history data, check [Create application start-up history] in the application start-up setting. For details of the application start-up setting, refer to the following section.
5.15.1 Setting method
Historical data are stored for each module as follows. They are not deleted even when GT SoftGOT1000 is closed. Delete unnecessary history data.
2006/09/25 19:56:26 No.1 GS501.b0 : The application has been started.
2006/09/25 20:10:30 No.1 GS501.b0 : The application has been terminated.
2006/09/25 13:51:28 No.10000 GS501.b10 : The application has been started.
2006/09/25 14:00:30 No.10000 GS501.b10 : The application has been terminated.
2006/09/25 16:47:02 No.1 GS501.b0 : The application has been started.
2006/09/25 16:57:07 No.1 GS501.b0 : The application has been activated.
MELSOFT(installation folder)
SGT1000
Multi
00001
Application start-up history data
SoftGOT_AppliLog.txt
5.15 Application Start-up 5 - 43
5.15.3 Precautions
(1) Precautions for setting
With personal computers employing VGA (640 480) resolution, the Application Start-up Setting dialog box cannot entirely seen on the screen.
Move the dialog box with the mouse to make settings, or employ resolutions of SVGA (800 600) or higher to the display.
(2) Precautions for creating application start-up history data If an application fails to start up, the error dialog box is displayed. The application cannot be restarted in this state. Close the error dialog box before starting the application. Choose not to display the error dialog box in the application start-up setting, if necessary.
(3) Precautions for exiting applications when exiting GT SoftGOT1000 Applications started from other than GT SoftGOT1000 are not terminated. Also, some applications may not be terminated with this function.
(4) Precautions for use Applications may not be started up if device ON time is too short. Keep the device ON until applications are started up.
5 - 44 5.15 Application Start-up
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
5.16 Close Menu
The Close menu at the upper right of the title bar can be disabled (enabled). The Close menu at the upper right of the title bar is grayed out when it is disabled. Clicking the Close menu in this status does not terminate GT SoftGOT1000. The setting selected here remains valid even after GT SoftGOT1000 is terminated and then restarted.
After making this setting, [Exit] provided in the right-click menu and the Project menu is enabled.
Close menu on the title bar
5.16.1 Disabling/enabling the close menu
1. Follow the procedure below. Select [Set] [Close Menu] from the menu. Right-click the mouse, and select [Set] [Close Menu] from the menu.
2. The Close menu at the upper right of the title bar is disabled.
3. To enable back the Close menu at the upper right of the title bar, select [Set] [Close Menu].
5.16 Close Menu 5 - 45
5.17 Interaction with PX Developer
The monitor tool function of PX Developer can be called on GT SoftGOT1000. In PX Developer, when registering GT SoftGOT1000 as the user graphic screen, the registered GT SoftGOT1000 can be started up. With interaction between GT SoftGOT1000 and PX Developer, their functions can be shared. Thus, the interaction improves the operational performance for combining the functions.
For methods of interaction between GT SoftGOT1000 and PX Developer, refer to the following manual.
PX Developer Version Operating Manual (Monitor Tool)
To call monitor tool functions for PX Developer on GT SoftGOT1000, the setting for the special function switch is required. For details on the setting, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Functions)
Security level change By changing the mode with the monitor tool of PX Developer, the security level of GT SoftGOT1000 can be changed to the level corresponding to the mode. For how to change the security level when changing the mode, refer to the following.
PX Developer Version Operating Manual (Monitor Tool)
When changing the security level, use PX Developer Version1.31H or later.
Set the PX Developer function call for a special function switch on GT Designer3.
Touch the special function switch, and then the monitor tool function for PX Developer set on GT Designer2 is called.
Screen of the called monitor tool function
5 - 46 5.17 Interaction with PX Developer
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
5.17.1 Setting method
Before interaction with PX Developer For interaction with PX Developer, the setting is required respectively for GT SoftGOT1000 and PX Developer. The following describes the settings required for interaction with PX Developer.
(1) Settings on GT SofGOT1000
Set to the online mode at start-up.( 3.12 Automatic Startup)
Check the [Display dialog when starting GT SoftGOT1000, specified with the module that has been
activated.] of the auxiliary setup tab on the environment setup dialog box.( 3.5 Environment Setup)
Do not check [Display dialog when closing GT SoftGOT1000.].( 3.5 Environment Setup)
Call project data on GT SoftGOT1000. ( 3.7 Opening the Project)
POINT
Opening project data
Set the PX Developer function call for the current project data opened on the GT SoftGOT1000. For the following cases, open the project data on GT SoftGOT1000.
When the project data has never been opened on GT SoftGOT1000 When the target project data differs from the last monitored project data
When GT SoftGOT1000 is displayed in the full screen mode for the interaction with PX Developer, set the back screen mode for GT SoftGOT1000, and then monitor tool windows are not behind GT SoftGOT1000.
( 5.18 Back screen mode)
(2) Settings on PX Developer For the settings on PX Developer, refer to the following manual.
PX Developer Version Operating Manual (Monitor Tool)
PX Developer function call setting Set to call monitor tool functions on GT SoftGOT1000. To call monitor tool functions for PX Developer on GT SoftGOT1000, the special function switch to which the [PX Developer function call] is set is required. Set the special function switch with GT Designer3. For details on the setting, refer to the following manual.
GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Functions)
After setting the PX Developer function call in the special function switch with GT Designer3, the settings can be changed on GT SoftGOT1000. (To change the settings, starting GT Designer3 is not needed.) The following describes the method for changing the settings on GT SoftGOT1000.
1. Operate any of the followings.
Click (PX Developer Function Call Setting).
Select [Set] [PX Developer Function Setting] [PX Developer Function Call Setting] from the menu. Right-click the mouse and select [Set] [PX Developer Function Call Setting] from the menu.
5.17 Interaction with PX Developer 5 - 47
2. The dialog box appears for the PX Developer function call setting. Set the dialog box with reference to the following list.
For details on *1, refer to the next page.
Item Description
Toolbar The functions of the toolbar are shown.
OK Press the button to accept the settings and close the dialog box.
Cancel Press the button to cancel the setting and close the dialog box.
Test
Call the monitor tool function that is checked in the [Call] column.
The name of the function is shown in the [Function] column.
The function is used to check a monitor tool function to be called and the position to be displayed when setting with GT
Designer3.
The display position for the monitor tool is always at the upper left of screen. ([Set to the relative coordinates to GT
SoftGOT1000] checked in [Display Position Setting] are disabled.)
For restrictions for calling monitor tool functions, refer to the following manual.
PX Developer Version Operating Manual (Monitor Tool)
Call Assign the functions that is checked in the [Call] column to the special function switch.
The setting is available only with GT Designer3.
Function
Select monitor tool functions to be called when touching the special function switch.
The following indicates the applicable functions.
Faceplate Control Panel Trend Graph
Alarm List Event List Find
Change Mode Communication Status Stop Buzzer
Show the Monitor toolbar Hide the Monitor toolbar Deactivate the Monitor tool
For details for each function, refer to the following manual.
PX Developer Version Operating Manual (Monitor Tool)
Parameter
Input an argument when calling a monitor tool function.
The following indicates the applicable functions and their settings.
Faceplate : Tag name
Control Panel : Group name
Trend Graph : Group name
Position Set the display position of monitor tool windows to be called.
Click the button to show the setting dialog box for the display position.
Comment Comments can be entered arbitrarily. (Up to 512 characters regardless of whether single-byte or double-byte)
Status bar
The function call number, which is checked in the [Call] column, is indicated.
Double-click the displayed function call number to show the column checked in [Call].
The setting is available with GT Designer3.
5 - 48 5.17 Interaction with PX Developer
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
POINT
Precautions for changing PX Developer function call setting
During changing the PX Developer function call setting on GT SoftGOT1000, do not change the PX developer function call setting of the same project data on other GT SoftGOT1000 or GT Designer3. When the PX Developer function call setting of the same project data is changed on multiple software, the setting saved at the last is enabled. The settings saved before the last one are deleted.
*1 Setting for display position
In the setting dialog box for the display position, the position can be set for displaying monitor tool windows to be called.
(Continued to next page)
Item Description
Set to the relative
coordinates to GT
SoftGOT 1000.
To display monitor tool windows in the fixed position on the display regardless of whether display is GT SoftGOT1000, do not
check the item.
If not checked, the coordinates of the display position can be set with their origin at the upper left on the display of a personal
computer.
Check the item to always display monitor tool windows in the fixed position on GT SoftGOT1000.
If checked, the coordinates of the display position can be set with their origin at the upper left on the display of a personal
computer.
5.17 Interaction with PX Developer 5 - 49
Item Description
Window selection
Set the display position when calling monitor tool functions.
To display monitor tool windows, Set the coordinates in [Top], [Left], [Right] and [Bottom].
The coordinates can be automatically set with the (Aiming mark).
The following describes how to use aiming mark.
1) Set a window at the position of a monitor tool window to be displayed. (Any windows, including monitor tool windows, can
be positioned.)
2) Drag the aiming mark to the set window.
If dragged, the window is surrounded with a black frame.
Release the mouse button on the window surrounded with a black flame.
3) The coordinates of the set window are input in the setting dialog box for the display position.
Do not use (Aiming mark) if [Set to the relative coordinates to GT SoftGOT1000.] is checked.
Directly input the coordinates. (Applicable range: -32768 to 32767)
Top Set X-coordinate on the upper left of the window.
Left Set Y-coordinate on the upper left of the window.
Right Set X-coordinate on the upper right of the window.
Bottom Set Y-coordinate on the upper right of the window.
100
100 300
600
5 - 50 5.17 Interaction with PX Developer
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
PX Developer function call sub-setting
1. Operate any of the followings.
Click (PX Developer Function Call Sub-Setting).
Select [Set] [PX Developer Function Setting] [PX Developer Function Call Sub-Setting] from the menu.
Right-click the mouse and select [Set] [PX Developer Function Call Sub-Setting] from the menu.
2. The dialog box appears for the PX Developer function call sub-setting. Set the dialog box with reference to the following explanation.
Item Description
Create PX Developer
Function call history.
Check the item to register the calling status of monitor tool functions as a history.
For available information as history, refer to the following.
5.17.2 PX Developer function call history
5.17 Interaction with PX Developer 5 - 51
5.17.2 PX Developer function call history
Histories for calling monitor tool functions can be registered.
Available information as history The following information can be registered as a history.
Success of calling monitor tool functions Failure of calling monitor tool functions
Referencing history data The following describes the reference method of the history data.
1. Operate any of the followings.
Click (PX Developer Function Call History).
Select [Set] [PX Developer Function Setting] [PX Developer Function Call History] from the menu.
Right-click the mouse and select [Set] [PX Developer Function Call History] from the menu.
2. The history data appears.
POINT
History data
When history data is not registered, the PX Developer function call history cannot be referenced. To reference the history data, check [Create PX Developer Function call history.] in the PX Developer function call sub-setting. For the PX Developer function call sub-setting, refer to the following.
5.17.1 Setting method
The history data is managed for each module as shown below. The data is not deleted even if GT SoftGOT1000 is exited. The unnecessary data is required to delete by the user.
2007/01/10 10:56:47 No.1 Function Call No.1 : Failed to call PX Developer Function.
2007/01/10 10:57:39 No.1 Function Call No.1 : PX Developer Function has been called.
2007/01/10 10:57:53 No.1 Function Call No.2 : Failed to call PX Developer Function.
2007/01/10 11:07:56 No.1 Function Call No.2 : PX Developer Function has been called.
2007/01/11 17:10:35 No.1 Function Call No.3 : PX Developer Function has been called.
2007/01/12 13:25:11 No.1 Function Call No.4 : PX Developer Function has been called.
PX Developer function call history data
MELSOFT (Installation folder)
SGT1000
Multi
00001
SoftGOT_PXFuncLog.txt
5 - 52 5.17 Interaction with PX Developer
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
5.18 Back screen mode
The monitor screen of GT SoftGOT1000 is always displayed behind all the other screens. In this mode, other applications can be used while GT SoftGOT1000 is displayed in full-screen.
5.18.1 Setting method
1. Operate any of the followings.
Select [View] [Back Screen Mode] from the menu.
Right-click the mouse and select [View] [Back Screen Mode] from the menu.
2. GT SoftGOT1000 is displayed behind all other screens.
3. To cancel the settings, operate any of the followings.
Select [View] [Back Screen Mode] from the menu. (Note that the settings cannot be canceled in the menu bar if displayed in full screen.)
Right-click the mouse and select [View] [Back Screen Mode] from the menu.
5.19 Scroll Function
The scroll bars are displayed when GT SoftGOT1000 pane is resized to a smaller size.
5.19.1 Setting method
1. Operate the following.
Select [View] [Scroll Bar] from the menu.
2. The scroll bars are displayed when GT SoftGOT1000 pane is resized to a smaller size. Scroll the monitor screen with the scroll bars, and then the hidden part of the monitor screen is displayed. The scroll bars cannot be operated with keyboards. The scroll bars are not displayed with the full screen mode.
3. For hiding the scroll bars, select [View] [Scroll Bar] from the menu.
5.18 Back screen mode 5 - 53
5.20 Exit Key
GT SoftGOT1000 can be ended with the key on a keyboard.
5.20.1 Disabling/enabling exit key
1. Operate the following.
Select [Set] [Exit Key [F12]] from the menu.
2. The key on the keyboard cannot end GT SoftGOT1000. End GT SoftGOT1000 with the Set menu and others.
3. For ending GT SoftGOT1000 with the key on the keyboard, select [Set] [Exit Key [F12]] from the menu.
F12
F12
F12
5 - 54 5.20 Exit Key
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
5.21 SoftGOT-GOT Link Function
The SoftGOT-GOT link function enables GT SoftGOT1000 to connect the GOT via Ethernet. And then, the function synchronizes GT SoftGOT1000 data with GOT project data and resource data. When input objects (touch switch, numerical input, and ASCII input) are input or other operation is perforvaaaamed, the simultaneous operation between GT SoftGOT1000 and the GOT must be prevented. The operation must be allowed by either GT SoftGOT1000 or the GOT. GT SoftGOT1000 can monitor a controller connected to the GOT.
POINT
(1) GT SoftGOT1000 project data GT SoftGOT1000 uses project data read from the GOT. Creating new GT SoftGOT1000 project data is not required.
(2) Number of GOTs that can communicate with GT SoftGOT1000 Only one GT SoftGOT1000 can communicate with one GOT. While GT SoftGOT1000 communicates with the GOT, another GT SoftGOT1000 cannot communicate with the GOT.
(3) Controller monitored by GT SoftGOT1000 while the GOT uses the multi-channel function GT SoftGOT1000 monitors a controller connected to the GOT that assigns the channel number 1 to the controller. A controller other than the channel number 1 assigned cannot be monitored. Therefore, objects with devices of a controller other than the channel number 1 assigned are not displayed on the screen. With a touch switch or others, when devices are written to the controller other than the channel number 1 assigned, a system alarm occurs.
(4) Communication status between the GOT and a controller To monitor a controller connected to the GOT by using GT SoftGOT1000, enable communications between the GOT and the controller. If the GOT cannot communicate with the controller, the SoftGOT-GOT link function is not available. For how to connect the controller to the GOT, refer to the following.
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Electric Products) for GT Works3
Ethernet
GT SoftGOT1000
GOT Controller
ControllerGT SoftGOT1000 monitors the controller connected to the GOT. GT SoftGOT1000 only monitors the controller with the channel number 1 assigned on the GOT. GT SoftGOT1000 cannot communicate with the controller other than the channel number 1 assigned.
GT SoftGOT1000 reads GOT project data from the GOT, and monitors the controller with the same project data as the read GOT project data.
5.21 SoftGOT-GOT Link Function 5 - 55
Difference between the SoftGOT-GOT link function and the VNC server function To operate the GOT on the personal computer connected via Ethernet, two functions are available: SoftGOT-GOT
link function and VNC server function.
(1) SoftGOT-GOT link function With the SoftGOT-GOT link function, GT SoftGOT1000 and the GOT each have a project data and monitor a controller. Since GT SoftGOT1000 displays the GOT screen on the personal computer, the processing load on the GOT is reduced. By using a GOT internal device for the screen switching device, GT SoftGOT1000 and the GOT can display different screens.
The GOT and GT SoftGOT1000 each operate independently. Therefore, collecting data, including alarm data and logging data, can make a difference in the collection result between the GOT and the personal computer. The functions unavailable for GT SoftGOT1000, including extended functions and option functions, cannot be used with the SoftGOT-GOT link function.
(2) VNC server function
With the VNC server function, the remote screen of the personal computer displays the GOT screen. You can view the data collected by the GOT, including alarm data and logging data, on the personal computer in real time. Even though an extended function or an option function is used, you can also remotely operate the GOT from the personal computer.
Since the VNC server function increases the processing load on the GOT, the GOT can delay displaying data and collecting data, including alarm data and logging data. The GOT can also delay responding to an operation from the VNC client (personal computer).
Personal computer (GT SoftGOT1000)
A 1254 348B
A 1254 348B
In remote operation (10s)
A 1254 348B
A 1254 348B
In remote operation (10s)
GOT
The personal computer reads project data and
resource data from the GOT.
Ethernet
PLC
Monitoring
The personal computer (GT SoftGOT1000) and the GOT each monitor the PLC independently.
Monitoring
Personal computer (VNC client)
A 1254
348B A 1254
348B
In remote operation (10s)
A 1254
348B A 1254
348B
In remote operation (10s)
GOT (VNC server)
Monitoring Remote operation
GOT screen display
Remotely operating the GOT from the personal computer (VNC client) (The personal computer does not monitor the PLC.)Ethernet
PLC
5 - 56 5.21 SoftGOT-GOT Link Function
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
5.21.1 Project data synchronization
When the SoftGOT-GOT link function is used, GT SoftGOT1000 reads project data or resource data from the GOT, and synchronizes GT SoftGOT1000 data with the GOT data. When the project data is synchronized, GT SoftGOT1000 can display the same screen as that of the GOT. Because the project data used for GT SoftGOT1000 is read from the GOT, creating new GT SoftGOT1000 project data is not required.
Project data synchronization Project data is synchronized at the following timing.
Synchronization timing Reference
Starting the monitor with GT SoftGOT1000 3.8
Selecting [Tool] [GOT Project Data Acquisition] from the menu 3.3
Changing project data of the GOT that is communicating with GT SoftGOT1000 GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals)
5.21 SoftGOT-GOT Link Function 5 - 57
The following shows the processes of the project data synchronization.
*1 When [Tool] [GOT Project Data Acquisition] is selected from the menu, GT SoftGOT1000 does not determine whether the time
stamp of the project data is matched or not.
*2 When project data of the GOT that is communicating with GT SoftGOT1000 is changed, the confirmation dialog box for the project
data synchronization does not appear.
Not matched
Not used
Project data synchronization is started.
Is the time stamp of the project data matched between
GT SoftGOT1000 and the GOT?
Matched
Without synchronization
Used
With synchronization
Is a password set for the project data?
With password
Without password
Without setting
With setting Is [Project Data Upload Password] set?
Enter a password.
Is the password correct?
Correct
Not correct
The confirmation dialog box for the project data synchronization appears.
Select whether to synchronize the data or not.
*1
Is the SoftGOT-GOT link function used between the connected
GOT and a different GT SoftGOT1000 module?
*2
GT SoftGOT1000 project data is updated.
GT SoftGOT1000 starts monitoring.
How is the condition of GT SoftGOT1000 when the project data is
synchronized?
Before monitoring
During monitoring
The condition of GT SoftGOT1000 does not change.
A dialog box is displayed, indicating that the connected GOT is using the SoftGOT-GOT link function.
Before monitoring
The project data and resource data are read from the GOT.
5 - 58 5.21 SoftGOT-GOT Link Function
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
POINT
Precautions during project data synchronization
Do not perform the following operations during the project data synchronization. Turn off the GOT or a controller. Press the reset button of the GOT. Disconnect the communication cable. Turn off the personal computer.
If the operations listed above are performed during the project data synchronization, GT SoftGOT1000 project data and GOT project data may differ.
Select [Tool] [GOT Project Data Acquisition], and synchronize GT SoftGOT1000 project data with GOT project data again.
HINT
Automatic password entry for project data synchronization
To automatically enter a password when project data are synchronized, enter a password in the [GOT Link Setup] dialog box beforehand.
3.6.1 Communication setup dialog box
Resource data synchronization When resource data is stored in the GOT, the resource data is synchronized at the same time when project data is synchronized. The resource data is copied from the drive A or B in the GOT to the virtual drive A or B in GT SoftGOT1000.
2.4.1 Precautions for using the GT Soft GOT1000
The resource data of the following functions is synchronized.
For how to collect resource data with each function, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Functions)
After the resource data is synchronized, GT SoftGOT1000 and the GOT collect each resource data. Therefore, the synchronized resource data may differ between GT SoftGOT1000 and the GOT.
POINT
Resource data when the multi-channel function is used for the GOT
Regardless of the number of channels for controllers connected to the GOT, GT SoftGOT1000 data is synchronized with all GOT resource data. After the resource data is synchronized, GT SoftGOT1000 only monitors a controller with the channel number 1 assigned. Therefore, GT SoftGOT1000 only collects resource data for the controller with the channel number 1 assigned. (For controllers other than the channel number 1 assigned, resource data is not collected.)
Function
Advanced user alarms, Alarm history
5.21 SoftGOT-GOT Link Function 5 - 59
5.21.2 Authorization control
When the SoftGOT-GOT link function is used, and when input objects (touch switch, numerical input, and ASCII input) are input or other operation is performed, the right to input objects (authorization) is required. By enabling the input or other operation only when the authorization is obtained, the simultaneous operation between GT SoftGOT1000 and the GOT is prevented.
No authorization is required for the following operation or function.
POINT
Operations not recognized by GT SoftGOT1000/GOT
In the following operations, touching is not recognized as the input operation. Screen save status While Key-in disable signal (system signal 1-1.b9) is ON.
Operation/Function Description
Screen operation Moving windows
Switching the order of windows
Function
Functions controlled by triggers (system information, screen switching device, status observation
function, and others)
GOT internal devices (GS654, 655, and 656)
5 - 60 5.21 SoftGOT-GOT Link Function
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
HINT
How to check the authorization status
(1) How to check the status with GT SoftGOT1000 When the SoftGOT-GOT link function is used, the status bar on GT SoftGOT1000 displays the status whether the authorization or the exclusive authorization is obtained or not.
The status is checked by GOT internal devices.
5.21.3 Control or notification with GOT internal devices
(2) How to check the status with the GOT Whether the GOT obtains the authorization or the exclusive authorization can be checked by the GOT internal devices.
5.21.3 Control or notification with GOT internal devices
(3) Operation status popup notification function This function notifies whether the authorization is obtained or not and the operation status at the target side with a popup display. The display position of the operation status popup display is common with the display position set for the advanced alarm popup display, and is displayed in bands either on the bottom, center or bottom of the display. If the base screen is switched when displaying the operation status popup, the popup is displayed at the display position set for the advanced alarm popup display in the base screen after switching. If authorization is obtained, the operation status popup display is cleared. The display is set by using the GOT utility or GOT setup of GT Designer3. For how to set the utility, refer to the following.
User's Manual of GOT used
For how to set GT Designer3, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals)
Obtaining the authorization
(1) Obtaining the authorization by using the GOT When GT SoftGOT1000 starts monitoring, the GOT automatically obtains the authorization. When input objects are input without obtaining the authorization with the GOT, the dialog box for obtaining the authorization appears. In the following cases, the GOT automatically obtains the authorization. The GOT is restarted. The GOT obtains the exclusive authorization. While GT SoftGOT1000 obtains the authorization, the user does not operate GT SoftGOT1000 within the
authorization obtained time set in the GOT utility or GOT setup of GT Designer3. GT SoftGOT1000 stops monitoring. GT SoftGOT1000 is terminated. The communication between GT SoftGOT1000 and the GOT is disconnected by a communication cable
disconnection or others.
(2) Obtaining the authorization by using GT SoftGOT1000 When input objects are input without obtaining the authorization with the GT SoftGOT1000, the dialog box for obtaining the authorization appears. When the GOT has the exclusive authorization, GT SoftGOT1000 cannot obtain the authorization.
Item Description
OPE Displays the status whether GT SoftGOT1000 obtains the authorization or not.
Lights in green when GT SoftGOT1000 obtains the authorization.
PRI Displays the status whether the GOT obtains the exclusive authorization or not.
Lights in blue when the GOT obtains the exclusive authorization.
5.21 SoftGOT-GOT Link Function 5 - 61
Exclusive authorization for the GOT
(1) Exclusive authorization This right allows only the GOT to obtain the authorization. (Exclusive authorization) When the GOT obtains the exclusive authorization, the GOT automatically obtains the authorization.
(2) How to obtain the exclusive authorization The exclusive authorization is obtained by using the GOT internal device (GS447) or the GOT utility. For how to set the GOT internal device, refer to the following.
5.21.3 Control or notification with GOT internal devices
For how to set the utility, refer to the following.
the User's Manual for the GOT used
POINT
(1) Operation that automatically obtains the exclusive authorization When the dedicated screen for the utility, the extended function, or the option function is displayed, the GOT obtains the exclusive authorization regardless of the value of the Exclusive authorization control signal (GS447.b0). When the above dedicated screen is switched to the user-created screen, the exclusive authorization is controlled by the value of GS447.b0.
5.21.3 Control or notification with GOT internal devices
(2) SoftGOT-GOT link function The following settings are set by using the GOT utility or GOT setup of GT Designer3.
Authorization obtained time Authorization guarantee time Operation status popup notification
For how to set the utility, refer to the following.
User's Manual of GOT used
For how to set GT Designer3, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals)
5 - 62 5.21 SoftGOT-GOT Link Function
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
5.21.3 Control or notification with GOT internal devices
GOT internal devices enable to check the exclusive authorization control or the communication status between GT SoftGOT1000 and the GOT. For details of the GOT internal devices, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals)
(1) Exclusive authorization control (GS447)
(2) SoftGOT-GOT link status control/notification (GS244)
(3) Authorization guarantee status notification signal (GS984)
Bit number Signal name Description
b0 Exclusive authorization control signal By turning on this signal, the GOT obtains the exclusive authorization.
Not available for GT SoftGOT1000
b1 Authorization guarantee time cancel
signal
By turning on this signal, the GOT cancels the setting of authorization
guarantee time.
b2 to b15 Use prohibited -
Bit number Signal name Description
b0 Communication status notification
signal Turns on while GT SoftGOT1000 communicates with the GOT.
b1 Obtaining authorization notification
signal Turns on when the GOT or GT SoftGOT1000 obtains the authorization.
b2 GT SoftGOT1000/GOT identification
signal
Notifies that SoftGOT1000 or the GOT is in use.
0: GOT
1: GT SoftGOT1000 (Changes to 0 if GT SoftGOT1000 does not
communicate with the GOT.)
b3 Obtaining exclusive authorization
notification signal
Turns on when the GOT obtains the exclusive authorization.
Always off for GT SoftGOT1000
b4 System screen displaying notification
signal
Turns on when the dedicated screen for the utility, the extended function, or
the option function is displayed.
Always off for GT SoftGOT1000
b5 to b15 Use prohibited -
Signal name Description
Authorization guarantee status notification signal When the authorization guarantee time is set in GT SoftGOT1000 or GOT,
the remaining authorization guarantee time (seconds) is stored.
5.21 SoftGOT-GOT Link Function 5 - 63
HINT
How to utilize GOT internal devices
Objects or others displayed only on the GOT can be set by using the GT SoftGOT1000/GOT identification signal (GS244.b2). Example) Bit switch displayed only on the GOT
1. Register a shape to a part to display the shape when the bit switch turns on or off. For how to register the part, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals)
2. Create the following objects.
For how to set objects, refer to the following. GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals)
3. Arrange the bit switch on the created parts display.
Object Setting item
Bit switch
Set [Device] on the [Device] tab.
Select [None] in [Shape] on the [Style] tab.
Set [OFF] in [Trigger Type], or set GS244.b2 in [Trigger Device] on the [Trigger] tab.
Parts display (Bit parts)
Set the same device as that of the bit switch in [Parts Switching Device] on the [Device/Style] tab.
Set the part registered in the step 1. to the part for [ON] or [OFF] on the [Device/Style] tab.
Set [OFF] in [Trigger Type], or set GS244.b2 in [Trigger Device] on the [Trigger] tab.
5 - 64 5.21 SoftGOT-GOT Link Function
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
5.21.4 Setting method
This section explains the system configuration and setting method to use the SoftGOT-GOT link function. The SoftGOT-GOT link function in the following system configuration is used as an example to explain the procedures.
Operation flow before using the SoftGOT-GOT link function
Connect the GOT with controllers GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Electric
Products) for GT Works3
Connect the GOT with the personal computer on which GT
SoftGOT1000 is installed. GOTs, controllers, and others available with the SoftGOT-GOT
link function
Create project data on GT Designer3. GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals)
Write the project data and install the extended function OS to the GOT. GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals)
Configure the communication setting and environmental setting on GT
SoftGOT1000. Operation and setting on GT SoftGOT1000
Monitoring by GT SoftGOT1000 starts. Operation and setting on GT SoftGOT1000
Ethernet Ethernet (Network No.1)
GT1675M-V
GT SoftGOT1000
Controller
IP address PC No.
Port No.
: 192.168. 3.1 : 1 : 5001
IP address PC No.
Ethernet Download Port GOT Communication Port No.
: 192.168. 3.18 : 3 : 5014 : 5001
Ethernet connection
PC No. : 2
5.21 SoftGOT-GOT Link Function 5 - 65
GOTs, controllers, and others available with the SoftGOT-GOT link function
(1) GOTs available with the SoftGOT-GOT link function
(2) Controllers and connection types monitorable by GT SoftGOT1000 when using the SoftGOT-GOT link function
(3) Units connecting a personal computer (GT SoftGOT1000) with the GOT
(4) Cables connecting a personal computer (GT SoftGOT1000) with the GOT Use the cables applicable to an interface of the GOT to be used.
Item Type
GOT GT16 GT15
Controller monitored Bus connection CPU direct
connection
Computer link
connection
Ethernet
connection
RCPU
QCPU (Q mode)
Other than redundant system
Redundant system
(Main base unit)
Redundant system
(Extension base unit)
QCPU (A mode)
QSCPU
LCPU
QnACPU
ACPU Other than A1FXCPU
A1FXCPU
FXCPU
Motion controller CPU (Q series)
Motion controller CPU (A series)
MELSECNET/H remote I/O station
CC-Link IE Field Network head module
OMRON PLC
TOSHIBA PLC
YASKAWA PLC
YOKOGAWA PLC
SIEMENS PLC
KEYENCE PLC
CNC CNC C70
MELDAS C6/C64
Robot controlle CRnQ-700/CR750-Q/CR751-Q
CRnD-700/CR750-D/CR751-D
Item Type
GT16 - (Built-in interface)
GT15 GT15-J71E71-100
5 - 66 5.21 SoftGOT-GOT Link Function
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
(5) Connection conditions for GT SoftGOT1000 and the GOT
Operation and setting on GT Designer3
(1) Communication setting between the GOT and the controller Configure the communication setting between the GOT and the controller.
For details of the communication setting, refer to the following.
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Electric Products) for GT Works3
(2) Ethernet download setting Configure the Ethernet download setting between the GOT and GT SoftGOT1000. Set the Ethernet download port.
The following is the example of setting with the [PC (Data Transfer)] dialog box.
1. Select [Common] [Peripheral Setting] [PC (Data Transfer)] from the menu to display the [PC (Data Transfer)] dialog box.
2. Set an interface for [Destination I/F ] in [Ethernet Download].
3. Click the [Detail] button to display the [Detail Setting] dialog box.
Connection type Connection conditions
Distance between controller and PC Number of connectable PCs
GOT Ethernet connection 100m (max. segment length) 1
Item Description
GOT NET No. 1
GOT PC No. 3
GOT IP Address 192.168.3.18
GOT Communication Port No. 5001
Item Description
Ethernet download port Set on GT Designer3 (Default: 5014)
5.21 SoftGOT-GOT Link Function 5 - 67
4. Set the following items, and click the [OK] button. For setting items of the [Detail Setting] dialog box, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals) 8. COMMUNICATION WITH GOT
5. Click the [OK] button in the [PC (Data Transfer)] dialog box.
POINT
(1) Setting the firewall When the port for the Ethernet communication is blocked by the firewall, a communication error occurs. Disable the firewall or configure the setting to open the port.
(2) Setting when the GOT and the controller are connected by a connection type other than the Ethernet connection To use the SoftGOT-GOT link function, configure the setting for [GOT IP Address] and [Ethernet Download Port No.] by either of the following method. Set [Destination I/F] in [Ethernet Download] in the [PC (Data Transfer)] dialog box. Set a driver for Ethernet in [Driver] in the [Controller Setting] dialog box. Select [Communication Setting] of [Gateway] in the [Controller Setting] dialog box, and then select [Use the
function of Gateway].
(3) Unusable port Nos. (Port No. 49154, 49158) The following GOT port numbers are used as command communication ports. Do not use them for the communication or others between the GOT and the controller. TCP communication: Port No. 49154 UDP communication: Port No. 49158
(3) Writing project data and install the extended function OS to the GOT Write the created project data and install the extended function OS (SoftGOT-GOT Link Function) to the GOT. For writing project data and OS to the GOT, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals) 8. COMMUNICATION WITH GOT
Item Description
GOT IP Address 192.168.3.18
Ethernet Download Port No. 5014
5 - 68 5.21 SoftGOT-GOT Link Function
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
Operation and setting on GT SoftGOT1000
(1) Environmental setting For setting items of the [Environment Setup] dialog box, refer to the following.
3.5.1 Environment setup dialog box
1. Perform either of the following operations to display the [Environment Setup] dialog box.
Clicking (Environment Setup) Selecting [Set] [Environment Setup] from the menu Right-clicking the mouse to select [Environment Setup] from the menu
2. Select [640 480] for [Resolution] in the [Action Setup] tab. (Select [Resolution] according to the resolution of the GOT to be used.)
HINT When the resolutions of GT SoftGOT1000 and the GOT differ The resolution of GT SoftGOT1000 is automatically changed according to the resolution of the GOT when GT SoftGOT1000 starts monitoring.
5.21 SoftGOT-GOT Link Function 5 - 69
(2) Communication setting For setting items of the [Communication Setup] dialog box, refer to the following.
3.6.1 Communication setup dialog box
1. Perform either of the following operations to display the [Communication Setup] dialog box.
Clicking (Communication Setup) Select [Online] [Communication Setup] from the menu. Right-click the mouse to select [Communication Setup] from the menu.
2. Set the following items.
POINT
Connection types of the GOT/controllers and communication settings of GT SoftGOT1000 Configure the communication setting for GT SoftGOT1000 as follows according to the connection type of the GOT
and controllers.
3. Click the [GOT Link] button to display the [GOT Link Setup] dialog box.
Item Description
Connection [Ethernet]-[MELSEC]
Ethernet
NET No. 1
PC No. 1
Port No. 5001
Wait Time Transmission wait time
Connection type of the GOT and controller Communication setting of GT SoftGOT1000
Bus connection, Direct CPU connection, Computer
link connection [Ethernet]-[GOT]
Ethernet connection [Ethernet]-[MELSEC]
5 - 70 5.21 SoftGOT-GOT Link Function
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
4. Select [Use GOT Link], and then set the following items.
5. Click the [Communication Test] button to execute the communication test between GT SoftGOT1000 and the GOT.
(3) Starting the monitor
1. GT SoftGOT1000 starts monitoring when either of the following operations is executed.
Click (Monitor Start) Select [Online] [Monitor Start] from the menu. Right-click the mouse and select [Monitor Start] from the menu.
2. The project data of GT SoftGOT1000 and the GOT are synchronized when monitoring starts. When a password is set for a GOT project data, enter the password.
HINT
(1) When using the SoftGOT-GOT link function, the project data saved in a personal computer cannot be opened on GT SoftGOT1000. To open project data on GT SoftGOT1000, clear [Use GOT Link] in the [GOT Link Setup] dialog box.
(2) To automatically enter a password when project data are synchronized, enter a password in the [GOT Link Setup] dialog box beforehand.
3.6.1 Communication setup dialog box
Item Description
Destination GOT IP Address 192.168.3.18
Destination GOT Port No. 5014
Communication method TCP
5.21 SoftGOT-GOT Link Function 5 - 71
5.21.5 Management of GT SoftGOT1000 modules with the SoftGOT-GOT link function (GT SoftGOT1000 Commander)
GT SoftGOT1000 Commander is the tool to manage the multiple GT SoftGOT1000 modules with the SoftGOT-GOT link function. The monitor status check of GT SoftGOT1000 modules and the operation to start or stop monitoring are available by GT SoftGOT1000 Commander.
Operating environment The operating environment is the same as that of GT SoftGOT1000. For details of the operating environment of GT SoftGOT1000, refer to the following.
2.1 Operating Environment
How to install or uninstall the tool SoftGOT1000 Commander is installed or uninstalled automatically when GT SoftGOT1000 is installed or uninstalled. However, if comments are set by GT SoftGOT1000 Commander, the comments are not deleted even if GT SoftGOT1000 Commander is unstalled.
How to start the tool
Select [Start]*1 [MELSOFT]*2 [GT Works3] [GT SoftGOT1000 Commander] from the menu of Windows to start GT SoftGOT1000 Commander.
*1 Select [All Programs] on the [Start] screen, or select [Start] [All Programs].
*2 [MELSOFT Application] appears for a version of GT Works3 earlier than 1.136S.
Ethernet
GOT (station No.2) Controller Controller
GOT (station No.1)
GT SoftGOT1000 Commander
GT SoftGOT1000 (module No.2) : Communicating with the GOT (station No.2)
Management Management
Monitoring the controller connected to the GOT (station No.2) by GT SoftGOT1000 (module No.2)
Monitoring the controller connected to the GOT (station No.1) by GT SoftGOT1000 (module No.1)
GT SoftGOT1000 (module No.1) : Communicating with the GOT (station No.1)
5 - 72 5.21 SoftGOT-GOT Link Function
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
Operating procedure GT SoftGOT1000 Commander manages target GT SoftGOT1000 modules with the SoftGOT-GOT link function. GT SoftGOT1000 Commander can start the target GT SoftGOT1000 modules and make the target GT SoftGOT1000 modules start or stop monitoring controllers. The status of the target GT SoftGOT1000 modules is displayed in the monitor status list on the [Monitor Status] tab.
Setting item (1) Monitor Status tab
Menu item
(1) Menu
(2) Help
Item Description
GT SoftGOT1000 Activation Default Setting
[Environment Setup]
[Environment Setup] of GT SoftGOT1000 can be registered as default.
The default value registered can be reflected as set value when starting
GT SoftGOT1000 from GT SoftGOT1000 Commander.
[Communication Setup]
[Communication Setup] of GT SoftGOT1000 can be registered as default.
The default value registered can be reflected as set value when starting
GT SoftGOT1000 from GT SoftGOT1000 Commander.
[Reset]
Restores the setting of [Environment Setup] and [Communication Setup]
to the initial value.
Exit Exits GT SoftGOT1000 Commander.
Item Description
About GT SoftGOT1000 Commander The version information of GT SoftGOT1000 Commander can be checked.
5.21 SoftGOT-GOT Link Function 5 - 73
Setting item
Item Description
Always display GT SoftGOT1000
Commander in front Select this item to display the GT SoftGOT1000 Commander window on the top front.
Checks the version information of GT SoftGOT1000 Commander.
Monitor Status Checks the monitor status of GT SoftGOT1000 modules with the SoftGOT-GOT link function.
(1) Monitor Status tab
GOT Search Searches GOTs connected to the Network.
(2) GOT Search tab
Exits GT SoftGOT1000 Commander.
5 - 74 5.21 SoftGOT-GOT Link Function
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
(1) Monitor Status tab
(Continued to next page)
Item Description
Monitor status list
Displays GT SoftGOT1000 modules with the SoftGOT-GOT link function.
When any of rows are clicked, the clicked row is highlighted and selected.
The display contents of the monitor status list displayed in icon display by the display switching button differs
from the same in detail display.
Point (1) Display switching button
No. Displays the GT SoftGOT1000 module number.
IP Address Displays the IP address of the GOT which communicates with the GT
SoftGOT1000 module.
N/W No.
Displays the network number of the GOT which communicates with the GT
SoftGOT1000 module.
When the connection type between the GOT and the controller is the bus
connection or the direct CPU connection, [-] is displayed.
PC No.
Displays the GOT station number of the GOT which communicates with GT
SoftGOT1000 module.
When the connection type between the GOT and the controller is the bus
connection or the direct CPU connection, [-] is displayed.
Project Title Displays the project title of the project data read by the GOT.
Status
Displays the GT SoftGOT1000 module status.
Online: During monitoring
Offline: Stopped monitoring
Uploading: During reading project data from the GOT
Not Started: The target GT SoftGOT1000 module is not activated.
Comment Displays the comment entered in the [No. n Property] dialog box.
Display switching button
Clicking the button displays the monitor status list in detail.
Clicking the button displays the monitor status list with icons.
Point (1) Display switching button
Monitor status list
Display switching button
5.21 SoftGOT-GOT Link Function 5 - 75
Item Description
Select any rows in the monitor status list, and then click the [Front Display] button to display the GT
SoftGOT1000 module window of the selected row on the top front.
The window can also be displayed on the top front when [No.], [IP Address], [N/W No.], [PC No.], or [Project
Title] in each row of the monitor status list is double-clicked.
However, when the back screen mode is enabled by the GT SoftGOT1000 module, the GT SoftGOT1000
module window is not displayed on the top front even if the [Front Display] button is clicked.
When the GT SoftGOT1000 module window on the top front and the GT SoftGOT1000 Commander window
are overlapped, the GT SoftGOT1000 Commander window is displayed on the top front.
Select a row (a GT SoftGOT1000 module) in the monitor status list and click the [Status Switching] button to
switch the status of the selected GT SoftGOT1000 module ([Online] or [Offline], [Not Started] to [Online]/
[Offline]).
The monitor statuses can also be switched when [Status] in each row of the monitor status list is double-
clicked.
However, the monitor statuses cannot be switched while [Uploading] is displayed on [Status].
When starting GT SoftGOT1000 newly, clicking the [Start SoftGOT1000] button displays the [Start
SoftGOT1000] dialog box.
(a) Start SoftGOT1000
Selecting GT SoftGOT1000 in the monitor status list and clicking the [Stop] button exits the selected GT
SoftGOT1000.
Select any rows in the monitor status list, and then click the [Comment Edit] button to display the [No. n
Property] dialog box.
The [No. n Property] dialog box can also be displayed when [Comment] in each row of the monitor status list
is double-clicked.
(b) n module number property
Select an inactivated GT SoftGOT1000 module in the monitor status list and click the [Erase Machine Info]
button to delete the information of the selected GT SoftGOT1000 module.
The information of the GT SoftGOT1000 module being activated cannot be deleted.
5 - 76 5.21 SoftGOT-GOT Link Function
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
POINT
(1) Display switching button The display switching button switches the monitor status list between detail display and icon display. When in icon display, [No.] and [IP Address] are displayed in the monitor status list.
(2) Context menu Select a row in the detail display or an icon in the icon display of the monitor status list and right-click to display the context menu. In the context menu, [Front Display], [Status Switching], [Stop] and [Comment Edit] can be selected.
Detail display button
Icon display button
5.21 SoftGOT-GOT Link Function 5 - 77
(a) Start SoftGOT1000
(b) n module number property
Item Description
No. Specify the machine No. of GT SoftGOT1000 to be started.
Environmental Setup
Configure the environmental settings of GT SoftGOT1000 to be started.
The settings are identical to [Environment Setup] in GT SoftGOT1000.
3.5.1 Environment setup dialog box
Communication Setup
Configure the communication settings of GT SoftGOT1000 to be started.
The settings are identical to [Communication Setup] in GT SoftGOT1000.
3.6.1 Communication setup dialog box
Default Setting Reflection
Reflect default values of Environment Setup/Communication Setup of GT SoftGOT1000 to be started in a
batch.
If the Environment Setup/Communication Setup already exists in the specified machine, the default value
setting is overwritten.
Activate GT SoftGOT1000
and start monitoring Select this item to start the monitoring after starting GT SoftGOT1000.
Activate in the monitor-only
mode Select this item to start GT SoftGOT1000 in the monitor-only mode.
Item Description
Comment
Up to 255 characters can be entered.
One line feed is counted as two characters.
The comments are saved with the IP address of the GOT linked.
Therefore, even if the GT SoftGOT1000 module number to be communicated to the GOT is changed to a
new module number, the displayed comment is the same as that of the old module number.
5 - 78 5.21 SoftGOT-GOT Link Function
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
(2) GOT Search tab
*1 When no [No.] checkbox is selected, selecting [Display the checked GOT only] will display nothing in the GOT Search list.
Item Description
Display the checked GOT
only
The GOT Search list displays only the GOTs corresponding to the [No.] checkboxes selected.*1
Once this item is selected, the displayed GOTs will remain the same even when GT SoftGOT1000
Commander is started again or the [Auto Acquisition] button is clicked.
GOT Search list
Displays found GOTs.
Click the row to select and highlight it.
No. Displays the number of found GOTs.
GOT type Displays the type of found GOTs.
IP address Displays the IP address of found GOTs.
Port No. Displays the port No. used for uploading the project data of found GOTs.
Clicking the [Auto Acquisition] button displays the [GOT Type], [IP Address] and [Port No.] of the searched
GOT.
For linking GT SoftGOT1000 newly started to the found GOT, select the row of the found GOT in the GOT
Search list and click the [Start SoftGOT1000] button to display the [Start SoftGOT1000] dialog box.
The [Start SoftGOT1000] dialog box can be also displayed by double-clicking the GOT row selected in the
GOT Search list.
The settings are identical to the [Start SoftGOT1000] dialog box in the monitor status list tab.
(1) Monitor Status tab (a) Start SoftGOT1000
GOT Search list
5.21 SoftGOT-GOT Link Function 5 - 79
POINT
(1) Search target GOT Auto acquisition searches only GT16 GOTs.
(2) IP Address duplication If a duplicated [IP Address] is found, GTSoftGOT1000 can not be started from the GOT Search list. Also, the duplication of [IP Address] may not be found, even if existing. Therefore, make sure to check the whole system before searching again.
(3) Resolution, IP Address, and Destination GOT Port No. settings Click [Communication Setup], [Environment Setup], or [OK] in the [Start SoftGOT1000] dialog box to display the following dialog box.
(a) Select [Yes]. [Resolution] in the environmental Setting is changed to [GOT Type] of the row selected in the GOT
Search list. [Destination GOT IP Address] and [Destination GOT Port No.] in the GOT Link Setup dialog box is
changed to [IP Address] and [Port No.] of the row selected in the GOT Search list.
(b) Select [No]. GT SoftGOT1000 is started with the values set in the [Communication Setup] or [Environment Setup] dialog box.
5 - 80 5.21 SoftGOT-GOT Link Function
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
5.21.6 Precautions
Settings and OS required for the GOT
(1) Ethernet setting Set [GOT IP Address] and [Ethernet Download Port No.] for project data.
GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals) 7. COMMUNICATION WITH GOT
(2) Extended function OS Install the extended function OS (SoftGOT-GOT Link Function) on the GOT.
5.21.4 Ethernet download setting (2) Ethernet download setting
Setting devices which affect the control of GOT/GT SoftGOT1000 It is recommended to set a GOT internal device for a control device of the function which affects the control of the GOT/GT SoftGOT1000 (including the system signal, screen switching device, or security level device). When a controller device is set for the device which affects the control of the GOT/GT SoftGOT1000, due to an operation of either GT SoftGOT1000 or the GOT, an unexpected behavior may be caused to the other. The following shows the setting example of how to enable the function which affects the control of the GOT/GT SoftGOT1000 only when the authorization is obtained by using a GOT internal device and the script function.
Example: When the authorization is obtained, the screens of GT SoftGOT1000 and the GOT are switched according
to the value (screen number) of a controller device (D1000)
For the screen switching device, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals)
For the script function, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Functions)
Function not available with the SoftGOT-GOT link function When using the SoftGOT-GOT link function, the PX developer function call is not available.
Operation without the authorization Clicking and touching an input object are not recognized as input operations if the authorization is not obtained. The dialog box for obtaining the authorization appears. (When the GOT has the exclusive authorization, GT SoftGOT1000 cannot obtain the authorization.)
Timing of which the project data synchronization is not executed During the following operations, project data are not synchronized. The project data synchronization is executed when the operation ends.
While displaying the print preview While displaying the dialog box which disables operation of other screens if the dialog box is displayed
Using the SoftGOT-GOT link function in the system that requires the quick communication response When the SoftGOT-GOT link function is used in the system that requires the quick communication response, the Ethernet connection is recommended between the GOT and the monitor PLC. If the GOT monitors the PLC connected by the direct CPU connection by using the SoftGOT-GOT link function, the communication response speed of GT SoftGOT1000 will decrease.
Function Setting
Screen switching device Set a GOT internal device (GD1000).
Script function
Set the following project script in which the trigger type is set to [Ordinary].
if([b:GS244.b1] == ON){
[w:GD1000] = [w:D1000];
}
5.21 SoftGOT-GOT Link Function 5 - 81
5.22 Monitor-only Mode
The monitor operation of GT SoftGOT1000 by a mouse and keyboard is disabled in this mode. It is useful when using GT SoftGOT1000 only for monitoring.
5.22.1 Setting method
After starting GT SoftGOT1000
1. Enable the monitor-only mode by either of the following operations. Select [Set] [Monitor-only Mode] from the menu. Right-click the mouse, and select [Set] [Monitor-only Mode] from the menu.
2. Start monitoring. 3.8 Starting Monitoring
Before starting GT SoftGOT1000
1. Select [Start]*1 [MELSOFT]*2 [GT Works3] from the menu of Windows, right-click [GT SoftGOT1000] , and select [Properties].
*1 Select [All Programs] on the [Start] screen, or select [Start] [All Programs].
*2 [MELSOFT Application] appears for a version of GT Works3 earlier than 1.136S.
2. The [GT SoftGOT1000 Properties] dialog box appears. Select the [Shortcut] tab, and then add [/MNTONLY] to the end of the character strings in [Target]. (A one-byte space is required before /.)
3. After adding [/MNTONLY], click the [OK] button.
4. At the next GT SoftGOT1000 startup, GT SoftGOT1000 starts with the monitor-only mode enabled.
5 - 82 5.22 Monitor-only Mode
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
POINT
Precautions for the monitor-only mode
(1) Once monitoring starts, the monitor-only mode cannot be switched between enabled and disabled.
(2) When the monitor-only mode is enabled, the keyboard input function cannot be set.
(3) When the monitor-only mode is enabled, and when the mouse cursor is moved on the monitor screen, the mouse cursor is disabled. (The mouse cursor appearance is the same as the appearance set on the personal computer.) Even if the mouse cursor is disabled, the menu can be displayed by clicking the right mouse button.
HINT
Confirmation dialog box displayed at monitor startup in the monitor-only mode
The confirmation dialog box appears when monitoring starts with the monitor-only mode enabled. Whether to display the confirmation dialog box or not can be set by selecting the following item in the [Environment Setup] dialog box.
[Display dialog at the start of monitoring in the monitor-only mode.] in the [Auxiliary Setup] tab
3.5.1 Auxiliary Setup tab
5.22 Monitor-only Mode 5 - 83
5 - 84 5.22 Monitor-only Mode
APPENDICES
Appendix1 Internal Device Interface Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . App - 1
Appendix2 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . App - 12
Appendix3 Applicable Project Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . App - 20
Appendix4 Unsupported Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . App - 20
Appendix5 Open Source Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . App - 21
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
Appendix1 Internal Device Interface Function
The internal device interface function is a function that can be used with Microsoft Visual C++, Microsoft Visual C#,
Microsoft Visual Basic, and Embarcadero C++ Builder. By using the internal device interface function, the GOT internal device can be read/written from a user-created application.
Appendix.1.1 Development environment
The following shows development environment for an application using the internal device interface function.
Appendix.1.2 Accessible devices
For the GOT internal devices that can be read/written from a user-created application, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Functions)
POINT
Access to internal devices
Internal devices can be accessed only while GT SoftGOT1000 is running. Internal devices hold their values while GT SoftGOT1000 is running.
Internal devices can be accessed irrespective of the connection type of GT SoftGOT1000.
Development environment
Language Software
C++
Microsoft Visual C++ 6.0, Microsoft Visual C++ .NET(2002),
Microsoft Visual C++ .NET 2003, Microsoft Visual C++ 2005,
Microsoft Visual C++ 2008, Embarcadero C++ Builder XE
C# Microsoft Visual C# .NET(2002), Microsoft Visual C# .NET 2003,
Microsoft Visual C# .NET 2005, Microsoft Visual C# .NET 2008
BASIC
Microsoft Visual Basic 6.0, Microsoft Visual Basic .NET(2002),
Microsoft Visual Basic .NET 2003, Microsoft Visual Basic .NET 2005,
Microsoft Visual Basic .NET 2008
App - 1
Appendix.1.3 Internal device interface function
The internal device interface function is used to operate internal devices from a created program.
The following describes the internal device interface function.
The following files are required when using the internal device interface function.
The above files are stored in the Disk4 folder in the DVD-ROM of GT Works3. When using an application that uses the internal device interface function, store GDevlib_GT16.dll in the same folder as the application or in a folder with a path specified. The folder storing the above files is shown below.
Internal device interface function Description Reference
unsigned long GDev_OpenMapping() Opens and maps the shared memory of the GOT internal device. Appendix.1.4
long GDev_Read() Reads from the GOT internal device. Appendix.1.5
long GDev_Write() Writes to the GOT internal device. Appendix.1.6
void GDev_CloseUnMapping() Unmaps and closes the shared memory of the GOT internal device. Appendix.1.7
File name Description
GDevlib_GT16.dll DLL for the internal device interface
GDevlib_GT16.lib LIB for the internal device interface
GDevlib_GT16.h Header file for the internal device interface
DVD-ROM drive
GDevlib
Module
GDevlib_GT16.dll
GDevlib_GT16.lib
DLL for internal device interface
LIB for internal device interface
GDevlib_GT16.h Header file for internal device interface
App - 2
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
POINT
Before using the internal device interface function
Use the GDevlib_GT16.dll, GDevlib_GT16.lib, or GDevlib_GT16.h that is stored in the same DVD-ROM as GT SoftGOT1000 to be used. If using any file that is copied from another DVD-ROM, an error such as application error may occur.
HINT
Processing flow when the internal device interface function is used
The following shows the processing flow when the internal device interface function is used in a program.
Open and map the shared memory of internal device
GDev_OpenMapping function
Read/write to internal device
GDev_Read function
GDev_Write function
Unmap and close the shared memory of internal device
GDev_CloseUnMapping function
App - 3
Appendix.1.4 GDev_OpenMapping (Opening and mapping the internal device shared memory)
The following shows details of the GDev_OpenMapping function.
(1) Function Opens and maps the shared memory of the GOT internal device.
(2) Format
(a) For Visual C++and C++ Builder
ulMapPointer = GDev_OpenMapping(*lphMapFile, sGotNo)
(b) For Visual C#
ulMapPointer = GDev_OpenMapping(*lphMapFile, sGotNo)
(c) For Visual Basic ulMapPointer = GDev_OpenMapping(hMapFile, sGotNo)
(3) Explanation The shared memory handle for the internal device of GT SoftGOT1000 that is specified by sGotNo is obtained, and map processing is performed with the handle. The obtained shared memory handle is stored to lphMapFile or hMapFile, and the obtained shared memory address is stored to ulMapPointer.
(4) Return value Normal termination: A number other than "0" (shared memory address) is returned. Abnormal termination: "0" is returned.
(5) Precautions for using the GDev_OpenMapping function After the GDev_OpenMapping function is called and required processings are performed, the GDev_CloseUnMapping function must always be called. If it is not called, a memory leak may result and an error such as application error may occur.
Variable name Variable type Description I/O
ulMapPointer unsigned long Return value (shared memory address) Output
*lphMapFile HANDLE Shared memory handle Output
sGotNo short Module No. of GT SoftGOT1000 (1 to 32767) Input
Variable name Variable type Description I/O
ulMapPointer uint32 Return value (shared memory address) Output
*lphMapFile intPtr Shared memory handle Output
sGotNo int16 Module No. of GT SoftGOT1000 (1 to 32767) Input
Variable name Variable type Description I/O
ulMapPointer unsigned long Return value (shared memory address) Output
hMapFile HANDLE Shared memory handle Output
sGotNo short Module No. of GT SoftGOT1000 (1 to 32767) Input
App - 4
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
Appendix.1.5 GDev_Read (Reading from the internal device)
The following shows details of the GDev_Read function.
(1) Function Reads from the GOT internal device.
(2) Format
(a) For Visual C++and C++ Builder
lReturn = GDev_Read(ulMapPointer, sDevNameID, lDevNum, *lpsDataTable, lDataSize)
(b) For Visual C#
lReturn = GDev_Read(ulMapPointer, sDevNameID, lDevNum, *lpsDataTable, lDataSize)
(c) For Visual Basic lReturn = GDev_Read(ulMapPointer, sDevNameID, lDevNum, sDataTable(0), lDataSize)
(3) Explanation The device values in the area starting from the device specified by sDevNameID and lDevNum are batch read for the number specified by IDataSize to the shared memory address specified by ulMapPointer. The read device values are stored to lpsDataTable or sDataTable. Specify the shared memory address that has been obtained by the GDev_OpenMapping function.
(4) Return value Normal termination: "0" is returned. Abnormal termination: A number other than "0" is returned.
Variable name Variable type Description I/O
lReturn long Return value Output
ulMapPointer unsigned long Shared memory address Input
sDevNameID short Device name ID (GB:0/GD:1/GS:2) Input
lDevNum long Device number Input
*lpsDataTable short Device value read Output
lDataSize long Number of data points to be read Input
Variable name Variable type Description I/O
lReturn int32 Return value Output
ulMapPointer uint32 Shared memory address Input
sDevNameID int16 Device name ID (GB:0/GD:1/GS:2) Input
lDevNum int32 Device number Input
*lpsDataTable int16 Device value read Output
lDataSize int32 Number of data points to be read Input
Variable name Variable type Description I/O
lReturn long Return value Output
ulMapPointer unsigned long Shared memory address Input
sDevNameID short Device name ID (GB:0/GD:1/GS:2) Input
lDevNum long Device number Input
sDataTable(n) short Device value read Output
lDataSize long Number of data points to be read Input
App - 5
(5) Precautions for using the GDev_Read function The maximum number of data points to be read, that is set for IDataSize, must be specified in the following range. For bit device (GB) specification
Device number + (Number of data points to be read 16)-1 Terminal device number For word device (GD/GS) specification
Device number + Number of data points to be read-1 Terminal device number In the case of bit device (GB) specification, specify a multiple of 16 for the device number. Secure the area for lpsDataTable with the same size as lDataSize or more. If the area is insufficient, an error such as application error may occur.
(6) Device specifying method For bit device (GB) specification
Example) Reading 1-point data from GB64 (sDevNameID=0, lDevNum=64, lDataSize=1)
Example) Reading 3-point data from GB80 (sDevNameID=0, lDevNum=80, lDataSize=3)
For word device (GD/GS) specification
Example) Reading 3-point data from GD5 (sDevNameID=1, lDevNum=5, lDataSize=3)
Example) Reading 1-point data from GS500 (sDevNameID=2, lDevNum=500, lDataSize=1)
Variable name Storage device
lpsDataTable[0] GB64 to GB79
Variable name Storage device
lpsDataTable[0] GB80 to GB95
lpsDataTable[1] GB96 to GB111
lpsDataTable[2] GB112 to GB127
Variable name Storage device
lpsDataTable[0] GD5
lpsDataTable[1] GD6
lpsDataTable[2] GD7
Variable name Storage device
lpsDataTable[0] GS500
App - 6
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
Appendix.1.6 GDev_Write (Writing to the internal device)
The following shows details of the GDev_Write function.
(1) Function Writes to the GOT internal device.
(2) Format
(a) For Visual C++and C++ Builder
lReturn = GDev_Write(ulMapPointer, sDevNameID, lDevNum, *lpsDataTable, lDataSize)
(b) For Visual C#
lReturn = GDev_Write(ulMapPointer, sDevNameID, lDevNum, *lpsDataTable, lDataSize)
(c) For Visual Basic lReturn = GDev_Read(ulMapPointer, sDevNameID, lDevNum, sDataTable(0), lDataSize)
(3) Explanation The device values are batch written to the devices specified by sDevNameID and lDevNum for the shared memory address specified by ulMapPointer for the number specified by lDataSize. The device values to be written are stored to lpsDataTable or sDataTable. Specify the shared memory address that has been obtained by the GDev_OpenMapping function.
(4) Return value Normal termination: "0" is returned. Abnormal termination: A number other than "0" is returned.
Variable name Variable type Description I/O
lReturn long Return value Output
ulMapPointer unsigned long Shared memory address Input
sDevNameID short Device name ID (GB:0/GD:1/GS:2) Input
lDevNum long Device number Input
*lpsDataTable short Device value to be written Input
lDataSize long Number of data points to be written Input
Variable name Variable type Description I/O
lReturn int32 Return value Output
ulMapPointer uint32 Shared memory address Input
sDevNameID int16 Device name ID (GB:0/GD:1/GS:2) Input
lDevNum int32 Device number Input
*lpsDataTable int16 Device value to be written Input
lDataSize int32 Number of data points to be written Input
Variable name Variable type Description I/O
lReturn long Return value Output
ulMapPointer unsigned long Shared memory address Input
sDevNameID short Device name ID (GB:0/GD:1/GS:2) Input
lDevNum long Device number Input
sDataTable(n) short Device value to be written Input
lDataSize long Number of data points to be written Input
App - 7
(5) Precautions for using the GDev_Write function The maximum number of data points to be written, that is set for lDataSize, must be specified in the following range. For bit device (GB) specification
Device number + (Number of data points to be written 16)-1 Terminal device number For word device (GD/GS) specification
Device number + Number of data points to be written-1 Terminal device number In the case of bit device (GB) specification, specify a multiple of 16 for the device number. Secure the area for lpsDataTable with the same size as lDataSize or more. If the area is insufficient, an error such as application error may occur.
(6) Device specifying method For bit device (GB) specification
Example) Writing 1-point data from GB64 (sDevNameID=0, lDevNum=64, lDataSize=1)
Example) Writing 3-point data from GB80 (sDevNameID=0, lDevNum=80, lDataSize=3)
For word device (GD/GS) specification
Example) Writing 3-point data from GD5 (sDevNameID=1, lDevNum=5, lDataSize=3)
Example) Writing 1-point data from GS500 (sDevNameID=2, lDevNum=500, lDataSize=1)
Variable name Storage device
lpsDataTable[0] GB64 to GB79
Variable name Storage device
lpsDataTable[0] GB80 to GB95
lpsDataTable[1] GB96 to GB111
lpsDataTable[2] GB112 to GB127
Variable name Storage device
lpsDataTable[0] GD5
lpsDataTable[1] GD6
lpsDataTable[2] GD7
Variable name Storage device
lpsDataTable[0] GS500
App - 8
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
Appendix.1.7 GDev_CloseUnMapping (Unmapping and closing the internal device shared memory)
The following shows details of the GDev_CloseUnMapping function.
(1) Function Unmaps and closes the shared memory of the GOT internal device.
(2) Format
(a) For Visual C++and C++ Builder
GDev_CloseUnMapping(hMapFile, ulMapPointer)
(b) For Visual C#
GDev_CloseUnMapping(hMapFile, ulMapPointer)
(c) For Visual Basic
GDev_CloseUnMapping(hMapFile, ulMapPointer)
(3) Explanation The unmap processing is performed for the shared memory address specified by ulMapPointer and the shared memory handle specified by hMapFile is released. Specify the shared memory address and shared memory handle that have been obtained by the GDev_OpenMapping function.
(4) Return value None
(5) Precautions for using the GDev_CloseUnMapping function After the GDev_OpenMapping function is called and required processings are performed, the GDev_CloseUnMapping function must always be called. If it is not called, a memory leak may result and an error such as application error may occur.
Appendix.1.8 Precautions for the internal device interface function
The following shows precautions for using an application that uses the internal device interface function.
(1) When the GDev_OpenMapping function is called The GDev_OpenMapping function must be called after GT SoftGOT1000 is started.
(2) When the GDev_Read function or the GDev_Write function is called The GDev_Read function and the GDev_Write function must be called while GT SoftGOT1000 is running.
(3) When exiting GT SoftGOT1000 If GT SoftGOT1000 has been exited in a status the GDev_OpenMapping function is called, the GDev_CloseUnMapping function must be called immediately. If GT SoftGOT1000 is started again without the GDev_CloseUnMapping function called, after GT SoftGOT1000 is exited, GT SoftGOT1000 may not operate normally. If GT SoftGOT1000 does not operate normally, the GDev_CloseUnMapping function should be called before GT SoftGOT1000 is exited.
Variable name Variable type Description I/O
hMapFile HANDLE Shared memory handle Input
ulMapPointer unsigned long Shared memory address Input
Variable name Variable type Description I/O
hMapFile intPtr Shared memory handle Input
ulMapPointer uint32 Shared memory address Input
Variable name Variable type Description I/O
hMapFile HANDLE Shared memory handle Input
ulMapPointer unsigned long Shared memory address Input
App - 9
Appendix.1.9 Sample program
A sample program using the internal device interface function is stored in the Disk4 folder in the DVD-ROM of GT Works3. Use the sample program as a reference when creating an application using the internal device interface function. The following shows folders storing the sample programs.
DVD-ROM drive
GDevlib
Sample
VB
VC
Sample program storing folder for Visual Basic 6.0
Sample program storing folder for Visual C++ 6.0
VC# Sample program storing folder for Visual C# .NET(2002)
App - 10
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
This sample program is used to read/write data from/to the internal device of GT SoftGOT1000 that is running.
Example) Sample program for Visual C++
Setting item Description
GB Device GB device monitor area
Device No. Input a device range (GB0 to GB65535).
Write Value
Turns ON the device specified for Device No.
Turns OFF the device specified for Device No.
Read Value
Displays the reading result of the specified device.
The value is updated only while monitoring is performed.
Bit device status
"1" : ON
"0" : OFF
GD Device GD device monitor area
Device No. Input a device range (GD0 to GD65535).
Write Value
Write value input area
(GD)
Set a value to be written to the device specified for Device No.
Input format: Signed decimal number (-32768 to 32767)
Writes the value input for the write value input area to the specified device.
Read Value
Displays the reading result of the specified device. (Updates only while monitoring
is performed.)
Display format: Signed decimal number (-32768 to 32767)
The value of the internal device specified for Device No. is read.
GS Device GS device monitor area
Device No. A device range (GS0 to GS2047) can be input.
Write Value
Write value input area
(GS)
Set a value to be written to the device specified for Device No.
Input format: Signed decimal number (-32768 to 32767)
Writes the value input for the write value input area to the specified device.
Read Value
Displays the reading result of the specified device. (Updates only while monitoring
is performed.)
Display format: Signed decimal number (-32768 to 32767)
The value of the internal device specified for Device No. is read.
Starts monitoring. (Displayed only while monitoring is stopped.)
Stops monitoring.(Displayed only while monitoring is performed.)
Write value input area (GD)
Write value input area (GS)
Monitor execution status
ON
OFF
Write
Write
Start monitor
Stop monitor
App - 11
Appendix2 Troubleshooting
Appendix.2.1 Error message
The following table indicates the error messages occurred in [GT SoftGOT1000] themselves, the Descriptions and resolutions.
Error messages displayed when GT SoftGOT1000 is used.
(Continued to next page)
Error message Definition and cause Corrective action
Adobe Reader is not installed properly.
Install Adobe Reader included with the product.
Adobe Reader is not installed.
Adobe Reader is not installed correctly. After uninstalling Adobe Reader, reinstall it.
Easysocket is not installed. Perhaps GT SoftGOT1000 is not installed
correctly. After uninstalling GT SoftGOT1000, reinstall it.
GS###.b##: The .exe file is invalid (not .exe or
error in .exe image).
Access to the specified file (application) was
not made.
The specified file (application) is corrupted.
The specified file (application) is not an
executable file.
Check the settings of the application start-up
setting.
Check the access right of the specified file
(application).
Specify an operable file (application).
Specify an executable file (application).
GS###.b##: Failed to start the application.
The specified file (application) is corrupted.
Relevant applications are not installed
properly.
There is not sufficient space left in memory/
hard disk.
GT SoftGOT1000 was terminated illegally last
time.
Check the settings of the application start-up
setting.
Specify an operable file (application).
Install relevant applications again.
Terminate unnecessary applications.
Increase free space in the hard disk.
Restart GT SoftGOT1000.
Restart the personal computer.
GS###.b##: The operating system denied
access to the specified file.
Access to the specified file (application) was
not made.
The specified file (application) is corrupted.
Relevant applications are not installed
properly.
Check the settings of the application start-up
setting.
Check the access right of the specified file
(application).
Specify an operable file (application).
Install relevant applications again.
GS###.b##: The specified file was not found.
The specified file (application) does not exist.
Check the settings of the application start-up
setting.
Specify an existing file (application).
Install relevant applications again. GS###.b##: The specified path was not found.
GS###.b##: There was not enough memory to
complete the operation.
There is not sufficient space left in memory/
hard disk.
GT SoftGOT1000 was terminated illegally last
time.
Terminate unnecessary applications.
Increase free space in the hard disk.
Restart GT SoftGOT1000.
Restart the personal computer.
The GT SoftGOT1000 is not installed correctly. Can not find the Windows sregistry for GT
SoftGOT1000. After uninstalling GT SoftGOT1000, reinstall it.
Please do logoff/the termination of Windows after
ending 'GT SoftGOT1000'.
Close 'GT SoftGOT1000' before log out or shut
down the Windows.
Close 'GT SoftGOT1000' before log out or shut
down the Windows.
Advanced APP setup file was not found. The Advanced APP setup file does not exist.
Create the Advanced APP setup file
[
sv].
There is no application associated with the
extension of Advanced APP setup file (.csv).
The application associated with the extension
(.csv) of the Advanced APP setup file does not
exist.
The application associated with the file
extension is not installed correctly.
Set the application associated with the extension
(.csv) of the Advanced APP setup file.
Install the application associated with the file
extension again.
App - 12
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
(Continued to next page)
Error message Definition and cause Corrective action
Failed to start the application.
Access to the Advanced APP setup file is
disabled.
The Advanced APP setup file is corrupted.
The application associated with the file
extension is not installed correctly.
Not enough free memory or hard disk space.
GT SoftGOT1000 was exited illegally last time.
Illegal process is running.
Check the access right of the Advanced APP
setup file.
Create the Advanced APP setup file again.
Install the application associated with the file
extension again.
Exit unnecessary applications.
Increase the free space of the hard disk.
Restart GT SoftGOT1000.
After restarting the personal computer, restart
GT SoftGOT1000.
The check result cannot be displayed.
Access to the Advanced APP check file is
disabled.
The Advanced APP setup check file is corrupted.
The application associated with the file extension
is not installed correctly.
Check the access right of the Advanced APP
setup check file.
Install the application associated with the file
extension again.
Access to the Advanced APP Setup file is
denied.
Access to the Advanced APP setup file is
disabled.
Check the access right of the Advanced APP
setup file.
Failed to open the Advanced APP Setup check
file.
Access to the Advanced APP setup check file is
disabled.
The Advanced APP setup check file is corrupted.
Check the access right of the Advanced APP
setup check file.
Failed to check Advanced APP Setup. The operating environment is not supported. Install GT SoftGOT1000 again.
History file was not found. The application start-up history file cannot be
started up. Check the application start-up history file.
Easysocket has an invalid version. GT SoftGOT1000 may be not installed correctly. After uninstalling GT SoftGOT1000, reinstall it.
The specified project data was created by using a
previous version of the GT Designer3.
Some functions may not operate properly.
Do you want to proceed?
The version of the GT Designer3 on which the
project data is created is later than the GT
SoftGOT1000.
Select a button on the displayed dialog box.
Yes: Execute reading and perform monitoring
with operable functions.
No: Install GT SoftGOT1000 of the same version
as GT Designer3 and execute reading again.
The major versions of the specified project data
and GT SoftGOT1000 Standard monitor OS do
not match.
Project data : Ver. ##.##
GT SoftGOT1000 Standard monitor OS
: Ver. ##.##
Specify the project data of the same version.
The following OS major versions are not
matched.
The major version of OS in GT Designer3 that
stores the created project data to be read.
The standard monitor OS in GT SoftGOT1000
Install GT SoftGOT1000 with the same version
as GT Designer3 that stores the created
project data, and read the data again.
Create the project data for GT Designer3 that
version is same as the version of GT
SoftGOT1000, and read the data again.
Failed to take a snap shot.
GT SoftGOT1000 was closed illegally last
time.
Illegal process is running.
Restart GT SoftGOT1000.
After restarting the personal computer, restart
GT SoftGOT1000.
Vertical project data is not supported. The project data for vertical display type has
been read. Read project data for horizontal display.
A Communication error occurred.
Retry : Executes communication again.
Cancel : Cancels all communication.
To retry communication, restart the GT
SoftGOT1000.
Cable was disconnected.
Cable was broken.
After checking for the left causes, select the
button in the displayed dialog box.
[Retry]
Restarts communication.
[Cancel]
After Cancel is selected, all communications will
not be made.
When performing monitoring, restart GT
SoftGOT1000.
Transmission speed (Baud rate) is incorrect.
The PLC CPU type is different from that of the
project setting.
Cannot set up the operating environment.
Insufficient disk space or memory may be the
cause.
Not enough free disk space.
GT SoftGOT1000 was exited illegally last time.
Illegal process is running.
Exit unnecessary applications.
Increase the free space of hard disk to 250MB
or more.
Restart GT SoftGOT1000.
After restarting the personal computer, restart
GT SoftGOT1000.
App - 13
(Continued to next page)
Error message Definition and cause Corrective action
Failed to set up an operating environment.
Check the followings and retry the operation.
Free disk space.
Access privileges to the environment file.
Validity of environment files (invalid files or
files not found).
Effect of antivirus software's real-time
surveillance.
Not enough free disk space. Increase the free space of hard disk to more than
250M bytes.
Can not access the necessary file for GT
SoftGOT1000s operation.
Check whether GT SoftGOT1000 has been
operated already.
GT SoftGOT1000 may be not installed correctly. After uninstalling GT SoftGOT1000, reinstall it.
Real-time protection in antivirus software gets in
the way of accessing the file.
Stop real-time protection in antivirus software, or
set the following multiple paths from exception
settings in anti-virus software and put aside real-
time protection in anti-virus software.
C:\Program Files\MELSOFT\SGT1000
Path name is too long. Save the GT Designer3 under too many directory
levels.
In Option setting, set the project of GT Designer3
again.
GOT type of the project is different from the one
specified in the GT SoftGOT1000.
[Project data setting]
GOT type : #####(###x###)
PLC type : #####
[GT SoftGOT1000 setting]
Resolution : ###x###
Connection : #####(#####)
The GOT type set in the project is different from
the GOT type specified in GT SoftGOT1000.
Make correction so that the GOT type of the
project created on GT Designer3 is the same as
the GOT type of GT SoftGOT1000.
GOT type (Resolution) of the project is different
from the one specified in the GT SoftGOT1000.
[Project data setting]
GOT type : #####(###x###)
PLC type : #####
[GT SoftGOT1000 setting]
Resolution : ###x###
Connection : #####(#####)
The GOT type (Resolution) set in the project is
different from the GOT type (Resolution)
specified in GT SoftGOT1000.
Make correction so that the GOT type
(Resolution) of the project created on GT
Designer3 is the same as the GOT type
(Resolution) of GT SoftGOT1000.
PLC type of the project is different from the one
specified in the GT SoftGOT1000.
[Project data setting]
GOT type : #####(###x###)
PLC type : #####
[GT SoftGOT1000 setting]
Resolution : ###x###
Connection : #####(#####)
The PLC type set in the project is different from
that in GT SoftGOT1000.
Make correction so that the PLC type of the
project created on GT Designer3 is the same as
the CPU type of GT SoftGOT1000.
Manual file cannot be found.
Please install manuals.
GT Manual 1000 is not installed.
GT Manual 1000 is not installed correctly. After uninstalling GT Manual, reinstall it.
Cannot stop monitoring.
Close the dialog on monitor screen and retry.
Since the message such as "This function cannot
be used now" was displayed on the screen, GT
SoftGOT1000 could not be exit correctly.
After selecting in the dialog box to erase the
on-screen message, exit from GT SoftGOT1000
again.
There was the other internal cause than the
above that did not allow to exit from the software. After selecting in the dialog box, wait for
some time and exit from GT SoftGOT1000 again.
Fail in the delete of resource data.
Please close resource data if it is opened.
Check the file access privilege.
Failed in erasing resource data after loading
screen data.
If there is resource data opened by another
software, close that file.
Check the file access privilege.
Initialization for reading failed.
Execute one of the following operations.
Close the dialog if it is displayed.
Switching to offline mode may have been
failed.
Wait for several seconds and retry the
operation.
Since the message such as "This function cannot
be used now" was displayed on the screen, this
funciton can not be loaded.
After selecting in the dialog box to erase the
on-screen message, re-load the function.
Waiting for completion of internal process. re-load the function after a few minutes.
OK
OK
OK
App - 14
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
Error message Definition and cause Corrective action
Failed to read a project data.
Check the following items and retry the
operation.
Data size and number of the data.
Free disk space.
Access privileges to the environment file.
Validity of project data (invalid file or file not
found).
Screen data size was too large. Decrease the screen data size to 57MB or less.
Not enough free disk space. Increase the free space of hard disk to more than
250M bytes.
Can not access the project data. Check the access privilege of the project data.
Not compatible with the project setting. Check whether setting is correct on GT
Designer3.
This data is not for GT SoftGOT1000 project.
The project data does not exist.
Use a correct project data or normal project data.
Check that the project data exists.
App - 15
Appendix.2.2 Troubleshooting for license key
The troubleshooting and error messages related to license key, the error definition and cause, and corrective actions are described below.
Troubleshooting for license key
(1) Troubleshooting for USB license key When attaching a USB license key to the personal computer and it is not recognized, check the following.
POINT
If the system driver is not installed or uninstalled properly even if the above corrective actions are taken, use the installer of the following system driver. (GT SoftGOT1000 installation folder)\SGT1000\SystemDriver\SPI_768.exe*
*When using a PC CPU module, use SPI_710.exe.
Problem Definition and cause Corrective action
The dialog for starting a wizard to search an
added hardware is displayed.
The license key was attached to the PC before
the installation of system driver.
Exit the GT SoftGOT1000 without any installation
and then remove the license key.
When attaching the GT15-SGTKEY-U after
installing the system driver, it is recognized as
license key.
The GT15-SGTKEY-U is not recognized as
license key by the OS when attached to the PC.
The GT15-SGTKEY-U was attached to the PC
before the installation of system driver, and an
illegal driver was installed.
Install the system driver after removing the GT15-
SGTKEY-U.
When attaching the GT15-SGTKEY-U after
installation, it is recognized as license key.
The GT SoftGOT1000 displays an error message
involving license key despite System Driver is
installed/license key is installed/the port is ready
for use.
System Driver has an error.
Remove the GT15-SGTKEY-U and uninstall
System Driver once (In Windows, select [Add or
Remove Programs] and delete [Sentinel
Protection Installer #.#.#].)
Install System Driver again.
Install the GT15-SGTKEY-U after installing
System Driver.
Then it is recognized as license key.
When the license key is attached, the dialog box
asking you to specify the storage location of the
system file is displayed.
The automatic detection of the system file failed.
Specify the system file in the following location.
C:\Program Files\Common Files\SafeNet
Sentinel\Sentinel System Driver\sntnlusb.sys
App - 16
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
(2) Troubleshooting Related to the License Key Check the following items if the license key is not recognized even if it has been installed on the DOS/V personal computer or the printer does not operate properly after being connected on the external side of the license key.
POINT
If the system driver is not installed or uninstalled properly even if the above corrective actions are taken, use the installer of the following system driver. (GT SoftGOT1000 installation folder)\SGT1000\SystemDriver\SPI_768.exe*
*When using a PC CPU module, use SPI_710.exe.
Problem Definition and cause Corrective action
The license key cannot be recognized
The license key is connected to the personal
computer's serial port. Connect the license key to the printer port
The license key is installed on the DOS/V
personal computer via the printer switch (the
devices are installed in the order from the DOS/V
personal computer, then the printer switch, and
then the license key).
Install the license key closer to the DOS/V
personal computer than the printer switch (i.e.,
install the devices in the order from the DOS/V
personal computer, then the license key, and
then the printer switch.)
It is possible that the power supply to the printer
port is shut off via setting of the DOS/V personal
computer.
Change the settings so that the printer port can
be used.
The system driver is not installed. Install the system driver.
The parallel port is unusable. Set the personal computer, Windows, etc. to
make the parallel port usable.
In the case of a Fujitsu-made FM/V Series
computer
Install the system driver and restart the
DOS/V personal computer.
Cannot print
If a printer cable that is 5 m or longer is used, the
printing may be disturbed by noise from the
surroundings.
Check the cable length.
(Check the overall cable length when a switch is
used.)
App - 17
Appendix.2.3 Troubleshooting related to mail transmission
(1) Troubleshooting
(2) Error code No dialogue boxes are displayed by GT SoftGOT1000 for errors related to mail transmission and dialup. Refer to the mail history data for error codes and error messages. For how to check the mail history data, refer to the following.
5.6.5 Mail history
The following table lists the error codes related to mail transmission and dialup, their definitions and causes, and the corrective actions to take:
POINT
Error notifications from the mail server
When an error is notified from the mail server, the error message will be displayed in the mail history data. The following shows an example. (Example) Error message displayed when an error is notified from the SMTP server
When an error as shown above occurs, consult the server administrator.
Appendix.2.4 Troubleshooting for print
Problem Definition and cause Corrective action
Mail is not sent.
The mail send setting of GT SoftGOT1000
has not been made. Make the mail send setting of GT SoftGOT1000.
Mail send setting has been made on GT
Designer3.
The mail send setting method is wrong. Reexamine the mail send setting of GT SoftGOT1000.
Error code Definition and cause Corrective action
600 to 750s Setting errors of personal computers and
peripheral devices (e.g., modem) Refer to the Help function in Windows.
Error message
SMTP Error Report : #####.
Problem Definition and cause Corrective action
GT SoftGOT1000 does not
output data to a printer even
when the hard copy is
executed from a monitor
screen with [Print to printer
(Hard Copy Function)]
enabled.
Printing is disabled due to a problem in the
printer.
Select [Project] [Print Setup] on GT SoftGOT1000 to
check the settings of the printer.
Print a test page from Windows to check the settings of the
printer.
Check if the printer is powered on and online.
Install the printer driver again.
The output target in the hard copy setting of
the project data is set to [File].
Open the project data with GT Designer3, and select [Printer]
for [Target] in the hard copy setting.
App - 18
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
Appendix.2.5 Troubleshooting for file save problems
Appendix.2.6 GOT error code list
For the system alarm detected with GOT, refer to the following manual.
GT16 User's Manual (Hardware)
Appendix.2.7 Error code list when using the internal device interface function
The following shows lists of error codes that occur when the internal device interface function is used.
GDev_OpenMapping function
GDev_Read function/GDev_Write function
Problem Definition and Cause Corrective action
No files are output when the
hard copy command is
executed from the monitor
screen of the GT
SoftGOT1000.
The file cannot be saved due to problems
with the output destination disk.
Confirm that the folder that is designated as a virtual drive
does exist.
Check the access right for the folder that is designated as a
virtual drive.
Confirm that there is enough free space in the folder that is
designated as a virtual drive.
The file cannot be saved, since file number
external control device value is set to a
value outside of the range 1 to 9999.
Confirm that the file number external control device value is
set to a value in the range 1 to 9999.
Error code Definition and cause Corrective action
0 Opening or mapping of the shared memory was failed.
(Access to internal devices disabled)
Start GT SoftGOT1000.
Specify the module No. (1 to 32767) of the existing GT
SoftGOT1000.
Exit unnecessary applications to secure memory space.
Restart the personal computer.
Error code Definition and cause Corrective action
-1 The specified device is illegal. Specify the ID of an existing device name.
-2 The specified head device is outside the range. Specify an existing device number.
-3 The specified terminal device is outside the range. Specify device points of the existing device range.
-9 The specified shared address is illegal. Specify the shared memory address obtained by the
GDev_OpenMapping function.
App - 19
Appendix3 Applicable Project Data
Use GT SoftGOT1000 of the same version as the GT Designer3. When the versions of GT SoftGOT1000 and GT Designer3 are different, install the same version of GT SoftGOT1000/GT Designer3.
HINT
When using the project data created on the GT Designer3 version older than the GT SoftGOT1000 version
Open the project data on the GT Desinger3 of the same version as the GT SoftGOT1000, and save the project data.
Appendix4 Unsupported Functions
Compared to GT SoftGOT2, the GT SoftGOT1000 does not support the following functions.
Function Description
Remote device monitoring Monitoring a device monitored by GT SoftGOT1000 with a PC or mobile phone using the mail function
GT Designer3 versionGT SoftGOT1000 version
App - 20
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
Appendix5 Open Source Software
Appendix.5.1 OpenSSL toolkit
This product uses OpenSSL toolkit licensed under the OpenSSL License and the Original SSLeay License. The permission notice of the OppenSSL License and Original SSLeay License is described below.
LICENSE ISSUES ==============
The OpenSSL toolkit stays under a double license, i.e. both the conditions of the OpenSSL License and the original SSLeay license apply to the toolkit. See below for the actual license texts.
OpenSSL License ---------------
/* ==================================================================== * Copyright (c) 1998-2018 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved. * * Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without * modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions * are met: * * 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright * notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. * * 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright * notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in * the documentation and/or other materials provided with the * distribution. * * 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this * software must display the following acknowledgment: * "This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project * for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)" * * 4. The names "OpenSSL Toolkit" and "OpenSSL Project" must not be used to * endorse or promote products derived from this software without * prior written permission. For written permission, please contact * openssl-core@openssl.org. * * 5. Products derived from this software may not be called "OpenSSL" * nor may "OpenSSL" appear in their names without prior written * permission of the OpenSSL Project. * * 6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following * acknowledgment: * "This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project * for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)" * * THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT ``AS IS'' AND ANY * EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE * IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR * PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR * ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, * SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT * NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; * LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) * HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, * STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) * ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED * OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. * ==================================================================== * * This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young * (eay@cryptsoft.com). This product includes software written by Tim * Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com). * */
App - 21
Original SSLeay License -----------------------
/* Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com) * All rights reserved. * * This package is an SSL implementation written * by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com). * The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL. * * This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as * the following conditions are aheared to. The following conditions * apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA, * lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code. The SSL documentation * included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms * except that the holder is Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com). * * Copyright remains Eric Young's, and as such any Copyright notices in * the code are not to be removed. * If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given attribution * as the author of the parts of the library used. * This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or * in documentation (online or textual) provided with the package. * * Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without * modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions * are met: * 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright * notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. * 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright * notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the * documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. * 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software * must display the following acknowledgement: * "This product includes cryptographic software written by * Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com)" * The word 'cryptographic' can be left out if the rouines from the library * being used are not cryptographic related :-). * 4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from * the apps directory (application code) you must include an acknowledgement: * "This product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com)" * * THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG ``AS IS'' AND * ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE * IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE * ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE * FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL * DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS * OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) * HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT * LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY * OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF * SUCH DAMAGE. * * The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or * derivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e. this code cannot simply be * copied and put under another distribution licence * [including the GNU Public Licence.] */
App - 22
1
O V
E R
V IE
W
2
S P
E C
IF IC
A T
IO N
S
O F
G T
S of
tG O
T 10
00
3
O P
E R
A T
IO N
O F
G T
S
of tG
O T
10 00
4
C O
N N
E C
T IO
N
5
F U
N C
T IO
N S
A P
P E
N D
IC E
S IN
D E
X
INDEX
[A]
Applicable project data .................................... App-20 Application Start-up ............................................. 5-35 Authorization control............................................ 5-60 Automatic Startup ................................................ 3-28
[B]
Back screen mode............................................... 5-53 Settings ............................................................ 5-53
Barcode Reader Connection ............................. 4-186 Bus Connection ................................................... 4-64
[C]
CC-Link IE Controller Network Connection ................................................................. 4-143,4-145 Close Menu ......................................................... 5-45 CNC Connection
Direct CPU connection................................... 4-147 Ethernet Connection ...................................... 4-148
Communication Setup ......................................... 3-14 Communication setup dialog box..................... 3-15
Computer Link Connection .................................. 4-73 Connectable modules ........................................................................... 4-141
Built-in Ethernet port CPU, Ethernet module, Ethernet board/card ......................................... 4-85 CC-Link IE Controller Network Connection ............................................................. 4-143,4-146 Computer Link Connection .............................. 4-74 MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET10 Connection ....................................................................... 4-141 MODBUS(R)/TCP Connection....................... 4-183 OMRON PLC Connection .............................. 4-159 TOSHIBA PLC Connection .................. 4-165,4-179 YASKAWA PLC Connection ................ 4-169,4-172 YOKOGAWA PLC Connection ...................... 4-175
Connection cable CC-Link IE Controller Network Connection.... 4-144 CC-Link IE Field Network Connection ........... 4-146 CNC Connection .................................. 4-147,4-148 Computer Link Connection .............................. 4-75 Direct CPU Connection.................................... 4-66 Ethernet Connection ........................................ 4-86 MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET10 Connection ....................................................................... 4-142 MODBUS(R)/TCP Connection....................... 4-183 OMRON PLC Connection .................... 4-158,4-159 Robot Controller Connection.......................... 4-153 TOSHIBA PLC Connection ........ 4-162,4-165,4-179 YASKAWA PLC Connection ................ 4-169,4-172 YOKOGAWA PLC Connection ...................... 4-175
Controller that allows monitoring ........................... 4-1
[D]
Direct CPU Connection ....................................... 4-65 Displaying File Information in PLC ........................ 5-8
[E]
Environment Setup ................................................ 3-8 Environment setup dialog box............................ 3-8
Ethernet Connection When using Built-in Ethernet port LCPU........ 4-109 When using Built-in Ethernet port MELSEC iQ-F (one-to-one connection, multiple connection) ......................................... 4-96 When using Built-in Ethernet port QCPU ......... 4-99 When using Built-in Ethernet port RCPU ......... 4-86 When using C Controller module ................... 4-113 When using CC-Link IE Field Network Ethernet adapter module................................ 4-135 When using CNC C70 (Q17nNCCPU)........... 4-132 When using Ethernet module (A series) ........ 4-123 When using Ethernet module (FX series) ...... 4-127 When using Ethernet module (MELSEC iQ-R series) ..................................... 4-91 When using Ethernet module (Q series, L series)......................................... 4-104 When using Ethernet module (QnA series).... 4-117
Exit Key................................................................ 5-54 Exiting from GT SoftGOT1000............................. 3-27
[F]
Full Screen Mode................................................. 5-22 Full screen mode types .................................... 5-22 Precautions ...................................................... 5-25 Setting method ................................................. 5-24
Functions that Cannot Be Used............................. 2-6
[G]
GDev_CloseUnMapping function ......................App-9 GDev_OpenMapping function ...........................App-4 GDev_Read function .........................................App-5 GDev_Write function..........................................App-7 GT SoftGOT1000 Commander............................ 5-72
[H]
Help ..................................................................... 3-30
[I]
Interaction with PX Developer ............................. 5-46 PX Developer function call history ................... 5-52 PX Developer function call setting ................... 5-47 PX Developer function call sub-setting ............ 5-51
Internal device interface function .......................App-1
[K]
Keyboard Input .................................................... 5-19 Keyboard input enabling/disabling procedure ......................................................... 5-19 Precautions ...................................................... 5-21
Index-1
When operating the numerical input function or the ASCII input function from the keyboard of a PC ............................................. 5-19
[M]
Mail Function ....................................................... 5-10 How to set up the mail function........................ 5-12 Mail function overview...................................... 5-10 Mail history ....................................................... 5-18 Operation flow when using the mail function.... 5-11 Sending e-mail ................................................. 5-16
MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET10 Connection ........................................................ 4-140 Menu Bar ............................................................... 3-5 MODBUS(R)/TCP Connection .......................... 4-183 Monitor Stop ........................................................ 3-26 Monitoring Operation ........................................... 3-26 Monitor-only Mode............................................... 5-82 Moving the Window ............................................. 5-30
Cascade........................................................... 5-30 Minimize all windows........................................ 5-30 Setting method................................................. 5-31 Window movement........................................... 5-31 Window movement types................................. 5-30
[O]
Object Script Error ............................................... 5-34 OMRON PLC Connection.................................. 4-157 Opening the Project ............................................. 3-21 Operation Environment.......................................... 2-1 Operation of GT SoftGOT1000.............................. 3-1
[P]
Popup Menu ........................................................ 5-26 Popup menu ineffective/effective ..................... 5-26 Precautions ...................................................... 5-26
Precautions............................................................ 2-8 Precautions for using the GT Soft GOT1000 ..... 2-8 Precautions on license key .............................. 2-10
Print ....................................................................... 5-2 Performing page setup....................................... 5-4 Performing print preview .................................... 5-3 Performing print setup........................................ 5-4 Printing ............................................................... 5-2
Property ................................................................. 5-5
[R]
Resource Data....................................................... 5-6 RFID Connection ............................................... 4-187 Robot Controller Connection ............................. 4-153
[S]
Screen Configuration of GT SoftGOT1000............ 3-4 Script Error .......................................................... 5-33 Scroll Function ..................................................... 5-53
Setting method................................................. 5-53 SIEMENS PLC Connection ............................... 4-178 Snap Shot .............................................................. 5-1 SoftGOT-GOT Link Function ............................... 5-55
Specifications......................................................... 2-3 License key specifications.................................. 2-5 Specifications of the GT SoftGOT1000.............. 2-3
Starting Monitoring............................................... 3-25 Starting up multiple GT SoftGOT1000 modules ............................................................... 5-27
Precautions for use .......................................... 5-29 Startup procedure ............................................ 5-27
System Alarm ...................................................... 5-32 System Configuration ............................................ 2-1
[T]
Tool bar.................................................................. 3-7 TOSHIBA PLC Connection................................ 4-165 Troubleshooting ...............................................App-12
Error Message..............................................App-12 Troubleshooting for License Key..................App-16 Troubleshooting Related to Mail Transmission .....................................................................App-18
[U]
Unsupported Functions....................................App-20
[Y]
YASKAWA PLC Connection.............................. 4-168 YOKOGAWA PLC Connection .......................... 4-175
Index-2
REVISIONS
* The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover.
(Continued to next page)
Print Date * Manual Number Revision
Oct., 2009 SH(NA)-080860ENG-A First printing: Compatible with GT SoftGOT1000 Version3.01B
Jan., 2010 SH(NA)-080860ENG-B Compatible with GT SoftGOT1000 Version3.10L
FXCPU (compatible with the Ethernet connection)
OMRON PLC (compatible with SYSMAC CJ2, CP1E and Ethernet connection)
Compatible with the GT Designer3 compressed file (*.GTW)
Connection with LCPUs supported
SoftGOT-GOT link function supported
May, 2010 SH(NA)-080860ENG-C Compatible with GT SoftGOT1000 Version3.14Q
Windows 7 supported
Connection with Q50UDEHCPU and Q100UDEHCPU supported
Management of GT SoftGOT1000 modules with the SoftGOT-GOT link function by GT
SoftGOT1000 Commander enabled
Monitor-only mode supported
Jun., 2010 SH(NA)-080860ENG-D Compatible with GT SoftGOT1000 Version3.17T
Connection with LJ72GF15-T2 supported
Oct., 2010 SH(NA)-080860ENG-E Compatible with GT SoftGOT1000 Version3.19V
OMRON PLC (SYSMAC CJ2M compatible)
Advanced setting of the application startup is supported.
Extension of module No. (1 to 32767) at multiple startups is supported.
OMROM PLC (Ethernet connection) supports connection types which can be
monitored by SoftGOT-GOT link function.
Jan., 2011 SH(NA)-080860ENG-F Compatible with GT SoftGOT1000 Version3.23Z
FXCPU (compatible with the USB connection)
Connection with C Controller module supported
Connection with the CC-Link IE field network Ethernet adapter unit supported
Advanced setting of the application startup is supported
MODBUS/TCP connection supported
Displaying the [File Information in PLC] dialog box by using the GOT special register
(GS device) supported
The internal device interface function supports the C# language.
Apr., 2011 SH(NA)-080860ENG-G Compatible with GT SoftGOT1000 Version3.28E
Barcode reader connection supported
RFID connection supported
The internal device interface function supports Embarcadero C++ Builder EX
Jul., 2011 SH(NA)-080860ENG-H Compatible with GT SoftGOT1000 Version3.31H
Windows 7 64-bit OS supported
Connection with L02CPU-P and L26CPU-PBT supported
CC-Link IE Field Network connection supported
Oct., 2011 SH(NA)-080860ENG-I Compatible with GT SoftGOT1000 Version3.37P
Displaying the comment set with GT SoftGOT1000 Commander on the title bar supported
Connection with TOSHIBA PLC (Unified Controller nv series) supported
Changing the security level in the interaction with PX Developer supported
Jan., 2012 SH(NA)-080860ENG-J Compatible with GT SoftGOT1000 Version3.40S
Connection with SIEMENS PLC (ISMATIC S7-300/400 series) supported
GT SoftGOT1000 Commander supports displaying only the selected GOTs.
The troubleshooting for the licence key has been updated.
Apr., 2012 SH(NA)-080860ENG-K Compatible with GT SoftGOT1000 Version3.45X
Connection with OMRON PLC (CJ2H-CPU6 -EIP) supported
Connection with YASKAWA PLC (MP2300S) supported
Connection with FX3GC supported
REVISIONS - 1
* The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover.
(Continued to next page)
Print Date * Manual Number Revision
Jun., 2012 SH(NA)-080860ENG-L Compatible with GT SoftGOT1000 Version3.54G
In the communication setting, the setting range of the timeout time is changed.
Sep., 2012 SH(NA)-080860ENG-M Compatible with GT SoftGOT1000 Version3.58L
Connection with YOKOGAWA PLC (F3SP71-4N) supported
The information site on the Internet is changed to the Mitsubishi Electric Factory Automation
Global Website.
Nov., 2012 SH(NA)-080860ENG-N Compatible with GT SoftGOT1000 Version3.63R
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS changed
Connection with Q24DHCCPU-V supported
Connection with YASKAWA PLC (CP-317) supported
Feb., 2013 SH(NA)-080860ENG-O Compatible with GT SoftGOT1000 Version3.67V
Connection with Q03UDVCPU, Q04UDVCPU, Q06UDVCPU, Q13UDVCPU, Q26UDVCPU,
L02SCPU, L26CPU, LJ71E71-100 supported
The connection setting of giving priority to communication processing is supported.
Communiction effective mode with PLC supported
SIEMENS S7 Ethernet OP communication supported
SoftGOT-GOT link function supports the UDP/IP communication
May, 2013 SH(NA)-080860ENG-P Compatible with GT SoftGOT1000 Version3.70Y
Connection with YOKOGAWA PLC (F3SP76-7S) supported
Connection with L06CPU and Q170MSCPU supported
Jun., 2013 SH(NA)-080860ENG-Q Compatible with GT SoftGOT1000 Version3.74C
Windows 8 supported
Connection with L02SCPU-P, L06CPU-P, L26CPU-P, Q24DHCCPU-LS, CR750-Q, CR750-D,
CR751-Q, CR751-D, FX3S supported
Ethernet connection with KEYENCE PLC (KV series) supported
Sep., 2013 SH(NA)-080860ENG-R Compatible with GT SoftGOT1000 Version3.100E
Changed the error message displayed when GT softGOT1000 is used.
Nov., 2013 SH(NA)-080860ENG-S Compatible with GT SoftGOT1000 Version3.104J
FX3U-232-ADP-MB compatible
Jan., 2014 SH(NA)-080860ENG-T Compatible with GT SoftGOT1000 Version3.108N
Windows 8.1 supported
Jun., 2014 SH(NA)-080860ENG-U Compatible with GT SoftGOT1000 Version3.117X
Connection with R04CPU, R08CPU, R16CPU, R32CPU, R120CPU, RJ71C24,
RJ71C24-R2, RJ71EN71, Q24DHCCPU-VG, F3SP71-4S supported
Jul., 2014 SH(NA)-080860ENG-V Compatible with GT SoftGOT1000 Version3.118Y
Partial corrections
Oct., 2014 SH(NA)-080860ENG-W Compatible with GT SoftGOT1000 Version3.122C
GT Works3 Version1 is no longer compatible with Windows XP Service Pack2 and
Windows 2000.
Jan., 2015 SH(NA)-080860ENG-X Compatible with GT SoftGOT1000 Version3.126G
Connection with the motion controller CPU (MELSEC iQ-R series) supported
Connection with the MELSEC iQ-F supported
Apr., 2015 SH(NA)-080860ENG-Y Compatible with GT SoftGOT1000 Version3.130L
R08PCPU, R16PCPU, R32PCPU, and R120PCPU are supported.
R12CCPU-V is supported.
Jul., 2015 SH(NA)-080860ENG-Z Compatible with GT SoftGOT1000 Version3.136S
R04ENCPU, R08ENCPU, R16ENCPU, R32ENCPU, and R120ENCPU are supported.
The folder name [MELSOFT Application] displayed in the Windows start menu has been
changed to [MELSOFT].
REVISIONS - 2
* The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover.
2009 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION
Print Date * Manual Number Revision
Oct., 2015 SH(NA)-080860ENG-AA Compatible with GT SoftGOT1000 Version3.144A
R08SFCPU, R16SFCPU, R32SFCPU, and R120SFCPU are supported.
Dec., 2015 SH(NA)-080860ENG-AB Compatible with GT SoftGOT1000 Version3.150G
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS changed.
Q26DHCCPU-LS is supported.
Access to an LCPU or a QCPU via an RCPU by the Ethernet connection is supported.
May, 2016 SH(NA)-080860ENG-AC Compatible with GT SoftGOT1000 Version3.155M
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS changed.
GT SoftGOT1000 is compatible with Windows 10.
Aug., 2016 SH(NA)-080860ENG-AD Compatible with GT SoftGOT1000 Version3.160S
Partial corrections
Oct., 2016 SH(NA)-080860ENG-AE Compatible with GT SoftGOT1000 Version3.165X
[Delay time] has been added to the mail setup.
Jun., 2017 SH(NA)-080860ENG-AF Compatible with GT SoftGOT1000 Version3.180N
Partial corrections
Oct., 2017 SH(NA)-080860ENG-AG Partial corrections
Apr., 2018 SH(NA)-080860ENG-AH Partial corrections
Oct., 2018 SH(NA)-080860ENG-AI Partial corrections
Apr., 2019 SH(NA)-080860ENG-AJ A description of OpenSSL toolkit has been added.
Oct., 2019 SH(NA)-080860ENG-AK Partial corrections
Jan., 2020 SH(NA)-080860ENG-AL Partial corrections
Oct., 2020 SH(NA)-080860ENG-AM Partial corrections
Apr., 2022 SH(NA)-080860ENG-AN Compatible with GT SoftGOT1000 Version3.275M
GT SoftGOT1000 is compatible with Windows 11.
GT SoftGOT1000 has ended support for Windows XP and Windows Vista.
Jul., 2022 SH(NA)-080860ENG-AP Compatible with GT SoftGOT2000 Version1.280S
FX3U-ENET and FX Configurator-EN are supported.
This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind, nor does it confer any patent licenses. Mitsubishi Electric
Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may occur as a result of using the
contents noted in this manual.
REVISIONS - 3
SH(NA)-080860ENG-AP
Intellectual Property Rights
Trademarks GOT is a registered trademark of Mitsubishi Electric Corporation. Microsoft, Microsoft Access, Excel, SQL Server, Visual Basic, Visual C++, Visual C#, Windows, Windows NT, Windows Server, and Windows Vista are trademarks of the Microsoft group of companies. Adobe and Adobe Reader are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated. Intel, Intel Core, Pentium, and Celeron are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation in the United States and other countries. MODBUS is a trademark of Schneider Electric SA. VNC is a registered trademark of RealVNC Ltd. in the United States and other countries. Other company and product names herein are either trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners.
Copyrights The screens (screenshots) are used in accordance with the Microsoft Corporation guideline. VS-FlexGrid Pro Copyright 2003 ComponentOne LLC. SPREAD Copyright 1999 FarPoint Techonologies, Inc.
GT SoftGOT1000 Version3
MODEL
MODEL CODE
SW3-SOFTGOT-O-E
1D7MA9
SH(NA)-080860ENG-AP(2207)MEE
Operating Manual for GT Works3
Specifications subject to change without notice. Printed in Japan, July 2022.
When exported from Japan, this manual does not require application to the Ministry of Economy, Trade and Industry for service transaction permission.
HEAD OFFICE : TOKYO BUILDING, 2-7-3 MARUNOUCHI, CHIYODA-KU, TOKYO 100-8310, JAPAN NAGOYA W
Related manuals for Mitsubishi GT SoftGOT1000 Software Operating Manual
Manualsnet FAQs
If you want to find out how the GT SoftGOT1000 Mitsubishi works, you can view and download the Mitsubishi GT SoftGOT1000 Software Operating Manual on the Manualsnet website.
Yes, we have the Operating Manual for Mitsubishi GT SoftGOT1000 as well as other Mitsubishi manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.
The Operating Manual should include all the details that are needed to use a Mitsubishi GT SoftGOT1000. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.
The best way to navigate the Mitsubishi GT SoftGOT1000 Software Operating Manual is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.
This Mitsubishi GT SoftGOT1000 Software Operating Manual consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.
You can download Mitsubishi GT SoftGOT1000 Software Operating Manual free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.
To be able to print Mitsubishi GT SoftGOT1000 Software Operating Manual, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the Mitsubishi GT SoftGOT1000 Software Operating Manual as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.